JP6946712B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. Some of these gaming machines are provided with an auxiliary tank for accommodating game media such as medals surplus in the storage section (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-323750

Here, in the gaming machines illustrated above, there is still room for improvement in terms of usability of the auxiliary tank.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preferably using an auxiliary tank.

The present invention
The housing that is open to the front and
A door body that opens and closes the front opening of the housing,
A hopper device installed in the housing and having a storage unit for storing game media, and a hopper device.
An auxiliary tank installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing and accommodating a game medium surplus in the storage unit,
With
The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening for discharging the gaming medium inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine.
The auxiliary tank
It has a bottomed shape with an opening at the top and a bottom at the bottom.
An opening / closing means provided on the bottom and capable of opening / closing the bottom.
Supporting means that supports the opening / closing means so that it can be opened and closed,
An urging means that urges the opening / closing means toward the closing side, and
With
The auxiliary tank has a first orientation in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom is on the lower side in the predetermined installation area, and a second orientation in which the opening is on the lower side and the bottom is on the upper side, respectively. Can be installed,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the opening / closing means is opened by the weight of the opening / closing means when the game medium from the storage unit is placed on the opening / closing means. It is composed and
The bottom portion has a receiving portion for receiving a game medium supplied from the storage portion when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation.
The bottom portion is characterized in that a standing portion that stands up from the bottom portion is provided at a portion surrounding the receiving portion.

According to the present invention, the auxiliary tank can be preferably used.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. (A) is a perspective view showing the bottom of the housing, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the cross section taken along the line AA of (a). It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a top view of the auxiliary tank. FIG. 13 is a perspective sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. FIG. 5 is a perspective sectional view taken along line CC in a state where the auxiliary tank is in a downward posture. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. It is explanatory drawing in the case of using the auxiliary tank corresponding to the manual collection. It is explanatory drawing in the case of using the auxiliary tank corresponding to the automatic collection. (A) is a perspective view of the bottom lid, and (b) is a perspective view of the back surface of the bottom lid. It is a side view of the bottom lid. It is a partially enlarged view in the cross section of the DD line of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode that the rotation of the bottom lid is restricted. It is explanatory drawing which shows the support structure of the bottom cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of removing the bottom cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the installation example of the auxiliary tank. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 3rd RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a BB state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the display mode. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition notification processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of push order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a special zone. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of betting. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the push order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing at the time of stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific role. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of continuous production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effective line and the stop symbol in the normal game mode and the specific mode as a free mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode in a specific mode, and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode in a specific mode, and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode in a specific mode, and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol of each combination in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol of each combination in a specific mode. It is a figure which shows the lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect at the time of switching of a game mode. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing at the time of betting for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing at the start for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the winning combination correspondence processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination process for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the special zone processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of stop for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end processing for a specific mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect in a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game of a normal game mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game of a normal game mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game of a specific mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game of a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus notification processing for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific combination for a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process for a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of the continuous production in each mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the display effect in a bonus and each game in a bonus. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which is carrying over a bonus in a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the count process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the display of the acquisition number by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the specific mode switching process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of mode switching by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the specific mode setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of setting a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of setting a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transformation example of the relationship between the display effect in a bonus and each game in a bonus. (A) is a flowchart showing a modified example of the continuous effect setting process for a specific mode, and (b) is a flowchart showing a modified example of the end determination process. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lottery table for a bonus state in a specific mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of setting a specific mode by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect for a mobile interlocking service by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the information input / output processing by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for an advantageous section by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the specific mode switching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect at the time of mode switching by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the MAX bet switching process by a main control device. It is a figure which shows the outline of the modification of the identification display of a specific mode. It is a front view of the slot machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of special addition. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing. It is a figure which shows the special addition generation generation table. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a special zone. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows various addition tables. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference between a normal addition and a special addition. It is a flowchart which shows the process for betting operation by a main control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference between a normal addition and a special addition. It is a flowchart which shows the payout determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for payout. It is a flowchart which shows the process for re-game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of various addition tables. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lottery table for a normal game state in a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the modification of a special addition. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of various addition tables. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process for betting operation. It is a figure which shows the modification of the credit insertion switch and the start lever. It is a perspective view of the state which the auxiliary tank which concerns on 3rd Embodiment is in a downward posture. It is explanatory drawing which shows the installation state of the auxiliary tank corresponding to the FF line cross section in FIG. 150. It is a partially enlarged view of the bottom when the auxiliary tank is in the upward posture. It is explanatory drawing which shows how the lower opening opens and closes. It is a partially enlarged sectional view which shows the structure of the auxiliary tank which concerns on the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged sectional view which shows the structure of the auxiliary tank which concerns on the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a top view of the auxiliary tank which concerns on 4th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 156, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG of the tank body. FIG. 156 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH and an enlarged view of a main part. (A) is a perspective view of the bottom lid, and (b) is a perspective view of the back surface of the bottom lid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the installation state of the auxiliary tank corresponding to the cross section of HH of FIG. 156. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state before engagement. It is explanatory drawing which shows the engaged state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which disengaged. It is explanatory drawing in the case of using the auxiliary tank corresponding to the automatic collection. It is a perspective view of the bottom cover which concerns on the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a top view of the tank body. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the extension plate at the time of closing, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the extension plate at the time of opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows how the movement of an auxiliary tank is regulated. It is explanatory drawing which shows the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54 which concerns on the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the installation state of the auxiliary tank which concerns on the modification 3 of the 4th Embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the lower sensor portion and its peripheral portion, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower sensor portion. (A) is a perspective sectional view of the auxiliary tank, and (b) is a perspective sectional view of the tank body. It is a vertical sectional view of an auxiliary tank. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state before engagement, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an engaged state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which disengaged.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. The rear view of the door 12, FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11, FIG. 6 (a) is a perspective view showing the bottom of the housing 11, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the cross section taken along line AA of (a). be.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 6, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by hitting a nail against a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured so that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 shifts the angular positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

FIG. 7 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main control device 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "red bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), a "first replay" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, 18 on the left reel 32L). Second), "watermelon" symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), "white bell" symbol (eg, 12th on left reel 32L), "second replay" symbol (eg, 11th on left reel 32L) , "White 7" symbol (eg, 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 5th on left reel 32L), "Youth" There are 10 types of symbols (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R among the visible symbols. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 8, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the symbols that stop at the lower right line L4 connecting the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated and a line that is not activated depending on the number of bets on medals are set, and when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the valid line. As a result of winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which is a game medium, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize will not be established and the above benefits will not be granted.

In the slot machine 10, only the right-down line L4 is regarded as an effective line as shown in FIG. 9 (a), and the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are shown in FIG. 9 (b). There are cases where the combination line is an effective line and cases where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 9 (c). More specifically, when three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-sloping line L4 is regarded as the valid line, and when two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line is below. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are considered to be effective lines. Further, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bending line L6 is regarded as an effective line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-sloping line L5 are not regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with three medals bet is a three-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is a two-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is played. Also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game is normally played. Therefore, the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game may be referred to as a normal game mode, and the 1-bet game may be referred to as a specific mode.

10 to 12 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won in the normal game mode and a privilege given when the prize is won.

In the normal game mode, the small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the first small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the first small role prize. If the first small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination have different combinations of winning symbols, but in the 3-bet game, the left reel 32L "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol and the middle reel 32M A winning mode in which the "red bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. Is. For example, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the top, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle, and the "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the bottom. If it is stopped, it will be the 5th small winning combination. As shown in FIG. 7, on the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol (11th and 14th) and the "red bell" symbol are arranged at adjacent positions (12th and 15th) on the upstream side. On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol is arranged at a position (No. 2 and 5) separated by one symbol from the "second replay" symbol (No. 0 and No. 3) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the fifth small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 18th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage. If the 18th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The "Red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stopped on the effective line. In that case, the 19th small winning combination will be won. If the 19th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the 20th small winning combination to the 24th small winning combination are established in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out, and in the 2-bet game, 14 medals are paid out.

Similar to the 18th small winning combination, the 25th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage. In the case of the 18th small winning combination, the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R may stop in the middle stage only when the winning combination is duplicated with the BB ("second replay" symbol, If the "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol combination) is the 25th small winning combination, the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop in the middle row regardless of whether or not the BB has been won. Can be. If the 25th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 26th small winning combination It will be a prize. If the 26th small winning combination is successful, 5 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

In the 27th small winning combination, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L The "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line. If the 27th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

Left reel 32L "red bell" or "white bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "youth" symbol, right If the "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R and the "red bell" symbol stop on the effective line, the 28th small winning combination will be won. As shown in FIG. 7, on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol (3rd, 7th, 15th, 20th) and the adjacent position on the downstream side (2nd, 6th, 14th, 19th) ), The "first replay" symbol is arranged, and the "second replay" symbol is arranged at an adjacent position (11th) on the downstream side of the "white bell" symbol (No. 12). On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol (2nd, 5th, 10th, 15th, 20th) and the adjacent position on the upstream side (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) are "No. A "1 replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged. Therefore, when the 28th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "bell" on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, except when the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage. While the symbol and the "replay" symbol are tempered, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop, which is a so-called double tempai stop result. If the 28th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 29th small winning combination will be won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 9th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper or middle stage, and if the 29th small winning combination is established, the left The "white bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. If the 29th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 30th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 30th small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 30th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the first 31 small wins. Although the details will be described later, the 31st small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 31st small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 32nd small It will be a winning role. If the 32nd small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

There are 1st re-game prize to 8th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that enables the game of the next game to be performed without inserting a medal is given. Further, when the second re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game When a prize or a fifth re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. The first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize are winning modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

The state transition prizes in which only the game state transition is performed include the first BB prize, the second BB prize, and the CB prize.

When the "Red 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line, the first BB prize is won, and when the "White 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line. When the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the second BB prize is awarded. .. When these BB prizes are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, , CB prize. When the CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from the winning, there is a stop roll in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right. When the "watermelon" symbol on the reel 32R and the "watermelon" symbol stop on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In addition, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" on the right reel 32R. Even when the symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "second replay" symbol, and the "cherry" symbol stop on the effective line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. In the following, the combination of each of the above symbols will be referred to as a transition result.

The correspondence between the combination of the winning symbols and the privilege given when the winning is won in the specific mode as the one-bet game will be described in detail later.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for medal payout (not shown), and pays out medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. The hopper device 51 is attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 by being attached to the metal hopper mounting plate 22 (see FIG. 6A). The hopper mounting plate 22 is screwed and fixed to the bottom plate 11a, and includes a plurality of locking claws 22a capable of locking the hopper device 51 (lower end portion of the payout device 53). The hopper device 51 is fixed by engaging the hopper device 51 with these locking claws 22a.

An auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 51 to prevent medals from being stored in the storage tank 52 in a predetermined amount or more. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the auxiliary tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, the surplus medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are stored in the auxiliary tank 54.

The medals housed in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected by the employees of the game hall. That is, the auxiliary tank 54 is housed in the housing 11 in a state of being placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 (see FIG. 5), and is on the front side (front side) in a state where the front surface of the housing 11 is open. ), It is possible to take it out from the inside of the housing 11. Hereinafter, a collection method in which the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out and medals are collected may be referred to as manual collection.

The medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 can be collected not only by the above manual collection but also by an automatic collection device installed in the game hall. That is, as shown in FIG. 6A, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with a medal discharge hole 15 for discharging medals to the outside of the slot machine 10, and the medal is discharged from the medal discharge hole 15. The medals are supplied to the automatic collection device located below the slot machine 10. The medal discharge hole 15 penetrates the bottom plate 11a in the thickness direction and is arranged corresponding to the drop position of the medal falling from the guide plate 52a. Hereinafter, a collection method for collecting medals using an automatic collection device may be referred to as automatic collection.

Whether the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are collected manually or automatically depends on the equipment of the game hall in which the slot machine 10 is installed, that is, the game hall corresponds to the automatic collection. It can be used properly depending on whether or not it exists.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time is provided. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, each credit insertion switch 56 to 58 only involves the operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

More specifically about each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 are formed in a size having a larger operation surface operated by hand or the like than the third credit insertion switch 58. ing. Therefore, the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is improved. In other words, the second credit insertion switch 57 that can be used in the one-bet game as the specific mode has the same operability as the first credit insertion switch 56 that can be used in the three-bet game as the normal game mode. It can be said that there is.

A first effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect is generated is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57. That is, the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the first effect switch 66, and the second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first effect switch 66. Is provided. As described above, when the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are set to the normal game mode and the 1-bet game is set to the specific mode, the normal game mode and the specific mode can be set depending on the positional relationship of the corresponding credit insertion switches 56 to 58. It can be said that they are distinguished.

Further, on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, on the right side of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, a second effect switch 67 used for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is provided. .. The second effect switch 67 will be described in detail later.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and a remaining payout that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A number display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68 for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is provided. There is. The push order notification unit 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44, respectively. The push order notification unit 68 can also be replaced by a liquid crystal display or the like, and an LED lamp may be provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44 so as to make the stop switches 42 to 44 emit light, or the stop switch 42. The LED lamps may be provided adjacent to the ~ 44.

On the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for a hole manager or the like to adjust the output of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by the hall manager or the like inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

<About auxiliary tank 54>
Here, the auxiliary tank 54 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. 13 is a plan view of the auxiliary tank, FIG. 14 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 13, FIG. 15 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of the auxiliary tank 54 in a downward posture, and FIG. 16 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. It is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the auxiliary tank 54 includes a tank body 501 having a bottomed substantially box shape whose upper portion is open upward. The tank body 501 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. The tank body 501 has a bottom plate portion 501a having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view, and a front wall portion 501b, a rear wall portion 501c, a right side wall portion 501d, and a left side wall portion 501e that stand up from the bottom plate portion 501a so as to surround the bottom plate portion 501a. An upper opening 502 having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view is formed on the upper portion thereof.

The right side wall portion 501d and the left side wall portion 501e are inclined so that the distance between them increases toward the upper side. In this case, the upper opening 502 can be expanded as compared with the case where both wall portions 501d and 501e are upright. As a result, even when a large number of medals move toward the auxiliary tank 54 at once, such as when the medals in the storage tank 52 are manually scraped out and moved to the auxiliary tank 54, the medals are spilled and scattered in the housing 11. Is suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16, a handle portion 503 is integrally formed on the upper portion of the front wall portion 501b of the tank body 501. The handle portion 503 includes a flat plate-shaped extending portion 503a extending forward from the upper end portion of the front wall portion 501b, and a hanging portion 503b hanging downward from the front end portion of the extending portion 503a. Connecting portions 503c that connect the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b are provided at both left and right ends of the hanging portion 503b, and the mounting rigidity of the hanging portion 503b to the tank body 501 is increased. The handle portion 503 is open downward, and a finger or a hand can be inserted between the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b from below the handle portion 503.

Since the handle portion 503 is provided, the auxiliary tank 54 can be pulled out forward from the inside of the housing 11 by hooking a finger or a hand on the hanging portion 503b. Then, when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the inside of the housing 11, the auxiliary tank 54 can be held stably because the fingertip is inserted between the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b. Therefore, a series of operations of pulling the auxiliary tank 54 forward from the inside of the housing 11 and lifting it can be continuously and smoothly performed.

The rear wall portion 501c of the tank body 501 is formed with a circular upper sensor insertion hole 505a and a lower sensor insertion hole 505b arranged one above the other. In each of these sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b attached to the housing 11 (see FIG. 6A). ) Is inserted. These sensor rods 16a and 16b are for detecting the stored state of medals in the auxiliary tank 54, and are electrically connected to the main control device 101. As shown in FIG. 6A, the sensor rods 16a and 16b are paired with each other vertically separated from each other, and their base ends are fixed to the back plate 11b of the housing 11, respectively, toward the front. It extends parallel to the bottom plate 11a.

The sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b of the tank body 501 are formed at positions corresponding to the sensor rods 16a and 16b on the rear wall portion 501c. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, the sensor rods 16a and 16b pass through the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b from the rear of the auxiliary tank 54 and the tips of the sensor rods 16a and 16b. Is located inside the tank body 501. Each of the sensor rods 16a and 16b is made of a conductive metal material, and the capacity of the medals (conductivity) of the auxiliary tank 54 reaches a predetermined amount and the medals are interposed between the sensor rods 16a and 16b. Then, both sensor rods 16a and 16b conduct with each other through the medal. As a result, the main control device 101 grasps that a predetermined amount of medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, that is, the auxiliary tank 54 is in a full state.

When the main control device 101 is found to be full, an external signal indicating that the main control device 101 is full is output to the game hall management device (hall computer) through the external centralized terminal plate 121 described later. .. After that, the full state of the auxiliary tank 54 is notified to the employee of the game hall through a predetermined communication terminal, and the employee collects the medals in the auxiliary tank 54.

<About the configuration to support both manual collection and automatic collection>
By the way, when the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are collected by automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 becomes an obstacle and it is necessary to remove the medals from the housing 11. However, if the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the housing 11, it is necessary to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank 54 in the game hall, which is inconvenient. In addition, the auxiliary tank 54 may be lost or mistaken for a slot machine of another model, which may cause inconvenience when the slot machine 10 is re-distributed as a used machine.

Therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 according to the present embodiment is compatible with both manual collection and automatic collection methods, and the storage tank 52 is installed in the housing 11 with the auxiliary tank 54 installed in the housing 11. It is configured so that the medals overflowing from the medals can be automatically collected. Hereinafter, the configuration for that purpose will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view when the auxiliary tank 54 is used in correspondence with manual collection, FIG. 18 (a) is an explanatory view when the auxiliary tank 54 is used in correspondence with automatic collection, and FIG. 18 (b) is (a). It is a partially enlarged view in the cross section of EE.

As described above, in the installed state of the auxiliary tank 54, the sensor rods 16a and 16b are inserted into the tank body 501. However, in the present embodiment, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down, each sensor rod is inserted. The structure is such that 16a and 16b can be inserted into the respective sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b.

That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture with the bottom plate portion 501a on the lower side, the upper sensor rod 16a is inserted into the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted into the lower sensor insertion hole 505b. On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward posture with the bottom plate portion 501a on the upper side, the upper sensor rod 16a is inserted into the lower sensor insertion hole 505b and the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted into the upper sensor insertion hole 505a. The opening diameters and height positions of the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b for the sensor rods 16a and 16b are set so as to be possible.

Specifically, in relation to the lower sensor rod 16b, the distance Lb1 (see FIG. 16) from the lower end position of the bottom plate portion 501a to the lower end position of the lower sensor insertion hole 505b and the upper end position of the rear wall portion 501c. Distance from to the upper end position of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a Both with La1 are equal to or less than the distance from the bottom plate 11a to the lower end position of the lower sensor rod 16b (the lower end position in the insertion portion into each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b). It has become. On the other hand, in relation to the upper sensor rod 16a, the distance Lb2 from the lower end position of the bottom plate portion 501a to the upper end position of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the lower end position of the lower sensor insertion hole 505b from the upper end position of the rear wall portion 501c. The distance to and from La2 is equal to or greater than the distance from the bottom plate 11a to the upper end position of the upper sensor rod 16a (the upper end position in the insertion portion into each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b). In the present embodiment, the opening diameters of the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b are substantially equal to the distances La1 and Lb1, and the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b are in the height direction (vertical direction) of the tank body 501. It is set to be substantially vertically symmetrical with respect to the center line 510.

With such a configuration, it is possible to install the auxiliary tank 54 in the housing 11 not only in the upward posture but also in the downward posture in which the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the auxiliary tank 54 has a structure in which the bottom thereof can be opened and closed. Specifically, the tank body 501 includes a lower opening 512 provided in the bottom plate 501a and a bottom lid 514 that opens and closes the lower opening 512. The bottom lid 514 is rotatably supported by a support portion 504 (see FIG. 16) provided at a connecting portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e.

The lower opening 512 penetrates the bottom plate 501a in the thickness direction and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. The lower opening 512 is arranged in the central portion of the bottom plate portion 501a, and its size is such that a plurality of medals can pass through at the same time.

The bottom lid 514 serves as an opening / closing means for opening / closing the lower opening 512, and the closing position (see FIG. 14) for covering and closing the lower opening 512 from above and the tank main body from the closing position. It can be displaced to an open position (see FIG. 15) that rotates inward of 501 to open the lower opening 512. The bottom lid 514 has a substantially flat plate shape, and has a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view corresponding to the shape of the lower opening 512. The dimensions of the bottom lid 514 in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction are both larger than the lower opening 512 and smaller than the bottom plate 501a, and the bottom lid 514 has a front wall portion 501b and a rear wall portion 501b. It is possible to close the lower opening 512 while avoiding interference with the portion 501c, the right side wall portion 501d, and the left side wall portion 501e.

The support portion 504 includes a front support portion 515a, a rear support portion 515b, and an intermediate support portion 515c. Each of these support portions 515a to 515c is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the tank body 501 at the connecting portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e, and is arranged at a predetermined interval from each other. The detailed structure of each of the support portions 515a to 515c and the connection structure with the bottom lid 514 will be described in detail later.

In the present embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for manual recovery, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 16, the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture and the bottom lid 514 is positioned in the closed position. The side opening 512 is closed. In this state, as shown in FIG. 17, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, and the guide plate 52a (see FIG. 5) of the hopper device 51 is positioned above the upper opening 502.

With such an installation mode, the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 fall into the auxiliary tank 54, and the medals can be stored in the auxiliary tank 54. At this time, as shown in FIG. 16, the bottom lid 514 is placed on the surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, so that the bottom lid 514 is restricted from rotating downward, and the bottom lid 514 is in the closed position. It is suppressed to rotate downward beyond the above. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out of the housing 11 or lifted, the weight of the medal prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 from coming off.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is used in correspondence with the automatic collection, as shown in FIG. 15, the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down to be in a downward posture, and the bottom lid 514 is positioned in the open position to open the lower side. Part 512 is opened. In this state, as shown in FIG. 18A, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, the guide plate 52a is positioned above the lower opening 512, and the auxiliary tank 54 is placed. Is located above the medal ejection hole 15 (see FIG. 6A).

With such an installation mode, the lower opening 512, the upper opening 502, and the medal discharge hole 15 communicate with each other, and the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 pass through the auxiliary tank 54 and enter the medal discharge hole 15. It becomes movable. As a result, the medals from the storage tank 52 can be guided to the medal discharge hole 15 even with the auxiliary tank 54 installed, and the medals can be automatically collected.

Here, when switching the auxiliary tank 54 from automatic collection to a form corresponding to manual collection, the operation of closing the lower opening 512 is forgotten, and the auxiliary tank 54 is held in an upward posture with the lower opening 512 open. In some cases, it may be installed in the housing 11. In this case, since the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out, the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 are spilled and scattered in the housing 11 when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the housing 11. As a result, it becomes necessary for the employees of the game hall to manually remove the medals one by one, which may cause a great deal of trouble.

Further, even when the auxiliary tank 54 is switched from the manual collection to the form corresponding to the automatic collection, the opening operation of the lower opening 512 is forgotten, and the auxiliary tank 54 remains closed by the bottom lid 514. Is assumed to be installed in the housing 11 in a downward posture. In this case, since the movement path of medals to the medal discharge hole 15 is blocked by the bottom lid 514, when the game is played in such a state, medals from the guide plate 52a are accumulated to some extent on the bottom back of the tank body 501. After that, it will lead to a situation of spilling one after another. In this case, not only the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 cannot be properly and automatically collected, but also the medals are scattered in the housing 11.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the form of the auxiliary tank 54 can be switched between manual collection and automatic collection without being aware of the closing operation and opening operation of the bottom lid 514. The configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 has been devised. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22 with a detailed description of the bottom lid 514. 19A is a perspective view of the bottom lid 514, FIG. 19B is a perspective view of the back surface of the bottom lid 514, FIG. 20 is a side view of the bottom lid 514, and FIG. , FIG. 22 is an explanatory view showing how the rotation of the bottom lid 514 is restricted.

The bottom lid 514 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 19, includes a flat plate-shaped lid main body 521 and a substantially round bar-shaped shaft portion 522. The lid body 521 has a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view, and its longitudinal and lateral dimensions are larger than those of the lower opening 512. Therefore, when the bottom lid 514 is located in the closed position, the entire lower opening 512 is closed by the lid main body 521, and the back surface 521b of the lid main body 521 and the tank are surrounded by the lower opening 512. The surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the main body 501 comes into contact with the surface in a circumferential shape.

As shown in FIG. 19B, a plurality of ridges 523 are provided on the back surface 521b of the lid main body 521. Each ridge portion 523 extends along the longitudinal direction of the lid main body 521, and is arranged so as to be parallel to each other at a predetermined interval in the lateral direction of the lid main body 521. By providing these ridge portions 523, the strength and flexural rigidity of the lid main body 521 are reinforced, and the durability of the bottom lid 514 is enhanced.

The shaft portion 522 is integrally formed with the lid main body 521 at one long side portion 521c of the lid main body 521, and extends along the extending direction of the long side portion 521c. The shaft portion 522 includes a front support shaft 524 and a rear support shaft 525 provided on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the long side portion 521c, and an intermediate support shaft 526 provided in the middle of each of the support shafts 524 and 525. And have. The front support shaft 524, the rear support shaft 525, and the intermediate support shaft 526 correspond to the front support portion 515a, the rear support portion 515b, and the intermediate support portion 515c (see FIG. 13) provided in the tank body 501. .. That is, the front support shaft 524 and the rear support shaft 525 are connected to the front support portion 515a and the rear support portion 515b, respectively, and the intermediate support shaft 526 is connected to the intermediate support portion 515c, respectively.

In the lid main body 521, a front side notch 530 and a rear side notch 531 notched in a rectangular shape are formed at both ends of the shaft portion 522 in the axial direction. Further, a support opening 532 is formed at a position corresponding to the intermediate support shaft 526. By forming the front notch 530, the rear notch 531 and the support opening 532, a predetermined gap is secured between the lid main body 521 and each of the support 515a to 515c, and the bottom lid 514 Interference with each of the support portions 515a to 515c during rotation is avoided.

The shaft portion 522 is provided with a plurality of notched grooves 533 in which a part of the shaft portion 522 is cut out in the radial direction of the shaft portion 522. These notch grooves 533 correspond one-to-one with a plurality of ribs 506 (see FIGS. 14 and 16) provided at the connection portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e in the tank body 501. When the bottom lid 514 is attached to the tank body 501, as shown in FIG. 21, each rib 506 is inserted into and engaged with each notch groove 533, and the shaft portion 522 moves with respect to the tank body 501. Is regulated.

In the present embodiment, when the bottom lid 514 is located in the closed position, the rotation position of the bottom lid 514 is not fixed or held. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the lid main body 521 of the bottom lid 514 is placed on the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank main body 501 and is merely maintained in the closed position, and the bottom lid 514. Is in a state where it can freely rotate toward the open position.

Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down from the upward posture to the downward posture, the bottom lid 514 rotates toward the open position by its own weight, and the lower opening 512 is naturally opened. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the lower opening 512 is opened accordingly. Therefore, the lower opening 512 can be opened in conjunction with the reversing operation of the auxiliary tank 54, and a separate opening operation by hand is not required. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower opening 512 from being left closed, and it is possible to always take an appropriate mode without being aware of the presence or absence of opening.

Further, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the shaft portion 522 of the bottom lid 514 is covered from above by the bottom plate portion 501a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the medal from the storage tank 52 from colliding with the shaft portion 522 and causing an obstacle in support. At this time, by covering the shaft portion 522 with the bottom plate portion 501a, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated part as a covering member, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 19A, a protruding portion 535 is integrally formed on the surface 521a of the lid main body 521. The protrusion 535 is arranged at the center of the lid body 521 in the longitudinal direction and is adjacent to the support opening 532 in the lateral direction. The protruding portion 535 protrudes from the surface 521a of the lid main body 521 at a predetermined height, and is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 522 (see FIG. 20).

As shown in FIG. 22A, when the bottom lid 514 is rotated in the first direction 537 in the direction from the closed position to the open position, the top portion 535a of the protruding portion 535 becomes the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501. The rotation of the bottom lid 514 in the first direction 537 is restricted by abutting against. As a result, the position of the rotation end of the bottom lid 514 is defined, and the upper limit of the rotation angle in the first direction 537 is limited to the predetermined rotation angle α.

In this case, the predetermined rotation angle (maximum rotation angle to the first direction 537) α of the bottom lid 514 is the bottom lid 514 when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture as shown in FIG. 22 (b). The rotation angle is such that the bottom lid 514 is inclined toward the closed position side with respect to the virtual vertical line 540 passing through the rotation shaft 538. In other words, the center of gravity of the bottom lid 514 does not straddle the virtual vertical line 540, and the rotation angle does not exceed the virtual vertical line 540 in the first direction 537. Specifically, the predetermined rotation angle α is set to less than 90 °, and is 85 ° in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the center of gravity of the bottom lid 514 is located on the closed position side with respect to the virtual vertical line 540, and the bottom lid 514 is due to its own weight. Try to lean towards the closed position.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bottom lid 514 is located in the open position, the rotation position of the bottom lid 514 is not fixed or held. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the protruding portion 535 of the bottom lid 514 is in contact with the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501, and the bottom lid 514 is merely leaning against the left side wall portion 501e. Instead, the bottom lid 514 is in a state where it can freely rotate toward the closed position.

Therefore, when the bottom lid 514 tries to tilt toward the closed position as described above, the bottom lid 514 lightly rotates toward the closed position, and the lower opening 512 is naturally closed. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the lower opening 512 is closed accordingly. Therefore, the lower opening 512 can be closed in conjunction with the reversing operation of the auxiliary tank 54, and a separate manual closing operation is not required. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower opening 512 from being left open, and it is possible to always take an appropriate mode without being aware of the presence or absence of closure.

By the way, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the bottom lid 514 tries to stay at the equilibrium position where the center of gravity of the bottom lid 514 is located directly below the rotation shaft 538. Is in contact with the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501, so that the rotation of the bottom lid 514 is restricted in front of the equilibrium position. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the bottom lid 514 is maintained at a position where the bottom lid 514 is rotated in the first direction 537 by the predetermined rotation angle α from the closed position, and this position is the open position. Is equivalent to.

As shown in FIG. 20, the projecting portion 535 has a first inclined portion 535b located on the shaft portion 522 side and a second inclined portion 535c located on the side opposite to the shaft portion 522 side with the top portion 535a interposed therebetween. I have. The first inclined portion 535b has an inclination that goes up from the shaft portion 522 side toward the top portion 535a, and the second inclined portion 535c has an inclination that goes down from the top portion 535a toward the side opposite to the shaft portion 522 side. The inclination angle of the second inclined portion 535c is smaller than that of the first inclined portion 535b.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the protrusion amount (height in the protrusion direction) of the protrusion 535 to be small and secure the strength of the protrusion 535. That is, the degree of limitation of the rotation range of the bottom lid 514 is defined by the amount of protrusion of the protruding portion 535. When the inclination angle of the second inclined portion 535c is larger than that of the first inclined portion 535b, the top portion 535a Will move away from the rotation shaft 538 of the bottom lid 514, and it will be necessary to increase the amount of protrusion of the protruding portion 535. In this case, the strength of the protruding portion 535 is reduced, and the protruding portion 535 is easily damaged due to a collision of medals or the like.

Here, in the present embodiment, the bottom lid 514 is tilted to a predetermined rotation angle (specific rotation angle) between the closed position and the open position, and the bottom lid 514 is removed in a predetermined removal direction in that state. It is possible to release the connection between the bottom lid 514 and the tank body 501 by moving the bottom lid 514 to the tank body 501. Hereinafter, the configuration for that purpose will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24 with detailed explanations of the front support portion 515a, the rear support portion 515b, and the intermediate support portion 515c. FIG. 23 is an explanatory view showing a support structure of the bottom lid 514, and FIG. 24 is an explanatory view showing a method of removing the bottom lid 514.

As described above, in the bottom lid 514, the front support shaft 524, the rear support shaft 525, and the intermediate support shaft 526 of the shaft portion 522 have the front support portion 515a, the rear support portion 515b, and the intermediate support portion of the tank body 501. By being connected to 515c, it is connected to the tank body 501. Since the connecting structures of the support shafts 524 to 526 and the support portions 515a to 515c are the same, a combination of the front support shaft 524 and the front support portion 515a will be described here as an example.

As shown in FIG. 23A, the front support portion 515a protrudes from the support standing portion 551 that stands upward from the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501 and the left wall portion 501e of the tank body 501 toward the support standing portion 551. It is provided with a support protrusion 552.

The height dimension of the support standing portion 551 is larger than the shaft diameter of the front support shaft 524, and the protruding portion 551b protruding toward the left wall portion 501e side is formed on the upper portion of the support standing portion 551. .. The support protrusion 552 is arranged at a height position corresponding to the protrusion 551b, and faces the protrusion 551b in the radial direction of the front support shaft 524. An elongated slit portion 554 that opens vertically and extends in the axial direction of the front support shaft 524 is formed between the protrusion portion 551b and the support protrusion portion 552. A space portion 553 into which the front support shaft 524 can be inserted is formed below the slit portion 554. , It is curved in an arc shape so that the distance between them narrows as it goes upward.

On the other hand, the front support shaft 524 has a shape in which a part of the round bar is chamfered in a plane. Specifically, it includes a pair of flat surfaces 561 parallel to each other and a sliding surface 562 having an arcuate cross section connecting between the flat surfaces 561. The distance (diameter width) M between the two flat surfaces 561 is the same as the opening width (opening width in the same direction as the above direction) Ld of the slit portion 554 or smaller than the opening width Ld.

As shown in FIG. 20, the flat surface 561 is formed by being angled at an inclination angle rotated by a predetermined angle about a rotation shaft 538 with respect to a virtual plane flush with the lid body 521 of the bottom lid 514. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 24, when the bottom lid 514 is tilted to a predetermined specific rotation angle β between the closed position and the open position, both flat surfaces 561 stand upright (in other words,). If so, the sliding surface 562 is set at an angle that faces the slit portion 554).

Therefore, by inclining the bottom lid 514 to the specific rotation angle β, the lateral width of the front support shaft 524 becomes the interval M of the flat surfaces 561, and the opening width Ld or less of the slit portion 554 can be set. Therefore, by moving the bottom lid 514 toward the upper opening 502 in the same posture, the front support shaft 524 can pass through the slit portion 554 and the front support shaft 524 can be removed from the front support portion 515a. By the way, when the bottom lid 514 is moved upward with the bottom lid 514 tilted to the specific rotation angle β, the rear support shaft 525 and the intermediate support shaft 526 are also removed from the rear support portion 515b and the intermediate support portion 515c, respectively. The bottom lid 514 can be removed from the tank body 501.

Since the bottom lid 514 is removable from the tank body 501 in this way, when the bottom lid 514 is damaged, it is not necessary to replace the entire auxiliary tank 54, and it is possible to deal with it by replacing the bottom lid 514. Become. Further, when the bottom lid 514 is attached to the tank body 501, it can be easily attached by pushing the bottom lid 514 from above to below each support portion 515a to 515c in a state of being tilted at a specific rotation angle β. , The assembly work of the auxiliary tank 54 can be facilitated.

On the other hand, when the bottom lid 514 is positioned in the closed position (see FIG. 23 (a)) or the open position (see FIG. 23 (b)), the lateral width of the front support shaft 524 is larger than the distance M of the slit portions 554. Therefore, the front support shaft 524 cannot pass through the slit portion 554. Therefore, even if the bottom lid 514 is moved toward the upper opening 502 at those positions, it cannot be removed from the tank body 501. As described above, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward posture in order to support automatic collection. At that time, the bottom lid 514 is hung from the tank body 501, and the protruding portion 535 is provided. Stays at the rotation position (open position) that abuts on the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501. Even in such a case, the bottom lid 514 is the tank main body because the predetermined rotation angle α (open position) defined by the protrusion 535 and the specific rotation angle β that allows the bottom lid 514 to be removed are different. It is suppressed that it deviates from 501 and falls.

<About the configuration for fixing the auxiliary tank 54>
By the way, from the viewpoint of suppressing the loss of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation of the slot machine 10, it is desirable to transport the slot machine 10 with the auxiliary tank 54 housed in the housing 11. However, when manually collecting the medals housed in the auxiliary tank 54, it is necessary to take out the auxiliary tank 54 from the inside of the housing 11, so that the auxiliary tank 54 is required to be installed in a free state without being fixed. Therefore, if the slot machine 10 is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank 54 moves in the housing 11 and collides with surrounding members such as the hopper device 51, causing damage.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration has been devised so that the auxiliary tank 54 can be in a fixed state when the slot machine 10 is transported, while the auxiliary tank 54 can be in a free state when it is used in correspondence with manual collection. There is. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 13 to 18.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 17, a plate-shaped flange portion 571 projecting outward is provided at the upper end portion of the tank body 501 in the auxiliary tank 54. The flange portion 571 is integrally formed with the tank body 501, and includes a front flange portion 571a, a rear flange portion 572b, a right flange portion 571c, and a left flange portion 571d. Each of these flange portions 571a to 571d is continuously formed in a frame shape so as to surround the upper opening 502. By providing the flange portion 571 in this way, the bending rigidity of the tank body 501 is reinforced, and the deformation of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted while the medal is housed is suppressed. The front flange portion 571a is also used as the extending portion 503a of the handle portion 503.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 18A, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward posture on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, the right side of the tank body 501 is on the right side. An engaging portion 574 that engages with the flange portion 571c is provided. The engaging portion 574 is integrally formed with the hopper mounting plate 22, and is formed by bending a part of the hopper mounting plate 22. Specifically, in the hopper mounting plate 22, the mounting plate protruding portion 575 is formed so as to project to the right from the right end of the mounting plate main body 22b, and the mounting plate protruding portion 575 is bent like a crank. As a result, the engaging portion 574 is formed. As shown in FIG. 6B, the engaging portion 574 has a standing portion 577 that stands upward from the mounting plate protruding portion 575 and a stretch that projects from the upper end portion of the standing portion 577 toward the installation area of the auxiliary tank 54. It has a protrusion 578.

The lower surface of the overhanging portion 578 is substantially parallel to the surface of the bottom plate 11a, and the length dimension of the overhanging portion 578 in the overhanging direction is smaller than the length dimension of the right flange portion 571c in the overhanging direction. ing. The height of the upright portion 577 is set so that the gap dimension Le between the overhanging portion 578 and the bottom plate 11a is slightly larger than or the same as the plate thickness dimension of the right flange portion 571c. Further, the distance Lh (see FIG. 6A) between the inner wall surface 577a of the upright portion 577 and the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 is slightly larger or the same as the width dimension Lf of the auxiliary tank 54 (see FIG. 13). It is set to be. As shown in FIG. 18A, the engaging portion 574 is arranged at a position lowered rearward by a predetermined distance from the front end portion 11d of the bottom plate 11a, and has a predetermined length shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the right flange portion 571c. It extends in the front-back direction.

With such a configuration, the auxiliary tank 54 in the downward posture is placed on the bottom plate 11a on the front side of the engaging portion 574, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slidably moved toward the back plate 11b from that state. As shown in FIG. 18B, the right flange portion 571c can be inserted into the gap between the overhanging portion 578 and the bottom plate 11a. As a result, the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 can be engaged with each other, and the floating (upward movement) of the auxiliary tank 54 can be regulated by the overhanging portion 578.

Therefore, by installing the auxiliary tank 54 as described above during transportation of the slot machine 10, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from moving upward in the housing 11 and colliding with the upper guide plate 52a or the like. Further, when the auxiliary tank 54 moves upward, the auxiliary tank 54 is caught at a position of interference with the locking device 20 in the housing 11, and there is an inconvenience that the lock cannot be unlocked even if the unlocking operation is performed through the key cylinder 21. Although it may occur, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by restricting the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54.

When the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 are engaged, not only the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted, but also the auxiliary tank 54 is arranged between the standing portion 577 and the right side plate 11c. By doing so, it is possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the left-right direction. In this case, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from reciprocating left and right during transportation of the slot machine 10 and repeatedly colliding with the right side plate 11c and the hopper device 51.

Here, when manually collecting medals, when a part or the whole of the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted and the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the inside of the housing 11, the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 are engaged. In the engaged state, the above-mentioned extraction operation becomes difficult. That is, in the present embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture so as to engage the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, the hanging portion 503b stands up and the handle portion 503 opens upward. It becomes a state. In this case, since it is difficult to insert a finger or a hand from below, the employee habitually tries to perform the above removal operation after transporting (or installing) the medal to the game hall where the medals are collected by manual collection. It also makes it easier to hesitate. As a result, an unreasonable removal operation in the engaged state is suppressed, and damage to the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the front end portion 11d of the bottom plate 11a is provided with a regulation plate 579 that regulates the amount of forward movement of the auxiliary tank 54. The regulation plate 579 is made of a metal flat plate having a predetermined thickness dimension, and forms an ascending step with the bottom plate 11a at the rear end portion.

The length dimension of the regulation plate 579 in the front-rear direction (sliding direction of the auxiliary tank 54) is such that when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid to a predetermined installation position, the rear end portion of the regulation plate 579 is in front of the auxiliary tank 54. It is set to the position position. That is, the distance between the rear end portion of the regulation plate 579 and the back plate 11b is longer than the longitudinal dimension Lg of the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, after the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at a predetermined installation position, even if the auxiliary tank 54 moves forward, it is caught by the regulation plate 579, and further forward movement is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from colliding with the back surface of the front door 12 during transportation of the slot machine 10, and it is possible to suppress damage to the auxiliary tank 54 and the front door 12.

The thickness dimension of the regulation plate 579 is such that when the front door 12 is closed, the lower end portion 12a of the front door 12 (see FIG. 4. For details, the lower end portion is located above the bottom plate 11a when the front door 12 is closed. It is advisable to make the height of the part) so that it can be ridden. As a result, the gap between the front door 12 and the bottom plate 11a can be filled with the regulation plate 579. That is, the regulation plate 579 can also function as an fraud prevention plate that prevents an act of inserting a foreign object such as a wire through the gap and attempting to illegally access the inside of the slot machine 10.

Here, the predetermined installation position is set at a position where the guide plate 52a is arranged above the lower opening 512 provided in the bottom plate portion 501a of the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, when transporting the automatic collection to the game hall, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed downward with the bottom lid 514 in the open position, the auxiliary tank 54 will be installed after transportation or in the game hall. It can be used as it is without the need to remove or adjust the position.

However, it is not always necessary to position the bottom lid 514 in the open position for transportation. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed with the bottom lid 514 mounted on the upper sensor rod 16a. In this case, the rotation of the bottom lid 514 to the open position can be restricted by the contact of the upper sensor rod 16a at a position on the way to the open position. As a result, the upper limit of rotation of the bottom lid 514 from the closed position is defined by the predetermined rotation angle γ, and even if a foreign object or a hand is allowed to enter through the medal discharge hole 15 to rotate the bottom lid 514 to the open position. It is blocked by the upper sensor rod 16a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower opening 512 from being completely opened, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation shaft 538 and the upper sensor rod 16a are arranged so that the predetermined rotation angle γ is smaller than the specific rotation angle β (see FIG. 24) at which the bottom lid 514 can be removed. The positional relationship of is set. In this case, even if the bottom lid 514 is rotated by allowing a foreign object or a hand to enter through the medal discharge hole 15, the bottom lid 514 cannot be rotated or is difficult to rotate to the specific rotation angle β, which makes it difficult to remove the bottom lid 514. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of completely opening the lower opening 512 by removing the bottom lid 514.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, as shown in FIG. 17, the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 are not engaged with each other, and the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a free state. Therefore, when manually collecting medals, the auxiliary tank 54 can be easily taken out from the inside of the housing 11.

The distance between the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 corresponds to the width dimension Lf of the auxiliary tank 54, and specifically, it is slightly larger than the width dimension Lf. There is. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, the auxiliary tank 54 is sandwiched between the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c, and the flange portion 571 comes into contact with the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c. , The movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the left-right direction is restricted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the left side wall portion 501e and the right side wall portion 501d of the tank body 501 are inclined so that the distance between them increases as they move upward. It is formed. Of these, the left side wall portion 501e is a wall portion that faces the engaging portion 574 when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, and has the above-mentioned inclination, so that the lower end portion of the left side wall portion 501e Can be easily separated from the engaging portion 574. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, it is possible to secure a space between the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574, which makes it difficult to install the auxiliary tank 54 due to interference with the engaging portion 574, or the auxiliary tank 54 becomes It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as tilting.

By the way, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, the regulation plate 579 is located in front of the auxiliary tank 54, and the auxiliary tank 54 can come into contact with the regulation plate 579 when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a bulging portion 581 having a semicircular cross section is provided on the back surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501.

The bulging portion 581 is integrally formed with the tank body 501, and is arranged on the back surface of the bottom plate portion 501a at the front portion of the tank body 501. As a result, the tank body 501 is less likely to be caught by the regulation plate 579, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be pulled out smoothly. In this case, by making the height dimension of the bulging portion 581 larger than the plate thickness dimension of the regulating plate 579, the bulging portion 581 tends to come into contact with the regulating plate 579 first when the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out. It becomes possible to preferably exert the effect of reducing catching.

When disengaging the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, the engagement can be disengaged by pulling out the auxiliary tank 54 forward (front side) from the state shown in FIG. 18A. .. When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward posture, the handle portion 503 is in a state in which the hanging portion 503b stands up and opens upward, so that a finger or a finger or a finger or the handle portion 503b is provided from above the handle portion 503 to the hanging portion 503b. The drawer operation can be easily performed by hooking a hand. At that time, in order to suppress the catching with the regulation plate 579, an inclined surface may be provided on the rear upper end portion of the regulation plate 579 or the front upper end portion 571e (see FIG. 17) of the extension portion 503a (front flange portion 571a). good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b extend in a direction parallel to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 (extend in the same direction as the tank installation surface in the height direction). ), By sliding the auxiliary tank 54 in the front-rear direction, the sensor rods 16a and 16b can be taken in and out of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the lower sensor insertion hole 505b.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in an upward posture and the medal is housed in the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 is relatively heavy, so that the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out by the employee. At that time, it is considered that the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out by sliding the bottom plate 11a from the front opening side of the housing 11. In this case, the sensor rods 16a and 16b inserted into the insertion holes 505a and 505b are pulled out from the auxiliary tank 54 without receiving an excessive force.

On the other hand, in the state where the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the downward posture, the auxiliary tank 54 is empty and its weight is relatively light. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out, it is conceivable that the front end portion of the auxiliary tank 54 is tilted and pulled out so as to be lifted. In this case, there is a concern that the sensor rods 16a and 16b receive an excessive force from the auxiliary tank 54. In this respect, since the auxiliary tank 54 is slid and moved in the front-rear direction to release the engaged state, it is suppressed that the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out in an inclined posture, and each sensor rod 16a, It is possible to prevent 16b from receiving excessive force. That is, the sensor rods 16a and 16b can be protected.

According to the configuration described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 is opened and closed as the orientation of the auxiliary tank 54 is changed between the upper and lower sides. As a result, it is possible to switch between manual collection and automatic collection simply by turning the auxiliary tank 54 upside down, and the switching operation can be simplified. Moreover, since the switching between the closed state and the open state is associated with the posture of the auxiliary tank 54, it is possible to easily grasp which mode is used. For example, in the case where the opening / closing is only switched under the upward posture, it is difficult to grasp which state the auxiliary tank 54 is in unless the inside of the auxiliary tank 54 is looked into. As a result, there is a risk of using it in an erroneous manner, such as using it in an open state where it should be used in a closed state. In this respect, in this configuration, the appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 can be different between the closed state and the open state, so that the difference in the state can be noticed at first glance. In particular, since the auxiliary tank 54 is configured to be in an open state when the bottom portion is on the upper side, it is easy to notice that the bottom is vacant, and it is possible to suppress use in an erroneous manner.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is changed from the upward posture to the downward posture, the bottom lid 514 is configured to rotate by its own weight toward the open position. In this case, in addition to suppressing forgetting to open the lower opening 512, a drive unit for rotating the bottom lid 514 toward the open position, a sensor for detecting the posture of the auxiliary tank 54, and the sensor. A control configuration or the like that controls the drive unit according to the detection result of the above is not required, and the configuration can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

The upper limit of the rotation range of the bottom lid 514 to the open side is limited to a predetermined rotation angle α, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the bottom lid 514 rotates toward the closed position by its own weight. And said. In addition to suppressing forgetting to close the lower opening 512, a drive unit or the like for rotating the bottom lid 514 toward the closed side becomes unnecessary, which makes it possible to simplify the configuration and reduce the cost. It will be possible.

By installing the auxiliary tank 54 in the downward posture, the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 are engaged with each other, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the upward posture, they are not engaged. This makes it possible to regulate the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation of the slot machine 10 while avoiding adversely affecting the operation of taking out the auxiliary tank 54 during manual collection.

In particular, since the presence or absence of engagement is associated with the posture of the auxiliary tank 54, the appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 can be different between the case of the engaged state and the case of the non-engaged state. For example, when the engaging portion becomes a blind spot when viewed from an employee of the game hall, an unreasonable removal operation is performed without noticing that the engaging portion is in the engaged state, and the right flange portion 571c, the engaging portion 574, etc. are removed. May damage. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the difference in appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 makes it possible to notice the difference in state at first glance. In this case, for example, if the employee is notified in advance that the auxiliary tank 54 is in the fixed state when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, it is easy to determine which of the above states it is in without having to confirm the engaging portion. It is possible to grasp the situation and suppress an unreasonable take-out operation.

By engaging the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 upward is restricted. If the auxiliary tank 54 moves upward during transportation, the auxiliary tank 54 is caught at a position where it interferes with the locking device 20, and it is assumed that the lock cannot be unlocked even if the unlocking operation is performed later. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 upward is restricted by engaging the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

The engaging portion 574 is provided on the surface of the bottom plate 11a (the installation surface of the auxiliary tank 54) and is configured to engage with the flange portion 571 of the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated part for engagement in the auxiliary tank 54, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 can be simplified.

Not only that, by engaging the flange portion 571, the distance from the engaging portion 574 can be increased when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the auxiliary tank 54 is unintentionally engaged and the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted. Further, since the hopper device 51 and the auxiliary tank 54 are provided side by side in the housing 11, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, the flange portion 571 causes the hopper device 51 and the housing 11 to be provided. The position of the auxiliary tank with respect to the right side plate 11c of the is regulated. Therefore, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is not engaged in the upward posture, the misalignment of the auxiliary tank 54 can be regulated.

Focusing on the characteristic that the auxiliary tank 54 does not need to be taken out during automatic collection, the downward posture of the auxiliary tank 54, which is unsuitable for manual collection, is adopted as a common posture during transportation and automatic collection of the slot machine 10. On top of that, the auxiliary tank 54 is fixed to the housing 11 only in the case of the common posture. Further, since the lower opening 512 is provided in the bottom plate 501a of the tank body 501 and can be opened and closed by the bottom lid 514, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience during transportation while suppressing the adverse effect on automatic collection. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to adapt to each of the three usage environments of transportation, automatic collection, and manual collection by simply changing the posture of the auxiliary tank 54, which is convenient. Can be significantly improved.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 26 and 27.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the payout detection sensor 51a and the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the third credit. In the third credit input detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, the settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, the reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a, an upper sensor rod 16a, and a lower sensor rod 16b that detect that the setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are input / output ports. It is designed to be output to the CPU 102 via the 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volt, for example. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit The input / output port 104 includes a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), and the like. It is connected via.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 28), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured so that a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Then, when the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 27, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main base that controls and manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

On the input side of the display control device 81, a first effect switch 66 (more specifically, a first effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the first effect switch 66) and a second effect switch 67 (more specifically, the second effect switch). A second effect switch detection sensor) that detects the operation of the effect switch 67) is connected. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 55.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the outline of the power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 26) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the reading result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the number. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set the segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62, respectively. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62 to display the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of the registers saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S213 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, when the re-game prize is established in the 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and when the re-game prize is established in the one-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting medals. By the way, in this embodiment, the re-game winning is not established in the 2-bet game, but if the game is transformed so that the re-game winning is established even in the 2-bet game, two cards are inserted in this automatic insertion process. It is advisable to set the virtual medal of to be automatically inserted.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals possessed and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets and the like is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as a specified number in the CB state, and a gaming state other than the CB state (specifically, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, BB). "1" and "3" are set as the specified number in the state). That is, in the CB state, the affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and the bet number is "1" or "3" in other than the CB state. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medal is bet, or if the number of bets is "2" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including the information of the processing result of step S206 and the information of the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as the control device on the sub side. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the effective line. Further, in the 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S211, the reel control process of step S212, the medal payout process of step S213, the RT state process of step S214, and the bonus state process of step S215 are executed in this order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of gaming states in the normal gaming mode, which are roughly classified into a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. Further, as the gaming state in the specific mode, there are three types of gaming states: a normal gaming state in the specific mode, a BB state in the specific mode, and a CB state in the specific mode.

In this slot machine 10, based on the lottery result of the lottery process and the stop result of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the above 6 types or 3 types of gaming states are shifted to the game playability. The specific mode in the present embodiment is a mode that imitates the playability of the normal game mode. Therefore, first, the game performance of the normal game mode will be described, and later, the specific mode will be described in detail.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. .. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state of the normal game mode, and the normal game state is determined. Select a lottery table. Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 31 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state of “setting 3” in the normal game mode. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The judgment value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV. In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 20, in step S306, a winning flag indicating that the first small winning combination to the fifth small winning combination and the 14th small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination have been won is set. It is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, the winning flag indicating that the set winning flag has won the first BB (hereinafter referred to as the "first BB winning flag") or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (hereinafter, the "second BB winning flag"). If not, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. In step S306 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the corresponding winning flag is set if a winning combination other than the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won, and the first BB, the second BB, and the second BB are set. If you have not won a role other than CB, the corresponding winning flag will not be set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is successful is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV. By the way, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is judged using the lottery table shown in FIG. 31, the probability of winning the normal replay (the probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/3, and the strong cherry. The probability of winning (the probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/263, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/154, and the probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/252. , The probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 65500 minutes. It is 1. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, the forward push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 20 to 23) is about 1/164, respectively, and the middle push bell 1, The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, the right push bell 1, and the right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 24 to 27) is about 1 / 16.4, respectively. The probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is Approximately 1 / 4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is about 1 / 3280, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 34) The probability of winning) is about 1/6550. The probability of winning the watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning the watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 6550. It is one-third. The probability of winning the chance A duplication 1, the chance A duplication 2, the chance B duplication 1, and the chance B duplication 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 37 to 40) is about 1/3280, respectively. The probability of winning the middle bell duplication 1 and the middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41, 42) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning a single prize in the first BB and the second BB (probability of winning when IV = 43, 44) is about 1/65500, respectively. The probability of winning the CB (the probability of winning when IV = 45) is about 1 / 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing any of the roles is about 1 / 1.94.

In the lottery table for the normal game state in the normal game mode, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV = 2 to 12, 28 to 30, 46 to 49. Therefore, in the normal game state in the normal game mode, these index values IV are not won.

After setting the winning flag in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S309, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, the stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the lottery process is completed. In the stop information setting process, when a plurality of wins are won among the small wins, replays, and bonuses, the stop information is set in the order of priority shown below. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the stop information is set so that the small winning combination is given priority and the bonus winning is established when the small winning combination cannot be established. If the re-game and bonus are won, the stop information is set so that the re-game prize is preferentially established.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect processing is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped is stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning when IV = 20 to 27, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and the right push bell 2 (hereinafter, collectively referred to as “push order bell”) are won (see FIG. 31), the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established depending on the operation order.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, and the middle stop switch 43 Set the stop information so that the first small winning combination is established when is first operated, and the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Set stop information. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of 4 symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode. It can be stopped and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the valid line. Therefore, when the distance between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by 5 symbols or more, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the second small winning combination winning or the fifth small winning combination winning.

The second small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as the fifth small winning combination symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged so that the distance between the second small winning symbols (fifth small winning symbols) is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 8th "watermelon" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), the 12th "white bell" The design stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small winning combination symbol of the medium reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. Further, the fifth small winning combination symbol of the medium reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols are arranged at positions 11 and 14. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small winning combination symbol or the fifth small winning combination symbol may stop on the effective line, or both the second small winning combination symbol and the fifth small winning combination symbol may be on the effective line. It doesn't stop.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 13th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the 5th small winning combination symbol The barrel "cherry" pattern stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the fifth small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "cherry" symbol to the 17th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the first 2 The "Red 7" symbol, which is a small role symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, the second small winning combination symbol and the fifth small winning combination symbol can be stopped in the middle stage even if the middle reel 32M is slid by four symbols and then stopped. Can not. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a timing, the No. 2 "BAR" symbol or the No. 6 "white bell" symbol stops in the middle stage.

When the second small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the second small winning combination winning can be established.

The second small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "red 7" symbol reaches the lower stage, it is shown in FIG. 34 (c). As shown, the "Red 7" symbol, which is the second small winning combination symbol, stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops in the lower row. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 13th "cherry" symbol reaches the lower row, the 14th "watermelon" symbol is moved to the lower row as shown in FIG. 34 (d). Stop. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is a transitional result as shown in FIG.

When the fifth small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the fifth small winning combination winning can be established.

The fifth small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R is the "second replay" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "second replay" symbol is arranged at the 0th and 3rd positions. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the fifth small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 17th "BAR" symbol to the 3rd "2nd replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, it is the 5th small winning combination symbol. The "2nd replay" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the fifth small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops in the lower row. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is a transitional result as shown in FIG.

When the 2nd small winning combination symbol and the 5th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle stage, that is, when the "BAR" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the stop information 2nd In the setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom.

The "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between the "watermelon" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol and the combination of the "white bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol from the left are as shown in FIG. It is a transition to.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small winning combination is established and the fifth small winning combination is established. It will be either the case where the winning is established or the case where the transition roll is stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination prize.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between the first small winning symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops in the upper row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small winning combination prize is established regardless of the operation timing.

When the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the small winning combination is established or the shift roll is stopped on the valid line depending on the operation timing. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 29th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing, and if the unquestioned bell is won, the second is regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 Small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the effective line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the winning result handling process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the winning result command is set in step S415 so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any of the first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes has been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game state to the re-game state is performed. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, when it is determined that the current game state is the re-game state, the automatic input process is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for medal payout is driven to eject medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the valid line. When the shift result is stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the shift roll has not stopped on the valid line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning combination is awarded based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Judge whether it is established or not. When the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. Further, when the transition roll is stopped on the effective line under a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the step S503 is performed. The first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 36 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 31), the lottery table for the first RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 1 to 5, and has the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the normal gaming state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is about 1 in 32.8, respectively. The odds of not winning any of the roles are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 36, if the winner is IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and if the winner is IV = 2, the first promotion replay is won, and the IV If you win when = 3, you will win the 1st promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win the 1st promotion replay 3, and when IV = 5, you will win. If this happens, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 1 in 7.30. The normal replay winning probability under the normal game state is also about 1 / 7.30. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each role type of small role, re-game, and bonus will be won with the same probability as the normal game state, while the privilege of re-game will be given. Changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game prize that does not shift to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize, the third re-game prize that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412), a stop command is generated not only when the push order bell described above is won, but also when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stopped switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 37A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. When the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won, unlike the case where the push order bell is won, the first replay prize or the first replay prize is won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. The third re-game prize is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also assigned as winning combinations. However, none of the above six operation sequences is associated with the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game. Therefore, the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game will not win a prize regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, respectively, and the first promotion replay 2 is the first replay and the first replay. The 6th replay is assigned in addition to the 3 replays, the 1st promotion replay 3 is assigned the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promotion replay 4 is assigned. Although the 8th re-game is assigned in addition to the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game, the re-games that win the prize are the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game regardless of which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation order in which the third re-game prize is established. That is, for example, if the first promotion replay is one type, the operation order corresponding to the third replay prize is also one type, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay prize is intentionally established. This is because it can be possible to make it. It should be noted that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. It is determined whether or not the third re-game prize has been established. When the third re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508 to end this process. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 38 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 36), the lottery table for the second RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 1 to 10, and has the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing judgment of the winning combination is performed using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 / 13.2 and IV = 2-5, and the probability of winning is about 1 / 0.5 and IV = 9, respectively. , The probability of winning at 10 is about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the state shifts to the second RT state, the probability of deviation is lower than that of the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the 2nd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 4th re-game winning that shifts to the 3rd RT state, and the 5th re-gaming Winning and is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412), in addition to the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above are won, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second 2 Even when the promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

FIG. 37B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 are won, the first re-game prize or the second re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the second promotion replay 1 is won, one of the first re-game prize, the fourth re-game prize, and the fifth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. .. When the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first re-game prize or the fourth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The numbers assigned to the fourth re-game in the figure correspond to the symbol combination when the fourth re-game prize is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a disjointed pattern, "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a different color 7 symbol middle stop, and "3" is a symbol that is a red 7, red 7, BAR middle stop. Corresponding to the combination, "4" corresponds to the symbol combination in which White 7, White 7, and BAR are stopped in the middle stage (see FIG. 12). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the 2nd promotion replay 1 is won, the combination of symbols that will be disjointed will stop and the 4th replay prize will be established, or a unique 7 The symbol combination that stops in the middle of the symbols stops, and the 4th re-game prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination processing, the process proceeds to step S509. It is determined whether or not the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize has been established. If the 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are not established, this process is terminated as it is. When the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process is terminated.

When the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the third RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 39 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the second RT state (see FIG. 38), the lottery table for the third RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 9 to 12, and has the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing judgment of the winning combination is performed using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9,10. At that time, it will not be won, and the probability of winning at IV = 11 and 12 will be about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, the winning mode is that the small winning combination, the replaying game, and the bonus are won with the same probability as the 2nd RT state, while the privilege of the replaying game is given. Changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, and the 6th re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, 7 Re-game prize, 8 re-game prize, and 3rd re-game prize that shifts to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 37 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. If BAR Replay 1 is won, any one of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 7th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true. If BAR Replay 2 is won, any one of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 8th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether or not any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, the CB winning flag, the special first BB flag, and the special second BB flag is set. The special first BB flag and the special second BB flag are flags corresponding to the special first BB and the special second BB that can be won in the specific mode. The special first BB and the special second BB are bonus combinations corresponding to the first BB and the second BB in the normal game mode. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the CB winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processes of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, CB It will be a prize. The CB symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the distance between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting processing (step S207), the lower line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 Is set as a valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, the lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the drawing of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 45, and "16384" is set as the point value of IV = 46 to 49. Is set (see Fig. 31 etc. for the correspondence between IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 2 (IV = 47). The probability of winning in the case of CB is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning in CB small and medium-sized role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1 in 4.00, and CB. The probability of winning the small and medium-sized role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 49) is about 1/4.00. No off-the-shelf event occurs.

FIG. 41 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, even if any of the CB small and medium-sized combination 1 to the CB small and medium-sized combination 4 is won, some small winning combination will be won. It always holds. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if the 1st small role prize, the 18th small role prize, the 19th small role prize, and the 25th small role prize are established, 15 medals will be paid out and the first If 2 small wins to 17 small wins and 20 small wins to 24 small wins are established, 14 medals will be paid out. That is, when the state shifts to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the CB is won only in the normal game mode, and is not won in the specific mode.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, when it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and the first BB prize, the second BB prize, the special first BB prize, or the special second BB prize is established in step S609. Judge whether or not.

Then, when any of the BB winnings is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. The flag is set. In step S612, it is determined whether or not the current BB winning is the special first BB winning or the special second BB winning in the specific mode. If a negative determination is made in step S612 and the current BB winning is the first BB winning or the second BB winning in the normal game mode, 216 is set in the remaining payout counter in step S613, and the remaining payout number is set. A process of displaying 216 on the display unit 61 is performed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S612, 24 is set in the remaining payout number counter and 24 is displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 in step S614. The numerical value set in step S613 or step S614 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state. That is, the upper limit payout number is set as 216 for the first BB and the second BB in the normal game mode, and the upper limit payout number is set as 24 in the special first BB and the special first BB in the specific mode, and the upper limit payout of the bonus is set in each mode. The numbers are different.

By performing the processes of steps S610 to S614, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. ..

FIG. 42 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state in which the first BB or the second BB shifts in the normal game mode. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 27, 31 to 49, and "21845" is set as the point value of IV = 28 to 30. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 28) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB medium-red 7 matching combination (IV). The probability of winning when = 29) is about 1 / 3.00, and the probability of winning the BAR matching role in BB (probability of winning when IV = 30) is about 1 / 3.00. It becomes. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/65500.

FIG. 41 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. As described above, the first small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, regardless of whether the winning combination is BB medium / small combination 1, BB medium red 7 matching combination, or BB medium BAR matching combination, the first small is irrespective of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. One of the winning combination, the 30th small winning combination, and the 31st small winning combination is always established. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, 9 medals are paid out when the 1st small winning combination, the 30th small winning combination, and the 31st small winning combination are established. Since the probability of loss in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S615. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter becomes 0, and when it becomes 0, the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is cleared. Further, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in this game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state returns to the game state when the CB winning is established. For example, if the CB prize is established under the normal game state, the game returns to the normal game state after the end of the CB state, and if the CB prize is established under the third RT state, the third RT state is established after the end of the CB state. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB, the second BB, the special first BB, and the special second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. By the way, in the case of shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals by the end of the CB state. When shifting to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (= 9 × 24-3 × 24) medals in the normal game mode until the BB state ends.

When none of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag, the CB winning flag, the special 1st BB winning flag, and the special 2nd BB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), the 1st BB winning and the 2nd BB winning , CB winning, special 1st BB winning, special 1st BB winning (when step S609 is NO), a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in step S605, step S613 or step S614. In the case where the end determination process is performed in step S615 and the case where the end determination process is performed, the process proceeds to step S606 and the state command is set. Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game), and in step S606, the state information storage area. Set the status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal plate 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the normal gaming mode will be described with reference to FIG. 43. The CB state is not shown.

When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state when the transition roll stops on the valid line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 31).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third re-game prize is established when any of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 37 (a)). .. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state are not won, so that the 1st RT state does not shift to the 3rd RT state.

In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the 2nd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state when the 4th re-gaming prize or the 5th re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition result is stopped on the valid line. The 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are established when the 2nd promotion replay 1 or the 2nd promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 37 (b). )reference). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 37 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the 3rd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the 3rd re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition result is stopped on the valid line. The third replay prize is established when the BAR replay 1 or the BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 37 (c)). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 37 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

Incidentally, when each BB winning flag is carried over, a lottery table for carry-over (not shown) is used as the lottery table in the lottery process (FIG. 30). In the carry-over lottery table, the PV values of IV1 to 22 are the same as the PV values of IV1 to 22 in the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 31), and the PV values after IV23 are set to 0. ing. In other words, in the carry-over lottery table, bonuses and small wins that overlap with bonuses are not won.

In the slot machine 10, in the normal game mode, the main control device 101 manages six types of game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state, and is roughly classified. The main control device 101 manages five types of display modes: a normal mode, a challenge mode, an attack mode, a VBB mode (including an additional special zone), and a BB mode.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, in the BB mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. If you win the lottery to shift to the attack mode, you will shift to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode, and if you win the lottery to shift to the challenge mode, you will shift to the challenge mode after the end of the BB mode. If none of the transition lottery is won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode is finished. When the mode shifts from the VBB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VBB mode after the BB mode ends.

The normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1st 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1-fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "push order replay") This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. Transition to challenge mode If the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and if the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so that it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It almost corresponds to the first RT state. In the normal mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, as in the normal mode. In the challenge mode, a lottery for transition to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which it is easy to shift to the attack mode, although the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode. Transition to attack mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the mode shifts from the challenge mode to the normal mode. The challenge mode does not shift to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order replay is won, it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state, and it almost corresponds to the first RT state. .. In the challenge mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified at both the time when the push order bell is won and the time when the push order replay is won. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to the VB mode. Regardless of the attack mode, the attack mode shifts to the VB mode as compared with the normal mode. The transition probability of is high. Transition to VB mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode is shifted to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode is different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode has the highest probability and the first attack mode has the lowest probability, and the first attack mode and the second attack mode are set to be the lowest. , The third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, the stop switch 42 is notified in the operation order notified by the player. When ~ 44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when the game state shifts to the attack mode.

Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell winning and the pushing order replay winning. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation order for establishing the first replay prize is notified in the attack mode. , In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 37 (b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. In that case, the operation order for establishing the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is notified. Therefore, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In the VB mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when the game state shifts to the VB mode.

Explaining the transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and then return from the attack mode to the normal mode. .. Then, in the attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, so if a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and the VB mode returns to the attack mode, the player expects more medals to be owned. can.

As described above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also called a so-called chance zone that is expected to shift to the attack mode.

Further, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. Then, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, it basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery to shift to the second attack mode, you will shift to the second attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery to shift to VB mode will increase. In the second attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery to shift to the third attack mode, you will shift to the third attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery to shift to VB mode will increase. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery to shift to the 4th attack mode, you will shift to the 4th attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery to shift to the VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when shifting to attack mode, the probability of shifting to VB mode increases as the first attack mode → second attack mode → third attack mode → fourth attack mode and attack mode are promoted, and the attack A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the player has a configuration in which the number of medals owned by the player is increased in each display mode of the attack mode, the VBB mode, and the BB mode in the normal game mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of RT states and a plurality of states such as a BB state and a CB state are switched back and forth by winning a prize in each re-game or stopping a transitional outcome. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning prize is established or the transition result is stopped. Further, in the attack mode and the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation order in which the first small winning combination can be established is notified, so that the number of owned medals can be expected to increase.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode is roughly divided into (1) processing related to the transition lottery of the display mode, (2) processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the transition lottery of the display mode, and (3) based on the winning result. There is a process for shifting the display mode, and (4) a process related to the notification effect on the sub side. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery (1) is performed in the lottery result correspondence process (step S310) of the lottery process (FIG. 30) by the main control device 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S701, as a result of this lottery, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B and middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1, 2, weak cherry duplication 1, 2, watermelon duplication 1, 2, chance A duplication 1 , 2, Chance B duplication 1, 2, Middle bell duplication 1, 2 (see, for example, Fig. 31, IV = 13-18, 31-42, hereinafter, these roles are collectively referred to as "specific role"). Judge whether or not. When the lottery result is a specific combination, the process for shifting the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S702 to S708 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination is not won, processing for shifting to the display mode or the like is performed in steps S709 to S712.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination has been won, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when the attack mode is entered. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the first specific combination process is executed in step S704.

<First specific role processing>
The first specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the game is in the normal game state or the first RT state, and the attack mode is not won. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the attack mode is performed. Further, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the challenge mode. When not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a chance mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as an attack mode lottery table in step S803. In the normal time table and the chance mode table, the transition probabilities to the attack mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the attack mode than the weak cherries. In addition, the normal time table and the chance mode table have different transition probabilities to attack mode as a whole, and the chance mode table has a higher transition probability to attack mode than the normal time table. Is set to.

After acquiring the table for the attack mode transition lottery in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In such a process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for shifting to the attack mode.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won based on the processing result of step S804. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the process of setting the attack mode winning flag is performed in step S806.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S807, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, as a display mode transition lottery, when the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the VB mode is won, the notification that the transition lottery has been won is notified after passing through the precursor mode. Will be done. Therefore, the game that won the transition lottery may differ from the game that notifies that the transition lottery has been won, and from the game that won the transition lottery to the game that the notification of winning the transition lottery is performed. , Set as a precursor mode.

As the number of precursor games, 0 games to 32 games are set, and in step S808, one of these 1-32 is randomly determined by lottery. It should be noted that the number of precursor games to be selected may be set to be different depending on the specific combination that triggered the winning of the attack mode and the game state. This also applies to the lottery process for other precursor games.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The precursor counter is a counter that is subtracted by 1 for each game, and when the precursor counter becomes 0, it is notified that the precursor mode has ended and the transition lottery has been won.

In step S810, a process of setting a precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is executed. The precursor command includes information on the lottery result (display mode that shifts after the precursor mode, attack mode in the case of step S810) and the number of precursor games that triggered the precursor mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S810, the first specific combination process is terminated.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first specific combination process is terminated as it is without setting the number of precursor games. When the bonus winning flag is set, it means that a specific role is won in the carry-over state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and the attack mode transition lottery is won, or a role that overlaps with the bonus (strong cherry duplication 1,). This is the case when the attack mode transition lottery is won in 2nd grade). In this case, the BB mode is prioritized as the transition destination of the display mode, not the attack mode.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, the challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, the challenge mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the transition probability to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the challenge mode than the weak cherries.

The case where step S811 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case as well, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S811, and the lottery table is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. It is a table of. As in steps S801 to 803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, the process of setting the challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is executed in step S814.

In the following step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first specific combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is not set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S816, the process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S817, and the process for setting the precursor command is executed in step S818. After that, the first specific combination processing is terminated. The processes of steps S815 to S818 correspond to steps S807 to S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, the process for adding the continuous game in the challenge mode is performed in steps S819 to S823. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S820, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. In step S820, a value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases according to the type of the specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, there is an 80% chance of adding 30 games in challenge mode, and a 20% chance of adding 50 games. For weak cherries, there is an 80% chance of adding 5 games, and a 20% chance of adding 20 games.

In step S821, the number of games in the challenge mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S820 is added to the counter (more specifically, the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S822, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The addition command includes information that the addition has occurred, the number of additional games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) to be added. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the additional command will be described in detail later, but the display control device 81 adds the information included in these additional commands as notification based on the reception of the additional command. Notify.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process proceeds to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 45), if a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. In the second RT state, in step S706, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when the transition to the VB mode is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S706, the second specific combination process is executed in step S707. If a negative determination is made in step S705 or an affirmative determination is made in step S706, the third specific combination process is executed in step S708.

<Second specific role processing>
The second specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the second RT state is performed and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second specific combination process, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode is performed. Further, in the second specific combination process, a lottery for promoting the rank of the attack mode is performed, and a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, a process of grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, step S901 determines which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode is the rank of the current attack mode.

In step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probabilities to the VB mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among the strong cherry and the weak cherry, the strong cherry is set to have a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the weak cherry. Further, in the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is different as a whole, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. As described above, the one in the fourth attack mode shifts to the VB mode more than the one in the third attack mode so that the one in the third attack mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the VB mode than the one in the second attack mode. It is set so that the transition probability of is high.

In step S903, the VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting the VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S909, a process for setting the number of precursor games is performed in the same manner as in steps S807 to S810. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it is not set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S907, the process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S908, and the process for setting the precursor command is executed in step S909. After that, the second specific combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, the attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In such a process, the table for promotion lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode. Specifically, the table for the first attack mode, the table for the second attack mode, and the table for the third attack mode are totaled. There are three (promotion lottery is not performed when staying in the 4th attack mode). In each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherries. Further, in each attack mode table, the promotion probability of the second attack mode table is lower than that of the first attack mode table, so that the third attack mode table has a lower promotion probability than the second attack mode table. The table for attack mode is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion win. If the promotion is won, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flags provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 are rewritten from the rank flags corresponding to the ranks of the current attack mode to the rank flags one higher. After that, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command contains information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to produce an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As an effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set according to the rank of the attack mode, and the display control device 81 receives the promotion command in the attack mode. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, it is controlled to perform the effect for the attack mode with the background color according to the rank of the promotion destination.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S913 is executed, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In such an additional lottery process, the attack mode additional lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% chance of winning an additional lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% chance of winning an additional lottery. The winning probability may be different depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has not been won, the second specific combination processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the attack mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The number of additional games in the attack mode The table for the lottery is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, there is a 90% chance of adding 20 games in attack mode, and a 10% chance of adding 80 games. For weak cherries, there is a 95% chance of adding 5 games, and a 5% chance of adding 100 games.

In step S918, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S917 is added to a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S919, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is terminated.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination process ends. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination process executed in step S708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is a case where the third RT state is performed, or a state where the second RT state is performed and the VB mode is won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. The winning probability of the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process of step S914 and the lottery process of step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in the attack mode is added, and in step S1006, the added command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the third specific combination process ends. The processing of steps S1003 to S1006 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S919. The number of additional games may be different between the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination process ends. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 45), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of this lottery process is not a specific winning combination, the result of this lottery process is pushed in step S709. It is determined whether or not the order replay or the push order bell (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "push order role") has been won. If the push order combination is won, the push order combination process is performed in step S710, and then the lottery result handling process ends. The push order combination processing will be described in detail later.

After executing any of the processes of step S704, step S707, step S708 and step S710, or after making a negative determination in step S709, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The special zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th re-game winning, and the additional special zone is a high addition of the number of continuous games in the attack zone over a plurality of games. Indicates a state that occurs with probability. If the special zone flag is set in step S711, the special zone process is executed in step S712. The special zone flag, the special zone, and the special zone processing will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, the process for dealing with the result of the lottery ends.

As described above, when it is determined that a specific winning combination has been won in the lottery result handling process, the process for shifting to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, and the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or attack mode. Etc. are performed. If the player wins the transition lottery to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, he / she is notified that he / she has won the transition lottery after the precursory game. Therefore, a process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Process for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery>
(2) In the process for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the game state are performed. The processing to be performed and the processing to be performed are performed. Therefore, first, the process related to the notification that the transition lottery has been won will be described.

<Process for mode transition notification>
The notification that the transition lottery has been won is performed in the mode transition notification processing (step S206) in the normal processing (FIG. 29). The mode transition notification process is a process executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a predetermined number). Hereinafter, the mode transition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. The number of precursor games is counted in the winning result handling process described later, and the number of precursor games is subtracted by 1 each time one game is exhausted. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

When the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. Then, in step S1104, the challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, the challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies that the challenge mode is started by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S1106, counting of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1106, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state when the attack mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1110, the attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies that the attack mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1110, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state when the VB mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1114, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies that the VB mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1114, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated. If it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

That is, among the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode that shift through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. On the other hand, regarding the attack mode and the VB mode, only the notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is performed based on the betting operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0, and the precursor is announced. Even if the number of games becomes 0, the attack mode and VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode does not involve the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the gaming state, and specifically, the attack mode shifts to the second RT state. It is started and the VB mode is due to the difference that it is started by shifting to the 3rd RT state.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is the case where the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, and the transition is made when the 3rd re-game winning is established, and the 3rd RT state is the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2. Is won, and the transition is made when the 4th and 5th re-game prizes are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay prize is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay prizes are established, This is the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third re-game winning or the like. Therefore, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the winning combination is to shift the gaming state thereafter. It is configured to enable the transition of the game state. It should be noted that from the notification that the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery has been won to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state shifts), the notification as a preparation state (for example, "" "Preparing" will be announced.

<Explanation of transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the push order combination process (step S710) in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 45). Here, prior to the description of the push order combination processing, an outline of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG. 50.

<Overview of push order notification effect>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (push order notification effect) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the push order notification unit 68. Here, a case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 50 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and the display is larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize that the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first are the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a number is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

In the push order notification unit 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, 68c provided side by side corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the middle LED lamp 68b is lit, and the left and right LED 68a, 68c lamps are lit. Turns off. As a result, the player can recognize that the stop switch to be operated first in this game is the middle stop switch 43. The push order notification unit 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination together with the push order by changing the color of the LED lamp to be turned on. Further, the lighting color of the LED lamp corresponding to the second and subsequent operations may be changed or blinked so that the stop switch to be operated after the second can be recognized.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

In the push order notification unit 68, the LED lamp 68b in the middle is turned off and the LED lamp 68c on the right is turned on (the LED lamp 68a on the left remains turned off). As a result, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), on the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

In the push order notification unit 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains off). As a result, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification effect, the push order is explained during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. The notification effect is set to be executed. By configuring the push order notification effect to be executed at a timing before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 42 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It becomes possible to make the operation of 44 desired, and the game can proceed at a good tempo.

<Pushing order processing>
Next, the push order combination process executed in step S710 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S1201 is the case where the first re-game or the third re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 49). be.

When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the current display mode is in the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying the display mode, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a special zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional special zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is the corresponding flag of the mode (VB mode flag, It has a structure that coexists with the special zone flag). Therefore, in step S1203, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set includes the case where the attack mode is in, the case where the VB mode is in the VB mode, and the case where the special zone is in the special zone.

If it is determined in step S1203 that the attack mode is not in progress, the process for notifying the push order of the third re-game is executed in step S1204. Specifically, among the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 37 (a)). After that, in step S1205, a process of setting the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order combination process ends. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the push order notification command will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the attack mode is in progress, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified in step S1206 (see FIG. 37 (a)). After that, in step S1207, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is completed. The case where the negative determination is made in step S1203 is the case where the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won even though the attack mode is in progress. For example, the game state is changed to the first RT state during the attack mode. It is assumed that you have fallen. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. Therefore, the case of making a negative determination in step S1203 indicates that the attack mode is in the first RT state.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, so that the game state is reached. Can be transferred to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first re-game prize is established and the third re-game prize is established. , There is.

As already explained, the attack notification flag is based on the fact that the number of precursor games was 0 after winning the attack mode transition lottery (notification that the attack mode transition lottery was won). Is a flag that is set. Further, the attack mode flag is a flag set based on the transition to the attack mode (shift to the second RT state). The attack notification flag and the attack mode flag are cleared when the attack mode ends. Therefore, when the attack notification flag is set and the attack mode flag is not set, it indicates that the state is ready for the transition to the attack mode, and the attack notification flag is set. And, when the attack mode flag is set, it means that the display mode is the attack mode. By the way, the attack mode flag may be set while clearing the attack notification flag based on the transition to the attack mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of the fall replays 1 to 3. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S1205 is the case where the first re-game or the second re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, the push order notification process of the first re-game is executed in step S1207. Specifically, among the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 37 (b)). After that, in step S1208, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is completed.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, and the game state is changed. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first re-game prize is established and the third re-game prize is established. , There is.

In addition, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in the situation where the attack notification flag is set, the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state by notifying the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning. It is possible to prevent it from being caused. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. Will shift from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state.

Further, for example, in the 1st RT state, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay prize, and the 3rd regame prize is established. Even if it is done (even if it shifts to the second RT state), the second re-game winning can be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to shift to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, it will promptly shift to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S1209 is the case where the first re-game, the fourth re-game, or the fifth re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 49). be.

When the VB notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed in step S1212. Specifically, among the first re-game, the fourth re-game, and the fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game prize or the fifth re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 37 (b)). After that, in step S1213, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the main push order combination process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, the process for notifying the push order of the first re-game is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1208. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and the player must be in the attack mode. If there is no push order notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1214 is a case where any one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, the process for notifying the push order of the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game is executed. Specifically, among the 1st re-game, the 3rd re-game, and the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game, the operation order corresponding to the 6th re-game winning to the 8th re-game winning is notified (FIG. 37 (FIG. 37). c) See). After that, in step S1218, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the main push order combination process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process for notifying the push order of the first re-game is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1208. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the BAR replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and if the attack mode is not in the push order notification effect. No forward notification effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the lottery result this time is a push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, in step S1220, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the normal mode or the challenge mode. When the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed in step S1221 (see FIG. 33). After that, in step S1222, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the main push order combination process is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the push order notification process is not performed, and the push order combination process is terminated as it is.

<Process to shift the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, as a result of notifying the game state to be changed as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the game state change is won will be described. This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 32). Hereinafter, the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

In step S1301, the game number management process is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode described above, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted.

In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established based on the result of this stop. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, the RT state process (FIG. 35) performs a process for shifting the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying the display mode, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a special zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional special zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is the corresponding flag of the mode (VB mode flag, It has a structure that coexists with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1304, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set includes the case where it is in the attack mode, the case where it is in the VB mode, and the case where it is in the special zone. ..

When the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, since the display mode is already the attack mode, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, the process for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, the attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, the attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command notifies that the attack mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1307, counting of the number of continuous attack modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the attack mode is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1307 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is completed.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third re-game winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the 4th and 5th re-game winnings have been established as the result of this stop. As described above, when the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 35), a process for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the VB mode flag is set. When the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the VB mode flag is not set, the process for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S131 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, the process of setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode in which the VB mode shifts through the attack mode, and after the VB mode ends, the VB mode always shifts to the attack mode.

After that, in step S1312, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies that the VB mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1313, counting of the number of continuous VB modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1313 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is completed.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the 4th and 5th re-game winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1314. In step S1314, as a result of this stop, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established. In the present embodiment, when the seventh re-game winning is established, that is, the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R. When the BAR symbol stops at the combination line in the middle row, it is configured to shift to the additional special zone. In the additional special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added not only to the specific role but also to all the roles (pushing order, specific role and bonus) that can be won in the normal game mode. The case where the 7th re-game prize is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game prize (FIG. 37). (C)) Further, when the 7th re-game of the 1st, 6th, and 7th re-games wins the lottery, for example, 20 minutes when the BAR replay 1 is won. Win a lottery to win the 7th re-game with a probability of 1.

When the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, in step S1316, a process of setting the special zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The special zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is the above-mentioned additional special zone, and when the special zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is stopped. .. In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is because the special zone shifts to the VB mode, and after the special zone ends, it always shifts to the VB mode.

After that, in step S1317, the special zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command notifies that the special zone is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1318, the counting of the number of continuous special zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1318 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

As described above, based on the winning combination (3rd to 5th re-games) corresponding to the transition of the game state, a process for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (FIG. 35). conduct. This is to prevent the attack mode etc. from being started based on the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the game state even though the lottery for transitioning the display mode has not been won. Is.

In addition, when shifting to the display mode, among those that accompany the transition to the gaming state, when shifting to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or when shifting from attack mode to VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding winning combination. Therefore, the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of the transition to the lower mode, the transition of the display mode is not performed when the gaming state shifts due to, for example, the second re-game winning as a fall replay or the stop of the transition roll. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Game number management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes is 0. Based on the above, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the game mode, a normal game mode performed in the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game and a specific mode performed in the 1-bet game are provided. The process of step S1401 is for determining whether the game to be ended this time is a game in the normal game mode or a game in the specific mode. Then, in step S1401, when the number of bets is 1 as a specific number, it is determined that the game ending this time is a game in the specific mode. If the game is in a specific mode, the game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, in the game in the specific mode, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the like are not counted.

If the game ending this time is a game in the normal game mode instead of the specific mode, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and special zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the game number management process is terminated. .. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set, or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the like are cleared, but the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after the preparation state such as the attack mode is passed, the push order notification for shifting the game state is performed by these flags, and it is possible to return to the game state before the bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. If it is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (when the precursor mode is not set), or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. ..

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. In the challenge mode, the number of challenge mode continuation games is subtracted by proceeding to step S1407 and performing a process of subtracting 1 from the challenge mode continuation counter. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and the challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. In the display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the challenge mode ends in this game. After performing the process of step S1410, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. In the attack mode, the number of attack mode continuation games is subtracted by proceeding to step S1412 and performing a process of subtracting 1 from the attack mode continuation counter. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. After that, in step S1416, the attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the attack mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1416, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. In the case of the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1418, and it is determined whether or not the zone is an additional special zone. If it is not an additional special zone, the number of VB mode continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1419. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. After that, in step S1423, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the VB mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1423, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1424. In step S1424, the number of special zone continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and the special zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1427. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in this game. As such notification, for example, the number of games that have been successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1427, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

<End judgment processing>
Next, as the process at the end of the bonus, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. As described above, the end determination process is the process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 40). In the end determination process, the success or failure of the bonus end condition is determined, and when the bonus is terminated, processing for winning notification such as an attack mode in which the bonus is duplicated is performed, and an attack mode in which the bonus is duplicated is elected. Process for adding the number of games such as.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination is established. As already explained, the first small winning combination (BB small and medium small winning combination 1) is established with high probability during the bonus (Fig. 42). In addition, when the player wins the BB middle red 7 matching combination (IV = 29), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 30th small combination winning (FIG. 41 (b)), and further. When the 30th small winning combination of the 1st small winning combination and the 30th small winning combination wins the lottery, the 30th small winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, the lottery for winning the 30th small winning combination is won with a probability of 1/100 when the winning combination of 7 BB middle reds is won. When the BAR matching combination (IV = 30) in BB is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 31st small combination winning (FIG. 41 (b)), and further, the 1st small combination. If the 31st small winning combination of the winning combination and the 31st small winning combination wins the lottery, the 31st small winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, when the BAR matching combination in BB is won, the lottery for winning the 31st small combination is won with a probability of 1/200.

When it is determined in step S1501 that the small winning combination is established, in step S1502, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1501 or after the process of step S1502 is executed, the addition process is executed in step S1503. The addition process is a process for granting a privilege other than the payout of the game medium based on the result of the game during the bonus this time. For example, if the result of this game is the 30th small winning combination (7 reds in the lower row), if the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode is won, and the mode is other than the normal mode or the challenge mode. If there is, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added (for example, 100 games). In addition, when the 31st small winning combination (lower BAR alignment) is established, if the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode and the VB mode are won, and if the display mode is the attack mode, the VB mode and the special zone. In the VB mode, the special zone is won a plurality of times (for example, twice), and in the special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added (for example, 300 games). In step S1503, a flag (attack mode winning flag, etc.) corresponding to the transition of the display mode is set, and a counter addition process (addition process such as an attack mode continuation counter) is performed according to the number of additional games.

In the following step S1504, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after setting the bonus end command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1505, in steps S1506 to S1519, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding the number of continuous games.

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. When the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1507, the number of precursor games is set in step S1508, and the precursor command is set in step S1509. The processing of steps S1507 to S1509 is the same as the processing of steps S808 to S810. After executing the process of step S1509, the end determination process is terminated.

That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the attack mode is won, after the bonus ends, the attack mode winning notification is performed through the precursor game. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will shift to an advantageous state again.

Here, if the bonus is won during any of the precursor modes before the winning notification, the precursor games are already set when the lottery process for the precursor games is performed in step S1507. In the present embodiment, even in such a case, the number of precursor games is reset. That is, regardless of the number of remaining games, the number of precursor games at the time of winning the bonus is set again after the end of the bonus. By doing this, it is possible to make the feeling of excitement after the bonus ends for a long time.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1506, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. When the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the winning notification of the challenge mode and the VB mode is performed through the precursor game.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. When the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1513, the attack mode addition game number addition process is performed in step S1514, and the addition command is set in step S1515. .. The processing of steps S1513 to S1515 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1515, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1512, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. When the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1517, the challenge mode number of games addition process is performed in step S1518, and the addition command is set in step S1519. .. The processes of steps S1517 to S1519 are the same as the processes of steps S820 to S822. When a negative determination is made in step S1516, or after the process of step S1519 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zones>
Next, the processing for the special zone will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. The special zone processing is the processing executed in step S712 in the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 45). As already explained, the special zone shifts to the VB mode, and during the special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added to each game.

That is, in the special zone processing, first, the result of the lottery processing this time is grasped in step S1601. In the following step S1602, the attack mode additional game number lottery process is performed. In the following step S1603, the number of games in the attack mode is added. Then, in step S1604, after setting the additional command, the processing for the special zone ends. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of additional games selected in the additional game number lottery process in step S1602 is larger than that in the additional game number lottery process in step S917.

<Processing related to notification effect on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side, various notification processes performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As various notification processes, an effect setting process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. When a new command is received, in step S1702, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a mode transition notification process (FIG. 6) in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process. There are a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, and the like in 49). In the case of these bet-time commands, the bet-time effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the process of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the first to first commands are used. There are precursor commands and addition commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 46 to 48), push order notification commands set in the push order combination process (FIG. 51), and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the process of step S1706 is executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a stop command. The stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a winning result command set in step S415 of the reel control process (FIG. 32). In addition, the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, and special zone set in the winning result correspondence process (Fig. 52). There is an end command etc. In the case of these stop commands, the stop effect setting process is executed in step S1708.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the process of step S1708 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1709, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1709, an effect based on a command from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, starting, and stopping (for example, an effect when the first reel is stopped, an effect when the second reel is stopped, and an operation of the settlement switch 59 are used. Settings for effects, etc.), settings for effects based on signals from sensors (first effect switch detection sensor, second effect switch detection sensor, etc.) connected without going through the main control device 101, settings for error notification, etc. I do.

Hereinafter, the bet-time effect setting process, the start-time effect setting process, and the stop-time effect setting process will be described. In the description of each effect setting process, it will be described with reference to the schematic views of the display effects of FIGS. 64 to 69.

<Bet production setting process>
The betting effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the bet command received this time is a bet command, and the information on the number of bets included in the bet command is a specific number bet command which is a specific number (1). Such a process is a process for determining whether the game mode to be executed is a normal game mode or a specific mode, and when it is determined that the game mode is a specific number bet command, the game mode executed this time is the specific mode. Means that. In this case, the effect setting process for the specific mode is executed in step S1802, and then the effect setting process ends. The betting effect setting process for the specific mode will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the command is not a specific number bet command and the game mode to be executed is the normal game mode, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the challenge mode start command is included, the process of setting the challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1804. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "challenge mode start", and the display mode to be shifted is easy to win the attack mode transition lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) suggesting that the mode is in the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "grab the attack mode!" With a thick male voice) is emitted.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the attack mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “attack mode confirmed”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack number one!" In a high voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1808. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "VICTORY BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" In the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

After executing any of the processes of step S1804, step S1806, and step S1808, or when a negative determination is made in step S1807, other bet-time effects are set in step S1809, and then this effect setting process is performed. To finish. In the process of step S1809, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 of the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode that shifts to one condition that the game has not been played for a predetermined time, or turning on the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Starting effect setting process>
Next, the start-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the number of bets at the start is the specific number (1). Such a process is a process for determining whether the game mode to be started is a normal game mode or a specific mode, and when it is determined that the number of bets is a specific number, the game mode executed this time is the specific mode. It means that there is. In this case, the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode is executed in step S1902, and then the effect setting process ends. The start-time effect setting process for the specific mode will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the number is not a specific number, the display mode setting process is performed in step S1903. In such processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is a normal mode, a challenge mode, an attack mode, a VB mode, or a specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is used. , The display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag are set as flags for grasping the display mode also in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side. An area is provided, the corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, the challenge mode flag is set in the setting process of the challenge mode start effect in step S1804. In step S1903, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effects are performed.

In the following step S1904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is a push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, the push order notification process is performed in step S1905. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the push order notification command is included as the start command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the result of this lottery is the first promotion replays 1 to 4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2003, the mode correspondence flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. In the case of not in the attack mode, in step S2004, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the third re-game winning is established, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S2003 that the attack mode is in progress, in step S2005, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the first re-game winning is established, and then for push order notification. End the process.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is the fall replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the first re-game winning is established, and then the push order notification process is completed. do.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not the fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notification flag indicating that the VB winning notification has been performed is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The notified flag is cleared based on the transition to the VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it is preferable that the configuration is such that the presence / absence of the notified flag is determined. If the winning notification of the VB mode has been completed, in step S2008, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are established, and then the push order notification is performed. End the processing. If the winning notification of the VB mode has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replays 1 and 2. In the case of BAR replays 1 and 2, in step S2010, the mode correspondence flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. When in the VB mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the sixth to eighth re-game winnings are established in step S2011, and then the push order notification process is terminated. do. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the lottery result this time is a bell. If the bell is won, in step S2013, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the push order in which the bell prize is established as the first small winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the push order notification process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 58), if it is determined in step S1904 that the push order combination is not won, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the specific combination is won. If the specific combination is won, the specific combination notification process is performed in step S1907. The specific combination notification process will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1906, or after executing the process of step S1905 or step S1907, the process proceeds to step S1908. In step S1908, it is determined whether or not an additional command is received as the start command this time. When the additional command is received, in step S1909, the additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the additional command is set in advance so that the additional effect is executed when the game is stopped. As the additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games as “+10”. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64. The display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 may be different depending on the number of additional games. The additional effect may be set as the start effect.

When the addition command is not received in step S1908, or after the process of step S1909 is executed, the bonus notification process is executed in step S1910, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S1911, and then the continuous effect setting process is executed. In step S1912, other start-time effects are set, and then the start-time effect setting process ends. The bonus notification process and the continuous effect setting process will be described in detail later. In the process of step S1912, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, or a process of turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted is performed.

<Production setting process when stopped>
Next, the stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the number of bets of the game ending this time is a specific number (1). Such a process is a process for determining whether the game mode of the current game is the normal game mode or the specific mode, and when it is determined that the number of bets is a specific number, the game mode of the current game is the specific mode. It means that it was. In this case, in step S2102, the stop-time effect setting process for the specific mode is executed, and then the present effect setting process ends. The stop-time effect setting process for the specific mode will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the number is not a specific number, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. When the challenge mode end command is included, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed in step S2104. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the characters "Challenge mode end" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Make more devotion!" With a thick male voice) is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the attack mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode start command is included, the process of setting the attack mode start effect is performed in step S2106. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “attack mode !! Ver.1”. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack mode start!" In a high voice of a woman) is emitted.

By the way, the display of "Ver.1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, it is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the characters "attack mode !! Ver.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a promotion effect. In addition, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.3" are displayed, and when the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.4" are displayed. The display is done.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2105, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the attack mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode end command is included, the process of setting the attack mode end effect is performed in step S2108. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 66B, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "attack mode END" and includes the current attack mode (VB mode, special zone). ) Is displayed, and the total number of payouts in this attack mode (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you" in a high-pitched female voice) is emitted.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2107, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode start command is included, the process of setting the VB mode start effect is performed in step S2110. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "777 VICTORY !!". In addition, in the VB mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" in the voices of men and women) is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2109, it is determined in step S2111 whether or not the VB mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode end command is included, the process of setting the VB mode end effect is performed in step S2112. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the character "VICTORY BONUS END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the VB mode this time. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total number of payouts in the attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of this VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, the voices of men and women "will continue") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2111, it is determined in step S2113 whether or not the special zone start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone start command is included, the process of setting the special zone start effect is performed in step S2114. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “Additional challenge !!” and a special mode in which the attack mode is likely to be added. The character suggesting that is is displayed. In addition, in the special zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "go" by the voice of a boy) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2113, it is determined in step S2115 whether or not the special zone end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone end command is included, the process of setting the special zone end effect is performed in step S2116. In the special zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64. The display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 may be different depending on the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2115, it is determined in step S2117 whether or not the bonus end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the bonus end command is included, the process of setting the bonus end effect is performed in step S2118. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during this bonus, and if the bonus has moved to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode (attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts (including VB mode, special zone, bonus). In addition, in the bonus end production, a character or the like that suggests these contents is performed according to the success or failure of the attack mode, the success or failure of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of the processes of step S2104, step S2106, step S2108, step S2110, step S2112, step S2114, step S2116 and step S2118, or after making a negative determination in step S2117, the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S2119, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As described above, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1909 in the start effect setting process.

After that, in step S2120, other stop effects are set, and then this effect setting process ends. In step S2120, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting of is controlled so as to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of these display modes, various in-game production processing is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In the present embodiment, as the effects during various games, a continuous effect and a bonus effect are provided. The continuous production is a production that expects a favorable result for the player (winning a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.), and is a game of a plurality of times (4 times in this embodiment). It is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which notification of whether or not the result was advantageous in the final game is performed. The effect during the bonus is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB, the second BB, the special first BB, or the special second BB prize.

The outline of the continuous production will be described with reference to FIG. 69.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). It shows the effect of dropping a daruma doll). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect of notifying the presence or absence of the continuation of the continuous effect is performed (the figure shows the effect that the first stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully removed. It shows that the continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect ends in the middle (for example, an effect in which the first stage daruma doll drop fails). ). The effect regarding the presence or absence of continuation of the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 69 (b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of the Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the second stage daruma doll has been successfully removed, and the continuous effect is continued. Shows).

As shown in FIG. 69 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two-stage Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the third stage daruma doll has been successfully removed, and the continuous effect is continued. Shows).

As shown in FIG. 69 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous production, a display suggesting that it is the final game of the continuous production is performed (in the figure, the one-stage Daruma dropping effect). Then, at the end of the final game, it is produced whether or not the result is advantageous for the player (the figure shows the effect that the final stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully removed).

As described above, in the continuous production, the production of the next game is set by taking over the production of the previous game, and the production of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous production (how many games there are until the end of the continuous production).

Here, in each game of continuous production, whether or not the continuous production is continued until the next game is set so that the continuation rate becomes higher as the game of continuous production progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of continuous production, the possibility of being notified of the discontinuation of continuous production is the highest, and as the game progresses, the possibility of being notified of discontinuation is low. Therefore, in the continuous production, the level of interest of the player differs greatly depending on the number of games in the continuous production of the current game, and the higher the interest is drawn as the game progresses from the start game to the end game. ..

The continuous effect setting is performed in the specific combination notification process (step S1907), the bonus notification process (step S1910), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1911) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 58). Therefore, each process will be described below in order.

<Process for bonus notification>
First, the bonus notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a bonus winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. In the case of a bonus winning game, in step S2202, a notification game lottery process for notifying the bonus winning is executed. In the notification game lottery process, the number of games after which the bonus winning is notified is determined by lottery. Specifically, 1 notification game is determined from 0 games (notified in this game) to 10 games. In the lottery of the notification game, the notification game may be different depending on the winning combination (whether or not it is a duplicate winning, if it is a duplicate winning, the type of the overlapping small winning combination, etc.). For example, if the bonus is won by overlapping strong cherries, a small number of games may be easily selected, and if the bonus is won by overlapping weak cherries, a large number of games may be easily selected.

In the following step S2203, a process of setting the number of continuous production games is performed based on the notification game determined by the process of step S2202. Specifically, in step S2203, the continuous effect game is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result notification, and is subtracted by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which continuous production of four games is performed, continuous production is started in a game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and result notification is performed in a game in which the continuous production counter is 0. More specifically, for example, when it is decided in step S2202 to notify the bonus winning after 10 games, 10 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2203. In this case, the continuous effect starts from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4. If it is decided in step S2202 to notify the bonus winning after 5 games, 5 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2203. Even in this case, the continuous production starts from the game in which the continuous production counter is 4.

If less than 4 notification games are set in step S2202, the continuous production is started from the middle. For example, if it is decided in step S2202 that the bonus winning is notified after two games, 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2203. In this case, the continuous production starts from this game, and is performed from the production of the third continuous production game shown in FIG. 69 (c).

After executing the process of step S2203, in step S2204, the continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The continuous effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201 or after executing the process of step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from this game. The bonus game corresponds to a game from the next game in which the first BB, the second BB, the special first BB or the special second BB wins, to the end of the bonus. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S2205 is the case where the first BB, the second BB, the special first BB, or the special second BB prize is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2206, the number of bonus production games is set in the bonus production counters of the various counter areas 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus mid-effect counter is a counter for executing the effect set for each game according to the progress of the bonus game, and the effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the bonus games of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the winning role is won in which 9 medals are paid out in each game, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. That is, the bonus games of the first BB and the second BB end in 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned effect counter during the bonus is a counter for grasping which game of the 24 games should be produced. Is. Then, in step S2206, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games, and the subtraction process of the bonus effect counter is performed in each game of the bonus game. After the processing of step S2206 is performed, in step S2207, the bonus medium effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The bonus during effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the bonus during effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, or after the process of step S2207 is executed, the bonus notification process ends.

<Process for notification of specific role>
Next, the specific combination notification process executed in step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command of this time. If the precursor command is not included, in step S2302, it is determined whether or not the additional command is included as the start command of this time. If the additional command is not included, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won a specific role as a result of the lottery, you have not won the lottery to shift to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or the lottery to add the number of continuous games. If the bonus is not won, the lottery process in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2304. Although it is difficult to distinguish the pseudo-precursor mode from the premonition mode in appearance, in the precursor mode, the player is notified of a favorable result (such as winning the challenge mode) based on the end of the number of precursor games. The pseudo-precursor mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player of a favorable result based on the end of the pseudo-precursor game number.

In step S2304, the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b, and the lottery for whether or not to execute the pseudo precursor mode is performed. conduct. In the pseudo-precursor mode lottery table, the probability of winning the pseudo-precursor mode lottery is set to differ depending on the type of specific winning combination. For example, a strong cherry is a pseudo-cherry rather than a weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the precursor mode is high.

In step S2305, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2304. If the game is won, the lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed in step S2306. This process corresponds to step S808 on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 out of 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the following step S2307, a process of setting the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2306 in the continuous effect counter is performed. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after the continuous production. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous effect counter in step S2307, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode becomes the one corresponding to the start of continuous effect (remaining 4 games), the continuous effect is started. It will be.

In step S2308, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating that the pseudo precursor mode is set in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed. In the following step S2309, the continuous effect flag is set. After that, the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2301 to S2303, or if a negative determination is made in step S2305, the specific combination notification process is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1911 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command received this time. If a precursor command is included, in step S2402, a process of inputting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command to the continuous effect counter is performed. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (4 games remaining), continuous production is started. In the following step S2403, the continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after the process of step S2403 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2405. Then, in step S2406, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the number of continuous effect counters corresponds to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2408, and the effect table for this precursor is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2409, the corresponding continuous effect effect data is specified from the present precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Performs the process of setting as a continuous effect of. As the production data of the continuous production specified from the production table for this precursor, if the continuous production counters are 1 to 3, the continuous production counter is the production data indicating that the continuous production is continued until the next game. If it is 0, it is the production data indicating that the continuous production of this time ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2410. In step S2410, a pseudo precursor effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2411, the corresponding continuous effect effect data is specified from the pseudo precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Performs the process of setting as a continuous effect of. As the production data of the continuous production specified from the pseudo precursor effect table, if the continuous production counters are 1 to 3, the production data indicating that the continuous production continues until the next game or the production data indicating that the continuous production does not continue is used. If the continuous production counter is 0, the production data indicates that the continuous production of this time ends with a failure.

It should be noted that the effect data specified from the pseudo precursor effect table when the continuous effect counters are 1 to 3 includes data in which continuous effect is not set. For example, when the continuous effect counters are 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect continues until the next game of FIG. 69 (a). When the production data of the first production game is set and the continuous production counter is 0, the production data of the second continuous production game indicating that the continuous production does not continue until the next game is set in FIG. 69 (b). By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the middle in a game in which the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode is 0.

After the processing of step S2409 or step S2411, it is determined in step S2412 whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0. When the continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2413. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2406 or step S2412, or after the process of step S2413 is performed, the continuous effect setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S2404 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2414. In step S2414, it is determined whether or not the bonus production flag is set. If it is set, in step S2415, the effect counter during bonus is subtracted. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the effect counter during the bonus is performed. In the following step S2416, a bonus effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2417, the production data of the corresponding bonus production is specified from the bonus production table and the bonus production counter, and the corresponding production data is acquired from the normal game production data storage area 182b. Performs the process of setting as a production during the bonus. In step S2418, it is determined whether or not the effect counter during the bonus is 0. If the bonus effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the bonus effect flag is performed in step S2419. After that, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing is performed on the main control device 101 side based on the insertion of medals as a game medium and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are When the rotation is started, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds. In the configuration in which the privilege is given, a plurality of RT states having different probabilities of replay as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state shifts when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay wins. Whether or not the corresponding replay can be won is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the notification of the operation order is performed according to the result of the lottery process. It is done by winning the lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the push order bell winning can be established and a medal can be obtained. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as the gaming state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the operation order is notified, the player presses in the RT state with the replay probability improved. It is possible to establish a forward bell prize and obtain a large number of medals.

In the above-mentioned flow of games, for example, it is difficult for a player who is not accustomed to the game to understand how the game state is changed and the display mode is changed. You may not be able to enjoy it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a specific mode is provided in which the above-mentioned flow of games can be experienced.

<Overview of specific mode>
The specific mode is set as a 1-bet game, as opposed to the normal game mode which is set as a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game. In the specific mode, it is possible to experience the playability of the normal game mode in a simulated manner without reducing the number of medals. Specifically, one game is started by inserting one medal and one card is played after each game. Is paid out, and the mode is such that there is no increase or decrease in medals. In other words, the specific mode is a mode in which all the game results are paid out equal to the number of bets. Then, it is possible to experience the transition of the gaming state (transition of the RT state) and the transition of the display mode in the above-mentioned normal game mode by each game result of equal payout. The mechanism of the specific mode will be described below.

As described above, in the 3-bet game, the downward-sloping line L4, which is a straight line, is regarded as the effective line (FIG. 9 (a)), while in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is regarded as the effective line (FIG. 9 (c)). )). In the specific mode implemented as the 1-bet game, the combination of the winning symbols is different from the normal game mode mainly implemented as the 3-bet game.

More specifically, when the lottery result in the 1-bet game is a predetermined result and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line, it is not the effective line in the 1-bet game and falls to the right. A specific symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination stops on the line L4. The specific symbol combination is set as a combination in which a prize of the specific result is established when the lottery result in the 3-bet game is a specific result. That is, when the predetermined symbol combination for which the winning of the predetermined result is established in the 1-bet game stops at the bending line L6, the specific symbol combination for which the winning of the specific result is established in the 3-bet game descends to the right. It will stop at line L4, and although the same symbol is apparently stopped at the same place in the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game, the 3-bet game will win a specific result, and the 1-bet game will win a prize. The result is a predetermined result, and the result of winning is different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a1), in the 3-bet game, the first BB is won, and the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped on the valid line. The first BB prize is established. In the 1-bet game, a special 1st BB (1st PBB) is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 1st BB, and when the special 1st BB is won, the "red 7" symbol and "red" are on the valid line. The combination of symbols is set so that the special first BB prize is established when the "7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol are stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (b1), when the combination of the symbols to be the special 1st BB winning symbol stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the 1-bet game, the downward-sloping line which is regarded as the effective line in the 3-bet game. At L4, the combination of symbols that will be the first BB prize is stopped. However, in the 1-bet game, the right-down line L4 is not an effective line, so even if the combination of symbols that will be the first BB prize is stopped at the right-down line L4 as described above, the first BB prize is not established.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a2), in the 3-bet game, the 26th small role (watermelon) is won, and the "watermelon" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol stop on the effective line. Then, the 26th small role prize is established. In the 1-bet game, the 26th small winning combination is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 26th small winning combination, and when the 26th small winning combination is won, the "watermelon" symbol and the "watermelon" are on the valid line. The combination of symbols is set so that the 26th P small winning combination is established when the symbol and the "red bell" symbol are stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), when the combination of symbols that will win the 26th P small winning combination stops at the bending line L6, which is the effective line of the 1-bet game, it falls to the right, which is the effective line in the 3-bet game. On line L4, the combination of symbols that will win the 26th small winning combination will stop. However, in the 1-bet game, the right-down line L4 is not an effective line, so even if the combination of symbols that will be the 26th small winning combination is stopped at the right-down line L4 as described above, the 26th small winning combination is not established. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the 3-bet game, the second small winning combination (bell) is won, and the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are on the valid line. By stopping, the second small winning combination is established. In the 1-bet game, a 2P small winning combination is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 2nd small winning combination, and when the 2nd small winning combination is won, a "white bell" symbol and "red" are placed on the valid line. The combination of symbols is set so that the second P small winning combination is established when the "7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol are stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (b3), when the combination of the symbols that will win the second P small winning combination stops at the bending line L6, which is the effective line of the 1-bet game, it falls to the right, which is the effective line in the 3-bet game. On line L4, the combination of symbols that will win the second small winning combination stops. However, in the 1-bet game, the right-down line L4 is not an effective line, so even if the combination of symbols that will be the second small winning combination is stopped at the right-down line L4 as described above, the second small winning combination is not established. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (a4), in the 3-bet game, the second small winning combination (bell) is won, and the "white bell", "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol stop on the valid line. As a result, the second small winning combination is not established and the so-called bell is missed. This combination of symbols is a transitional outcome. In the 1-bet game, if the 2P small winning combination is won, the 2P small winning combination will be established when the "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "red bell" symbol stop on the valid line. Without doing so, it becomes a so-called missing bell. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (b4), when the combination of the symbols that is the so-called missing bell without winning the second P small winning combination stops at the bending line L6, which is the effective line of the 1-bet game, the 3-bet game On the downward-sloping line L4, which is regarded as an effective line in the above, the combination of symbols (transitional outcome) that is a so-called missing bell without winning the second small winning combination is stopped.

As described above, in the specific mode, a winning combination different from the winning combination in the 3-bet game is established with the same outcome as the winning outcome in the 3-bet game as the normal game mode.

Here, in the 3-bet game in the normal game mode, the right-down line L4, which is a straight line, is set as an effective line, while in the specific mode, the bending line L6, which is a line where bending occurs, is set as an effective line. .. Then, it is considered that it is easier for the player to notice when the combination of symbols that wins the prize is stopped at a straight line rather than at a line where bending occurs. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b1). , Even if the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol, which is the first PBB prize, stops at the bending line L6, which is the effective line, to the right of the combination of the symbols. It is considered that the eyes go first toward the "Red 7" symbol that is stopped along the descending line L4. Moreover, the stop roll in which the "Red 7" symbol is aligned with the downward-sloping line L4 and stops is a stop roll in which the first BB prize is established in the normal game mode.

Then, from the player who is familiar with the stop result, even if the combination of the first PBB winning symbols stopped at the bending line L6 is stopped in the specific mode, it is not set as an effective line and falls to the right. It is considered that it can be judged that the first BB prize has been established by being distracted by the combination of the symbols of the first BB prize stopped at the line L4. That is, by setting the outcome in this way, when the first PBB prize is established in the specific mode, it is possible to think that the first BB prize is established instead of the first PBB prize.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), the combination of the "watermelon" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "red bell" symbol is stopped on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, in the specific mode. In the specific mode, it is easier to catch the eye if the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the downward-sloping line L4, which is not the effective line. It is possible to make people think that the 26th small role prize has been established instead of the role prize.

In addition, for the player, the winning is established when the combination of different symbols is set as the combination of the symbols for which the winning is established by aligning the same type of symbols, rather than being set as the combination of the symbols for which the winning is established. Is considered to be easy to notice. In that respect, as shown in FIG. 70 (a3), even in the normal game mode, the combination of the symbols for which the second small winning combination is established is the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the effective line. Although it is set as a combination of "red 7" symbols, at the stop roll, the same type of "bell" symbols ("white bell" symbols, "red bell" symbols) are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Then, when the second small winning combination is established, it is considered that the bell role is winning as the second small winning combination based on the symbol stopped at the upper line L1 above the right-down line L4 which is the effective line. Be done. Even in the specific mode, the combination of the symbols for which the 2nd P small winning combination is established is set as a combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol on the effective line, but the winning is At the stop roll that is established, the same type of "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1 as in the case of the second small winning combination. Then, when the second P small winning combination is established, it is considered that the bell role is determined to have won.

That is, in the present embodiment, the bent line is more easily recognized by the player than the straight line, and the winning mode in which the same type of symbols are aligned is more easily recognized by the player than the winning mode in which different symbols are combined. Is used to make the stop roll in the specific mode be judged as if it were the stop roll in the normal game mode, and the pseudo game can be reproduced as a more realistic one.

Further, the bending line L6 set as the effective line in the specific mode and the right-down line L4 set as the effective line in the normal game mode have a common symbol stop position (left reel) in the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. The upper stage of 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M) are set, and different symbol stop positions (lower stage and middle stage of the right reel 32R) are set in the right reel 32R. In this way, when associating the winning combination and the winning mode in the specific mode and the normal game mode, only the stop symbol of the right reel 32R needs to be different. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily associate the winning modes between the specific mode and the normal game mode.

Further, the effective line in the specific mode and the effective line in the normal game mode are set so that the lines L1 to L6 do not overlap. This is because if the overlapping valid lines are set, the stop result will be different between the specific mode and the normal game mode when the combination of the winning symbols is stopped in the overlapping valid lines. This is because, despite the fact that the stop rolls are standardized as described above, it is clearly understood that different roles are played by winning a prize with different stop rolls.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, the correspondence between the combination of symbols to be won in the specific mode and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described.

As a combination corresponding to the first small combination to the 32nd small combination in the normal game mode, the first P small combination to the 32nd small combination are set in the specific mode.

In the specific mode, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay symbol" on the right reel 32R. If, stops on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, the 1st P small winning combination will be won. If the 1st P small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out. The 1st P small winning combination corresponds to the 1st small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 1st P small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol stops on the upper row of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol stops on the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol stops on the lower row of the right reel 32R. The symbol stops. That is, the "bell" symbol stops at the downward-sloping line L4.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "BAR" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" on the right reel 32R. When the symbol and the player stop on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, the 2nd P small winning combination to the 17th P small winning combination are awarded. When the 2nd P small winning combination prize to the 17th P small winning combination winning is established, one medal is paid out. The 2nd P small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination correspond to the 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and the 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination is applied to the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of symbols that will win the 17P small winning combination is stopped, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol is stopped on the upper row of the left reel 32L on the right-down line L4, and the "red" symbol is stopped on the middle row of the middle reel 32M. The "bell" symbol stops, and the "red bell" symbol stops at the bottom of the right reel 32R. That is, the "bell" symbol stops at the upper line L1.

Of the 2nd P small winning combination to the 17th P small winning combination, the 2nd P small winning combination, the 3rd P small winning combination, the 6th P small winning combination, and the 7th P small winning combination have the same outcome, and the 4th P small winning combination, the 5th P small winning combination, The 8th P small win and the 9th P small win have the same roll, the 10th P small win, the 11th P small win, the 14P small win and the 15P small win have the same roll, and the 12th P small win and the 13P small win have the same roll. The combination, the 16th P small role and the 17th P small role have the same result. That is, the roles of these same outcomes are the same in the specific mode. However, in the following description, each role will be described as a different role for comparison with the normal game mode.

The 18th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage. If the 18th P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the one-bet game. The 18P small winning combination corresponds to the 18th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 18P small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 18th small winning combination is stopped.

The "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. If, stops on the valid line, the 19th P small winning combination will be won. If the 19th P small winning combination is established, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 19th small winning combination corresponds to the 19th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 19th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 19th small winning combination is stopped.

The 20th small winning combination to the 24th small winning combination correspond to the 20th small winning combination to the 24th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the 20th small winning combination to the 24th small winning combination are established, the 1-bet game Then one medal is paid out. The 20th P small winning combination and the 21st P small winning combination, and the 22nd P small winning combination and the 23rd P small winning combination are the same winning combination, and are treated as the same combination. However, for comparison with the normal game mode, each role will be described as different.

Similar to the 18P small winning combination, the 25th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage. In the case of the 18th P small winning combination prize, the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol of the right reel 32R stops in the middle stage only when the special 1st BB and the special 2nd BB PBB are won in duplicate. If you get (a combination of "2nd replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol or "white 7" symbol), but you win the 25th P small win, the right reel 32R regardless of whether you have won the PBB. The "Red 7" symbol or the "White 7" symbol can stop in the middle row. If the 25th P small winning combination is established, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 25th small winning combination corresponds to the 25th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 25th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 25th small winning combination is stopped.

When the "watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the effective line. Will be the 26th P small role prize. If the 26th P small winning combination is established, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 26th small winning combination corresponds to the 26th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 26th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 26th small winning combination is stopped.

The 27P small winning combination is a winning mode in which the so-called watermelon tempai is out of order, and when the 27th small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the one-bet game. The 27th small winning combination corresponds to the 27th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 27th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 27th small winning combination is stopped.

Left reel 32L "red bell" or "white bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "youth" symbol, right When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the reel 32R stops on the bending line L6 which is the effective line, the 28th P small winning combination is won. The 28th P small win is a stop roll that is out of the so-called double tempai. If the 28th small winning combination is successful, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 28th small winning combination corresponds to the 28th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 28th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 28th small winning combination is stopped.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the effective line, the 29th P small winning combination It will be a prize. If the 29th P small winning combination is established, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 29th small winning combination corresponds to the 29th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 29th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 29th small winning combination is stopped.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stopped on the bent line L6, which is the effective line. In that case, the 30th P small winning combination will be won. If the 30th P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 30th small winning combination corresponds to the 30th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 30th small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 30th small winning combination is stopped.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" or "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. If it stops on the bend line L6, it will be the 31st P small winning combination. If the 31st P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 31st small winning combination corresponds to the 31st small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 31st small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 31st small winning combination is stopped.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the effective line. Will be the 32nd P small role prize. If the 32nd P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 32nd small winning combination corresponds to the 32nd small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 32P small winning combination stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, it falls to the right. On the line L4, the combination of the symbols of the 32nd small winning combination is stopped.

As with the 30th to 32nd small wins, the 30th small win to the 32nd small win are the wins that can be won during the bonus.

As already explained, in the normal game mode, the first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize are given as the prizes that can be given the privilege of the re-game that allows the game of the next game to be played without inserting medals. It is set. On the other hand, as the re-game in the specific mode, a special re-game prize is set corresponding to the first re-game prize. Then, in the specific mode, the prize corresponding to the second re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize is not the re-game, but the second lip small role as a small role in which one medal is paid out when the prize is established. Winning ~ 8th Lip Small role winning is set.

That is, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "second replay" symbol stops on the bent line L6, which is the effective line, a special replay prize will be awarded. If the special re-game prize is established, the next game can be played as a re-game without inserting medals. The special re-game corresponds to the first re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the bending line L6, which is the effective line of the specific mode, has the above-mentioned special re-game winning symbol. When the combination is stopped, the combination of the symbols of the first re-game winning symbol is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4. In this case, the combination of the "replay" symbols is stopped on the middle line L2.

The effective lines are the "BAR" or "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. If it stops on the bend line L6, it will be the second lip small winning combination. If the second lip small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the one-bet game. The second lip small combination corresponds to the second re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the above-mentioned second lip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of symbols for the second re-game winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4. In this case, the combination of the "replay" symbols stops at the upward-sloping line L5.

The "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "2nd replay" symbol stops on the bending line L6, which is the effective line, the 3rd reel small winning combination will be won. If the third lip small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the one-bet game. The third lip small combination corresponds to the third re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the above-mentioned third lip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of symbols for the third re-game winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

The fourth lip small role corresponds to the fourth replay in the normal game mode. When the 4th lip small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 74 (d) to 74 (g), when the combination of the symbols that will be the 4th lip small winning combination is stopped at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, the right-down line L4 , The combination of the symbols of the 4th replay winning symbol is stopped.

The "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the effective line. Or, the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol or "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective lines. If it stops on the line L6, it will be the 5th Lip small win. If the 5th Lip Small Winning Prize is established, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The fifth lip small combination corresponds to the fifth re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIGS. 74 (h) and 75 (a), the bending line L6, which is an effective line of the specific mode, is described above. When the combination of the symbols for the 5th lip small winning combination is stopped, the combination of the symbols for the 5th re-game winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

The "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol, "youth" on the right reel 32R. If the symbol or the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bending line L6, which is the effective line, the sixth lip small winning combination will be won. If the 6th Lip Small Winning Prize is established, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The sixth lip small combination corresponds to the sixth re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the above-mentioned sixth lip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of symbols for the sixth re-game winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

When the "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the effective line. Will be the 7th Lip Small Role Winner. If the 7th Lip Small Winning Prize is established, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The 7th lip small combination corresponds to the 7th re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the 7th lip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of symbols for the 7th re-game winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

If the "1st replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the effective line, the first 8 rip small role prize. If the 8th Lip Small Winning Prize is established, one medal will be paid out in the 1-bet game. The eighth lip small combination corresponds to the eighth re-game in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 75 (d), the above-mentioned third lip small combination prize is given to the bending line L6 which is an effective line of the specific mode. When the combination of symbols to be used is stopped, the combination of symbols for the third re-game winning is stopped at the downward-sloping line L4.

Corresponding to the 1st BB prize, the 2nd BB prize, and the CB prize in the normal game mode, the 1st PBB prize (special 1st BB prize), the 2nd PBB prize (special 2nd BB prize), and the PCB prize (special CB) in the specific mode. Winning, SB winning) is provided.

The first PBB prize corresponds to the first BB prize, and as described above, the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. If, stops on the bending line L6, which is the effective line, the first PBB prize is won, and the gaming state shifts to the special bonus state as the bonus is established. Further, when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is an effective line, or on the left. If the "white bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, which is the effective line, the second PBB As a prize is awarded and the bonus is established, the gaming state shifts to the special bonus state. The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is the effective line. If this is the case, a PCB prize will be awarded, and the gaming state will shift to the special CB state as a bonus is established. In this embodiment, the PCB is set not to be won, and the PCB winning is not established.

As a stop roll corresponding to the shift roll in the normal game mode, a special shift roll is set in the specific mode. The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol stops on the bent line L6 as an effective line, or the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, "watermelon" When the symbol or the "first replay" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bend line L6, it is regarded as a special transition result. When the special transition roll is stopped, as shown in FIGS. 75 (e) and 75 (f), when the combination of the symbols to be the special shift roll is stopped at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode. , At the downward-sloping line L4, the combination of the symbols of the transition roll is stopped.

In addition, in the specific mode, a first lip small combination and an out-of-range small combination are provided as a combination that does not correspond to the combination in the normal game mode.

The "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" or "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. If it stops on a certain bend line L6, it will be the first lip small winning combination. If the first lip small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the one-bet game. As shown in FIG. 75 (g), when the combination of the symbols that will be the first lip small winning combination is stopped at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, basically, the upper line L1 is marked with "the first". The "1 replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is aligned and stopped.

Bending line L6 where the "first replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the right reel 32R are effective lines. If it stops at the top, it will be a small win. If a small winning combination is won, one medal will be paid out in the one-bet game. As shown in FIG. 75 (h), when the combination of the above-mentioned missed small winning combination symbols stops at the bending line L6 which is the effective line of the specific mode, all the symbols are aligned on the straight lines L1 to L5. It doesn't stop, and it becomes a disjointed eye.

The lottery table in the specific mode will be described with reference to FIG. 76. Here, in the specific mode, each RT state is not set as a game state as in the normal game mode, but a normal game state and a bonus state (special bonus state) are set. The lottery table of FIG. 76 is a lottery table that is referred to during the normal gaming state in the specific mode.

Incidentally, even when the game of the specific mode is performed during each RT state in the normal game mode, the lottery table for the normal game state in the specific mode can be referred to. Further, when the game of the normal game mode is performed during the normal game state in the specific mode, the lottery table for each RT state in the normal game mode can be referred to.

In the lottery table for the specific mode, 0 is set as the point value PV for each of the index values IV = 1 to 49, and the winning flag is not set at the index value IV = 1 to 49 (affirmative determination in step S305). do not). In the figure, the index values IV = 1 to 49 are omitted.

At the index value IV = 50, a small winning combination and a first small winning combination are set as winning combinations. The index value IV = 51 corresponds to the normal replay (IV = 1) in the normal game mode, and a special replay is set as the winning combination. The index values IV = 52 to 55 correspond to the first promotion replays 1 to 4 (IV = 2 to 5) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special first promotion replays 1 to 4. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st lip small role, the 3rd lip small role, the 6th lip small role to the 8th lip small role, and the out-of-order small role are set. The index values IV = 56 to 58 correspond to the fall replays 1 to 3 (IV = 6 to 8) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special fall replays 1 to 3. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st lip small role, the 2nd lip small role, the 6th lip small role to the 7th lip small role, the out-of-order small role is set. The index values IV = 59,60 correspond to the second promotion replays 1 and 2 (IV = 9, 10) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special second promotion replays 1 and 2. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st lip small combination, the 4th lip small combination, and the 5th lip small combination, an out-of-order small combination is set. The index values IV = 61, 62 correspond to BAR replays 1 and 2 (IV = 11, 12) in the normal game mode, and are referred to as special BAR replays 1 and 2. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st lip small combination, the 3rd lip small combination, the 6th lip small combination to the 8th lip small combination, the out-of-order small combination is set. The index values IV = 63 to 99 correspond to each small winning combination and bonus (IV = 13 to 49) in the normal game mode, and the corresponding winning combination is set.

When determining the winning or failing of a combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. 76, the probability of winning a special replay (probability of winning when IV = 51) is about 1 / 7.3, which is a special strong cherry. The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV = 63) is about 1/263, and the probability of winning a special weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 64) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a special watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 65) is about 1/154, and the probability of winning a special chance A (probability of winning when IV = 66) is about 252 minutes. 1. The probability of winning the special chance B (the probability of winning when IV = 67) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the special middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 68) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the special unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 69) is about 65500. It is one-third. The probability of winning the special forward push bell 1, the special forward push bell 2, the special pinch push bell 1, and the special pinch push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 70 to 73) is about 1/164, respectively. The probability of winning the special middle push bell 1, the special middle push bell 2, the special right push bell 1, and the special right push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 74 to 77) is about 1 / 16.4, respectively. be. The probability of winning the special strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 81) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the special strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 82). ) Is about 1/4680, the probability of winning the special weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 83) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning the special weak cherry duplication 2 (IV =) The probability of winning at 84) is about 1/6550. The probability of winning the special watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 85) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning the special watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 86) is It is about 1/6550. The probability of winning Special Chance A Duplicate 1, Special Chance A Duplicate 2, Special Chance B Duplicate 1, Special Chance B Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 87-90) is about 1/3280 each. be. The probability of winning the special middle bell duplication 1 and the special middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 91, 92) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning a single PBB and the second PBB (probability of winning when IV = 93, 94) is about 1/65500, respectively.

That is, in a specific mode, special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special unquestioned bell, special forward push bell 1, 2, special pinch push bell 1, 2, Special middle push bell 1, 2, special right push bell 1, 2, special strong cherry duplication 1, 2, special weak cherry duplication 1, 2, special watermelon duplication 1, 2, special chance A duplication 1, 2, special chance B duplication 1,2, special middle bell duplication 1,2, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB The probability of winning is normal replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, chance B, during the normal game state in the normal game mode. Middle bell, unquestioned bell, forward push bell 1, 2, pinch push bell 1, 2, middle push bell 1, 2, right push bell 1, 2, strong cherry duplication 1, 2, weak cherry duplication 1, 2, watermelon duplication 1 , 2, Chance A overlap 1, 2, Chance B overlap 1, 2, Middle bell overlap 1, 2, 1st BB, 2nd BB is the same as the probability of winning.

Although each of the above special combinations has the same winning probability as each combination in the normal game mode, the probabilities may not be exactly the same, but may be slightly different. In this case, it is preferable that the probabilities are such that the players cannot recognize that they have different winning probabilities.

Further, when determining the winning or failing of a combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. 76 in the specific mode, in addition to each of the above combinations, special first promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special second promotion Replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2, and one out-of-order combination (hereinafter referred to as "special push order replay") will be won. Specifically, the probability of winning the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 (probability of winning when IV = 52 to 55) is about 1/2, and the special fall replays 1 to 3 are won. The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV = 56 to 58) is about 1 / 8.2, and the probability of winning the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 (probability of winning when IV = 59,60) The probability) is about 1 / 8.2, and the probability of winning the special BAR replays 1 and 2 (probability of winning when IV = 61, 62) is about 1 / 8.2. And, the probability of winning the winning one-card combination (the probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/35.

As already explained, the PCB is not won in the particular mode. Further, in the specific mode, the probability of losing the winning combination in the normal game state is 0, and the winning combination is always won.

That is, in the specific mode of the present embodiment, each winning combination in the normal game mode and the corresponding winning combination are won with the same probability, and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination when the RT state shifts in the normal game mode (special). 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2, hereinafter collectively referred to as "special transition role") are also normal games in the specific mode. Win in the state.

As described above, all of the winning combinations of the special transition combination are set to include the out-of-order small combination. When the special transition combination is won, it depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 whether the out-of-order small combination winning or the other lip small winning combination is established.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established.

As shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, the out-of-order small winning combination and the first lip small winning combination are won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , The third lip small winning combination is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. As shown in FIG. 77 (c), when the special fall replays 1 to 3 are won, the out-of-order small winning combination, the first lip small winning combination, and the first lip small winning combination are won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. One of the two small winning combination prizes is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. In addition, if the special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the out-of-order small role prize, the 4th lip small role prize, and the 5th lip small role prize will be won. Either one is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), when the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, the out-of-order small winning combination, the first lip small winning combination, and the first rip small winning combination are won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Any of the 6 rip small winning combination to the 8th rip small winning combination is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When these special 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 and special BAR replays 1 and 2 were won, the stop switches 42 to 44 were operated in order from the left. In each case, the operation order and the winning mode are related so that the small winning combination winning is established. In other words, in the specific mode, even if these special transition combinations are won in the normal game state, as long as the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left, various lip small winning combinations are not won but small deviations. It is set so that the winning combination is established, and even if these special transition combinations are won, various small winning combination prizes will not be established unless the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is matched. In other words, even when these special transition combinations are won, if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is matched, it is possible to establish various small combination prizes.

In addition, the winning combination is set so that the winning combination includes the small winning combination in the specific mode, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the small winning combination is established or the first It is different whether or not the small role prize is established.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the winning combination is won, the small winning combination is won and the first lip is small, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. One of the winning combinations is always established, and which small winning combination is established depends on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

Even in the case of a single winning combination, the operation order and the winning mode are related so that when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated from the left, a small winning combination is established. That is, in the specific mode, in the normal game state, when the first winning combination is won, as long as the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left, the small winning combination is established and the operation order is matched. Unless, the first lip small role prize will not be established. In other words, it is possible to establish the first lip small winning combination if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is matched even when the winning combination is won.

In addition, the special push order bells (special forward push bells 1, 2, special pinch push bells 1, 2, special middle push bells 1, 2, special right push bells 1, 2) in the specific mode are the same as in the normal game mode. The operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the bell to be established are different, and the corresponding winning prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

That is, as shown in FIG. 78, for example, when the special middle push bell 1 is won, the 2nd P small winning combination or the 5th small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time. The stop information is set, the stop information is set so that the first P small winning combination is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the second P small winning combination is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Alternatively, stop information is set so that the 5th P small winning combination prize is established. Then, if the corresponding winning prize is not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the special transition result is stopped at the bending line L6.

<Game mode switching effect>
The normal game mode and the specific mode can be switched by the player operating the second effect switch 67 in a situation where the game is not performed (a situation in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped). It has become. In this case, the switching effect between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed based on the operation of the second effect switch 67.

When switching to a specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 79A, the character display of "free mode" indicating the specific mode and the specific mode being a practice mode are used as the effect when switching the specific mode. As a display for understanding, for example, a line with a balloon saying "Practice with us !!" by a girl character is displayed. In addition, in the effect at the time of switching the specific mode, a display is performed to instruct the player to return to the normal game mode by operating the second effect switch 67 again.

When switching to the normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), as the effect at the time of switching the normal game mode, the character display indicating the normal game mode and the operation of the second effect switch 67 are performed. A display is displayed to teach that the mode can be switched to a specific mode.

As described above, the display switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed by the second effect switch 67 connected to the display control device 81 on the sub side. In the slot machine 10, information is output from the main control device 101 side to the display control device 81 by various commands and the like, but information is not output from the display control device 81 side to the main control device 101. .. This is to reduce the input of information to the main control device 101, which mainly performs processing related to the interests of the player, as much as possible, thereby making it difficult to perform an act of illegally enjoying the interests. Therefore, whether or not the game mode switching effect is performed on the display control device 81 side is not specified on the main control device 101 side, and on the main control device 101 side, the lottery table and the effective line are limited to the number of bets. It only switches between. By doing so, the game different from the normal game mode and the specific mode without significantly increasing the processing load on the main control device 101 side in which the winning / failing judgment (lottery process) or the like related to the profit of the player is performed. The mode is feasible.

<Explanation of processing on the main control device 101 side when betting one bet>
The processing flow on the main control device 101 side when the number of bets is one will be described.

In the normal process (FIG. 29), after the start waiting process in step S204 is performed, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets is a specified number. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S205 is the case where it is determined that the number of bets has reached the specified number according to the gaming state, and in this slot machine 10, except when the gaming state is the bonus state. When the number of bets is 1 or 3, it is determined that the specified number has been reached. That is, in step S205, the execution of the specific mode of the 1-bet mode is permitted regardless of whether or not the switching effect is performed on the display control device 81 side.

In the mode transition notification process in step S206, as shown in FIG. 49, if the number of precursor games is not 0 (step S1101: NO), the present notification process is terminated as it is. The counting of the number of precursor games will be described later, but it is not counted when the number of bets is one. Therefore, the phenomenon that the number of precursor games in the normal game mode is subtracted during the game in the specific mode is avoided. If the number of precursor games is 0 (step S1101: YES), the output settings of the challenge mode start command, attack winning notification command, and VB mode winning notification command are set regardless of the number of bets (step S1105, step S1110). , Step S1114). Therefore, when the number of precursor games becomes 0 in the previous game played in the normal game mode, the notification is surely performed at the time of betting regardless of the number of bets in the next game. For example, in the normal game mode. If the attack mode or the like has been won, it is possible to play the game in the specific mode after recognizing it.

The bet command set in step S207 in the normal process includes information on the number of bets of the game to be started this time. That is, the information that the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated and three bets are made, the information that the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated and one bet is made, and the third credit insertion It contains any information that the switch 58 has been operated to place two bets. Since this is a one-card bet game, the bet command set in step S207 includes information that one bet has been made.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S208: YES), the effective line setting process is performed in step S209. Since this is a 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as effective lines.

In the lottery process of step S211 as shown in FIG. 30, in step S302, a lottery table (FIG. 76) for a specific mode according to the number of bets this time is acquired. Then, the process for determining whether or not the result is obtained in steps S303 to S308 is performed based on the lottery table. That is, only the lottery table used differs depending on the number of bets, and the winning / failing determination is performed by a common process regardless of the number of bets.

Incidentally, in the lottery table (FIG. 31 and the like) referred to in the normal game mode, 0 is set as the point value PV for each of the index values IV = 50 to 99. Therefore, not only is it not possible to win each combination in the normal game mode in the specific mode, but it is also set so that each special combination for the specific mode is not won in the normal game mode.

In the process of dealing with the lottery result in step S310, when one bet is made, a specific role (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B, middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1,2, weak cherry duplication 1, 2, watermelon Duplicate 1, 2, Chance A Duplicate 1, 2, Chance B Duplicate 1, 2, Middle Bell Duplicate 1, 2) and push order (1st promotion replay 1-4, fall replay 1-3, 2nd promotion replay) "Push order replay" consisting of 1, 2 and BAR replays 1 and 2, and "push order bell" consisting of forward push bells 1 and 2, pinch push bells 1 and 2, middle push bells 1 and 2, and right push bells 1 and 2. ") Will not be won. Therefore, at the time of betting one bet, none of the first specific combination processing, the second specific combination processing, the third specific combination processing, and the push order combination processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed. Further, even in the special zone processing, in the additional lottery table in the additional lottery processing in the attack mode, the number of additional games is set for the winning combination when one bet is made. Therefore, even if the processing for the special zone is performed with one bet, the number of games is not added. By the way, the number of continuous games in the special zone is not counted at the time of betting one card, so even if the game is played in a specific mode during the special zone, the number of continuous games in the special zone will not be affected. ..

In the lottery process (FIG. 30), after the lottery result correspondence process is performed, the process of setting the lottery result command is performed in step S311. Information on the current lottery result is set in the lottery result command regardless of the number of bets. Therefore, at the time of betting one card, the lottery result command includes information on any of the various special roles that are won at IV = 50 to 99 (FIG. 76).

In the normal process (FIG. 29), after the lottery process is executed, the reel control process (step S212) is performed. In the reel control process, regardless of the number of bets, a process for starting rotation (steps S401 to S402) and a process for stopping rotation (steps S403 to S412) are performed, and when all reels are stopped (step S411). : YES), the payout determination process is performed in step S413. In the payout determination process, the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning winning combination is set on the condition that the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag. At the time of betting one medal, one medal is set to be paid out as a privilege (FIGS. 71 to 73) associated with each winning combination.

In the winning result handling process, in the game number management process (FIG. 53) of step S1301, if the number of bets is 1 as a specific number in step S1401, each process (step S1402 to step S1427) is not performed. This management process ends. Therefore, at the time of betting one card, subtraction processing of the number of precursor games, subtraction processing of the number of continuation of challenge mode, subtraction processing of the number of continuation of attack mode, subtraction processing of the number of continuation of VB mode, and subtraction processing of the number of continuation of special zone are performed. No. In addition, since the 3rd to 5th re-game prizes and the 7th re-game prizes are not established when one bet is made, a negative determination is made in each of the processes of step S1302, step S1308, and step S1314, and the winning result handling process is terminated as it is. ..

In the reel control process (FIG. 32), after the winning result handling process is performed, the process of setting the winning result command is performed in step S415. Information on the current winning result is set in the winning result command regardless of the number of bets. Therefore, at the time of one bet, the 1st P small role to the 32nd P small role, the special replay, the 1st lip small role to the 8th lip small role, the 1st PBB, the 2nd PBB, the PCB, the special transition roll, the small loss Information on the winning result of any of the roles is included in this winning result command.

In the normal process (FIG. 29), in the medal payout process (step S213), one medal payout, which is a privilege at the time of one bet, is performed. In the RT state processing (FIG. 35) of step S214, since neither the transition roll nor the second to fifth re-game winnings are established at the time of one-card betting, the processing of each RT setting flag is not performed. That is, the RT state does not shift when one bet is made.

In the bonus state processing (FIG. 40) of step S215, the set number of the maximum payout number in the bonus differs depending on the winning bonus. Specifically, the special BB determined in step S612 indicates a first PBB or a second PBB, and these bonuses are bonuses that are won only when one bet is made. If it is determined in step S612 that the bonus won this time is a special BB, the number of remaining payouts is set to 24 in step S614. The reason why the maximum number of payouts differs between the first BB and the second BB and the first PBB and the second PBB will be described in detail later.

In the bonus state process, in the end determination process (FIG. 54), the presence or absence of a small winning combination is determined in step S1501 regardless of the number of bets, and the process of subtracting the current payout number from the remaining payout number (step S1502) is performed. .. During the bonus state at the time of betting one card, the 29th P small winning combination to the 31st P small winning combination are established, and one medal is paid out for each. That is, at the time of one-card bet, the increase of medals cannot be expected even in the bonus state, and the decrease of medals does not occur. Then, when the number of remaining payouts becomes 0 (step S1504: YES), the bonus end command is set (step S1505). Such processing is the same as in the case of 3-card betting.

However, since the various mode winning flags and various additional flags are not set at the time of 1st PBB, 2nd PBB winning, and during the bonus state at the time of 1 bet, the end determination process is terminated without setting the precursor command or the additional command. ..

Here, regardless of the number of bets, only one bonus can be won and carried over in each state with one opportunity, and it is set so that no other bonus will be won when one bonus is won. Has been done. More specifically, regardless of the number of bets, if any BB is won in each state, the other BB is not won. Therefore, in the situation where the 1st BB is won or the bonus state based on the 1st BB winning at the time of 3 bets, the lottery of the 2nd BB as well as the 1st BB is not performed, and the situation where the 2nd BB is won or the first In the bonus state based on the 2BB prize, the lottery of the first BB as well as the second BB is not performed. In addition, at the time of one bet, in the situation where the first PBB is won or the bonus state based on the first PBB prize, the lottery of the second PBB as well as the first PBB is not performed, and the situation where the second PBB is won or the first In the bonus state based on the 2PBB winning, the lottery of the 1st PBB as well as the 2nd PBB is not performed.

Furthermore, in the situation where the first BB or the second BB is won or the bonus state based on the first BB prize or the second BB prize at the time of three bets, even if the game is played with one bet, the first PBB or the second PBB No lottery will be held. On the contrary, in the situation where the first PBB or the second PBB is won or the bonus state based on the first PBB prize or the second PBB prize at the time of one bet, even if the game is played with three bets, the first BB or the second BB The lottery will not be held.

Therefore, in the slot machine 10, each BB is not won in duplicate, and the bonus state is not duplicated.

As described above, in the game at the time of one bet, the main control device 101 basically includes the bet command including the information that one bet has been made, and the information of the lottery result at the time of one bet. A lottery result command including, and a winning result command including information on the winning result at the time of betting one bet are output to the display control device 81. Based on each of these commands, the display control device 81 side performs a notification process for simulating the game in the normal game mode.

<Explanation of processing on the display control device 81 side when betting one sheet>
In the specific mode, the display mode in the normal game mode is simulated. Specifically, in the specific mode, each of the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, and the special zone in the normal game mode is set as a pseudo display challenge mode, a display attack mode, a display VB mode, and a display special. Experience it as a conversion zone. Each of these display modes shifts based on the lottery result and winning result at the time of one bet.

Specifically, the challenge mode for display is a special special role (special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special strong cherry duplication 1, 2, special weak cherry duplication 1, 2. Special watermelon duplication 1, 2, special chance A duplication 1, 2, special chance B duplication 1, 2, special middle bell duplication 1, 2) Transition by winning the transition lottery based on the winning.

In addition, the display attack mode can also be shifted by winning the transition lottery performed based on the above-mentioned special specific combination winning. However, the display attack mode shifts when the transition lottery is won and when the third lip small winning combination is established.

The display VB mode can be shifted by winning the transition lottery performed when the special specific combination is won during the display attack mode. However, the display VB mode shifts when the transition lottery is won and when the 4th and 5th lip small winning combination prizes are established.

In addition, the display special zone shifts when the special BAR replay is won and the 7th lip small winning combination is established during the display VB mode.

Hereinafter, the processing flow on the display control device 81 side when the number of bets is one, which enables each mode transition for these displays, will be described.

The processing at the time of single betting on the display control device 81 side is roughly divided into the betting effect setting process for the specific mode in the betting effect setting process (FIG. 57) and the specific mode processing in the start effect setting process (FIG. 58). There is a stop effect setting process for a specific mode in the start effect setting process and the stop effect setting process (FIG. 60). Each will be described below.

<Production setting process when betting for specific mode>
First, the effect setting process at the time of betting for a specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, this effect setting process is a process executed when the received bet command is a bet command corresponding to the specific number of sheets (1) (step S1801: YES).

The bet time effect setting process for the specific mode is roughly divided into a process for starting the specific mode (steps S2501 to S2506) and a process for notifying the mode transition (steps S2507 to S2521).

That is, as the process for starting the specific mode, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The specific mode flag is a flag set based on the operation of the second effect switch 67, and the CPU 181 specifies the state in which the specific mode flag is set as the specific mode. If it is not set, in step S2502, it is determined whether or not the start command has been received. The start command is a lottery result command or the like output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41.

When it is determined in step S2502 that the start command has been received, the bet command determined as the bet command corresponds to one bet, and the start lever 41 is not switched to the specific mode. This is the case when the start operation of is performed. Specifically, for example, the act of winning the first BB or the like in the normal game mode and attempting to establish the first BB prize with a single bet in the next game or later is applicable. In this case, after setting other betting effects in step S2503, the present effect setting process ends. In step S2503, for example, a process of turning off the built-in lamps of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 based on the bet operation is performed.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2504, and it is determined whether or not the second effect switch 67 as the changeover button has been operated. If the second effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2502. When the operation of the second effect switch 67 is performed, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is in progress. In the present embodiment, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not possible during these bonus states and bonus carry-over states, and if it is determined in step S2505 that these states are in progress, step S2502 is performed. return. That is, in these states, the operation of the switching button after the bet operation is invalid. If it is determined in step S2505 that these conditions are not present, the specific mode flag is set in step S2506.

When the specific mode flag is set in step S2501, or after the specific mode flag is set in step S2506, the mode transition notification process after step S2507 is performed. The mode transition notification process corresponds to the mode transition notification process (FIG. 49) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the number of display precursor games is 0. The display precursor game number indicates the number of continuous games in the pseudo precursor mode in the specific mode. The number of display precursor games is counted by the stop effect setting process for the specific mode, which will be described later, and the number of display precursor games is subtracted by 1 each time one game is exhausted.

When the number of display precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S2508 whether or not the display challenge mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The display challenge mode winning flag corresponds to the challenge mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag set through a transition lottery performed at the time of winning a special specific combination in the production setting process at the start of the specific mode. be. If the display challenge mode winning flag is set, the display challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S2509. Then, in step S2510, the display challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The display challenge mode flag corresponds to the challenge mode flag on the main control device 101 side. In step S2511, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the display challenge mode start effect is performed.

In this case, the display control device 81 acquires the image data for the challenge mode start effect from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the image data for the identification display from the identification information effect data storage area 182c of the ROM 182. To get. Then, after adding the image data for identification display to the image data for the challenge mode start effect, the image data for the display challenge mode start effect is set.

As shown in FIG. 93A, the display challenge mode start effect is substantially the same as the challenge mode start effect. The difference is that in the display challenge mode start effect, the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65 has a stamp 65a as image data for identification display called "free" indicating the specific mode, and the stamp 65a is the challenge mode. It is added so that it exists on the front side with respect to the image data of the start effect. That is, the display challenge mode start effect is for identification display acquired from the identification information effect data storage area 182c with respect to the image data for the challenge mode start effect acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b. The image data of the stamp 65a is added to the effect.

As described above, there is a difference between the display challenge mode start effect and the challenge mode start effect, that is, the presence or absence of the stamp 65a as the identification display. As a result, when the display challenge mode start effect is displayed, the player can clearly grasp that the current game mode is the specific mode. In this case, the display challenge mode start effect uses the effect data for the challenge mode start effect to create the effect data. As a result, the storage capacity can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the effect data for the display challenge mode start effect is separately stored.

Since the same applies to the creation of production data when performing other display effects, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S2512, counting of the number of continuation of the display challenge mode is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the display challenge mode is set in the display challenge mode continuation counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The display challenge mode continuation counter corresponds to the challenge mode continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the display challenge mode is the same as the initial value of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. Is set.

When it is determined in step S2508 that the display challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S2513 whether or not the display attack mode winning flag is set. The display attack mode winning flag corresponds to the attack mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag set through a transition lottery performed at the time of winning a special specific combination in the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode. be. If the display attack mode winning flag is set, the display attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S2514. Then, in step S2515, the display attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The display attack notification flag corresponds to the attack notification flag on the main control device 101 side, and it is possible to establish the third lip small winning combination by winning the display attack mode transition lottery. It is a flag to do. After that, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the display attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2516.

As shown in FIG. 92A, the display attack mode winning notification effect is substantially the same as the attack mode winning notification effect. The difference is that in the display attack mode winning notification effect, the stamp 65a is present in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the stamp 65a is present on the front side with respect to the image data of the attack mode winning notification effect. Is added to.

When it is determined in step S2513 that the display attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S2517 whether or not the display VB mode winning flag is set. The display VB mode winning flag corresponds to the VB mode winning flag on the main controller 101 side, and is a flag set through a transition lottery performed at the time of winning a special specific combination in the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode. be. If the display VB mode winning flag is set, the display VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S2518. Then, in step S2519, the display VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The display VB notification flag corresponds to the VB notification flag on the main control device 101 side, and when the display VB mode transition lottery is won, the 4th and 5th lip small winning combination prizes are awarded. It is a flag to make it feasible. After that, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2520.

As shown in FIG. 92B, the display VB mode winning notification effect is substantially the same as the VB mode winning notification effect. The difference is that in the display VB mode winning notification effect, the stamp 65a is present in the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the stamp 65a is present on the front side with respect to the image data of the VB mode winning notification effect. Is added to.

If the display precursor mode is not 0 in step S2507, or if the display VB mode winning flag is not set in step S2517, after executing any of the processes of step S2512, step S2516, and step S2520, In step S2521, after setting other betting effects, the present effect setting process ends.

<Starting effect setting process for specific mode>
Next, the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, this effect setting process is a process executed when the received start command is a lottery result command corresponding to the specific number of sheets (1) (step S1901: YES).

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set. If the specific mode flag is not set, this effect setting process ends as it is. That is, in the game at the time of one bet that is started without switching the game mode to the specific mode by the operation of the second effect switch 67, the start effect is not set.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the specific mode flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2602. The processing after step S2602 is configured as follows. Step S2602: Winning combination correspondence process for specific mode, Step S2603: Display mode setting process for specific mode, Step S2604: Bonus notification process for specific mode, Step S2605: Continuous effect setting process for specific mode, Step S2606: Other start Time production setting processing. The display mode setting process for the specific mode is the same process as the display mode setting process (step S1903) in the normal game mode, and the display mode in the current specific mode is specified based on the flags corresponding to various display modes. , The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

Hereinafter, the process for handling the winning combination for the specific mode will be described, and since the process for notifying the bonus for the specific mode and the process for setting the continuous effect for the specific mode are related to the continuous effect, etc., the process for setting the effect when the specific mode is stopped has been described. Each will be described later.

<Processing for winning combination for specific mode>
The winning combination handling process for the specific mode corresponds to the lottery result handling process (FIG. 45) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 82, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a special specific combination based on the received lottery result command. In the case of a special specific role, in step S2702, the display mode in the current specific mode is neither the display challenge mode, the display attack mode, the display VB mode, or the display special zone, and the display is normal. Determine if it is in mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the display attack mode winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the first specific combination process for the specific mode is executed in step S2704.

If it is determined in step S2702 that the mode is not the normal display mode, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the display attack mode winning flag is set, the display mode in the current specific mode is determined in step S2705. Determines whether or not is the display attack mode. In the case of the display attack mode, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the display VB mode winning flag is set. If the display VB mode winning flag is not set, the second specific combination process for the specific mode is executed in step S2707.

If it is determined in step S2705 that the mode is not the display attack mode, or if it is determined in step S2706 that the display VB mode winning flag is set, the third specific combination process for the specific mode is performed in step S2708. Run.

After executing any of the processes of step S2702, step S2707, and step S2708, in step S2709, the specific mode specific combination notification process is executed. The specific role notification process for the specific mode corresponds to the specific combination notification process in the normal game mode, and is related to continuous production, and will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the special specific combination is not won, the lottery result this time is the special push order combination (“special push order bell” based on the lottery result command received in step S2710. , And "special push order replay"). In the case of the special push order combination, the push order combination process for the specific mode is executed in step S2711.

If a negative determination is made in step S2710, or after executing the process of step S2709 or step S2711, it is determined in step S2712 whether or not the display special zone flag is set. If the display special zone flag is set, the specific mode special zone process is performed in step S2713. If a negative determination is made in step S2712, or after the process of step S2713 is executed, the true selection correspondence process ends.

<First specific combination processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the first specific combination process (FIG. 46) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 83, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, a normal time table for display attack mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 182a in step S2802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the challenge mode table for the display attack mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a in step S2803. The normal time table and the challenge mode table are the same as the table provided for the normal game mode on the main controller 101 side, and the transition winning rate of the strong cherry is replaced with the transition winning rate of the special strong cherry. , The transition winning rate of weak cherries is replaced with the transition winning rate of special weak cherries, and so on. Each special specific role) is replaced with a specific role. This also applies to tables for other specific modes.

After acquiring the display attack mode transition lottery table in step S2802 or step S2803, the display attack mode lottery process is executed in step S2804. In such a process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 183b, and the lottery is compared with the lottery table acquired in step S2802 or step S2803 to perform a lottery for shifting to the display attack mode.

In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the display attack mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2804. If the lottery for shifting to the display attack mode is won, the process of setting the display attack mode winning flag is performed in step S2806.

In the following step S2807, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2807, a lottery process for the number of precursor games for display is performed in step S2808. In step S2808, the number of precursor games for display of 1 from 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In step S2809, based on the processing result of step S2808, a process of inputting the number of display precursor games into the display precursor counters of various counter areas 183b is performed. The display precursor counter is decremented by 1 each time a 1-bet game is played.

In step S2810, a process of setting the display precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2807, or after the process of step S2810 is executed, the specific combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the lottery for transition to the display attack mode has not been won, the display challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S2811. In the display challenge mode lottery process, the display challenge mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The display challenge mode lottery table is the same as the challenge mode lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2812, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2811. If it is determined that the display challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S2813 whether or not the display challenge mode is used. In the display normal mode, in step S2814, a process of setting the display challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed.

In the following step S2815, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won, and if not, the lottery process for the number of precursor games for display is executed in step S2816, and the number of precursor games for display is executed in step S2817. Is executed in the precursor counter, the process of setting the precursor flag for display is executed in step S2818, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S2815 to S2818 correspond to steps S2807 to S2810.

If it is determined in step S2813 that the display challenge mode has been won again during the display challenge mode, the process for adding the continuation game of the display challenge mode is performed in steps S2819 to S2823. That is, in step S2819, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, the process proceeds to step S2820, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the display challenge mode is executed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games for display challenge mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the display challenge mode is the same as the table for drawing the number of additional games in the challenge mode on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2821, the number of games in the display challenge mode is added. In such a process, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S2820 to the display challenge mode continuation counter is performed. Then, in step S2822, the additional effect for display is set. The additional effect for display is almost the same as the additional effect in the normal game mode, and as the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, the stamp 65a is on the front side with respect to the display image in the additional effect in the normal game mode. Added to exist. In step S2822, only the setting of the display additional effect is performed, and the execution of the display additional effect is performed in the stop time effect setting process. This also applies to the setting process of other additional effects.

After executing the process of step S2822, the present specific combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2819, the display challenge mode addition flag is set in step S2823, and then the specific combination process ends.

<Second specific combination processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the second specific combination process (FIG. 47) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 84, in step S2901, a process of grasping the rank of the display attack mode is performed. Even in the specific mode, the display attack mode is provided with four ranks, that is, the first display attack mode to the fourth display attack mode, and the probability of transition to the display VB mode is different for each rank. Step S2901 determines which of the first display attack mode to the fourth display attack mode ranks in the current display attack mode.

In step S2902, the display VB mode lottery table according to the rank of the display attack mode grasped in step S2901 is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. The display VB mode lottery table is the same as the VB mode lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2903, the display VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S2902 and the lottery counters acquired from various counter areas 183b. Then, in step S2904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S2903 corresponds to the display VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, a process of setting the display VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is performed in step S2905. After that, in steps S2906 to S2909, a process for setting the number of precursor games for display is performed in the same manner as in steps S2807 to S2810.

If it is determined in step S2904 that the result of the display VB mode lottery process is not the display VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S2910. In step S2910, a display attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In such a process, a table for promotion lottery for display is acquired from various table storage areas 182a, and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 183b. The display promotion lottery table is the same as the promotion lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S2910 is a promotion win. If the promotion is won, in step S2912, the promotion process of the display attack mode in which the display rank flag is set corresponding to the rank of the promotion destination is performed. After that, in step S2913, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the promotion effect for display is performed. In the display promotion effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the display image in the promotion effect in the normal game mode.

If it is determined in step S2911 that the display promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S2913 is executed, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S2914 to S2920.

That is, in step S2914, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. In such an additional lottery process, a table for the display attack mode additional lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The display attack mode additional lottery table is the same as the attack mode additional lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

Then, in step S2915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has not been won, the specific combination processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S2916 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, the process proceeds to step S2917, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games for display attack mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b. The table for the number of games added in the attack mode for display is the same as the table for the number of games added in the attack mode on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2918, the number of games in the display attack mode is added. In such a process, a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S2917 to the display attack mode continuation counter is performed. Then, in step S2919, the additional effect for display is set. After executing the process of step S2919, the present specific combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2916, the display attack mode addition flag is set in step S2920, and then the specific combination process ends.

<Third specific combination processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the third specific combination process (FIG. 48) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 85, in step S3001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2914.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S3001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, the process proceeds to step S3004, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. Then, in step S3005, the number of games in the display attack mode is added, and in step S3006, the additional effect for display is set, and then the specific combination processing is ended. The processing of steps S3003 to S3006 is the same as the processing of steps S2916 to S2919.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the present specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S3003 that the bonus has been won, the display attack mode addition flag is set in step S3007, and then the specific combination process ends.

<Pushing order processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the push order combination process (FIG. 51) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 86, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is any of the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 based on the received lottery result command. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S3101 is a case where any one of the first lip small winning combination, the third lip small winning combination, and the out-of-small winning combination wins a prize depending on the operation order of the game this time. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3102, and it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set.

If the display attack notification flag is set, whether or not the display attack mode flag is set in step S3103, that is, the display attack mode, the display VB mode, and the display addition special zone. It is determined whether or not it is one of the above. When the display attack mode flag is set, in step S3104, the process for notifying the push order of the third lip small winning combination is executed. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the operation order corresponding to the third lip small winning combination is notified and produced among the first lip small winning combination, the third lip small winning combination, and the out-of-small winning combination. (Fig. 77 (b)). Also in the operation order notification effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the display image of the operation order notification effect in the normal game mode.

If it is determined in step S3103 that the display attack mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3105, and the first lip small winning combination among the first lip small winning combination, the third lip small winning combination, and the out-of-missing small winning combination is supported. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification effect of the operation order is performed (FIG. 77 (b)). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If the display attack notification flag is not set in step S3102, the main push order processing is terminated as it is without notifying the operation order. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3101 that it is not the special first promotion replays 1 to 4, it is determined in step S3104 whether or not the current lottery result is any of the special fall replays 1 to 3. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S3103 is a case where any one of the first lip small winning combination, the second lip small winning combination, and the out-of-small winning combination wins a prize depending on the operation order of the game this time. In this case, in step S3105, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set, in step S3106, the process for notifying the push order of the first lip small winning combination is executed. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the first lip small combination is performed among the first lip small combination, the second lip small combination, and the outlier small combination. (Fig. 77 (b)). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If the display attack notification flag is not set in step S3105, the main push order processing is terminated as it is without notifying the operation order. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, any one of the first lip small winning combination, the second lip small winning combination, and the out-of-small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3104 that it is not the special fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S3107 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the special second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S3107 is a case where any one of the first lip small winning combination, the fourth lip small winning combination, the fifth lip small winning combination, and the out-of-lip small winning combination wins a prize depending on the operation order of the game this time. In this case, in step S3108, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3109 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set.

When the display VB notification flag is set, the process for notifying the push order of the 4th rip small winning combination or the 5th rip small winning combination is executed in step S3110. Specifically, among the 1st lip small role, the 4th lip small role, the 5th lip small role, and the out-of-order small role, the notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the 4th lip small role or the 5th lip small role winning is performed. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to be performed (FIG. 77 (c)). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3109, it means that the display attack mode is set and the display VB mode is not won. In this case, in step S3106, the process for notifying the push order of the first small combination is executed, and then the main push order process is terminated. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S3108, the final push order processing is terminated as it is without notifying the operation order. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3107 that it is not the special second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S3111 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the special BAR replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S3111 is a case where any one of the first lip small winning combination, the sixth to eighth lip small winning combination, and the out-of-small winning combination wins, depending on the operation order of the game this time. In this case, in step S3112, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3113 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set and the display VB notification flag is set, in step S3114, the process for notification of the push order of the 6th lip small combination to the 8th lip small combination is performed. Run. Specifically, among the 1st lip small winning combination, the 6th to 8th lip small winning combination, and the out-of-longing small winning combination, the operation order corresponding to the 6th lip small winning combination to the 8th lip small winning combination is notified (FIG. 77). (D)). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3113, the process for notifying the push order of the first lip small winning combination is executed in step S3106, and then the main pushing order winning combination process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3113, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3113 that it is not the special BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S3115 whether or not the current lottery result is the special push order bell winning. If the special push order bell is won, it is determined in step S3116 whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. If the display attack mode flag is set and is currently in any of the display attack mode, the display VB mode, and the display addition special zone, the first P small winning combination is supported in step S3117. A process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order is executed (FIG. 78). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3116, the push order notification process is not performed, and the push order combination process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S3115 that the special push order bell has not been won, it is determined in step S3118 whether or not the result of the lottery this time is a winning combination. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S3118 is the case where the first lip small winning combination or the out-of-small winning combination wins depending on the operation order of the game this time. In this case, in step S3119, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. When the display attack mode flag is set, the push order notification process for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first lip small winning combination prize is executed in step S3120 (FIG. 78). After that, the final push order processing is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3119, the push order notification process is not performed, and the push order combination process is terminated as it is. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a small winning combination is established.

<Processing for specialized zones for specific modes>
This processing corresponds to the specialized zone processing (FIG. 55) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 87, the result of the lottery process this time is grasped in step S3201. In the following step S3202, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the display attack mode is performed. In the following step S3203, the number of games in the display attack mode is added. Then, in step S3204, after setting the additional effect for display, the processing for the special zone for the specific mode is completed. The processing of steps S3202 to S3204 is the same as the processing of steps S2917 to S2919. However, the number of games selected in the lottery process for the number of additional games in step S3202 is larger than that in the lottery process for the number of additional games in step S2917.

<Production setting process when stopped for specific mode>
Next, the stop-time effect setting process for the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. As described above, this effect setting process is a process executed when the received stop command is a winning result command corresponding to the specific number of sheets (1) (step S2101: YES).

The stop time effect setting process for the specific mode is composed of the game number management process for the specific mode in step S3301, the winning result corresponding process for the specific mode in step S3302, and the bonus end process for the specific mode in step S3303. Each will be described below.

<Game number management process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the game number management process (FIG. 53) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 89, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the bonus is won or the bonus state. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S3401, the number of games management process is performed after clearing the display challenge mode flag, display attack mode flag, display VB mode flag, display special zone flag, etc. in step S3402. To finish.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the number of precursor games for display is 0. If it is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games for display is performed in step S3404. When the number of display precursor games is 0 in step S3403 (when the display precursor mode is not set), or after the processing of step S3404 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is increased in steps S3405 to S3427. Performs counting processing.

That is, in step S3405, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode is set. In the case of the display challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S3406 to subtract 1 from the display challenge mode continuation counter. Then, in step S3407, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the display challenge mode flag is cleared in step S3408 and the display challenge mode end effect is performed in step S3409.

As shown in FIG. 93B, the display challenge mode end effect is substantially the same as the challenge mode end effect. In the display challenge mode end effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the challenge mode end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the mode is not the display challenge mode, it is determined in step S3410 whether or not the mode is the display attack mode. In the case of the display attack mode, the process proceeds to step S3411 to subtract 1 from the display attack mode continuation counter. Then, in step S3412, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the display attack mode flag is cleared in step S3413, and the display attack notification flag is cleared in step S3414. After that, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the attack mode end effect in step S3415.

As shown in FIG. 94B, the display attack mode end effect is substantially the same as the attack mode end effect. In the display attack mode end effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the attack mode end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65. The display of the number of games and the number of acquired games in the display attack mode will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3410 that the mode is not the display attack mode, the process proceeds to step S3416 to determine whether or not the display mode is VB mode. In the case of the display VB mode, in step S3417, it is determined whether or not the zone is a display addition special zone. If it is not a display addition special zone, a process of subtracting 1 from the display VB mode continuation counter is performed in step S3418. Then, in step S3419, it is determined whether or not the display VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the display VB mode flag is cleared in step S3420, and the display VB notification flag is cleared in step S3421. After that, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the display VB mode end effect in step S3422.

As shown in FIG. 95B, the display VB mode end effect is substantially the same as the VB mode end effect. In the display VB mode end effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the VB mode end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65. The display of the number of games and the number of acquired cards in the display VB mode will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3417 that the zone is an additional display special zone, the process proceeds to step S3423 to subtract 1 from the display special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S3424, it is determined whether or not the display special zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the special zone flag is cleared in step S3425 and the display special zone end effect is performed in step S3426. The special zone end effect for display is almost the same as the special zone end effect, and like the other display effects, the stamp 65a is on the front side with respect to the image data of the special zone end effect. Added to exist.

If a negative determination is made in step S3407, step S3412, step S3419, step S3416 or step S3424, or after executing the processes of step S3409, step S3415, step S3422 or step S3426, the process proceeds to step S3427. In step S3427, the additional notification process is executed. In such a process, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to execute the set additional display effect (step S2822, step S2919, step S3006, etc.). The additional effect for display is as described above. After executing the process of step S3427, the present management process is terminated.

<Processing for winning results for specific modes>
This process corresponds to the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 52) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 90, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the stop result of this time is whether or not the third lip small winning combination is established. If the third lip small winning combination is established, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. If the display attack mode flag is set, the display attack mode is already set, and the corresponding processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the display attack mode flag is not set, the display attack mode flag is set in step S3504. In the following step S3505, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the display attack mode start effect.

As shown in FIG. 94A, the display attack mode start effect is substantially the same as the attack mode start effect. In the display attack mode start effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the attack mode start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65.

After that, in step S3506, counting of the number of continuous display attack modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the display attack mode is set in the display attack mode continuation counter. The display attack mode continuation counter corresponds to the attack mode continuation counter on the main controller 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the display attack mode is the same as the initial value of the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Is set. After performing the process of step S3506, the corresponding process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the third lip small winning combination prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S3507. In step S3507, as a result of this suspension, it is determined whether or not the 4th and 5th lip small winning combination prizes have been established. When the 4th and 5th lip small winning combination prizes are established, it is determined in step S3508 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. When the display VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3509 whether or not the display VB mode flag is set. If the display VB mode flag is set, the display VB mode has already been set, and the corresponding processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the display VB mode flag is not set, the process of setting the display VB mode flag is performed in step S3510. After that, in step S3511, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the display VB mode start effect.

As shown in FIG. 95A, the display VB mode start effect is substantially the same as the VB mode start effect. In the display VB mode start effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the VB mode start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65.

After that, in step S3512, counting of the number of continuous display VB modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the display VB mode is set in the display VB mode continuation counter. The display VB mode continuation counter corresponds to the VB mode continuation counter on the main controller 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the display VB mode is the same as the initial value of the number of continuous games in the VB mode. Is set. After the process of step S3512 is performed, the corresponding process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3507 that the 4th and 5th rip small winning combination prizes have not been established, it is determined in step S3513 whether or not the 7th rip small winning combination winning has been established as a result of this stop. do. When the 7th lip small winning combination is established, it is determined in step S3514 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. When the display VB notification flag is set, the process of setting the display special zone flag is performed in step S3515. After that, in step S3516, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the display special zone start effect.

As shown in FIG. 96, the display special zone start effect is substantially the same as the special zone start effect. In the display special zone start effect, the stamp 65a is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the display image of the special zone start effect in the auxiliary display unit 65. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the above.

After that, in step S3517, counting of the number of continuous display special zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the display special zone continuation counter. The special zone continuation counter for display corresponds to the special zone continuation counter on the main controller 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the special zone for display is the initial number of continuous games in the special zone. The same value as the value is set. After executing the process of step S3517, the corresponding process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3513 or step S3514, the corresponding process is terminated as it is.

<Bonus end processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the end determination process (FIG. 54) on the main control device 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 91, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the bonus end command has been received. The bonus end command is a command set in step S1505 in the end determination process on the main control device 101 side. If the bonus end command has not been received, the final end process is terminated as it is.

When the bonus end command is received, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the display attack mode winning flag is set. When the display attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games for display is performed in step S3603, the number of precursor games for display is set in step S3604, and the number of precursor games for display is set in step S3605. Set the precursor flag. The processing of steps S3603 to S3605 is the same as the processing of steps S2808 to S2810. After executing the process of step S3605, the final end process is terminated.

If the display attack mode winning flag is not set in step S3602, it is determined in step S3606 whether or not the display challenge mode winning flag is set. When the display challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the display precursor mode in steps S3603 to S3605 is performed, and then the final end process is terminated. If the display challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S3606, it is determined in step S3607 whether or not the display VB mode winning flag is set. When the display VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the display precursor mode in steps S3603 to S3605 is performed, and then the final end process is terminated.

If the display VB mode winning flag is not set in step S3607, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode addition flag is set. When the display attack mode addition flag is set, the display attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S3609, the display attack mode addition game number addition process is performed in step S3610, and the display attack mode addition number processing is performed in step S3611. Set the additional effect for display. The processing of steps S3609 to S3611 is the same as the processing of steps S2917 to S2919. However, the additional display effect set in step S3611 is executed at the relevant timing. After executing the process of step S3611, the end process is terminated.

If the display attack mode addition flag is not set in step S3608, it is determined in step S3612 whether or not the display challenge mode addition flag is set. When the display challenge mode addition flag is set, the display challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S3613, the display challenge mode addition game number addition process is performed in step S3614, and the display challenge mode addition number processing is performed in step S3615. Set the additional effect for display. The processing of steps S3613 to S3615 is the same as the processing of steps S2820 to S2822. However, the additional display effect set in step S3615 is executed at the relevant timing. If a negative determination is made in step S3612, or after the process of step S3615 is executed, the end process is terminated.

<Game flow of each game mode>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal game mode implemented in the 3-bet mode or the 2-bet mode can be simulated in the 1-bet mode. Therefore, the flow and differences of each game mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100. 97 and 98 show the flow of the game in the normal game mode, and FIGS. 99 and 100 show the flow of the game in the specific mode.

In the normal game mode, when the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state, the display mode is basically the normal mode. If a specific combination is won (winning) at the timing of ta1 in this situation, a lottery for shifting the display mode to the challenge mode or the attack mode is performed. For example, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like at the timing of ta2 after passing through the precursor mode. After the attack mode winning notification effect is performed, the push order notification is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and when the push order combination is won, the push order notification for shifting the game state is sent. Will be done.

If the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won at the timing of ta3, the push order notification is executed as described above, so that the push order notification is performed so that the third re-game winning prize is established. .. As a result, the third re-game winning prize is established, and the attack mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

By the way, the state from the attack mode winning notification effect to the attack mode start effect is the state in which the attack mode is being prepared, the push order combination is notified, and the game state is changed. This is the case of the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.61 for each game played. On the other hand, when the second re-game winning is established and the attack mode is being prepared and the attack mode is changed, the push order combination is notified and the game state is changed to the second RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game, and more medals can be obtained than in the state of preparation. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to shift to the attack mode earlier after the attack mode winning notification effect is performed. On the other hand, if you want to win the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the number of medals may gradually decrease even though the transition to the attack mode has been confirmed. Therefore, after the winning notification of the attack mode is performed (more specifically, after the state of winning the attack mode), the number of continuous games in the attack mode may be added by winning the specific combination. .. Therefore, even if the transition to the attack mode is not performed easily, it is possible to fully enjoy the game during that period.

When the attack mode is started at the timing of ta3, the gaming state becomes the second RT state, and the winning probability of the push order replay becomes higher than that of the first RT state or the normal gaming state. For example, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won at the timing of ta4, the push order notification that the first re-game winning is established is performed during the attack mode. Therefore, during the attack mode, the occurrence of the event that the RT state falls due to the second re-game winning is avoided. Also, when the push order bell is won during the attack mode, the push order notification that the bell winning is established is performed. Therefore, the occurrence of the event that the transition result is stopped and the RT state falls due to the missing push order bell is also avoided.

When a specific combination is won (winning) at the timing of ta5 in the attack mode, a lottery for shifting the display mode to the VB mode and a lottery for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode are performed. For example, when the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is won, the VB mode winning notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like at the timing of ta6 through the precursor mode. After the VB mode winning notification effect is performed, the push order notification for VB mode is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, the fourth and fourth Push order notification that can establish the fifth re-game prize will be performed.

If the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 are won at the timing of ta7, the push order notification is executed as described above, so that the push order notification is established so that the 4th and 5th replay prizes are established. Is done. For example, when the fourth re-game winning is established, the VB mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

By the way, the state from the VB mode winning notification effect to the VB mode start effect is the state in which the VB mode is being prepared, the push order combination is notified, and the game state is changed. This is the case of the second RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Moreover, in the game from the VB mode winning notification effect to the VB mode start effect, the subtraction of the number of continuous games in the attack mode is stopped. Therefore, for example, if the push order notification is performed so that the fourth and fifth re-game prizes can be established, but the push order notification is not followed and the first re-game prize is established, the first re-game prize is established. There is a possibility that the game is played without starting the VB mode and reducing the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Therefore, for example, after the VB mode winning notification effect is performed, if the stop switches 42 to 44 that do not follow the push order notification are operated until the VB mode start effect is performed, a predetermined penalty is applied. May be. The predetermined penalty may be a configuration in which the number of continuous games in the attack mode is subtracted, the rank of the attack mode is demoted, or the attack mode is terminated. Further, as a configuration in which the VB mode is performed in the second RT state, a configuration in which the transition of the gaming state does not occur between the attack mode and the VB mode may be used. In this case, the VB mode can be started without passing through the 4th and 5th re-game winnings, and the difference between the execution game of the VB mode winning notification effect and the execution game of the VB mode start effect can be eliminated.

In the VB mode, since it is in the 3rd RT state, there is a possibility that the BAR replays 1 and 2 will be won. If you win the BAR Replays 1 and 2 and you win the BAR Matching Lottery, you will be able to win the 7th Replay Winning (Middle BAR Matching), and the 7th Replay Winning will be a special feature. Move to the conversion zone. The special zone continues until the number of continuous games in the special zone becomes 0, and then returns to the VB mode.

When the number of continuous games in the VB mode becomes 0 at the timing of ta8, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like performs the VB mode end effect. When the VB mode ends, the display mode shifts to the attack mode. Although the RT state is still the 3rd RT state, when the BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order notification that the 6th to 8th re-game winnings are established is not performed, so that the 3rd re-game winning is established. Possibility arises. When the third re-game winning is established at the timing of ta9, the game state shifts to the second RT state.

When the number of continuous games in the attack mode becomes 0 at the timing of ta10, the attack mode end effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. When the attack mode ends, the display mode shifts from the attack mode to the normal mode. Although the RT state is still the 2nd RT state, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won and the 2nd replay prize is established, or when the push order bell is won and the bell is missed. (When the transition roll is stopped), the gaming state shifts to the first RT state.

On the other hand, in the specific mode, the game state is not changed. Hereinafter, for example, a case where the specific mode is executed in a situation where the gaming state is the normal gaming state in the normal gaming mode will be described.

If a special specific combination is won (winning) at the timing of tb1, which is the normal display mode, a lottery for transition to the display challenge mode or the display attack mode is performed. In this case, since the stop result of the special specific role is the same as the stop result of the specific role, the player shifts to the challenge mode or the attack mode when the specific role is won in the normal game mode. You can experience the lottery in a simulated manner in a specific mode.

For example, if the special specific combination won at the timing of tb1 wins the lottery for shifting to the display attack mode, the mode shifts to the display precursor mode. When the display attack mode final notification effect is performed at the timing of tb2, the push order notification is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

If the special 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won at the timing of tb3, the push order notification is executed as described above, so that the 3rd lip small winning combination can be established. Sequential notification is performed. As a result, the third lip small winning combination is won, the display attack mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like, and the display attack mode is started.

In this case, the stop result of the third lip small winning combination that triggers the start of the attack mode for display is the same as the stop result of the third re-game prize that triggers the start of the attack mode in the normal game mode. ing. Therefore, the player can experience that the attack mode is started by the third re-game winning by winning the third lip small winning combination. Further, the display content of the attack mode start effect and the display attack mode start effect are substantially the same in appearance by the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, it is possible to experience the start of the attack mode in a simulated manner by performing the start effect.

On the other hand, there is a difference between the attack mode start effect and the display attack mode start effect, that is, the presence or absence of the stamp 65a. Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm which game mode the game is playing in, and for example, when trying to capture such a simulated experience in a photograph or the like. , The stamp 65a is inevitably reflected, and it can be an opportunity to desire an experience in the actual normal game mode instead of a simulated experience. The effect of displaying the stamp 65a is the same for other display effects.

By the way, the state from the display attack mode winning notification effect to the display attack mode start effect is the state in which the display attack mode is being prepared, and the special push order combination is notified. However, if you win the special fall replays 1 to 3, special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2, or special BAR replays 1 and 2, the push order notification will not be performed on condition that you are not in the display attack mode. A small role can be established. That is, the push order notification is performed when the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and when the special push order bell is won. On the other hand, when the display attack mode is started at the timing of tb3, for example, if the special fall replay games 1 to 3 are won at the timing of tb4, it is possible to establish the first lip small winning combination. Sequential notification is performed, and even when the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order notification that can establish the first lip small winning combination is performed. Not only that, when the display attack mode is started, the push order notification that can establish the first lip small winning combination is performed even when the winning of the first winning combination is won. Therefore, when the third lip small winning combination is established and the display attack mode is started, it is possible to experience as if the probability of winning the replay is improved.

When a special specific combination is won (winning) at the timing of tb5, a lottery for shifting to the display VB mode and a lottery for adding the number of continuous games in the display attack mode are performed. For example, when the lottery for shifting to the display VB mode is won, the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like at the timing of tb6 after the precursor mode. After the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed, the push order notification for the display VB mode is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and when the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won. Will be notified of the push order in which the 4th and 5th Lip Small Winners can be established.

If the special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 are won at the timing of tb7, the push order notification is performed so that the special 4th and 5th lip small winning combination prizes are established. For example, when the fourth lip small winning combination is established, the display VB mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

In this case, the stop result of the 4th and 5th lip small winning combination that triggers the start of the display VB mode is the stop result of the 4th and 5th re-game winning that triggers the start of the VB mode in the normal game mode. It is the same result as. Therefore, the player can experience the start of the VB mode by winning the 4th and 5th re-games in a simulated manner by winning the 4th and 5th lip small wins. Further, the VB mode start effect and the display VB mode start effect have substantially the same display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65 in appearance. Therefore, it is possible to experience the start of the VB mode in a simulated manner by performing the start effect.

In the display VB mode, if the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, and if the BAR matching lottery is won, the 7th lip small winning combination prize (middle BAR matching) can be established. Then, it will move to the special zone for display by winning the 7th Lip Small Role. The display special zone continues until the number of continuous games in the display special zone becomes 0, and then returns to the display VB mode.

When the number of continuous games in the display VB mode becomes 0 at the timing of tb8, the display VB mode end effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. When the display VB mode ends, the mode shifts to the display attack mode. However, in accordance with the transition of the RT state in the normal game mode, when the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, a push order report is performed so that the third lip small winning combination can be established. When the third lip small winning combination is established at the timing of tb9, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state in a pseudo manner (it does not actually shift).

When the number of continuous games in the display attack mode becomes 0 at the timing of tb10, the display attack mode end effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. When the display attack mode ends, the display transition from the display attack mode to the display normal mode. In the present embodiment, by shifting from the display attack mode to the display normal mode, the display attack mode flag and the display attack notification flag are cleared, and the push order notification is not performed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the transition of the pseudo RT state, the RT state shifts to the first RT state at the timing of tb10.

It should be noted that this configuration is used until the second lip small winning combination is established even after the end of the display attack mode or the special transition roll is stopped (for example, tb11) in accordance with the fall of the RT state in the normal game mode. (Until the timing) may be configured to notify the push order when a special push order combination other than the special fall replays 1 to 3 and the special push order bell is won. By doing so, it is possible to experience that the state in which the replay probability is improved continues until the RT state falls.

As described above, in the simulated game in the specific mode performed as a 1-bet game, the RT state and the like are not provided, and the normal game state until the first PBB and the second PBB are won, and the first PBB and the first PBB. A bonus state based on the 2PBB winning is set. Then, in both the normal game state and the bonus state, one medal is paid out in each game of one bet, and the number of medals does not increase or decrease. By doing so, it is possible to experience the playability in the normal game mode in the specific mode without worrying about the increase or decrease of medals.

In this case, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to insert medals (the game can be executed by inserting 0 medals), and by inserting one medal, which is the minimum number, at the time of one bet. It is possible to execute the game of. That is, the specific mode is a configuration that can be executed at least by receiving a medal loan at the game hall, and the act of simply playing the specific mode game for free is suppressed. In addition, in a game hall where medals are lent out in units of a predetermined number of medals (for example, 50 medals), after experiencing a simulated game with the minimum number of medals, the game is played in the actual normal game mode with the remaining medals. It can be a motivation to make it.

In addition, as a mode in which the number of medals does not increase or decrease, instead of realizing all of them as replaying roles, it is possible to win a role in which one payout such as various special roles (special watermelon role) is performed. As long as the number of medals is not increased or decreased, all the lottery results may be used as a replaying role, and it is considered that the operability of the specific mode is improved because the betting operation can be omitted in this way. However, if all the lottery results are used as re-games in this way, one card will be automatically inserted at the end of each game in the specific mode, and the settings for re-game will be made, and the specific mode will end. Can be difficult. In this case, for example, even if the setting for re-game is made, the setting can be canceled, or the power is turned off / on and the game mode is set again. There is a need. In that respect, as described above, since the configuration is such that one payout can be won, it is possible to switch from the specific mode to the normal game mode (the number of bets can be reset) except for the re-game combination winning game. , It is possible to add a novel game property called a specific mode to one game machine without adding a new configuration.

The medal payout rate (ball payout rate) per game differs between the normal game mode and the specific mode. Therefore, in order to make the simulated experience of the normal game mode more realistic in the specific mode, it is necessary to make the outcome, the production, the winning probability of each role, etc. common to both game modes, while the game hall. For the player, it is necessary to be able to identify in which game mode the game is being played. Therefore, by adding a stamp 65a as an identification display to each display image of the auxiliary display unit 65 in the specific mode, it is possible to easily identify that the game mode being executed is the specific mode.

Further, in this way, by displaying the identification of being in the specific mode on the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, when taking a commemorative photo of the display of the acquired number displayed in the attack mode end effect, it is simulated. It is possible to easily determine after the fact whether it is the number of acquisitions in the game experienced in the game or the number of acquisitions in the actual normal game mode.

In particular, since such identification display is performed not by the reels 32L, 32M, 32R but by the auxiliary display unit 65, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotated based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery of the winning combination is performed. The playability of the slot machine 10 itself, such as stopping each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 and determining whether or not to win a winning combination, is performed in a specific mode. The identification display does not get in the way of the experience, and the simulated experience of the normal game mode can be made more realistic. That is, for example, when the identification display is seen when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, it is reminded that the mode is a pseudo mode, and there is a possibility that the so-called eye-pressing is neglected. Therefore, as described above, by displaying the identification in a place that is difficult to see when operating the stop switches 42 to 44, even if it is a simulated experience, the game can be played with the same attention as in the normal game mode. It becomes possible to make it desired, and it becomes possible to improve the pseudo playability.

<Continuous production>
In the normal game mode, the continuous effect is an effect that starts when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode reaches a predetermined number and ends when the number of precursor games becomes 0, and is an effect that spans a predetermined number of games. Is. In the specific mode in the present embodiment, it is possible to experience continuous production during the normal game mode. For example, when the lottery for shifting to the display attack mode is won during the display normal mode, it is notified that the display attack mode has been won through the display precursor mode as described above. Then, the continuous effect is started when the number of display precursor games in the display precursor mode reaches a predetermined number, and ends when the number of display precursor games becomes 0.

Hereinafter, the process for executing the continuous effect in the specific mode will be described. The processing for executing the continuous effect includes a bonus notification process for a specific mode, a specific combination notification process for a specific mode, and a continuous effect setting process for a specific mode.

<Process for bonus notification for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the bonus notification process (FIG. 61) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 101, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a special bonus (first PBB, second PBB) winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. In the case of a special bonus winning game, in step S3702, a notification game lottery process for notifying the bonus winning is executed in the specific mode. In the notification game lottery process, a shorter number of games can be easily selected than in the notification game lottery process in the normal game mode. Specifically, 1 notification game is determined from 0 games (notified in this game) to 4 games.

In the following step S3703, a process of setting the number of continuous production games for display is performed based on the notification game determined by the process of step S3702. Specifically, in step S3703, the display continuous effect game is set in the display continuous effect counter. The display continuous effect counter corresponds to the continuous effect counter in the normal game mode, and is decremented by 1 each time the 1-bet game is executed. After executing the process of step S3703, the display continuous effect flag is set in step S3704.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701, or after the process of step S3704 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3705. In step S3705, it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to the start of the bonus game. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3705, the number of bonus production games is set in the display bonus medium effect counter in step S3706. The display bonus mid-effect counter corresponds to the bonus mid-effect counter in the normal game mode. In this embodiment, 24 is set as the maximum number of special bonus payouts. In addition, in the bonus game during the special bonus, a small winning combination is established for each game. Therefore, in the special bonus, 24 games are played as a bonus game. Therefore, in step S3706, 24 is input to the display bonus medium effect counter.

After that, in step S3707, the display bonus medium effect flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S3705, or after the process of step S3707 is executed, the present notification process ends.

<Process for notification of specific role for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the specific combination notification process (FIG. 62) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 102, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the display precursor flag is set. The display precursor flag may be set in the immediately preceding specific mode first specific combination process (FIG. 83) or the specific mode second specific combination process (FIG. 84). If the display precursor flag is not set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the display addition effect is set. The setting of the additional effect for display is performed in the first specific combination process for the specific mode (FIG. 83), the second specific combination process for the specific mode (FIG. 84), and the third specific combination process for the specific mode (FIG. 85) immediately before. Can be done. If the additional display effect is not set, it is determined in step S3803 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won a special specific role as a result of the lottery, you will be drawn to the challenge mode for display, the attack mode for display, the VB mode for display, or the number of continuous games. If the player has not won the game and the bonus has not been won, the lottery process of the display pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S3804. The display pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the pseudo precursor mode in the normal game mode.

In step S3804, whether or not to acquire the display pseudo precursor mode lottery table from the various table storage areas 182a and acquire the lottery counters from the various counter areas 183b to execute the display pseudo precursor mode. Make a lottery. The table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery for display is the same as the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S3805, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the display pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S3804. If the game is won, the lottery process for the number of games in the display pseudo precursor mode is performed in step S3806. Such a process corresponds to a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode in the normal game mode. In the following step S3807, a process is performed in which the number of pseudo precursor games for display determined in step S3806 is set in the continuous effect counter for display.

In step S3808, a process of setting a display pseudo flag indicating that the display pseudo precursor mode is set is executed. In the following step S3809, the display continuous effect flag is set. After that, the present notification process is terminated. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S3801 to S3803, or if a negative determination is made in step S3805, the present notification process is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 63) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 103, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the display precursor flag is set. When the display precursor flag is set, in step S3902, the process of inputting the number of display precursor games in the display precursor mode to the display continuous effect counter is performed. In the following step S3903, the display continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, or after the process of step S3903 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3904. In step S3904, it is determined whether or not the display continuous effect flag is set. When the display continuous effect flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the display continuous effect counter is performed in step S3905. Then, in step S3906, it is determined whether or not the display continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the number of continuous effect counters for display is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S3907 whether or not the pseudo flag for display is set. If the display pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3908, and the display main precursor effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3909, the corresponding continuous effect effect data is specified from the display main precursor effect table and the display continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b. At the same time, the effect data for the identification information is acquired from the identification information effect data storage area 182c, and the process of setting the continuous effect this time is performed.

The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the display effect table for the present sign is the same as the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the present sign in the normal game mode, and is the same as the other display effects. The stamp 65a is added so as to exist on the front side with respect to the image data of the continuous effect in the normal game mode.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the display pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, a display pseudo precursor effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3911, the corresponding continuous effect effect data is specified from the display pseudo precursor effect table and the display continuous effect counter, and the normal game effect data storage area 182b and the identification information effect data storage area are specified. The effect data is acquired from 182c, and the process of setting it as the continuous effect of this time is performed.

The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the pseudo-precursor effect table for display is the same as the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the pseudo-precursor effect table in the normal game mode, and is the same as other display effects. , The stamp 65a as an identification display is added so as to be present on the front side with respect to the image data of the continuous effect in the normal game mode.

After performing the process of step S3909 or step S3911, it is determined in step S3912 whether or not the display continuous effect counter is 0. When the display continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the display continuous effect flag and the display pseudo flag is performed in step S3913. If the display pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S3906 or step S3912, or after the process of step S3913 is performed, this setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S3904 that the continuous display effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3914. In step S3914, it is determined whether or not the display bonus medium effect flag is set. If it is set, the subtraction process of the display bonus in-effect counter is performed in step S3915. In the following step S3916, the display bonus effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3917, the effect data of the corresponding bonus effect is specified from the display bonus effect table and the display bonus effect counter, and the effect data storage area 182b for normal game and the effect data storage for identification information are stored. The effect data is acquired from the area 182c, and the process of setting it as the effect during this bonus is performed.

The effect data of the bonus effect specified from the display bonus effect table is the same as the effect data of the bonus effect specified from the bonus effect table in the normal game mode, and is the same as other display effects. , Stamp 65a is added so as to exist on the front side with respect to the image data of the effect during the bonus in the normal game mode.

In step S3918, it is determined whether or not the effect counter during the display bonus is 0. If the display bonus in-effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the display bonus in-effect flag is performed in step S3919. After that, this setting process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3914 or step S3918, the present setting process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the game in the specific mode, the display precursor mode in which the continuous effect is finally performed based on the display challenge mode winning, the display attack mode winning, and the display VB mode winning. Set. In addition, continuous production is set based on the bonus winning. In addition, when the specific combination is won, if the transition lottery of each mode is not won and the additional lottery is not won, the pseudo precursor mode for display corresponding to the pseudo precursor mode is set. Therefore, it is possible to experience in the specific mode that the specific combination or the like is won in the normal game mode and the result is notified through the precursor mode and the continuous production.

Here, a counter for grasping the execution game of the continuous production and a counter for grasping the number of games during the continuous production is provided separately for the normal game mode and the specific mode. Therefore, for example, even if the player switches to the specific mode while the continuous effect is being executed in the normal game mode, when the mode is returned to the normal game mode again, the continuous effect in the normal game mode before the switch is in progress. It is possible to resume from.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, for example, in the normal game mode, it is assumed that the mode is switched to the specific mode at the timing when the first continuous production game and the second continuous production game are exhausted. In this case, in the specific mode, the above-mentioned pseudo game can be performed regardless of the progress of the continuous production of the normal game mode up to that point and the subsequent result. Then, in the specific mode, when the pseudo display challenge mode or the like is won, the result is notified through continuous production. For example, when the mode is subsequently switched to the normal game mode, the continuous effect during digestion in the normal game mode is resumed. In this case, as a continuous production of the continuation of the digested first game and the second game, the continuous production is restarted from the third game.

By doing so, when a continuous effect occurs in the normal game mode, for example, it is predicted that the winning notification of the attack mode will be performed after that, and the winning notification will be performed in any mode in the specific mode. It is possible to make it possible to make a continuous production of the normal game mode after preparing in advance whether the game state will be changed and then the game state will be changed.

Moreover, as described above, the continuous effect counter and the continuous effect counter for display start counting as the precursor mode and the precursor mode for display from the game before the continuous effect occurs. Therefore, for example, when a situation arises in which continuous production can occur triggered by the winning of a specific combination, it is possible to perform preparations in the specific mode as described above even before the start of continuous production. By doing so, it is not necessary to interrupt the continuous production in the middle, and the continuous production can be fully enjoyed from the beginning.

On the other hand, after the continuous production is the final game and the advantageous result or the non-advantageous result is notified, if any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated, the winning notification production is performed. (Process for mode transition notification in FIG. 49). In other words, after the above result is notified through the continuous production in the 3-bet game, the winning notification production in the 3-bet game is performed even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated to play the 1-bet game. Then, after the above result is notified through the continuous production in the 1-bet game, the winning notification production in the 1-bet game is performed even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to play the 3-bet game. This is, for example, when a continuous effect occurs during a game in the normal game mode and the continuous effect continues until the final game, and when the above-mentioned advantageous result is notified, the following This is because it is conceivable to try to establish the first BB prize or the second BB prize by betting one card in the game. That is, in such a case, if the switching of the specific mode occurs based on one bet, the first BB or the second BB winning is notified through the continuous production, and the player's feelings are high. This is because there is a possibility that the screen for practice will be displayed and the feeling will be depressed, and the effect of the continuous production will be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the number of games to be produced in each of the normal game mode and the specific mode for the effect during the bonus. The effect during the bonus will be described with reference to FIG. 105.

As shown in FIG. 105 (a), the bonus medium effect in the normal game mode and the bonus medium effect in the specific mode are both effects having the same number of games continuity. Specifically, the bonus during the normal game mode is a live-action movie-style story production in which the story progresses for each game, and the story is completed in 24 games. Then, in each game, a story is assigned to each episode, and the story production of the one episode is unfolded over a predetermined period. The predetermined period is set longer than the shortest period (about 4.1 sec) required from the start of the game (operation of the start lever 41) to the completion of medal payout. In each game, if it is digested in the shortest period and the start operation of the next game is performed immediately, each story production being executed ends in the middle and the story production corresponding to the next game is started.

In the bonus state based on the first BB and the second BB in the normal game mode, the maximum number of payouts is set to 216. Then, in each game, one of the BB small and medium-sized roles 1, the BB medium-red 7-matched role, and the BB medium-sized BAR-matched role (IV = 28 to 30) is won, and any of the 1st to 32nd small roles wins. do. Regardless of which role wins, the privilege that can be obtained is 9 medals to be paid out, and the maximum number of medals to be paid out is reached in 24 games.

That is, in the normal game mode, the bonus state is set to end in 24 games, which is a predetermined number of games, and the effect during the bonus is also set to end in 24 games, which is the predetermined number of games.

On the other hand, in the bonus state (special bonus state) based on the first PBB and the second PBB in the specific game mode, the maximum number of payouts is set to 24. Then, in each game, one of the special BB small and medium-sized combination 1, the special BB medium-red 7 matching combination, and the special BB medium-sized BAR matching combination (IV = 78-80) is won, and any of the 1st P small role to the 32nd P small role. Ka will win a prize. Regardless of which role wins, one medal is paid out as a privilege to be obtained, and the maximum number of payouts is reached in 24 games.

That is, the bonus state in the specific mode is also set to end in 24 games, which is a predetermined number of games, as in the bonus state in the normal game mode. As the bonus effect in the specific mode, the same effect as the bonus effect in the normal game mode is used, and the bonus effect is common to each number of games in the bonus state. The difference is that, like the other effects, in the bonus medium effect in the specific mode, the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65 has a stamp 65a of "free" indicating the specific mode, and the stamp 65a is the normal game mode. It is added so that it exists on the front side with respect to the image data of the production during the bonus in.

Further, in the bonus production, the number of remaining payouts to be paid out during the bonus is displayed and the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed. In the normal game mode, the remaining number of payouts is 216 as described above, and in the effect during the bonus of the first game, as shown in FIG. 105 (b1), the display of the number of remaining payouts of 216 and 0 is displayed. The number of acquisitions is displayed. Then, in the production during the bonus of the second game, the display of the number of remaining payouts is reduced to 207 and the display of the number of acquisitions is increased to 9 in correspondence with the acquisition of 9 medals in the first game. .. This display is repeatedly updated in each game. For example, in the effect during the bonus of the fifth game in FIG. 105 (b2), the number of remaining payouts is displayed as 180, and the number of acquisitions is displayed as 36. Further, in the production during the bonus of the 23rd game in FIG. 105 (b3), the number of remaining payouts is displayed as 18 and the number of acquisitions is displayed as 196. Then, in the bonus mid-game production of the final game (24th game) of FIG. 105 (b4), the number of remaining payouts is displayed as 9 and the number of acquisitions is displayed as 207. When the payout is made in the final game, the number of remaining payouts becomes 0, and the bonus state ends.

Even during the bonus production in the specific mode, the number of remaining payouts paid out during the bonus is displayed and the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed. However, these displays in the specific mode are not the actual number of remaining payouts (upper limit payout number 24) or the actual number of acquisitions (upper limit acquisition number 24), but the remaining payout when replaced with the bonus state in the normal game mode. It is displayed as a number (upper limit payout number 216) or acquisition number (upper limit acquisition number 216).

For example, as shown in FIG. 105 (c1), as an effect during the bonus in the specific mode, in the first game, the number of remaining payouts of 216 is displayed and the number of acquisitions of 0 is displayed. The number of such displays is the same as that of FIG. 105 (b1), in other words, the number of remaining payouts and the number of acquisitions are displayed in a display different from the actual number of remaining payouts of 24 and the number of acquisitions of 0. .. And, in the production during the bonus of the second game, although one medal was won in the first game, nine medals are won in the normal game mode, so the display of the remaining payout number is reduced to 207. However, the display of the number of acquisitions will be increased to 9. This display is repeatedly updated in each game. For example, in the effect during the bonus of the fifth game in FIG. 105 (c2), the number of remaining payouts is displayed as 180, and the number of acquisitions is displayed as 36. The number of such displays is the same as that of FIG. 105 (b2), in other words, the number of remaining payouts and the number of acquisitions are displayed in a display different from the actual number of remaining payouts of 20 and the number of acquisitions of 4. .. Further, in the production during the bonus of the 23rd game in FIG. 105 (c3), the number of remaining payouts is displayed as 18 and the number of acquisitions is displayed as 196. The number of such displays is the same as that of FIG. 105 (b3), in other words, the number of remaining payouts and the number of acquisitions are displayed in a display different from the actual number of remaining payouts of 2 cards and the number of acquisitions of 22 cards. .. Then, in the bonus mid-game production of the final game (24th game) of FIG. 105 (c4), the number of remaining payouts is displayed as 9 and the number of acquisitions is displayed as 207. Such a display number is the same as in FIG. 105 (b4), in other words, the remaining payout number and the acquisition number are displayed in a display different from the actual remaining payout number of one sheet and the acquisition number of 23 sheets. .. When the payout is made in the final game, the number of remaining payouts becomes 0, and the bonus state ends.

As described above, by winning the first PBB and the second PBB and shifting to the special bonus, the bonus state in the normal game mode can also be simulated. Then, since the outcomes at the time of winning the first PBB and the second PBB are the same as the outcomes at the time of winning the first BB and the second BB in the normal game mode, it is necessary to shift to the bonus state for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. You can experience it in an easy-to-understand manner, and after shifting to the bonus state, the effects in the bonus state are also common, so you can enjoy the bonus in the specific mode as if it were a bonus in the normal game mode. ..

Furthermore, since the number of continuous games in the bonus state is the same and the production of each game in the bonus state is the same, data can be shared between the normal game mode and the specific mode, resulting in a large memory. The capacity can be reduced. In particular, the effect during the bonus state in the bonus state is in the form of a moving image by live action, and although the effect of increasing the attention of the bonus state is enormous, its storage capacity can be increased. In that respect, as described above, since the bonus medium effect in the specific mode is diverted from the bonus medium effect in the normal game mode, the balance between the effect and the storage capacity can be satisfactorily secured.

Not only that, the display of the remaining payout number and the acquisition number of the effect during the bonus is configured to use the display of the normal game mode instead of the display of the actual remaining payout number and the acquisition number in the specific mode. Therefore, it is possible to experience that a medal can be obtained by winning a bonus and digesting the bonus even in a specific mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the case where the first PBB or the second PBB is won during the specific mode and the first PBB or the second PBB is not won, that is, in the so-called carry-over state of the first PBB or the second PBB, the result is not correct. The lottery table used for the lottery is different. Therefore, the lottery table used for the winning / failing determination in the carry-over state will be described with reference to FIG. 106.

As shown in FIG. 106, in the carry-over state of the first PBB and the second PBB, the point values of the index values IV = 63 to 92, 95 to 99 are the same as those before the winning of the first PBB and the second PBB (FIG. 72). On the other hand, the point value of the index value IV = 50 to 62,93,94 is set to 0. In other words, when the 1st PBB and the 2nd PBB are carried over, the role of 1 out of place, special 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2 Do not win. Therefore, when the first PBB or the second PBB is carried over, it may result in a loss without winning any of the roles. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the first PBB or the second PBB cannot be won even though the first PBB or the second PBB is won. That is, even at the time of carrying over, if the playability of paying out one bet and one bet for each game remains, the bonus cannot be won by the control that prioritizes the small winning combination over the bonus winning, and the game is missed. This is because it may be forced to carry out a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game that includes the result.

When the 1st BB and the 2nd BB won in the normal game mode are carried over, the lottery table for the normal game state (the duplicated combination of BB and the point value PV of BB are 0) is referred to in the 3-bet game, and the above in the 1-bet game. The lottery table of FIG. 106 is referred to. Therefore, even if one bet is aimed at the first BB prize when the first BB or the like is carried over, the first BB prize or the like can be established without being disturbed by the payout of one card.

In addition, in the carry-over state, instead of using the lottery table provided with the above-mentioned deviation result, or in addition, in the carry-over state, the priority of drawing in the bonus prize is higher than that of the small winning combination. May be. That is, in a situation where both the bonus and the small winning combination are won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be performed so that the bonus winning is established with priority over the small winning combination winning. Even in this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to win a bonus by winning a small role. Further, the control that prioritizes the bonus winning over the small winning combination is not limited to the time when the bonus is carried over, and may be performed even in the bonus winning game or the bonus non-winning state.

<Display of the number of continuous games and the number of acquisitions>
As described above, in the bonus state in the specific mode, the number of remaining payouts and the number of acquisitions are displayed assuming that nine medals have been paid out in each game. In the present embodiment, the display of the acquired number corresponding to the normal game mode is performed not only in the bonus state but also in the display attack mode, the display VB mode, and the display addition special zone.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a counting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81. The counting process is a process for counting the number of continuous games such as the attack mode and the display attack mode and the number of acquired games, and is activated in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle).

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the count condition is satisfied. The count condition is satisfied by the start of the attack mode or the start of the display attack mode. If the count condition is satisfied, the count flags corresponding to the game modes are set in the various flag storage areas 183a in step S4002. The count flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the count condition has already been satisfied. For example, when the count condition is satisfied in the normal game mode (when the attack mode is started), the count flag is a flag. , The count flag for the normal game mode is set, and when the count condition is satisfied in the specific mode (when the display attack mode is started), the count flag for the specific mode is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, or after the process of step S4002 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, it is determined whether or not any of the count flags is set. If any of the count flags is set, the process proceeds to step S4004, and it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a start command is received from the main control device 101. When the game is started, the process proceeds to step S4005, and it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set. As described above, the specific mode flag is a flag indicating that the game mode is the specific mode, the state in which the flag is set is the specific mode, and the state in which the flag is not set is the normal game mode.

In the normal game mode, in step S4006, addition processing of game counters provided in various counter areas 183b is performed. Specifically, the game counter is added by 1. In the following step S4007, the subtraction process of the payout counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is performed. Specifically, the process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of bets (1 to 3) this time from the payout counter is performed.

When it is determined in step S4005 that the specific mode is set, in step S4008, the game counters for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b are added. Specifically, the game counter for the specific mode is added by 1. In the following step S4009, the subtraction process of the payout counter for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b is performed. Specifically, instead of the number of bets (1) this time, a value corresponding to the number of bets in the normal game mode (3 uniformly in this process) is subtracted from the payout counter for the specific mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S4004, or after executing the process of step S4007 or step S4009, the process proceeds to step S4010. In step S4010, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a winning result command is received from the main control device 101. When the game is finished, in step S4011, it is determined whether or not there was a payout in this game. In step S4011, it is determined that the replay has been paid out at the time of winning the prize.

If there is a payout, it is determined in step S4012 whether or not the specific mode flag is set. When the specific mode flag is not set and the game mode is the normal game mode, the process of grasping the number of payouts is performed in step S4013. At the time of winning the replay, the number of payouts is grasped assuming that the same number of payouts as the number of bets have been paid out. Then, in step S4014, a process of adding the current number of payouts to the payout counter is performed.

When it is determined in step S4012 that the mode is the specific mode, the process of grasping the current winning mode is performed in step S4015, and the number of payouts in the normal game mode is grasped based on the winning mode in step S4016. Perform processing. For example, as the winning mode this time, when the 1st P small winning combination (special bell) winning is established, the 1st P in the normal game mode is not one, which is the actual number of payouts based on the 1st P small winning combination winning. The number of payouts at the time of winning the first small win corresponding to the small win, which is nine, is grasped as a pseudo payout number. Further, for example, as the winning mode this time, when the 26P small winning combination (special watermelon) winning is established, the number is not one, which is the actual number of payouts based on the 26th small winning combination, but the first in the normal game mode. The number of payouts at the time of winning the 26th small win, which corresponds to the 26P small win, is grasped as a pseudo payout number.

In step S4017, a process of adding the pseudo payout number grasped in step S4016 to the payout counter for the specific mode is performed. As a result, the payout counter for the specific mode becomes a value as if the payout was received in the normal game mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S4010 or step S4011, or after the processing of step S4014 or step S4017 is executed, it is determined in step S4018 whether or not the count clear condition is satisfied. The count clear condition is satisfied by the end of the attack mode or the end of the display attack mode. If the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag corresponding to the game mode in which the count clear condition is satisfied is cleared in step S4019, and the corresponding game counter and payout counter are reset. Specifically, when the attack mode ends and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the normal game mode is cleared, and the game counter and the payout counter for the normal game mode are reset to 0. When the display attack mode ends and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the specific mode is cleared and the game counter and the payout counter for the specific mode are reset to 0.

When a negative determination is made in step S4003 or step S4018, or after the process of step S4019 is executed, the present count process is terminated.

In the normal game mode, for example, in the attack mode, as an effect during the attack mode, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), in an area that does not overlap with the push order notification effect on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65. The total number of games corresponding to the value of the game counter for the normal game mode is displayed, and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the value of the payout counter is displayed. In addition, the number of remaining games in the attack mode and VB mode is displayed in the area arranged side by side with the display area of the total number of games. Further, in the normal game mode, in the attack mode end effect setting process (step S2108 in the stop effect setting process of FIG. 60) and the VB mode end effect setting process (step S2112 in the stop effect setting process of FIG. 60), The number of continuous games and the number of acquired games are displayed with reference to the game counter and the payout counter for the normal game mode described above (FIGS. 66 (b) and 67 (b)).

In the specific mode, for example, in the display attack mode, even in the effect in the display attack mode, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 is in an area that does not overlap with the push order notification effect. , The total number of games corresponding to the value of the game counter for the specific mode is displayed, and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the value of the payout counter for the specific mode is displayed. In addition, the number of remaining games in the display attack mode and the display VB mode is displayed in the area arranged side by side with the display area of the total number of games. By doing so, for example, in the display attack mode, it is possible to experience in a simulated manner how many medals can be obtained in each game.

Further, the setting process of the end effect of the display attack mode (step S3415 in the game number management process for the specific mode in FIG. 89) and the setting process of the end effect of the display VB mode (game number management process for the specific mode in FIG. 89). In step S3422), the number of continuous games and the number of acquisitions are displayed with reference to the game counter and payout counter for the specific mode (FIG. 94 (b)) and FIG. 95 (b). That is, the display of the number of acquisitions in the specific mode is not the actual number of acquisitions (acquisition of one card for each game), but the number of acquisitions in which the number of payouts corresponding to the normal game mode is simulated. On the other hand, the number of continuous games is the actual number of games. As a result, it is possible to experience in a specific mode how many games the attack mode and the like will be acquired if the attack mode continues.

<Switching between normal game mode and specific mode>
Next, as a process related to switching the game mode, a specific mode switching process for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 109. The specific mode switching process is a process of being started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 on the sub side in a situation where the game is stopped (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped). be.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not the operation of the second effect switch 67 as the changeover button has been performed. When the operation is performed, in step S4102, it is determined whether or not it is in any of the bonus states or the bonus carry-over state. In the bonus state, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a non-switchable effect in step S4103. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "mode switching NG" to notify that the normal game mode and the specific mode cannot be switched. .. After the processing of step S4103 is performed, the main switching processing is terminated as it is without performing the following mode switching processing.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is not possible to switch between the normal game mode and the specific mode in the bonus state or the carry-over state before winning, although the bonus is won. By doing so, not only the structure of the lottery table referred to at the time of carry-over, but also the switching between both modes is practically not performed, and the bonuses are duplicated and won (winning) in both game modes. The event that ends up is avoided.

If a negative determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. When the specific mode flag is not set, it means that the operation of the second effect switch 67 was performed during the normal game mode. In this case, in step S4105, the process of setting the specific mode flag is executed. Further, in step S4106, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the effect at the time of switching the specific mode. The effect at the time of switching the specific mode is as described above, and as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "free mode", and the operation of the second effect switch 67 is performed again. Will teach you that you can return to the normal game mode. After setting the effect at the time of switching to the specific mode, the game content is stored in step S4107. Specifically, various flags and counters for the normal game mode are made non-rewritable (access inaccessible), and various flags and counters for the specific mode are rewritable (accessible). Then, in step S4108, the specific mode setting process is executed. Such processing will be described in detail later.

When the specific mode flag is set in step S4104, it means that the operation of the second effect switch 67 was performed during the specific mode. In this case, in step S4109, the process of clearing the specific mode flag is executed. Further, in step S4110, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the effect at the time of switching the normal game mode. The effect at the time of switching the normal game mode is as described above, and as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "normal mode" and the second effect switch 67 again. It is taught that the specific mode can be returned by the operation.

After executing the process of step S4111, the game content is stored in step S4111. Specifically, various flags and counters for the specific mode are made non-rewritable (accessible), and various flags and counters for the normal game mode are rewritable (accessible).

If a negative determination is made in step S4101, or after executing the process of step S4108 or step S4111, the process proceeds to step S4112. In step S4112, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set. If it is set, in step S4113, it is determined whether or not the game non-execution period has elapsed by a predetermined specific period (3 minutes) or more. During the game non-execution period, bets are not set, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not rotating, and medals are not paid out. During this game non-execution period, medals are paid out. Is completed, counting is started by a predetermined timer process. Then, for example, the timer processing count is reset on condition that any of the various operation units such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, and the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated. Therefore, for example, after the medal payout of a predetermined game is completed, none of the operation units are operated, and when a specific period elapses, an affirmative determination is made in step S4113.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4113, it is determined in step S4114 whether or not the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is established. If neither is the case, the process of clearing the specific mode flag is executed in step S4115, and the normal game mode switching effect is set in the subsequent step S4116.

That is, when the game non-execution period elapses in the specific mode, the mode is forcibly switched to the normal game mode on condition that the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is not obtained. As a result, for example, if a player who has practiced a game in a specific mode ends the game as it is without switching to the normal game mode, the next seated player does not notice and plays the game in the specific mode as it is. It is suppressed.

After executing the process of step S4116, the game content storage process is executed in step S4117. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S4111. After performing the process of step S4117, the present switching process is terminated.

If the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is in step S4114, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that the bonus digestion instruction effect is performed in step S4118. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "Please digest the bonus" and notifies that the bonus in the specific mode should be digested. After performing the process of step S4118, the present switching process is terminated.

For example, if the game is ended in the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state in the specific mode and the successor player tries to play the game in the normal game mode without noticing it, the non-switchable effect can be executed. In this case, there is a risk of being mistaken for a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the above-mentioned bonus digestion instruction effect is a configuration for suppressing the occurrence of the misunderstanding.

<Specific mode setting process>
The specific mode setting process performed in step S4108 of the specific mode switching process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111.

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the switching effect period has elapsed. The switching effect period is a period for maintaining the state after performing the specific mode switching effect, and is set to, for example, about 4.1 sec (corresponding to the period required for digesting one game). As for such a period, the passage of the period from the execution timing of the effect at the time of switching the specific mode is grasped by the predetermined timer processing.

When the switching effect period has elapsed, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so as to display the specific mode setting screen in step S4202. On the specific mode setting screen, for example, the game content of the specific mode that was played last time is taken over and the game of the specific mode this time is performed, or the game content of the specific mode that was played last time is reset and the game of this specific mode is played. Let them choose whether to carry out. For example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), a button image indicating "continuation of the previous time" indicating that the game content is to be taken over, and a "reset" indicating that the game content is to be reset are displayed. The button image displayed as "Start" is alternately highlighted every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec), and a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing. When asked, the highlighted side can be selected.

After displaying the setting screen in step S4202, it is determined in step S4203 whether or not any of the above selections (selection to take over the game content or selection to reset the game content) has been made. do. If no selection is made, the process proceeds to step S4204 to determine whether or not the start operation has been performed, that is, whether or not the start command from the main control device 101 has been received. If the start command has not been received, the process returns to step S4203, and if the start command has been received, the game content is set to be taken over in step S4205, and this setting process ends. In step S4205, a process of reading various flags and various counters for a specific mode made accessible in the process of step S4108 is performed. That is, if the start lever 41 is operated without making any selection, the previous game content is automatically taken over.

When it is determined in step S4203 that any of the selections has been made, it is determined in step S4206 whether or not the selection to take over the game content has been made. If it is selected to take over, the process proceeds to step S4205 to perform the takeover setting process, and then the present setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S4206 that the selection to reset the game content has been made instead of the selection to take over the game content, the game content reset processing in the specific mode is performed in step S4207. In such a process, a process of initializing various flags and various counters for a specific mode made accessible in the process of step S4108 is performed. As a result, the game content of the specific mode is set to the state when the power is turned on (normal mode for display).

In the following step S4208, the reset screen is displayed. As the reset screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), a display challenge indicating "free mode reset" indicating that the game content of the specific mode has been reset and a display challenge as an option of the state to be started after the reset is performed. Supports "Challenge mode" option corresponding to the mode, "Attack mode" option corresponding to the display attack mode, "VB mode" option corresponding to the display VB mode, and an additional special zone for display. The option "From the specialized zone" and the option "From the beginning" corresponding to the normal mode for display are displayed. Further, on the reset screen, for example, the image of one of the options is highlighted, and the highlighted option is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

In step S4209, it is determined whether or not the selection operation of the option corresponding to the display challenge mode has been performed in the display of the above options. When the display challenge mode is selected, the process of setting the display challenge mode flag is performed in step S4210. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the display challenge mode.

In the following step S4211, a process of setting the display challenge mode start effect is performed. As a result, the player can grasp that the specific mode is started from the display challenge mode (the selection operation of the display challenge mode is effective). In the display challenge mode start effect in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b1), an image of the “decision button” and an image of the “back button” are displayed together with the display challenge mode start effect. Each button image is alternately highlighted every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

In the following step S4212, the process of starting the counting of the number of continuous games in the display challenge mode is performed.

If it is determined in step S4209 that the display challenge mode selection operation has not been performed, it is determined in step S4213 whether or not the option selection operation corresponding to the display attack mode has been performed. When the display attack mode is selected, the process of setting the display attack notification flag is performed in step S4214. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the state at the time of winning notification of the display attack mode.

In the following step S4215, a process of setting the display attack mode winning notification effect is performed. As a result, the player can grasp that the specific mode is started from the game in which the winning notification of the display attack mode is performed (the selection operation of the display attack mode is effective). In the display attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b2), an image of the "decision button" and an image of the "back button" are displayed together with the display attack mode winning notification effect. Then, each button image is alternately highlighted at predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

When it is determined in step S4213 that the display attack mode selection operation has not been performed, it is determined in step S4216 whether or not the selection operation of the option corresponding to the display VB mode has been performed. When the display VB mode is selected, in step S4217, a process of setting each flag of the display attack notification flag, the display attack mode flag, and the display VB notification flag is performed. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the state at the time of winning notification of the display VB mode.

In the following step S4218, a process of setting the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed. As a result, the player can grasp that the specific mode is started from the game in which the winning notification of the display VB mode is performed (the selection operation of the display VB mode is effective). In the display VB mode winning notification effect in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b3), an image of the "decision button" and an image of the "back button" are displayed together with the display VB mode winning notification effect. Then, each button image is alternately highlighted every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

When it is determined in step S4216 that the display VB mode selection operation has not been performed, it is determined in step S4219 whether or not the option selection operation corresponding to the display special zone has been performed. When the display special zone is selected, in step S4220, the display attack notification flag, the display attack mode flag, the display VB notification flag, the display VB mode flag, and the display special zone flag. Performs the process of setting. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the start game of the display specialized zone.

In step S4221, a process of setting a display special zone start effect is performed. As a result, the player can grasp that the specific mode is started from the start game of the display special zone (the operation of selecting the display special zone is effective). In the display special zone start effect in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b4), an image of the “decision button” and an image of the “back button” are displayed together with the display special zone start effect. Then, each button image is alternately highlighted at predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

After executing the processes of step S4212, step S4215, step S4218 or step S4222, or when a negative determination is made in step S4219, it is determined in step S4223 whether or not the determination operation has been performed. Specifically, among the images of the "decision button" and the "back button" displayed in each of the above-set production images, the predetermined button operation (at the timing when the image of the "decision button" is highlighted. For example, it is determined whether or not the operation of the first effect switch 66) has been performed. Further, in step S4223, even when the option "from the beginning" corresponding to the normal display mode is selected from the options in FIG. 113 (a), an affirmative determination is made. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4223, the present setting process is terminated, and if a negative determination is made, the process returns to step S4209.

As described above, by making it possible to set the state at the start of the specific mode, it is possible to improve the versatility in the specific mode for practice. That is, if the player can select which state he / she wants to practice (pseudo-experience) in the specific mode, he / she does not need to play the game that he / she already understands and concentrates on the state he / she wants to practice or experience. You will be able to practice or experience it.

In this case, when the display attack mode or the display VB mode is selected, the winning notification effect is not set for the start of the display attack mode (start effect) or the start of the display VB mode (start effect). Was set. As a result, it is possible to experience that the attack mode is started after the third re-game prize, through the display attack mode being started after the third lip small role prize. In addition, it is possible to experience that the VB mode is started after the 4th and 5th re-game prizes, and the display VB mode is started after the 4th and 5th lip small wins. In other words, there is a sense of discomfort that the attack mode is started without going through the 3rd re-game prize (without going through the 3rd Lip small role prize), and without going through the 4th and 5th re-game prizes (4th). , It is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort that the VB mode is started (without passing through the 5th lip small winning combination prize).

On the other hand, when the display special zone is selected, the display special zone start effect is set (the configuration starts from the start game of the display special zone). This is a mode in which the special zone for display shifts when the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, and the 7th lip small winning combination is established in the game, and the attack mode for display and the display are used. This is because the winning game and the starting game cannot be different as in the VB mode. By doing so, it is possible to start the special zone in a simulated manner without passing through the 7th re-game prize (without passing through the 7th lip small role prize). In this case, for example, at the time of the display special zone start effect, the display "It is a mode that starts from the BAR alignment" may be displayed to explain the difference between the stop roll and the start mode. ..

<Modification example 1>
In the present modification 1, the winning probability of various special combinations in the specific mode is different from the winning probability of the corresponding specific combination in the normal game mode. FIG. 114 is a lottery table in the specific mode in the first modification.

For example, the point value PV corresponding to the special specific combination with the index value IV = 63 to 77,81 to 92 is set to be 10 times the point value PV (FIG. 31 etc.) in the corresponding specific combination in the normal game mode. As a result, the winning probability of the special specific combination becomes 10 times that of the corresponding specific combination in the normal game mode. By doing so, it is possible to experience by winning a special special role that a transition lottery for challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, special zone, etc. is performed by winning a specific role, and an additional lottery is performed. Therefore, it is possible to experience the transition lottery and the addition lottery with a higher probability than the transition lottery and the addition lottery in the normal game mode are performed. In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that a transition lottery or an additional lottery will occur with a smaller number of games than in the normal game mode.

In the first modification, as shown in FIG. 114, in addition to the winning probabilities of the special specific combination, the winning probabilities of the first PBB and the second PBB are also different from the winning probabilities of the first BB and the second BB corresponding to the normal game mode. Specifically, it is configured to win with a probability of 10 times that of the normal game mode. As a result, the bonus state can be experienced with a higher probability than in the normal game mode, in other words, the possibility that the bonus winning will occur with a smaller number of games than in the normal game mode can be increased.

As described above, if the winning probability of a special specific role is increased, it is necessary to lower the winning probability of another role. In that respect, in the present modification 1, as shown in FIG. 114, the winning probabilities of the special first promotion replays 1 to 4 and the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are the corresponding first promotion replays 1 to 1 in the normal game mode. While setting the same probability as the winning probability of 4 and 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2, the winning probability of other special replays (special fall replays 1 to 3, special BAR replays 1 and 2) is set to the corresponding other replays of the normal game mode. It is lower than the probability of. This avoids the inconvenience that the display attack mode and the display VB mode are not easily started even though the display attack mode and the display VB mode transition lottery are won based on the special specific combination winning. To do.

On the other hand, regarding the special fall replays 1 to 3 and the special BAR replays 1 and 2, even if the winning probability is lowered, the display attack mode and the display VB mode are configured to end by counting the number of games, so they are ended. There is no effect on the game, and even if you do the above, inconvenience is unlikely to occur.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the configuration regarding the setting of the effect during the bonus in the specific mode is different. In the bonus state (special bonus state) in the specific mode in this modification, a 3-bet game is possible in addition to the 1-bet game.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the benefits corresponding to the 30th P small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are different depending on each betting game as the winning combination in the special bonus state. That is, when the 30th P small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination is established in the 1-bet game, one medal payout equal to the number of bets is given as a privilege, and the 30th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination is established in the 3-bet game. If the 32P small winning combination is successful, the privilege is to pay out 3 medals, which is the same as the number of bets. By doing so, even if the special bonus state is exhausted in the 3-bet game, it is possible to prevent the medal from increasing or decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 115 (b), for example, when each game in the special bonus state is played in a 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out per game, and a total of 8 games are in the special bonus state. The maximum number of payouts will be reached. This makes it possible to shorten the digestion of special bonuses that require 24 games.

FIG. 116A shows a part of the continuous effect setting process for the specific mode in the second modification.

When it is determined in step S3904 in FIG. 103 that the display continuous effect flag is not set, it is determined in step S4301 whether or not the display bonus medium effect flag is set. Such a process is the same as the process of step S3914, and if it is not set, the present setting process is terminated as it is. If the display bonus mid-effect flag is set, in step S4302, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game. If it is a 1-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, the process of subtracting 1 from the display bonus middle effect counter is performed in step S4303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4302 that the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game, in step S4304, a process of subtracting 3 from the effect counter during the display bonus is performed.

After executing the process of step S4303 or step S4304, the process proceeds to step S3916 in FIG. 103 to acquire the display bonus medium effect table, and then the bonus medium effect setting process corresponding to the value of the display bonus medium effect counter. Etc. are performed.

For example, when each game in the special bonus state is played in a 3-bet game, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), as a production during the bonus in the special bonus state performed in the 3-bet game, the first game is The production data for the first game of the bonus production is acquired, the production data for the fourth game of the bonus production is acquired for the second game, and the production data for the seventh game of the bonus production is acquired for the third game. The production data is acquired by skipping three games. By doing so, even if the number of digested games in the special bonus state is shortened, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the production content of each game and the number of digested games.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification 3, the PCB can be won during the special bonus. FIG. 117 is a lottery table in the special bonus in the present modification 3. The PCB (special CB) in this embodiment is a so-called single bonus (SB), and one game of JAC game is executed based on the PCB (SB) winning. In the JAC game, special CB small and medium-sized roles 1 to 4 with an index value IV = 96 to 97 are won with a high probability.

As shown in FIG. 117, in the special bonus in this modification, the point value PV is assigned not only to the index value IV = 78 to 80 but also to the index value IV = 95, specifically, about 4 minutes. Wins when the index value IV = 95 with a probability of 1 (special CB wins).

FIG. 116B shows a part of the end determination process in the present modification 3.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the PCB (SB) prize has been established, and if the PCB (SB) prize has been established, the process of setting the remaining payout number to 0 is performed in step S4402. When a negative determination is made in step S4401, or after the process of step S4402 is executed, the processes after step S1501 in FIG. 54 are performed. Then, when the number of remaining payouts is set to 0 in step S4402, an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, and the process for ending the bonus is performed.

That is, it is possible to reduce the number of digestion games in the special bonus state by performing the modification as in the third modification. As a result, it is possible to end the bonus state in which the number of medals does not increase or decrease at an early stage.

In the special bonus state, the probability of winning the PCB is not limited to the above, and may be higher or lower than the above. If the probability is high, the special bonus state can be terminated earlier, and if the probability is low, the deviation from the effect during the bonus in the normal game mode can be reduced.

In addition, for example, the above configuration may be combined with the modification 2 so that the PCB can be won in the 3-bet game in the special bonus state, and the PCB may not be won in the 1-bet game. When the special bonus state is digested in the 3-bet game, it can be considered that the player has made a decision to digest the special bonus state at an early stage. This is because it is considered that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort even if a divergence occurs.

In the above-mentioned end determination process, the number of remaining payouts at the time of winning the PCB (SB) may be set to 1 or more, and the bonus may end after the special CB state (the state in which one JAC game can be executed) is executed. In this case, the game in the special CB state is executed in the 2-bet mode together with the 2-bet mode in the normal game mode, and two medals are paid out based on the establishment of each winning combination in the special CB state. It is good to say. By doing so, it is possible to create a bonus state in which an increase in medals cannot be expected.

In the configuration where the bonus state is terminated after executing each game in the special CB state, for example, the number of remaining payouts at the time of winning the PCB is set to 3, and each game in the special CB state is executed in the 2-bet mode. Two medals may be paid out as a privilege based on the establishment of each winning combination in the CB state, so that one medal can be expected to increase. At the time of winning the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB, the transition to the bonus state is performed, but the medals are not paid out. Therefore, if the player shifts to the bonus state in the specific mode, one medal will be reduced. In that respect, if the bonus state is configured so that an increase of one medal can be expected as described above, it is possible to eliminate the increase or decrease of medals by deducting the decrease of one medal at the time of winning.

In addition, as a configuration in which the number of medals is increased during the bonus and the total is plus or minus zero with the decrease at the time of winning the bonus, a configuration that does not go through the PCB state may be used. The number of payouts is set to 2, and each game in the special bonus state is executed in the 1-bet mode, and the privilege based on the establishment of each winning combination in the special bonus state is set to pay out two medals. Therefore, the configuration may be such that an increase in one medal can be expected.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification 4, the specific mode is set from the demo screen. The demo screen is a screen displayed when the effect switch (first effect switch 66) provided on the slot machine 10 is operated other than during game execution. As the demo screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), it corresponds to the option of "brightness setting" corresponding to adjusting the brightness of the screen and adjusting the volume output from the speaker 64. "Volume setting" option, "Free mode setting" option corresponding to setting a specific mode, "Mobile interlocking service" option corresponding to setting using the player's mobile terminal, etc. Etc. are displayed respectively. Further, on the demo screen, for example, the image of one of the options is highlighted, and the highlighted option is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

Then, when the selection operation of the option "free mode setting" is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the free mode setting image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the free mode setting image, the option of whether or not to reset the game history of the specific mode is displayed as an image of the "YES button" corresponding to the reset and an image of the "NO button" not corresponding to the reset, respectively. The highlighting of the button image is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

For example, when the image selection operation of the "YES button" is performed, the specific mode setting screen of FIG. 112 is displayed. The specific mode setting screen and the subsequent reset operation are as described above.

On the other hand, when the image selection operation of the "NO button" is performed, the configuration is such that the demo screen of FIG. 118 (a) is returned.

By doing so, the operability of the specific mode setting is improved. That is, it is possible to set the specific mode only by operating the first effect switch 66 without going through the operation of the second effect switch 67. As a result, for example, even if the second effect switch 67 is not always operable and can be operated based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, it is possible to set a specific mode (initialization, etc.). Become.

<Modification 5>
In the present modification 5, the specific mode is set by the mobile interlocking service on the demo screen (FIG. 118 (a)) shown in the modification 4.

When the option "mobile interlocking service" is selected on the demo screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the mobile interlocking service image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the mobile interlocking service image, the choice of whether to use the service in the normal game mode or the service in the specific mode is selected from the "normal mode" image corresponding to the normal game mode and the specific mode. Images of "specific mode" that do not correspond to each other are displayed, and highlighting of each image is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

Information input / output processing related to the mobile interlocking service will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120. The information input / output process is started by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1.49 msec) when the game is stopped.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the mobile interlocking service is selected on the demo screen. If the mobile interlocking service is not selected, this input / output process is terminated as it is. When the mobile interlocking service is selected, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled in step S4402 so as to display the mobile interlocking service image (FIG. 119 (a)).

In step S4403, it is determined whether or not the selection operation of the option for the normal game mode has been performed in the mobile interlocking service image. When the selection operation of the option for the normal game mode is performed, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled in step S4404 so as to display the game information for the normal game mode. In the display of the game information for the normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (b1), the game history in the normal game mode (bonus winning number, challenge mode winning number, attack mode winning number, VB mode winning number, special The number of winnings in the conversion zone, the number of additions, the maximum number of additional games, the maximum number of continuous games in attack mode, the maximum number of acquisitions in attack mode, etc.) are displayed by a QR code (registered trademark) or the like so that they can be acquired by a mobile terminal or the like. Further, in displaying the game information for the normal game mode, for example, a password input unit may be provided so that the password can be input by the operation of the player. The password is set according to, for example, the game history, and by inputting the password, the player can continue the previous game on the game machine.

In step S4405, it is determined whether or not the information input by the password or the like has been performed. When the information is input, in step S4406, as the process of updating the game information for the normal game mode, the process of rewriting the currently stored game history information into the game history according to the entered password. I do. The password and the game history are stored in the ROM 182 of the display control device 81 in a one-to-one correspondence. If a negative determination is made in step S4405, or after the process of step S4406 is executed, this input / output process ends.

If it is determined in step S4403 that the selection operation of the option for the normal game mode has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, it is determined whether or not the selection operation of the option for the specific mode has been performed. When the selection operation of the option for the specific mode is performed, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled in step S4408 so as to display the game information for the specific mode. In the display of the game information for the specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 119 (b2), the game history in the specific mode (number of special bonus wins, number of display challenge mode wins, number of display attack mode wins, display VB). QR so that the number of mode wins, the number of special zone wins for display, the number of additions, the maximum number of additional games, the maximum number of continuous games in the display attack mode, the maximum number of acquired attack modes for display, etc.) can be acquired on a mobile terminal or the like. Display by code (registered trademark), etc. Further, in the display of the game information for the specific mode, a password input unit is provided as in the display of the game information for the normal game mode, and the password can be input by the operation of the player.

In step S4409, it is determined whether or not the information input by the password or the like has been performed. When the information is input, in step S4410, as the game information update process for the specific mode, the process of rewriting the currently stored game history information to the game history according to the entered password is performed. conduct. If a negative determination is made in step S4407 or step S4409, or after the process of step S4410 is executed, this input / output process ends.

As described above, by performing the present modification 5, for example, when the practice in the specific mode is stopped in the middle, the game table, the game hall, the game day, etc. are changed, and the practice is restarted from the middle again. It becomes possible to do.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth modification, in the normal game mode, when the number of continuous games in the second RT state or higher as the game state reaches a predetermined number of games, the game state is forcibly set to the normal game state. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous section in the present modification 6. The advantageous section indicates a section of the game in which the game state is the second RT state or the third RT state. The advantageous section processing is started by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1.49 msec).

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the transition to the second RT state has occurred. Such a determination can be determined by whether or not the third re-game winning is established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the number of games measurement flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S4502.

When a negative determination is made in step S4501, or after the process of step S4502 is executed, it is determined in step S4503 whether or not the game number measurement flag is set. If it is not set, the processing for this advantageous section is terminated as it is. If it is set, the game number measurement process is executed in step S4504. In the game number measurement process, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of one game, and if it is the start timing, a process of adding 1 to the game number counter for the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e is performed.

In the following step S4505, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) based on the result of the measurement processing of the number of games. If the upper limit game has not been reached, the processing for this advantageous section is terminated. When the maximum number of games has been reached, the process of clearing the flags and counters for each display mode is performed in step S4506. By such processing, the display mode shifts to the normal mode. As a result, the push order notification is no longer performed, and the fall replay prize is established, so that the game state also shifts from the RT state to the normal game state. The RT setting flag may be cleared in step S4506 to forcibly shift the gaming state to the normal gaming state. After that, in step S4507, the forced termination command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the processing for this advantageous section is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the forced termination command performs a process (a process of resetting various flags and various counters) corresponding to the forced display mode such as the attack mode being set to the normal mode, and is forced to perform the process. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify that the reset has been made to. As a notification that the reset has been forcibly performed, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the content "The end upper limit has been reached. The normal game state is entered."

In this case, in the game number measurement process (step S4505), the addition process of the game number counter for the advantageous section is performed regardless of the bet number. Then, for example, when the practice is performed in the specific mode during the advantageous section, the number of games that can be played in the advantageous section is reduced by the number of games for which the specific mode is executed.

Therefore, for example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 122A, in the specific mode switching process in the present modification 6, when it is determined in step S4601 that the operation of the second effect switch 67 as the switching button is performed. , Step S4602 determines whether or not the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is established. The processing of step S4601 and step S4602 is the same as the processing of step S4101 and step S4102.

If it is determined in step S4602 that the bonus is in progress, the non-switchable effect is set in step S4603, and then the specific mode switching process ends. The process of step S4603 is the same as the process of step S4103.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4602 that the bonus is not in progress, in step S4604, it is determined whether or not the player is in the attack mode, the VB mode, or the special zone in the normal game mode. That is, it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section. If it is determined in step S4604 that the section is in an advantageous section, the non-switchable effect is set in step S4603, and then the specific mode switching process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S4604, the process proceeds to step S4104. The processing after step S4104 is as described above.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the number of games that can be played in the advantageous section in the normal game mode from being reduced by executing the specific mode during the advantageous section.

<Modification 7>
In the present modification 7, in the above modification 6, it is possible to switch to the specific mode during the advantageous section, and at the same time, a warning is given at the time of switching.

For example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 122 (b), the processes of steps S4701 to S4704 are performed in the same manner as in steps S4601 to S4604. If it is determined in step S4704 that the player is in the attack mode, the VB mode, or the special zone, the procedure proceeds to step S4705, unlike the above step S4604, so that an alert effect is performed. It controls the display unit 65 and the like.

As a warning effect, as shown in FIG. 123, along with the indication "in the advantageous section" indicating that the advantageous section is in progress, "three sheets because the advantageous section is reduced" to recommend that the game is performed in the 3-bet game. Please return to your bet. " If a negative determination is made in step S4704 or after the process of step S4705 is performed, the process proceeds to step S4104.

That is, the present modification 7 has a configuration in which the game mode can be switched even during the advantageous section and is left to the judgment of the player.

For example, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is not only the digestion of the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) but also the acquisition of the upper limit acquisition number (for example, 3000) of medals, and which continuation upper limit corresponds to the forced termination. If the forced termination effect is different depending on the situation, it is considered that some players desire to be forced to terminate by exhausting the maximum number of games instead of acquiring the maximum number of acquired games. Therefore, as described above, if the specific mode can be executed by the player's will even during the advantageous section, it will be forcibly terminated by the digestion of the maximum number of games based on the player's decision. It can be possible.

For example, when the game is forcibly terminated due to the exhaustion of the upper limit number of games, the setting value of the slot machine 10 is suggested as the forced termination effect. In this case, after winning the attack mode in the normal game mode, the game mode is switched from the normal game mode to the specific mode, the game is executed up to the maximum number of games, and then the normal game mode is switched to the attack mode. Although the number of medals won in the game is reduced, the number of medals does not decrease during the specific mode, so it is possible to execute the forced termination effect without reducing the number of medals. By doing so, the game property of steadily acquiring medals in the attack mode and the game property of executing the forced termination effect while selecting that the attack mode is not added or the like are played. It is also possible to let a person choose.

<Modification 8>
In the present modification 8, the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 is different, and the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is different depending on the situation. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing a MAX bet switching process relating to the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. The MAX bet switching process is started by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle).

In step S4801, the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the operation of one bet has occurred. When the single bet operation is performed, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not the single bet mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The one-card bet mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify the number of medals to be inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is set in the situation where the one-card bet mode flag is set. When is operated, one virtual medal is inserted, and when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where the one bet mode flag is not set, three virtual medals are inserted.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S4802 that the single bet mode flag is not set, that is, the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed in a situation where the single bet mode flag is not set. In this case, in step S4803, a process of setting the number of inserted medals to one based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed. In the following step S4804, the single bet mode flag is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4802 that the one-card bet mode flag is set, that is, when the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed in the situation where the one-card bet mode flag is set, the step. In S4805, a process of setting the number of inserted medals to 3 based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed. In the following step S4806, the single bet mode flag is cleared.

After the processing of step S4804 or step S4806 is performed, the bet number switching command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4807. When it is determined in step S4801 that the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 has not been performed, or after the process of step S4807 is executed, this switching process ends.

That is, in the present modification 8, the number of medals inserted is switched based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 based on the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57. By doing so, for example, when trying to play a game in a specific mode, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated once, the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 corresponds to the specific mode. In the specific mode, it is possible to operate the first credit insertion switch 56 instead of the second credit insertion switch 57 to play the game. In other words, although the number of bets differs between the normal game mode and the specific mode, the operation buttons at the time of inserting medals are common, and in the specific mode, the simulated experience of the normal game mode can be made more realistic. can.

For example, in the normal game mode, in the case of a configuration in which three bets are set as the specified number during the normal game state or the bonus state and two bets are set as the specified number during the CB state, the maximum bet is performed depending on which state. It is possible to make different numbers of virtual medals. On the other hand, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed only by the display control device 81, not via the main control device 101. Therefore, if the game mode is switched, the number of virtual medals inserted at the time of MAX betting is also automatically switched (three virtual medals are inserted in the normal game mode, and one virtual medal is inserted in the specific mode). ), The operation information of the second effect switch 67 for switching the game mode is output from the display control device 81 to the main control device 101, or the second effect switch 67 is connected to the main control device 101. It will be necessary to do it. Then, the processing load of the main control device 101 may increase, and the information input to the main control device 101 increases, so that fraudulent acts are likely to occur, and the fraudulent acts can be prevented in advance. Not preferred. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to improve the operability of the game in the specific mode without increasing the information input to the main control device 101.

If the configuration is such that the number of virtual medals inserted at the time of MAX betting is automatically switched by switching to the game mode, the second effect switch 67 is connected to the main control device 101 to switch the game mode. It suffices that this can be grasped by the main control device 101.

In the above modification 8, the second credit insertion switch 57 does not have to be provided with the same or substantially the same size as the first credit insertion switch 56, and for example, the second credit insertion switch 58 is provided with the same or substantially the same size as the third credit insertion switch 58. May be. As a result, the size of the second credit input switch 57 is reduced, so that the area where each credit input switch 56 to 58 is installed can be narrowed, and a place where other accessories (effect buttons, etc.) are installed can be secured. Is possible.

<Modification example 9>
In the present modification 9, the configuration of the identification display indicating that the user is in the specific mode is different.

As shown in FIGS. 125 (a) and 125 (b), in the present modification 9, the identification accessory 65b and the switching drive unit 65c for switching the position of the identification accessory 65b are provided. There is. The switching drive unit 65c is connected to the display control device 81, and the switching drive unit 65c is controlled by the CPU 181 so that the identification accessory 65b is set at a position where it does not overlap the auxiliary display unit 65 in the front-rear direction. It is displaced to the normal position (FIG. 125 (a)) and the specific position (FIG. 125 (b)) set at a position overlapping the auxiliary display unit 65 in the front-rear direction.

When the game mode is set to the normal game mode, the CPU 181 drives and controls the switching drive unit 65c so as to arrange the identification accessory 65b at the normal position, and the game mode is set to the specific mode. The switching drive unit 65c is driven and controlled so that the identification accessory 65b is arranged at a specific position.

By doing so, it becomes easier to understand from the appearance whether or not the game mode is the specific mode, and each effect data of the normal game mode can be diverted as it is in the specific mode. As a result, it is not necessary to perform a process of incorporating the image data of the stamp 65a into the effect data of the normal game mode, and the processing load in the specific mode can be significantly reduced.

The normal position of the identification accessory 65b and the position where the switching drive unit 65c is provided are set on the back side of the upper lamp 63, for example, so that they cannot be seen or are difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. good. As a result, in the normal game mode, the identification accessory 65b and the switching drive unit 65c do not get in the way, and the game can be performed without being particularly conscious of the specific mode.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the handling of the specific mode by the one-bet game is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, the specific mode by the 1-bet game in the present embodiment can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal game mode by the 3-bet game.

FIG. 126 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the second credit insertion switch 57 in the first embodiment is formed to have the same or substantially the same size as the third credit insertion switch 58, and is arranged to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. ing. Further, in the present embodiment, the second effect switch 67 for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not provided.

A fourth credit input switch 69 is provided on the decorative panel 80 arranged below the portion where the stop switches 42 to 44 are provided. The fourth credit insertion switch 69 is for inserting one virtual medal. The fourth credit input switch 69 is connected to the main control device 101. More specifically, a fourth credit insertion detection sensor (not shown) that individually detects the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is connected to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104 of the main control device 101. When the operation of the 4 credit insertion switch 69 is performed, the detection signal from the 4th credit insertion detection sensor is output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104. The CPU 102 determines that one virtual medal has been inserted based on the reception of the detection signal.

The fourth credit insertion switch 69 is a switch that can be pressed from the front side to the back side of the slot machine 10, and can be operated with other credit insertion switches 56 to 58 that can be pressed downward. The direction is different. Further, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is provided larger than the other credit insertion switches 56 to 58, and specifically, has an adult palm-sized ellipse (major diameter of about 15 cm, minor diameter of about 8 cm). ing. Therefore, it is an operation button that is easier for the player to catch the eye than the other credit insertion switches 56 to 58, and when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, the operation position and operation direction are different from the others. , It is easy to give the impression that a special operation is being performed.

FIG. 127 shows a lottery table for a specific mode in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, unlike the lottery table (FIG. 76) in the first embodiment, the point value PV is assigned to each of the index values IV = 51, 63 to 65, 68, 79, while the other index values. The point value PV of IV is set to 0. Therefore, index value IV = 51 (special replay), index value IV = 63 (special strong cherry), index value IV = 64 (special weak cherry), index value IV = 65 (special watermelon), index value IV = 68. (Special middle bell), index value IV = 79 (special red 7 matching combination) can be won, while other index values IV = 50, 52-62, 66-67, 69-78, 80-99 If not, you won't win. In the lottery table of the specific mode, 0 is set for the point value PV of the index value IV = 0 to 49 in the lottery table of the specific mode, and the winning combination in the normal game mode is in the specific mode. Will not win. Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the player wins when the index value IV = 79 is in the special bonus state, but in the present embodiment, the player wins when the index value IV = 79 even in the normal game state. Can be done. Therefore, the winning combination with the index value IV = 79 was referred to as the "special BB medium red 7 matching combination" in the first embodiment, but is also simply referred to as the "special red 7 matching combination" in the present embodiment. And.

For each index value IV = 51, 63 to 65, 68, 79, substantially the same point value PV is set. In other words, in the game in the specific mode, the special re-game is won with a probability of about 1/6, the special strong cherry is won with a probability of about 1/6, and the special weak is won with a probability of about 1/6. Win the cherry, win the special middle bell with a probability of about 1/6, and win the special red 7 match role with a probability of about 1/6.

The winning modes and benefits of the special re-game, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special middle bell, and special red 7 matching combination are the same as those in the first embodiment, and all of them are the re-game winning and strong in the normal game mode. A prize is won by stopping at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with the same result as the cherry prize, the weak cherry prize, the middle bell prize, and the red 7 matching combination prize. Further, the effective line set according to the number of bets is also the same as in the first embodiment.

The specific mode by the one-bet game in the present embodiment can be executed in a part of the case where the additional lottery for the number of continuous games in the attack mode is won.

<Outline of addition by specific mode>
The outline of the addition by the specific mode in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128.

In the normal game mode, when the display mode is equal to or higher than the attack mode and a specific role such as a watermelon, a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a middle bell, a chance eye A, or B is won, the same as in the first embodiment described above. In addition to the display mode transition lottery according to the current display mode, an additional lottery for the attack mode is performed.

When the additional lottery is won, in the present embodiment, the number of continuous games is added based on the number of additional games table according to the specific combination won in the additional lottery, and the winning combination by executing the specific mode. Depending on the situation, the number of continuous games may be added. In the following description, the addition performed at the table according to the specific winning combination in the additional lottery is referred to as a normal addition, and the addition according to the winning combination by executing the specific mode is referred to as a special addition.

In the normal addition, after the game that wins the specific combination or the bonus ends, the number of games corresponding to the specific combination that wins the additional lottery is added, and the notification of the number of additional games is notified by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. It is executed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, in the special addition, first, a special bet instruction effect for prompting the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In the special bet instruction effect, for example, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is referred to as a "dodeca button", and the display "press the dodeca button !!" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the special bet instruction effect is used. A sound effect is emitted from the speaker 64. As the sound effect, for example, it is set as a sound that the player can clearly recognize that an operation different from the normal betting operation should be performed by emitting "Zubababababan !!" with a loud electronic sound.

After the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is performed after the special bet instruction effect, the special start instruction effect for prompting the operation of the start lever 41 is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In the special start instruction effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the message "Put your spirit and hit the lever !!". Then, when the start operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed based on the special start operation instruction effect, the sound effect for the special start operation instruction effect is emitted from the speaker 64. As the sound effect, for example, a start operation is performed in which a low electronic sound emits "Dun" and has an effect different from that of a normal start operation (in a normal start operation, for example, a high electronic sound "Tun"). This is set as a sound that enables the player to grasp the fact and prompts a calm stop operation so as to expect the content of the subsequent game.

One medal is inserted based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69. Then, when the start lever 41 is operated in the situation where the one-card bet is made, the game is started as a game of the one-bet game, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. In the one-bet game, as described above, one of the special replay, the special strong cherry, the special weak cherry, the special middle bell, and the special red 7 matching role is won.

When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, any of the above-mentioned special winning combination winnings is established. The figure shows, for example, that a special watermelon prize has been established. In the special addition, the number of additional games this time is determined based on the winning special watermelon, and the additional effect corresponding to the determined number of games is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

In the special addition via the game in the specific mode, the addition of a large number of games is more likely to occur than in the normal addition without the game in the specific mode. Therefore, when a specific combination is won and an addition occurs, the player expects that a special addition will occur.

<Processing for special addition>
Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the processing when the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added will be described.

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing in the present embodiment. As described above, the second specific combination process is a process performed as one process of the lottery result corresponding process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 47).

That is, when a negative determination is made in step S911 in the flowchart of FIG. 47, or after the process of step S913 is executed (after the process for promotion of the attack mode is executed), the process proceeds to step S4901 shown in FIG. 129. In step S4901, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed in the same manner as the process in step S914.

In the following step S4902, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S4901. If it is not won, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it is won, the process proceeds to step S4903, and whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, that is, if a winning combination with the bonus is won as the specific role winning this time, or if the winning is specified during the bonus carry-over state. Determine if it is a role. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S916.

If the bonus winning flag is not set, the special additional lottery process is executed in step S4904. In the special addition lottery process, the special addition generation table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 106e. In the special addition generation table, the probability of occurrence of the special addition differs depending on the type of the specific combination won in the addition lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the pattern is set so that the higher the winning probability of each specific combination is, the lower the probability of occurrence of the special addition is set, and the higher the winning probability of the specific combination is, the special addition is made. There is a pattern that is set so that the probability of occurrence is high. For example, the probability of winning a watermelon is about 1/144 (including watermelon duplications 1 and 2, FIG. 31, etc.), and the probability of winning a strong cherry is about 1/218 (including strong cherry duplications 1 and 2, FIG. 31 etc.), and the probability of winning a strong cherry is lower than the probability of winning a watermelon. Then, in the special addition generation table, the special addition is more likely to occur at the time of addition based on the strong cherry winning than at the time of addition based on the watermelon winning.

On the other hand, the probability of winning a weak cherry is about 1/169 (including overlapping 1 and 2 of weak cherries, FIG. 31, etc.), and the probability of winning a watermelon is higher than the probability of winning a weak cherry. Then, in the special addition generation table, the special addition is more likely to occur when the addition is based on the watermelon winning than when the addition is based on the weak cherry winning.

That is, in the special addition generation table, the occurrence probability of the special addition is set regardless of the relationship between the winning probability of the specific combination in the normal game mode.

In step S4905, it is determined whether or not the special addition is won based on the processing result of step S4904. In the case of non-winning, in steps S4906 to S4908, the same processing as in steps S917 to S919 is performed, and then the second specific combination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the special addition is won, in step S4909, 1 is added to the addition counters of the various counter areas 106e. In the following step S4910, a process of setting a special addition flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed. The addition counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of occurrences of the special addition, and the special addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the special addition should be executed.

In the following step S4911, a special addition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special addition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the special addition should be generated in the next game, that is, that the next game should be executed in the specific mode. The display control device 81 that has received the special addition command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to execute the above-mentioned special bet instruction effect as the effect at the end of this game.

The case where it is determined in step S4903 that the bonus winning flag is set is the case where the addition this time is carried over after the end of the bonus. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4912. In step S4912, the special addition lottery process is executed in the same manner as in step S4904. Then, in step S4913, it is determined whether or not the special addition is won, and if it is not won, the process of setting the attack mode addition flag is performed in step S4914. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S920. If the special addition is won in step S4913, the process of adding 1 to the addition counter is performed in step S4915.

After executing the processes of step S4908, step S4911, step S4914, or step S4915, the second specific combination process is terminated.

The third specific combination processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 131. As described above, the third specific combination process is a process performed as one process of the lottery result corresponding process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 48).

In step S5001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. Such processing is the same as in step S1001. In step S5002, it is determined whether or not the additional winning is achieved based on the processing result of step S5001. If it is not won, the third specific combination process is terminated as it is. If the winner is selected, the same processing as in steps S4903 to S4915 is performed in steps S5003 to S5015. That is, for example, the special addition lottery process is performed in step S5005 or step S5012, and if the special addition lottery is not won, the normal addition processing is performed, and if the special addition lottery is won, the special addition lottery is performed. Perform processing.

Next, the end determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 132. As described above, the end determination process is a process executed as one process of the bonus state process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 54).

FIG. 132 shows a process when a negative determination is made in step S1511 in FIG. 54. That is, if the number of remaining payouts becomes 0 (step S1504: YES) and the attack mode winning flag, the challenge mode winning flag, and the VB mode winning flag are not set at the end of the bonus, the attack is performed in step S5101. It is determined whether or not the mode addition winning flag is set. If it is set, in steps S5102 to S5204, a normal addition process is performed in the same manner as in steps S1513 to S1515.

If it is determined in step S5101, that the attack mode addition flag is not set, it is determined in step S5105 whether or not the addition counter is 0. As described above, when the special addition is performed after the bonus is completed, the addition counter is added (step S4915, step S5015). If it is determined in step S5105 that the addition counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S1516, and the addition process in the challenge mode is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5105 that the addition counter is not 0, special addition processing is performed in step S5106 and step S5107 in the same manner as in steps S4910 and S4911. After executing the process of step S5104 or step S5107, the end determination process is terminated.

Next, the processing for the specialized zone in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133. As described above, the special zone processing is a processing performed as one processing of the lottery result correspondence processing in the main control device 101 (FIG. 55).

In step S5201, the process of grasping the lottery result of this game is performed in the same manner as in step S1601. In the following step S5202, the special addition lottery process is executed in the same manner as the process of step S4904 and the like. In the lottery process of step S5202, the probability of occurrence of the special addition in the other lottery process may be different, and specifically, the special addition may be more likely to occur than in the other lottery process.

In step S5203, it is determined whether or not the special addition is won based on the processing result of step S5202. In the case of non-winning, in steps S5204 to S5206, a normal addition process is performed in the same manner as in steps S1602 to S1604. On the other hand, if the special addition is won in step S5203, the special addition process is performed in steps S5207 to S5209 in the same manner as in steps S4909 to S4911. After executing the process of step S5206 or step S5209, the special zone process is terminated.

Next, the process for dealing with the lottery result at the time of special addition will be described.

FIG. 134 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery result correspondence process in this embodiment. As described above, the lottery result handling process is a process performed as one process of the lottery process in the main control device 101 (FIG. 45).

In the present embodiment, first, in step S5301, the number of bets in this game is determined. If the number of bets is not one bet corresponding to the specific mode, the process proceeds to step S701 and the normal game mode process is performed. On the other hand, if the game this time is a single bet, in step S5302, the lottery result corresponding process for the specific mode is executed, and then the corresponding process is terminated.

FIG. 134 (b) is a flowchart showing a lottery result correspondence process for a specific mode.

In step S5401, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. That is, also in the present embodiment, the one-bet game can be executed in a mode other than the specific mode, and in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the game was implemented in the specific mode. If it is not in the specific mode, this corresponding process is terminated as it is.

In the case of the specific mode, the process proceeds to step S5402, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a special watermelon winning. If the special watermelon is won, in step S5403, a process of acquiring the special watermelon table as the additional table this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 135 (a1) shows a special watermelon table selected as an additional table at the time of winning a special watermelon, and FIG. 135 (b1) shows a watermelon table selected as an additional table at the time of winning a watermelon. As shown in FIGS. 135 (a1) and 135 (b1), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special watermelon is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the special watermelon is won. The number of games selected at the time of winning is larger than that at the time of winning the watermelon.

If a negative determination is made in step S5402, it is determined in step S5404 whether or not the lottery result this time is a special strong cherry winning. If the special strong cherry is won, in step S5405, a process of acquiring the special strong cherry table as the additional table this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 135 (a2) shows a special strong cherry table selected as an additional table when a special strong cherry is won, and FIG. 135 (b2) shows a strong cherry table selected as an additional table when a strong cherry is won. There is. As shown in FIGS. 135 (a2) and 135 (b2), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special strong cherry is won is different from the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the strong cherry is won. When the special strong cherry is won, more games are selected than when the strong cherry is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5404, it is determined in step S5406 whether or not the lottery result this time is a special weak cherry winning. If the special weak cherry is won, in step S5407, a process of acquiring the special weak cherry table as the additional table this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 135 (a3) shows a special weak cherry table selected as an additional table when a special weak cherry is won, and FIG. 135 (b3) shows a weak cherry table selected as an additional table when a weak cherry is won. There is. As shown in FIGS. 135 (a3) and 135 (b3), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special weak cherry is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the weak cherry is won. The number of games selected when the special weak cherry is won is larger than when the weak cherry is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5406, it is determined in step S5408 whether or not the lottery result this time is a special middle-stage bell winning. If the special middle bell is won, in step S5409, a process of acquiring the special middle bell table as the additional table this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 135 (a4) shows a special middle bell table selected as an additional table when the special middle bell is won, and FIG. 135 (b4) shows a middle bell table selected as an additional table when the middle bell is won. There is. As shown in FIGS. 135 (a4) and 135 (b4), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special middle bell is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the middle bell is won. When the special middle bell is won, a larger number of games is selected than when the middle bell is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5408, it is determined in step S5410 whether or not the lottery result this time is a special replay winning. If the special replay is won, in step S5411, a process of acquiring the special replay table as the additional table of this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 135 (a5) shows a special replay table selected as an additional table at the time of winning a special replay, and FIG. 135 (b5) shows a replay table selected as an additional table at the time of winning a replay. Unlike other special specific roles, in the normal game mode, no extra is generated when the replay is won during the attack mode. The case where it is added at the time of winning the replay is only in the special zone, and the replay table shows the table for the special zone. As shown in FIGS. 135 (a5) and 135 (b5), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special replay is won is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the replay is won in the special zone. Therefore, the number of games selected when the special replay is won is larger than when the replay is won in the special zone. That is, even when compared with the combination added in the special combination zone, the number of games added when the special combination is won is larger. In addition, even in the additional table in the special zone in other specific roles, the number of additional games at the time of winning the special specific role is the corresponding specific in the special zone as compared with the additional table at the time of winning the special specific role. It is more than the number of additional games at the time of winning the role.

When a negative determination is made in step S5410, it means that the lottery result of the specific mode this time was the winning of the special red 7 matching combination. In this case, in step S5412, a process of acquiring the special red 7 matching combination table as the additional table of this time is performed from the various table storage areas 105a.

FIG. 135 (a6) shows a special red 7-matched table selected as an additional table when the special red 7 is aligned, and FIG. 135 (b6) shows a red 7-matched table selected as an additional table when the special red 7 is aligned. Shown. Unlike other special special roles, in the normal game mode, the red 7 match occurs only during the bonus. The red 7-matched table shows the table in the bonus. As shown in FIGS. 135 (a6) and 135 (b6), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special red 7 is aligned is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when the red 7 is aligned in the bonus. Therefore, the number of games selected when the special red 7 is aligned is larger than the number of games when the red 7 is aligned in the bonus.

After executing the processes of step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411 or step S54112, in step S5413, the process of adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. In such a process, the number of additional games at the time of the special addition determined by referring to the table acquired in each of the above processes and the lottery counter is added to the number of continuous games in the attack mode being executed.

After that, in step S5414, a process of setting the additional command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then this corresponding process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the addition command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to generate an addition effect corresponding to the end of this game (when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of games is different from the number of additional games in each specific combination by using each special specific combination corresponding to each specific combination in which the attack mode can be added. I do. As shown in the first embodiment, while each specific combination and each special specific combination have different combinations, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have the same apparent stop result.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a watermelon role, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the left reel, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel, and the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel. The watermelon role prize is established. Then, an additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the role of watermelon can occur. On the other hand, in the case of a special watermelon role, when the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the left reel, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel, and the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel, the right reel The "red bell" symbol will stop in the middle row, and the special watermelon role prize will be established. In this case, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped at the bottom of the right reel, and the appearance of the special watermelon winning prize is the same as that of the watermelon winning prize. Then, an additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the special watermelon role may occur. Therefore, from the stop result of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the situation where the addition occurs, it is possible to make the player think that the addition effect corresponding to the special watermelon role is generated by the watermelon role. can. By doing so, it is possible to show the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the special specific role such as the special watermelon role as a kind of the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the specific role such as the watermelon role.

Here, as a kind of additional effect corresponding to the winning of a specific role such as a watermelon role, a configuration is also conceivable in which a special additional effect such as the above-mentioned special watermelon role in which the number of games is added is set. However, if this is done, the additional effect corresponding to the specific combination winning may become complicated, or the specific combination winning becomes a condition for the special addition. Therefore, depending on the winning probability of the specific combination, the special addition may be added. There may be inconveniences such as not being able to win a specific role even though you want to generate it. On the other hand, if the winning probability of a specific combination is increased too much, inconveniences such as a ball output rate may occur. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, since the specific combination and the special specific combination are set as different combinations, each combination is associated with the additional effect, and only the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the specific combination becomes complicated. By adjusting the winning rate of each winning combination, it is possible to preferably generate an additional effect corresponding to the winning of a specific combination and the special additional effect described above.

Moreover, both the specific combination and the special specific combination can occur without going through the transition of the gaming state due to, for example, winning a bonus. Specifically, if a game is played in the normal game mode of a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game in a normal game state, a specific role can be won, and if a game is played in a specific mode of a 1-bet game, a special specific role can be won. You can win. That is, these specific combinations and special specific combinations can be won by simply changing the number of bets in the same gaming state without going through the transition of the gaming states. Then, which role was won / won cannot be identified depending on the gaming state.

And, as described above, which combination is won / won differs depending on the number of bets, so if you want to generate the above-mentioned special additional effect by a special specific combination, you can easily generate it by simply switching the number of bets. It becomes possible to make it. By doing so, it is possible to generate the above-mentioned special additional effect at the timing as designed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the commonality of the stop rolls, various measures are taken to reduce the distinctiveness between the specific combination and the special specific combination. Each will be described below.

<Structure that reduces the distinctiveness between special specific roles and specific roles>
As mentioned above, the special special role including the special replay and the special red 7 set and the corresponding specific role have the same stop result of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the time of winning, and any role wins the prize. It's hard to tell if you're doing it. In the present embodiment, in addition to the commonality regarding the stop roll, the present embodiment has a configuration for reducing the distinctiveness between the special specific combination and the specific combination.

<Commonality of production at the time of betting>
As a configuration for reducing the distinctiveness between the special specific combination and the specific combination, first, the commonality of the betting effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 136, when betting in the normal game mode, including the normal addition, for example, as a situation before betting, if the attack mode is in progress, the auxiliary display unit 65 acquires the bet during the current attack mode. The total number of acquisitions is displayed as the "number of get" (the figure shows that 54 cards have been acquired). In addition, the number of sheets paid out after winning the prize in the previous game is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 (the figure shows that nine pieces were paid out in the previous game). Then, the credit display unit 60 displays the number of virtual medals that are currently credited (in the figure, it is shown that the maximum number of 50 virtual medals is credited).

In the above pre-bet situation, for example, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated and three bets are placed, the display of the total number of bets obtained by the auxiliary display unit 65 corresponds to the number of bets this time. Specifically, it is updated to the display of the total number of acquisitions, which is reduced by 3 cards. Further, the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off to indicate that the next game can be started based on the bet operation. Then, the credit display unit 60 is updated from the display of the number of credits before betting to the display of the number of credits obtained by reducing the number of bets this time.

In addition, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect (sound effect when betting three sheets) corresponding to the betting operation this time. For example, in the sound effect when betting three cards, "bebe" is emitted three times in correspondence with the number of bets. It should be noted that the sound effect at the time of betting on one sheet is emitted as "be", and the sound effect at the time of betting on two sheets is emitted as "bebe". These bet sound effects may be other sound effects as long as the number of bets can be identified by the player.

As an effect at the time of betting operation at the time of special addition, for example, as a situation before betting, when the above special bet instruction effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the number of each game in the attack mode is displayed and the total number of acquisitions is displayed. The display will not be performed. Further, at the timing when the special bet instruction effect is started, the display of the payout number display unit 62 and the display of the credit display unit 60 are turned off.

Then, in this situation, when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated according to the instruction of the special bet instruction effect and one bet is made, the auxiliary display unit 65 starts from the special bet instruction effect to the special start instruction effect. The screen switches to. Even in the special start instruction effect, the number of each game in the attack mode and the total number of acquisitions are not displayed. Therefore, the display of the total number of winnings is not updated based on the main betting operation as in the case of normal betting. Further, as described above, the credit display unit 60 is turned off. Therefore, the display of the number of credits in the credit display unit 60 based on the betting operation this time is not updated.

In addition, although the betting operation this time corresponds to a single bet, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect at the time of three betting corresponding to the three betting. That is, normally, "be" is emitted once as a sound effect at the time of one bet corresponding to one bet, but in the case of one bet at the time of the special bet, the sound effect at the time of three bets is used. "Bebebe" and "Bebe" are fired three times.

<Processing for bet operation>
The processing for performing each of the above effects will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a bet operation process. The bet operation process is performed as one process in the in / out counter process for the number of bets in step S109 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) in the main controller 101. The bet operation process is started at the timing when the bet operation becomes possible (all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the medal payout is completed) in the in / out counter processing of the number of bets.

In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. When the special addition flag is set, it indicates that the game to be started next is a game for performing special addition. In this case, in step S5502, the special operation instruction command is output to the display control device 81. set. The display control device 81 that has received the special operation instruction command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to generate the special operation instruction effect based on the end of the game in which the special addition flag is set. In the following step S5503, the credit display invisible process is executed. Specifically, the display of the credit display unit 60 and the payout number display unit 62 is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S5501, or after the process of step S5503 is executed, it is determined in step S5504 whether or not any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69 has been operated, and the operation is performed. Wait until. Based on that any of the operations has been performed, the process proceeds to step S5505.

In step S5505, it is determined whether or not this operation is the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. If the operation is the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the three-card bet process is executed in step S5506. Such a process is a process for effectively betting three virtual medals according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than three, the betting operation is not valid. In this case, the process returns to, for example, step S5504.

When three virtual medals are effectively bet, the process of subtracting 3 corresponding to the current number of bets from the credit counter is performed in step S5507. In this case, the display of the credit display unit 60 is updated to the value subtracted by 3. When the display of the credit display unit 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is subtracted. Then, in step S5508, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the sound effect (bebebe) at the time of betting on three sheets is emitted, and then the betting operation process is ended.

If it is determined in step S5505 that the operation is not the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, it is determined in step S5509 whether or not the operation is the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58. If the operation is the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, the double bet process is executed in step S5510. Such a process is a process for effectively betting two virtual medals according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than two, the betting operation is not valid. In this case, the process returns to, for example, step S5504.

When two virtual medals are effectively bet, the process of subtracting 2 corresponding to the current number of bets from the credit counter is performed in step S5511. In this case, the display of the credit display unit 60 is updated to the value subtracted by 2. When the display of the credit display unit 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is subtracted. Then, in step S5512, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the sound effect (bebe) at the time of double betting is emitted, and then the betting operation processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S5509 that the operation is not the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, it is determined in step S5513 whether or not the operation is the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57. If the operation is the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, the one-card betting process is executed in step S5514. Such a process is a process for effectively betting one virtual medal according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than one (0), the betting operation is not valid. do. In this case, the process returns to, for example, step S5504.

When one virtual medal is effectively bet, the process of subtracting 1 corresponding to the current number of bets from the credit counter is performed in step S5515. In this case, the display of the credit display unit 60 is updated to the value subtracted by 1. When the display of the credit display unit 60 is OFF, only the credit counter is subtracted. Then, in step S5516, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the sound effect (b) at the time of betting on one bet is emitted, and then the betting operation processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S5513 that the operation is not the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, it means that the operation of the credit insertion switch this time is the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69. In this case, in step S5517, the one-card betting process is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S5514. In the following step S5518, similarly to the process of step S5515, a process of subtracting 1 corresponding to the number of bets this time is performed from the credit counter.

In step S5519, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. If the special addition flag is not set, in step S5520, as in the process of step S5516, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the one-sheet bet sound effect (be) is emitted, and then the bet operation process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5519 that the special addition flag is set, the speaker 64 is controlled in step S5521 so that a three-sheet bet sound effect (bebebe) is emitted. Then, in step S5522, the special start instruction command is set as the output target to the display control device 81, and then the bet operation process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the special start instruction command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to generate the special start instruction effect.

As described above, when the special addition flag is set and the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, the sound effect at the time of three bets is emitted. Therefore, it is possible to make the specific mode of this 1-bet game seem as if it is a 3-bet game.

Moreover, in the game started with the special addition flag set, the display of the credit display unit 60 is turned off. Therefore, only the credit counter is subtracted at the time of betting, and the credit display unit 60 is not updated. As a result, it is avoided that it becomes possible to clearly identify whether the bet is a 1-card bet or a 3-card bet just by looking at the credit display unit 60.

When the display of the credit display unit 60 is turned off, the display of the payout number display unit 62 is also turned off. As a result, the unnaturalness can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which only the display of the credit display unit 60 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to special operation effects and the like.

Even if the special addition flag is set, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated instead of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, the processing for one bet is performed and the bet is bet. The time sound effect is configured to set the sound effect at the time of one bet corresponding to the one bet. This is because, in a situation where such a special addition is performed in the first place, a player who operates the second credit insertion switch 57 instead of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 makes a bet by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69. This is because it is considered that they are aware of the fact that they will be injured. Therefore, a sound effect at the time of betting on one bet is set so that it can be confirmed that the bet on one bet has been made effectively.

In each game, betting may be made by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45 in addition to operating the credit insertion switch. Although the description of the processing in this case will be omitted, one bet sound effect (be) is emitted for each medal inserted regardless of the presence or absence of the special addition flag.

By the way, the case where the special addition flag is set is the case where a specific winning combination (winning) has occurred in the previous game, and at least three medals have been paid out. Then, in a game in which a special addition is performed, the situation where the credit counter is 0 is unlikely to occur normally, and the betting operation can be performed by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 without inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45. It has become. The situation where the credit counter is 0 is a case where the settlement switch 59 is operated before the game in which the special addition is performed, and the player who performs such an action is operated by the second credit insertion switch 57. It is highly possible that one bet is made by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69, as in the situation where the bet is made.

<Commonality of production at the time of winning>
Next, as a configuration for reducing the distinctiveness between the special specific role and the specific role, the commonality of the production at the time of winning will be described.

As shown in FIG. 138, when a normal addition occurs, for example, when the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the watermelon winning is established, the position corresponding to these "watermelon" symbols is established. By irradiating the reel with a predetermined light emitting part, a flash effect is generated as a watermelon payout appearance. The flash effect can be realized by controlling an existing light emitting unit or the like. When the watermelon prize is established, five medals will be paid out as a privilege corresponding to the watermelon prize. In this case, as the medal payout sound effect, a watermelon payout sound effect (for example, "dodddd" in bass) is emitted from the speaker 64. Then, an additional effect of the number of games is generated based on the watermelon table at the time of winning the watermelon.

On the other hand, when a special addition occurs, for example, when the "watermelon" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "red bell" symbol are stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the special watermelon winning is established, these Instead of each symbol (watermelon, watermelon, red bell) corresponding to the special watermelon, the reel at the position corresponding to the "watermelon" symbol is irradiated with the predetermined light emitting part, and the flash effect as the above-mentioned watermelon payout appearance occurs. do. That is, although it is a special watermelon prize, at the time of special addition, the above-mentioned watermelon payment appearance, which is an effect generated at the time of the watermelon prize, occurs. When the special watermelon prize is established, one medal will be paid out as a privilege corresponding to the special watermelon prize. In this case, the watermelon payout sound effect is emitted from the speaker 64 as the medal payout sound effect. That is, although it is a special watermelon prize and the number of medals paid out is one, a watermelon payout sound effect is generated as a medal payout sound effect at the time of special addition at the time of special addition. Then, an additional effect of the number of games is generated based on the special watermelon table at the time of winning the special watermelon.

<Payout judgment processing>
The processing for performing each of the above effects will be described.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a payout determination process according to the present embodiment. As described above, the payout determination process is a process performed as one process (step S413) of the reel control process (FIG. 32) in the main control device 101.

In step S5601, it is determined whether or not a payout can occur as a result of this winning. If a payout can occur, the payout process is performed in step S5602, and then the payout determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5601 that the payout does not occur, it is determined in step S5603 whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the re-game process is performed in step S5604, and then the main payout determination process is terminated.

Hereinafter, the payout process and the replay process will be described.

<Payout processing>
In the payout process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 140, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. If the special addition flag is not set and the game played this time is not a game corresponding to the special addition, the payout setting for the normal game mode is performed in steps S5702 to S5705. On the other hand, if the special addition flag is set and the game played this time is a game corresponding to the special addition, the payout setting for the specific mode is performed in steps S5706 to S5728.

As the payout setting for the normal game mode, first, in step S5702, the payout number is grasped. In such a process, the number of bets and the winning mode are specified, and the number of payouts corresponding to the specified number of bets and the winning mode is grasped. For example, if the number of bets this time is three and the bell (first small role) prize is established, it is understood that nine medals will be paid out. In addition, if the number of bets this time is three and the watermelon (26th small role, etc.) prize is established, it is understood that five medals will be paid out. Also, if the number of bets this time is 3 and a strong cherry (25th small role, etc.) prize, a weak cherry (18th small role, etc.) prize, and a middle bell (29th small role, etc.) are established, Know that three medals will be paid out. Then, it is understood that if the number of bets this time is 3 in the bonus and the red 7 match (30th small role) prize is established, 9 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if the number of bets this time is one and the special bell (1st P small role) prize is established, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. In addition, if the number of bets this time is one and the special watermelon (26th P small role, etc.) prize is established, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. In addition, the number of bets this time is one, and a special strong cherry (25th P small role, etc.) prize, a special weak cherry (18P small role, etc.) prize, and a special middle bell (29P small role, etc.) have been established. If so, it is understood that one medal will be paid out. In addition, if the number of bets this time is one and the special red 7 match (30th P small role) prize is established, it is understood that one medal will be paid out.

After performing the process of step S5702, in step S5703, the payout process of paying out the number of medals grasped in step S5702 is executed. Specifically, the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the grasped number of medals to be paid out is paid out. In this case, the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the number of payouts is added to the credit counter and the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit counter is paid out. That is, even if the number of payouts is added to the credit counter, if it is equal to or less than the upper limit of the credit counter, the medal is not paid out from the hopper device 51.

In the following step S5704, the payout sound effect corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if the watermelon (26th small role) prize is established, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the watermelon payout sound effect is emitted. Further, if the special watermelon (26th P small winning combination) prize is established, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the special watermelon is emitted. The payout sound effect for watermelon and the payout sound effect for special watermelon are set to different sounds to the extent that the player can identify them. For example, the payout sound effect for watermelon is set to the above-mentioned low-pitched sound. , The special watermelon payout sound is set to a low-pitched sound that is shorter than the watermelon payout sound effect. It should be noted that the payout sound effects of other specific roles and the payout sound effects of the special specific role are also set to be different to the extent that the player can identify them. In this case, the payout sound effect is set regardless of whether or not the medal is paid out from the hopper device 51. That is, the payout sound effect is set even when the number of payouts is only added to the credit counter.

In the following step S5705, the payout appearance corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if a watermelon (26th small role) prize is established, a flash effect is generated as a watermelon payout appearance. Further, the payout number display unit 62 is controlled so that the number 5 is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 corresponding to the above-mentioned five medal payouts as the watermelon payout appearance. If the special watermelon (26th P small role) prize is established, the light emitting part that illuminates each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is turned off as a special watermelon payout appearance. As a special watermelon payout appearance, the payout number display unit 62 is controlled so that the number 1 is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in correspondence with the above-mentioned one medal payout. That is, the watermelon payout appearance and the special watermelon payout appearance are different so that the player can identify them. In addition, different effects are set so that the player can identify the other specific role's payout appearance and the special specific role's payout appearance, and the flash effect and the extinguishing effect on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are set. It can be identified by the difference and the difference in the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62.

After the processing of step S5705 is performed, the main payout processing is completed.

As a payout setting for the specific mode, first, in step S5706, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is one as the specific number. If the number is not one, the process proceeds to step S5702, and the payout setting for the normal game mode is performed.

If the special addition flag is set and the game is played with a single bet, the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, a process of subtracting 1 from the additional counter is performed. Then, in step S5708, it is determined whether or not the addition counter has become 0. If it is 0, the special addition flag is cleared in step S5709. The processes of steps S5707 to S5709 are processes when a plurality of special addition games occur in succession.

If a negative determination is made in step S5708, or after executing the process of step S5709, the process proceeds to step S5710. In step S5710, it is determined whether or not the special watermelon (26th P small winning combination) prize has been established. If the special watermelon prize has been established, the payout process corresponding to the special watermelon prize is performed in step S5711. In this case, unlike the payout process in step S5703, the event that the number of payouts this time is added to the credit counter and exceeds the upper limit of the credit counter is unlikely to occur. That is, the credit counter is deducted by 1 by the one bet in the specific mode this time, and even if 1 which is the number of payouts this time is added, the upper limit value of the credit counter is not exceeded. The medal payout is not performed when the upper limit value of the credit counter is not exceeded, and the medal payout is performed by controlling the hopper device 51 only when the upper limit value of the credit counter is exceeded. The actual medal payout occurs when the credit counter is the upper limit value before the start of the specific mode and one medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 in the specific mode. .. The payout process is the same for other special special winning prizes.

In the following step S5712, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the watermelon payout sound effect is emitted in correspondence with the watermelon prize instead of the special watermelon prize which is the result of this prize. In this case, the payout sound effect is set regardless of whether or not the actual medal payout is performed. Then, in step S5713, it is controlled so that the watermelon payout appearance is performed in correspondence with the watermelon prize instead of the special watermelon prize which is the result of this prize. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a watermelon payout appearance. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5710 that the special watermelon prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5714 whether or not the special strong cherry (25th P small role, etc.) prize has been established. If the special strong cherry prize has been established, the payout process corresponding to the special strong cherry prize is performed in step S5715.

In the following step S5716, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the strong cherry is emitted in correspondence with the strong cherry winning instead of the special strong cherry winning which is the winning result of this time. Then, in step S5717, it is controlled so that the strong cherry payout appearance is performed in correspondence with the strong cherry prize instead of the special strong cherry prize which is the result of this prize. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for strong cherries. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5714 that the special strong cherry prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5718 whether or not the special weak cherry (18P small role, etc.) prize has been established. If the special weak cherry prize is established, the payout process corresponding to the special weak cherry prize is performed in step S5719.

In the following step S5720, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the weak cherry is emitted in correspondence with the weak cherry winning instead of the special weak cherry winning which is the result of this winning. Then, in step S5721, it is controlled so that the weak cherry payout appearance is performed in correspondence with the weak cherry prize instead of the special weak cherry prize which is the result of this prize. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for weak cherries. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5718 that the special weak cherry prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5722 whether or not the special middle bell (29th P small role, etc.) prize has been established. If the special middle bell winning is established, the payout process corresponding to the special middle bell winning is performed in step S5723.

In the following step S5724, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the middle bell is emitted in correspondence with the middle bell prize instead of the special middle bell prize which is the result of this prize. Then, in step S5725, it is controlled so that the payout appearance for the middle bell is performed in correspondence with the middle bell prize instead of the special middle bell prize which is the result of this prize. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for the middle bell. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5722 that the special middle-stage bell winning has not been established, it means that the winning result in the specific mode this time is the special red 7-match (30th P small role) winning. In this case, in step S5726, the payout process corresponding to the special red 7 matching prize is performed.

In the following step S5727, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout sound effect for the red 7 matching is emitted in correspondence with the red 7 matching winning instead of the special red 7 matching winning which is the result of this winning. Then, in step S5728, it is controlled so that the red 7-matched payout appearance is performed in correspondence with the red 7-matched prize instead of the special red 7-matched prize which is the result of this prize. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for the red 7 match. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is turned off when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the payout number is not performed.

After performing any of the processes of step S5713, step S5717, step S5721, step S5725 and step S5728, the payout setting for the specific mode is finished, and the payout process is finished.

<Processing for replay>
Next, the replay processing in the payout determination processing (FIG. 139) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 141.

In step S5801, it is determined whether or not the special addition is set. If the special addition is not set, the normal game mode processing is performed in step S5802 and step S5803. On the other hand, when the special addition flag is set, the processing for the specific mode is performed in steps S5804 to S5809.

That is, as a process for the normal game mode, in step S5802, a bet sound effect setting process is performed. In such a process, a bet sound effect corresponding to the number of re-bets corresponding to the number of bets of the game executed this time is set. Specifically, when a re-game prize occurs in a 3-bet game, a 3-card bet sound (bebebe) is set, and when a re-game prize occurs in a 2-bet game, a 2-card bet time is set. A sound effect (bebe) is set, and when a replay prize occurs in a one-bet game, a sound effect (be) at the time of one bet is set. These set bet sound effects are output from the speaker 64 when the virtual medal is automatically inserted into the next game based on the re-game winning. Specifically, the automatic loading process is performed in the start waiting process in the normal processing (FIG. 28), and the bet sound effect set in accordance with the automatic loading is output.

The subsequent re-bet process in step S5803 is a process of preparing to automatically bet a number corresponding to the number of bets in the game executed this time in the start waiting process (step S204) in the normal process (FIG. 28). Is. Specifically, in the case of a 3-bet game, the 3-card automatic insertion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d so that the 3-card bet is performed in the start waiting process, and in the case of a 2-bet game, the 2-card bet starts. Two automatic insertion flags are set in the various flag storage areas 106d so that they are performed in the wait process, and one bet is set in the various flag storage areas 106d so that one bet is performed in the start wait process in the case of a one-bet game. Set the automatic closing flag. In the start waiting process, by checking these automatic insertion flags, it is possible to identify that the re-game winning was established in the previous game, and the number of virtual medals automatically inserted according to the set automatic insertion flags. Perform processing. Then, at the time of the automatic charging, the bet sound effect set in step S5802 is output. After performing the process of step S5803, the process for replaying is terminated.

When the special addition flag is set in step S5801, as a process for the specific mode, in step S5804, it is determined whether or not this game is a one-bet game. If it is not a one-bet game, the process proceeds to step S5802, and processing for the normal game mode is performed. If it is a 1-bet game, the addition counter is subtracted in step S5805. Then, in step S5806, it is determined whether or not the addition counter is 0, and if it is 0, a process of clearing the special addition flag is performed in step S5807. The processes of steps S5805 to S5807 correspond to the processes of steps S5707 to S5709.

If the addition counter is not 0 in step S5806, or after executing the process of step S5807, a process of setting a three-card bet sound effect is performed in step S5808. Then, in step S5809, as a special re-bet process, the one-card automatic insertion flag is set so that the one-card bet is performed in the start waiting process. As a result, in the next game when the special replay prize is established by the special addition, one virtual medal is automatically inserted and the sound effect at the time of three bets is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to realize that the game in which the special addition is performed is a one-bet game. After that, the process for replaying is completed.

As described above, in the specific mode in which the special addition is performed, when the special specific role prize is established, one medal, which is the corresponding privilege, is paid out, while the payout sound effect and the payout appearance payout are the special special role prizes. The payout sound effect and payout appearance corresponding to a specific role are set instead of the one corresponding to. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the specific combination prize and the special specific role prize has been won.

On the other hand, even if the special special role prize is established, if the game is played in a situation where the special additional flag is not set, the special specific role is not the payout sound effect or the payout appearance corresponding to the special role prize. The one corresponding to the winning combination is set. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the special addition is not effective. For example, the addition can be made even though the special red 7-match prize is established in the 1-bet game in the normal game state. It is possible to prevent it from appearing unnatural when it does not occur.

In the special addition, when a special re-game prize is established, one virtual medal is automatically inserted, and a sound effect is emitted when three bets are made. By doing this, it is clear whether the special re-game prize was established in the game where the special addition was made, or whether the special re-game prize was established by simply playing the 1-bet game regardless of the special addition. Can be made to.

<Modification example 1>
In the present modification 1, when determining the addition game at the time of special addition, the game result that triggered the special addition is added. That is, not only the game result in the specific mode but also the game result of the normal game mode in which the specific mode is executed is taken into consideration to determine the privilege in the specific mode.

FIG. 142 shows a lottery table for special addition in the present modification 1. The special addition lottery table is acquired in each process (step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411, step S5412) of the lottery result corresponding processing for the specific mode.

In the special watermelon table, the special strong cherry table, the special weak cherry table, and the special middle bell table in the first modification, as shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (d), this additional winning was triggered. The number of additional games is set to differ according to the type of specific role. In this case, the number of additional games is set to be the largest when the winning combination that triggered the addition and the special combination of this time correspond (consecutively).

That is, in the special watermelon table, the trigger of the additional winning is the watermelon winning, and in the specific mode as the special additional carried out after that, when the special watermelon is won, it stops as if the watermelon winning occurred twice in a row. The number of games to be rolled will be continuous, and in this case, the number of special additional games is set to be the largest. Also, at the special strong cherry table, the trigger for the extra winning was the strong cherry winning, and in the specific mode as the special extra that was carried out after that, if the special strong cherry was won, did the strong cherry winning occur twice in a row? The games with stop rolls such as are continuous, and in this case, the number of special additional games is set to be the largest. At the special weak cherry table, the trigger for the additional winning is the weak cherry winning, and in the specific mode as the special additional that was carried out after that, when the special weak cherry is won, it seems that the weak cherry winning has occurred twice in a row. The number of games with a stop roll will be continuous, and in this case, the number of special additional games is set to be the largest. Regarding the special middle-tier bell table, if the additional winning was triggered by the middle-tier bell winning, and in the specific mode as the special extra-stage that was carried out after that, if the special middle-tier bell was won, did the middle-tier bell winning occur twice in a row? Such stop-roll games will be continuous, and in this case, the number of special additional games is set to be the largest.

In the special replay table and the special red 7-matched table, unlike the case of the other special specific combination tables described above, the event that the specific combination and the corresponding special specific combination are continuously won does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 142 (e) and 142 (f), in the special replay table and the special red 7-matched table, the number of additional games is increased according to the type of the specific role that triggered the additional winning this time. It is set to be different.

By doing the above, the number of additional games is determined in consideration of the game result in the normal game mode that triggered the occurrence of the special addition. improves.

In this case, for example, when various specific winning combinations are won consecutively in the normal game mode, the number of additional games may be determined on a lottery table different from the case where the winnings are not consecutively won. In this way, the continuity between the specific combination winning in the normal game mode and the special specific combination winning in the specific mode can be associated with the continuity of the specific combination winning in the normal game mode, and the normal game mode and the specific mode can be associated with each other. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the continuity with and from the continuity in the normal game mode.

<Modification 2>
In the second modification, the special BAR replay 1 (IV = 61) is set instead of the special replay as a winning combination in the lottery table in the specific mode.

As shown in FIG. 143, at the index value IV = 61, the winning combination at the time of winning the special BAR replay is different from the first embodiment, that is, the first special replay, the sixth special replay, and the seventh. A special re-game and an eighth special re-game are set.

Each of these special re-games will be given a re-game as a privilege at the time of winning. As shown in FIG. 144, in the first special replay, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel. The "red bell" symbol stops at 32R, and it is set as a winning mode similar to the above-mentioned first lip small winning combination. In the sixth special replay prize, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, and the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M. However, any of the "BAR" symbol, the "youth" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R, which is set as a winning mode similar to the above-mentioned 6P lip small winning combination. In the 7th special replay prize, the "1st replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "youth" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. , It is set as a winning mode similar to the above-mentioned 7th reel small winning combination. In the 8th special replay prize, the "1st replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. It is set as a winning mode similar to the reel small role.

When the special BAR replay 1 is won, as shown in FIG. 145, any special replay is won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. In this case, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the 7th special re-game (BAR middle stage alignment) prize can be established, the 7th special re-game prize is established and the 7th special re-game prize is established. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when is not established, another special re-game prize is established.

If the special BAR replay 1 is won at the time of special addition in the attack mode, the VB mode winning is given. In this case, after the special addition is completed, the VB mode winning notification is performed without going through the precursor mode for the VB mode, and after the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, the 4th and 5th replay prizes are established, and then. Shift to VB mode.

The state of the special addition of the present modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 146.

As described above, in the lottery table in the specific mode in the present modification 2, the special BAR replay 1 may be won, and if the special BAR replay 1 is won, the replay prize will be won and the next game will also be a 1-bet game. Is executed. That is, in the lottery table in the present modification 2, there is a 5/6 chance of winning the special specific role of any of the above special watermelon, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, and special red 7 set, and 1/6. Win a special BAR replay 1 with a probability. If a special specific role is won with a probability of 5/6, the lottery table for special addition is acquired as described above, the number of additional games is determined, and the number of games in attack mode is added. appear.

On the other hand, if the special BAR replay 1 is won with a probability of 1/6, the VB mode winning will be given along with the replay as a privilege at the time of winning. Then, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "VB + 1" indicating that the VB mode has been won.

In this modification 2, the special addition does not end due to the re-game winning, and the special addition is also performed in the next game. Then, even in the next game, there is a possibility of winning the special BAR replay 1 with a probability of 1/6. If you win the special BAR replay 1, you will be given a VB mode win as well as a replay as a privilege at the time of winning, as described above. Then, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "VB + 1" indicating that the VB mode has been won.

As mentioned above, by winning the re-game, a special addition will be made in the next game. In the example of FIG. 146, in this game, the special watermelon is won as a special specific role instead of the special BAR replay 1, and the corresponding number of games is added. Then, the special addition will be completed by winning the special special role.

In the example of FIG. 146, it means that the VB mode was won twice for convenience. In this case, when the special addition is completed, the VB mode winning notification is performed, and the first VB mode is executed after the fourth and fifth re-game winnings. When the first VB mode is completed, the normal game state is changed to the 1st RT state by the transition result, the transition to the 2nd RT state by the 3rd re-game winning, and then 2 by the 4th and 5th re-game winning. The second VB mode is executed. When the second VB mode ends, the normal game state shifts to the second RT state, and the attack mode shifts to the attack mode.

By doing so, the playability when a special addition is performed is improved. That is, by preventing the special addition from ending at the time of winning the re-game, the inconvenience that the game in the normal game mode is executed in the 1-bet game after the special addition is eliminated.

The above configuration may be used for, for example, a special zone. Specifically, in the special addition generated in the attack mode, the one of the second embodiment is adopted, and in the special addition generated in the special zone, the one of the modification 2 is adopted. By doing so, it is possible to reproduce the inconvenience caused by the re-game winning, in which the additions occur continuously in the special zone.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification 3, when the game is played with three bets instead of one bet in the situation where the special addition flag is set, the addition according to the lottery result in the normal game mode with three bets is added. generate. In addition, in this modification 3, in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 134 (a)), when the number of bets is 3 bets in the process of step S5301, if the special addition flag is not set, step S701 If the special addition flag is set, the process proceeds to the process corresponding to the lottery result in the normal time, which is substantially the same as the process corresponding to the lottery result for the specific mode shown in FIG. 134 (b). That is, in the process when the number of bets is 3 and the special addition flag is set, each special specific combination is assigned in the processes of steps S5402 to S5414 in the flow of FIG. 134 (b). It is applied by replacing it with a specific role. For example, in the process of whether or not the special watermelon is won in step S5402, it is determined whether or not the watermelon is won, and if the watermelon is won, the watermelon table is acquired as a special combination table for special addition in step S5403.

FIG. 147 shows a special special combination table for special addition and a specific combination table for special addition. The special specific combination table of FIGS. 147 (a1) to 147 (a6) is the same as that of FIGS. 135 (a1) to 135 (a6). On the other hand, in the special special combination table, as shown in FIGS. 147 (b1) to 147 (b4), the number of games is set to be larger than the number of additional games in the special special combination table. Has been done.

On the other hand, in the replay table shown in FIG. 147 (b5), the number of additional games is not set, and the additional games do not occur. Further, the number of additional games is not set even in the red 7-matched table shown in FIG. 147 (b6).

That is, in the winning / failing determination in the normal game mode, the probability of winning the specific combination is lower than the probability of winning the special specific combination in the specific mode. In that respect, if the special addition is executed in the normal game mode and the specific combination is won, the number of games added is larger than that in the case where the special addition is executed in the specific mode and the special special combination is won. In this way, by letting the player select a game property that is significantly different, such as a special addition performed in the specific mode and a special addition performed in the normal game mode, it is possible to greatly improve the game performance at the time of the special addition. Become.

In addition, when the special addition is carried out in the normal game mode, the addition is prevented from occurring when the replay is won. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the imbalance in which the addition occurs even in the normal game mode by winning the replay with a relatively high probability.

<Modification example 4>
In the present modification 4, when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, one bet may be placed or three bets may be placed. FIG. 148 shows a part of the betting operation processing in the present modification 4.

That is, if it is determined in step S5513 in FIG. 137 that the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is performed instead of the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, the process proceeds to step S5901. In step S5901, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. When the special addition flag is set, in steps S5902 to S5904, the processing for single betting in steps S5517 and S5518 and the processing for setting the sound effect for three betting in step S5521 are performed.

If the special addition flag is not set in step S5901, a 3-card bet process is performed in step S5905, a process of subtracting 3 from the credit counter in step S5906, and a 3-card bet effect in step S5907. Set the sound. Such processing is the same as the processing of steps S5506 to S5508. After performing the process of step S5904 or step S5907, the process for this operation is terminated.

By doing so, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 can be used even in the normal game mode. In this case, for example, in a game in which a normal addition occurs in the normal game mode, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 may be operated. For example, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the notification of the number of additional games is performed at the end of one game (when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped) in the normal addition, the configuration in which the notification of the number of additional games is performed at the time of betting operation of the next game is used. do. Then, as a betting operation of the next game, a special operation instruction effect is generated to prompt the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, and the number of additional games is notified based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69. In this way, in the normal game mode, in a game in which an additional attack mode may occur and a specific combination is won, the number of additional games is notified at the end of the game and the bet of the next game. There are cases where it is performed at the time of operation (when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated) and cases where it is performed at the end of the next game, and the notification mode of the number of additional games can be various.

In this case, the number of games notified at the time of betting operation of the next game is likely to be larger than the number of games notified at the end of the specific winning combination winning game in the normal game mode, and is notified at the time of betting operation of the next game. The number of games notified at the end of the next game may be larger than the number of games. In this way, the later the notification timing is, the more advantageous the configuration can be expected, and it is possible to draw great interest to the situation in which the additional notification is performed.

The number of games notified at the earlier timing may be rewritten by the notification of the number of games at the later timing. For example, as the previous timing, at the end of the game at the time of winning the specific combination, for example, the addition of 10 games may be notified, and the addition may be rewritten to, for example, 30 games based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69. Based on the result of the game in the mode, the configuration may be rewritten to add, for example, 100 games at the end of the game. In this way, since the stepwise addition can be performed with the operation of the player, the enjoyment of each operation can be greatly improved.

<Modification 5>
In a configuration in which both 1 bet and 3 bets are possible based on the operation of the 4th credit insertion switch 69 as in the above modification 4, the number of bets based on the operation of the 4th credit insertion switch 69 is the player. The configuration may be difficult to identify. For example, in the modified example 4, when a special operation instruction effect is generated, the game is started by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 and operating the start lever 41, in which the player is in a specific mode with one bet. It is difficult to tell whether it is in the normal game mode with 3 bets or not. In this case, if the special addition is won, the game is in the specific mode, and if the special addition is not won, the game is in the normal game mode.

As described above, by making it difficult to distinguish the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game from the bet operation, it becomes more difficult for the player to understand which of the two games is being played, and the specific role (special identification) is made. Role) It is considered that each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated while hoping for winning. Therefore, it is possible to attract more interest to the game.

In particular, since the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game can be switched back and forth without going through the transition of the gaming state, it is more difficult to understand which game is being played. Since the configuration is such that the game can be moved back and forth without going through the transition of the gaming state as described above, it is possible to generate the return between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game at various timings. It is possible to shift from a 3-bet game to a 1-bet game when it is desired to generate some kind of effect or to give some kind of privilege, not limited to the case where a special addition is won as in the embodiment of. ..

<Modification 6>
In the present modification 6, the configuration of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is changed. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 in the present modification 6.

In the sixth modification, the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is provided on the side opposite to the start lever 41 with the stop switches 42 to 44 interposed therebetween. The fifth credit insertion switch 75 is a lever-type operation unit that can be switched up and down. Normally, it is arranged at the upper initial position, and when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated toward the lower operation position, the operation detection signal is mainly used as the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is valid. It is output to the control device 101. The main control device 101 determines that the single bet operation has been performed based on the operation detection signal. Inside the fifth credit input switch 75, an urging means (leaf spring or the like) (not shown) for urging from the operating position to the initial position is provided, and the urging means is operated to the operating position. 5 The credit insertion switch 75 automatically returns to the initial position.

A second start lever 76 is provided on the right side of the fifth credit input switch 75 in parallel. The second start lever 76 has the same function as the first start lever 41, and when the start conditions of each game are satisfied, when the second start lever 76 is operated, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R The rotation of the game is started and the lottery of the game is performed.

At the tip of the fifth credit input switch 75, a first operation unit 75a having a spherical shape on the left and right halves (left half) is provided. Further, at the tip of the second start lever 76, a second operation portion 76a having a spherical shape on the left and right halves (right half) is provided. Then, the fifth credit input switch 75 and the second start lever 76 are installed close to each other so that a spherical shape is formed by both the operation units 75a and 76a. Therefore, when the first operation unit 75a of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 and the second operation unit 76a of the second start lever 76 can be operated at the same time and the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated. The second start lever 76 is easily operated, and when the second start lever 76 is operated, the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is also easily operated.

In the fifth credit input switch 75, the first lever body 75b, which is closer to the slot machine 10 main body than the first operation unit 75a, is on the second start lever 76, which is closer to the slot machine 10 main body than the second operation unit 76a. A credit side cover 75c that covers the 2 lever main body 76b from above is provided. Since the credit side cover 75c is provided, when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated downward, the credit side cover 75c causes the second lever body 76b of the second start lever 76 to face downward. It is pressed and the second start lever 76 is operated. As a result, when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated, the second start lever 76 is also operated.

With the above configuration, it is possible to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R without separately operating the start lever when a special addition or the like occurs. As a result, it is possible to enhance the impression that the game in the specific mode is a special game while reducing the distinctiveness of the game in the specific mode from the game in the normal game mode.

Further, since the second start lever 76 is operated based on the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 as described above, not only the operability when a special addition or the like occurs is improved, but also the bet operation is performed. The period from to the start of the game is shorter than that of the configuration in which each is operated separately. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to confirm that the credit is subtracted or the valid line is set based on the betting operation in the game when a special addition or the like occurs. This makes it possible to lower the distinctiveness between the specific mode and the normal game mode.

As described above, the second credit insertion switch 57 and the start lever 41, which can operate one bet, are separately provided while the second start lever 76 is operated based on the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75. It is provided. Therefore, in a game in which a special addition or the like occurs, it is possible to perform the betting operation and the start operation separately. By doing so, the fifth credit insertion switch does not reduce the real thrill of the game of the slot machine 10, which starts the game based on the operation of the player and ends the game based on the operation. The operability can be improved by the 75 and the second start lever 76.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 is different from that of each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 153. FIG. 150 is a perspective view showing the auxiliary tank 54 in a downward posture, FIG. 151 is an explanatory view showing an installation state of the auxiliary tank 54 corresponding to the FF line cross section in FIG. 150, and FIG. 152 shows the auxiliary tank 54 in an upward posture. FIG. 153 is an explanatory view showing how the lower opening 603 opens and closes. In these figures, the same components as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, the auxiliary tank 54 includes a substantially box-shaped tank body 601. The tank body 601 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. The bottom plate portion 602 of the tank body 601 is provided with a lower opening 603 that penetrates the bottom plate portion 602 in the thickness direction. The lower opening 603 has a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending along the longitudinal direction of the tank body 601 in a plan view, and is arranged at the center of the bottom plate portion 602.

An inclined portion 604 is provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602 so as to surround the lower opening 603. The inclined portions 604 include front inclined portions 604a and rear inclined portions 604b provided on both sides of the lower opening portion 603 in the longitudinal direction of the bottom plate portion 602, and both sides of the lower opening portion 603 in the lateral direction of the bottom plate portion 602. It is composed of a right side inclined portion 604c and a left side inclined portion 604d provided in the above. Each of these inclined portions 604a to 604d has an inclined shape that descends toward the lower opening 603, and the medal from the guide plate 52a (see FIG. 5) is along the inclination of each inclined portion 604a to 604d. Is guided to the lower opening 603.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the medals from the guide plate 52a are once dropped onto the back surface 602b, and the medals are collected in the lower opening 603. Therefore, the lower opening 603 has an elongated shape because the opening size in a plan view is smaller than that of the lower opening 512 (see FIG. 13) according to each of the above embodiments.

The back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602 is provided with a bottom plate protruding portion 605 that projects upward. The bottom plate protruding portion 605 is continuous in a circumferential shape along the peripheral edge portion of the bottom plate portion 602, and is formed over the entire circumference of the bottom plate portion 602. The upper surface 605a of the bottom plate protrusion 605 when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture (the installation surface with the bottom plate 11a when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture) is flattened, and the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture. It is substantially parallel to the upper surface of the flange portion 571 in the case. The bottom plate protruding portion 605 is integrally formed with the tank main body 601 and is formed at a predetermined height.

As shown in FIG. 152, the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 is provided with a bottom lid 606 that opens and closes the lower opening 512 and a support portion 607 that supports the bottom lid 606. The support portion 607 has a closing position (see FIG. 151) for closing the lower opening 603 and an opening for opening the lower opening 603 by rotating the bottom lid 606 inward of the tank body 601 from the closing position. It is rotatably supported at the position (see FIG. 153 (b)).

The support portion 607 is composed of an upright portion 608 that stands up from the surface 602a inward of the tank body 601 around the lower opening 603. The upright portions 608 are the front upright portions 608a and the rear upright portions 608b provided on both sides of the lower opening portion 512 in the longitudinal direction of the bottom plate portion 602, and both sides of the lower opening portion 512 in the lateral direction of the bottom plate portion 602. The right side standing portion 608c and the left side standing portion 608d provided in the above are provided. These standing portions 608a to 608d are continuous in a frame shape in a plan view.

Each of the upright portions 608a to 608d is integrally formed with the tank main body 601 and is arranged outward from the peripheral edge portion of the lower opening 603 by a predetermined distance. That is, the distance between the front standing portion 608a and the rear standing portion 608b is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the lower opening 603, and the distance between the right standing portion 608c and the left standing portion 608d is that of the lower opening 603. It is larger than the lateral dimension. As a result, a substantially prismatic recess 609 is formed by the upright portions 608a to 608d and the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 inside each of the upright portions 608a to 608d.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b), the bottom lid 606 includes a lid body 610 having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. The longitudinal and lateral dimensions of the lid body 610 are larger than those of the lower opening 603, and the entire lower opening 603 can be closed from the inside of the tank body 601 by the bottom lid 606. It is possible. Further, each of the above dimensions of the lid body 610 is smaller than that of the recess 609, and the thickness dimension of the bottom lid 606 is smaller than the depth dimension of the recess 609, that is, the height dimension of each of the standing portions 608a to 608d. It has become.

Therefore, when the bottom lid 606 is located in the closed position, the lid main body 610 is housed inside the recess 609. At that time, as shown in FIG. 151, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 comes into contact with the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 inside each of the standing portions 608a to 608d (see FIG. Rotation to the outside of the tank body 601 beyond the closed position is restricted.

On one long side of the lid body 610, a columnar through hole 612 that penetrates the lid body 610 in the longitudinal direction is provided. On the other hand, the front standing portion 608a and the rear standing portion 608b are provided with through holes 614a and 614b corresponding to the through holes 612, respectively. These through holes 614a and 614b have a columnar shape extending in the thickness direction of each of the upright portions 608a and 608b, and are arranged coaxially with each other. A round bar-shaped rod shaft 615 is inserted into the through holes 612, 614a and 614b with the bottom lid 606 housed in the recess 609, and the bottom lid 606 and the support portion 607 (tank body 601) are inserted through the rod shaft 615. And are connected.

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), a notch 618 is formed on one side of the lid main body 610 of the bottom lid 606 in the longitudinal direction by cutting out a part of the lid main body 610 in a rectangular shape. A coil spring 617 is arranged in the notch 618 to urge the bottom lid 606 toward the closed position. A rod shaft 615 is inserted through the winding portion 617a of the coil spring 617, and in the coil spring 617, one arm portion 617b is locked in the locking hole 606f of the bottom lid 606, and the other arm portion 617c is on the left side. By being hung on the upright portion 608d, it is bridged between the bottom lid 606 and the left upright portion 608d. As shown in FIG. 151, the urging force of the coil spring 617 is strong enough to hold the bottom lid 606 in the closed position without the bottom lid 606 rotating downward due to its own weight when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture. It is set to.

In the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is compatible with automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward posture. In this case, when a part of the bottom lid 606 is exposed upward from the lower opening 603, the medal does not overflow from the storage tank 52, and the medal is not placed on the bottom lid 606, the coil spring. The urging force of 617 holds the bottom lid 606 in the closed position and closes the lower opening 603 (see FIG. 151).

When the medal overflows from the storage tank 52, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), the medal falls on the right side inclined portion 604c provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602. The medal that has fallen on the right side inclined portion 604c descends along the inclination of the right side inclined portion 604c and is guided to the lower opening 603. In this case, even if the medal moves vigorously on the right side inclined portion 604c and passes through the lower opening 603, since the left side inclined portion 604d has a reverse inclination, the left side inclined portion 604d again opens the lower side. Guided towards section 603. Further, when the medal has a strong momentum and reaches the peripheral edge of the bottom plate portion 602 after climbing the left inclined portion 604d, the medal comes into contact with the bottom plate protruding portion 605. As a result, further movement of the medal is restricted, and the medal is prevented from falling to the outside of the tank body 601.

The medal that reaches the lower opening 603 is placed on the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 that is exposed from the lower opening 603. Such a flow is repeated each time a medal is discharged from the storage tank 52. The bottom lid 606 is maintained in the closed position while the medal weight on the back surface 606b is less than the predetermined weight and the urging force of the coil spring 617 exceeds the load of the medal. As a result, medals are accumulated on and around the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606.

Then, when the medal weight on the back surface 606b reaches a predetermined weight, the load of the medal exceeds the urging force of the coil spring 617, and the bottom lid 606 rotates downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), the lower opening 603 is opened, and medals on and around the back surface 606b fall into the tank body 601. These medals pass through the tank body 601 to reach the medal discharge hole 15, and are supplied to the automatic collection device located below the slot machine 10.

After the medal on the back surface 606b has fallen, the bottom lid 606 returns to the closed position and the lower opening 603 is closed again. After that, in the same manner as described above, the medals from the storage tank 52 are temporarily stored on the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606, and the lower opening 603 is opened each time the weight of the medals on the back surface 606b reaches a predetermined weight. Will be done. In this way, since the lower opening 603 is opened by the weight of the medal, it is possible to eliminate the manual opening operation of the bottom lid 606. Therefore, it is possible to support automatic collection simply by installing the auxiliary tank 54 downward, which improves convenience.

In this case, in the present embodiment, since the medal on the back surface 606b is guided to the lower opening 603, the medal weight can be easily concentrated on the bottom lid 606. For example, when the weight of the medals discharged from the storage tank 52 is dispersed on the bottom plate portion 602, the response of the bottom lid 606 is delayed and the time until the lower opening 603 opens tends to be prolonged. As a result, medals may overflow on the bottom plate portion 602, spill out to the outside of the tank body 601 and be scattered in the housing 11. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, since the medal weight is easily concentrated on the bottom lid 606, the open responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, by guiding the medal on the back surface 606b to the lower opening 603, the lower opening 603 can be reduced, and the size of the bottom lid 606 can be reduced accordingly. .. This makes it possible to suppress interference with the upper sensor rod 16a when the bottom lid 606 opens and closes. In this case, the size of the lower opening 603 and the bottom lid 606, the position of the rotating shaft 606c, and the like are adjusted so that the dimension from the rotating shaft 606c of the bottom lid 606 to the end portion 606d on the rotating tip side can be adjusted. If the distance from the rotation shaft 606c to the upper sensor rod 16a is shorter than the distance, the interference can be reliably avoided.

When transporting the slot machine 10, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward posture, as in the case of supporting automatic collection. In this case, the bottom lid 606 is held in the closed position by the urging force of the coil spring 617, and the lower opening 603 is closed (see FIG. 151). That is, in the present embodiment, the lower opening 603 can be closed when the slot machine 10 is transported.

In this case, by installing the auxiliary tank 54 downward so as to cover the medal discharge hole 15, the space above the medal discharge hole 15 (the space inside the tank body 601) can be closed by the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, even if a foreign object or a hand enters the medal discharge hole 15, unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 is hindered by the auxiliary tank 54, and such fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the bottom lid 606 is located in the closed position, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 and the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 come into contact with each other, so that the bottom lid 606 is outside the tank body 601. It is regulated to rotate to. With such a configuration, when the slot machine 10 is transported, the bottom lid 606 does not rotate even if a foreign object or a hand is pushed up through the medal discharge hole 15 and the bottom lid 606 is pushed up, and the lower opening is opened. It is possible to make it difficult to open the portion 603. As a result, the act of opening the lower opening 603 to suppress unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 can be suppressed, and the countermeasures against fraud can be strengthened. By the way, with such a configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed upward in response to manual collection, the weight of the medal in the auxiliary tank 54 prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 from coming off.

Further, when the bottom lid 606 is in the closed state, the periphery of the bottom lid 606 is surrounded by the upright portion 608 (the bottom lid 606 enters the inside of the recess 609). In this case, the peripheral end surfaces of the bottom lid 606 can be covered by the standing portions 608a to 608d, and foreign matter or hands that have entered through the medal discharge hole 15 can be prevented from being caught on the bottom lid 606. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of hooking the foreign matter or the like on the bottom lid 606 and pulling it to rotate the bottom lid 606 toward the open position.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the height dimension of the upright portion 608 (depth dimension of the recess 609) is larger than the plate thickness dimension of the bottom lid 606, the bottom lid 606 is deeply inserted into the recess 609. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the foreign matter or the like to be caught on the bottom lid 606, and it is possible to strengthen measures against fraud.

Here, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward posture, the medal enters the inside of the tank as the bottom lid 606 is opened by the weight of the medal. In this case, when the medal enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the bottom lid 606 returns to the closed position due to the urging force of the coil spring 617. At that time, if medals remain on the bottom lid 606, the medals may be bounced off with the force of returning the bottom lid 606 to the closed position and scattered in the housing 11. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the bottom plate protruding portion 605 stands up around the bottom plate portion 602 (the receiving portion for receiving the medal from the storage tank 52), even if the medal is bounced, the medal is released. It is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from reaching the outside.

Also in the present embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, the right flange portion 571c of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 are engaged with each other, and the lifting of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted (FIG. FIG. See 151). Therefore, during transportation of the slot machine 10, even if a foreign object or a hand is pushed up through the medal discharge hole 15 to push up the auxiliary tank 54, it is difficult to create a gap between the auxiliary tank 54 and the bottom plate 11a. It is possible to make it difficult to expand the gap. As a result, it is possible to suppress an act of inserting a foreign object such as a wire into the gap and attempting to illegally access the inside of the slot machine 10.

Further, even when used in correspondence with automatic collection, for example, when a player hits the slot machine 10 and an impact is applied, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from bouncing inside the housing 11. Will be done. As a result, the displacement of the auxiliary tank 54 due to the impact is suppressed, and the inconvenience that the medal from the storage tank 52 is not guided to the medal discharge hole 15 can be suppressed.

<Modification example 1>
In this modification, the configurations of the bottom lid 606 and the bottom plate portion 602 are different from those of the third embodiment. The auxiliary tank 54 according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in FIG. 154, in this modification, an inclined surface is formed on the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 toward the end on the rotating tip side of the bottom lid 606 with the auxiliary tank 54 in the downward posture. Has been done. In this modification, the inclined surface is formed by inclining the entire bottom lid 606 and the support portion 607, but only the back surface 606b may be inclined.

With such a configuration, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 can guide the medal placed on the back surface 606b toward the end portion of the bottom lid 606 on the rotation tip side. As a result, the medal can be brought closer to the end of the bottom lid 606 on the rotation tip side, and the weight of the medal can be easily concentrated on the portion. As a result, the open responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 is enhanced, and it is possible to prevent the medals from overflowing and spilling on the back surface 606b.

In particular, since the right inclined portion 604c of the bottom plate portion 602 is inclined downward toward the lower opening 603 (bottom lid 606), the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 and the right inclined portion 604c form a V-shaped groove. Can be configured. As a result, it becomes easier to collect medals on the portion of the bottom lid 606 on the rotation tip side side, and the open responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be suitably improved.

With the above configuration, the following effects can be expected. As described above, when the bottom lid 606 returns to the closed position due to the urging force of the coil spring 617, if a medal remains on the bottom lid 606, the medal is returned with the momentum to return the bottom lid 606 to the closed position. There is a risk of being bounced off. In this regard, since the back surface 606a (the surface on which the medal is placed) of the bottom lid 606 is inclined downward toward the rotation tip side of the bottom lid 606, it is difficult for the medal to remain on the bottom lid 606, and the medal Can suppress the jumping of the. Further, since the medal can be led out into the tank even if the opening amount of the bottom lid 606 is relatively small, the amount of rotation required for closing is reduced, and even if the medal remains, the flying amount can be suppressed to a small amount.

It is not always necessary to incline the entire back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606, and only the portion exposed upward from the lower opening 603 may be inclining, or a part of the portion may be inclined.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the configuration of the bottom lid 606 is different from that of the first modification. The auxiliary tank 54 according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 is provided with a back surface projecting portion 621 that projects upward from the back surface 606b. The back surface protruding portion 621 is integrally formed with the lid main body 610, and is provided on the exposed portion 606e exposed upward from the lower opening 603 in a state where the bottom lid 606 is located at the closed position.

The height dimension of the back surface protrusion 621 does not interfere with the bottom plate portion 602 (the peripheral wall surface of the lower opening 603) when the bottom lid 606 opens and closes, and the back surface protrudes when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture. The tip of the portion 621 is set to a predetermined size so as not to protrude below the bottom plate protruding portion 605. Specifically, the size is set to be higher than the height when a plurality of medals (for example, about 5) are stacked flat, and the height is such that the medals guided by the right-side inclined portion 604c can be blocked.

The back surface protruding portion 621 is arranged at a position closer to the rotating shaft 606c when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 606c, and is predetermined from the wall portion 603a on the rotating tip side of the peripheral wall portion of the lower opening 603. They are separated by a distance. As a result, in the exposed portion 606e of the bottom lid 606, a space on which the medal can be placed is secured in the portion on the rotating tip side of the back surface protruding portion 621. Further, the back surface protruding portion 621 is formed linearly from one end to the other end of the exposed portion 606e so as to vertically traverse the exposed portion 606e in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 606c in a plan view.

With such a configuration, the medal guided by the right side inclined portion 604c can be blocked by the back surface protruding portion 621. As a result, the medals can be collected on the front side of the back surface protruding portion 621 in the exposed portion 606e, and the medals can be brought to the portion separated from the rotation shaft 606c. As a result, the weight of the medal can be easily concentrated on such a portion, and the opening responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be enhanced.

At that time, since the back surface protruding portion 621 is separated from the wall portion 603a by a predetermined distance and a space for placing the medal is secured in the exposed portion 606e, the dammed medal is preferably placed on the bottom lid 606. Can be done. As a result, the damming prevents the medal from staying on the right side inclined portion 604c side, and the weight of the medal discharged from the storage tank 52 can be efficiently applied to the bottom lid 606.

The configuration for blocking the medals is not limited to the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606, and may be provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602. As such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), a configuration in which a back surface protruding portion 622 is provided above the wall portion 603b on the rotation base end side of the peripheral wall portion of the lower opening portion 603 can be considered. Be done.

In this case, the lower opening 603 is arranged so as to be biased toward the rotation tip side with respect to the bottom lid 606 in the radial direction of the rod shaft 615, and the portion of the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 on the rotation tip side is twisted. It is preferable to have a configuration in which a large number of exposed portions 606e are formed. As a result, the weight of the dammed medal can be efficiently applied to the portion on the rotating tip side, and the opening responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be enhanced.

The configuration in which the lower opening 603 is biased toward the rotation tip side with respect to the bottom lid 606 can be applied not only to this modification but also to each of the above-described embodiments and other modifications. .. Further, both the back surface protruding portions 621 and 622 may be provided, or the wall portion 603b may be raised to prevent the medal. Further, in this modification, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 is inclined in the same manner as in the modification 1, but the back surface 606b may be substantially horizontal as in the third embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the connection structure between the auxiliary tank 54 and the housing 11 is different from each of the above-described embodiments. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 159. 156 is a plan view of the auxiliary tank, FIG. 157 (a) is a sectional view taken along line GG of FIG. 156, FIG. 156 is a sectional view taken along line GG of the tank body, and FIG. FIG. 159 (a) is a perspective view of the bottom lid 704, and FIG. 159 (a) is a perspective view of the back surface of the bottom lid 704.

As shown in FIG. 156, the auxiliary tank 54 includes a tank body 701 having a bottomed substantially box shape whose upper portion opens upward. The tank body 701 has a bottom plate portion 701a having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view, and a front wall portion 701b, a rear wall portion 701c, a right side wall portion 701d, and a left side wall portion 701e that stand up from the bottom plate portion 701a so as to surround the bottom plate portion 701a. An upper opening 702 having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view is formed on the upper portion thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the tank main body 701 includes a lower opening 703 provided in the bottom plate portion 701a and a bottom lid 704 that opens and closes the lower opening 703. The bottom lid 704 is rotatably supported by a support portion 705 provided on the bottom plate portion 701a.

The lower opening 703 has a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view, and penetrates the bottom plate portion 701a in the thickness direction. The lower opening 703 is opened vertically, leaving a part at the peripheral edge of the bottom plate 701a, and is arranged close to the front wall 701b as a whole. In the bottom plate portion 701a, the bottom plate rear portion 701g and the bottom plate front portion 701f are arranged on both sides of the lower opening 703, and the bottom plate rear portion 701g is longer in the longitudinal direction than the bottom plate front portion 701f.

As shown in FIG. 159, the bottom lid 704 includes a substantially rectangular lid main body 706 in a plan view and a shaft portion 707 integrally formed with the lid main body 706. The lid main body 706 has larger dimensions in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction than the lower opening 703, and has a size capable of closing the lower opening 703. The shaft portion 707 is provided on one of the short side portions facing the longitudinal direction in the lid main body 706, and has a round bar shape extending along the width direction (extending direction of the short side portion) of the lid main body 706. .. The length dimension of the shaft portion 707 is larger than the width dimension of the lid body 706, and both ends of the shaft portion 707 in the axial direction protrude laterally from both ends of the lid body 706 in the lateral direction. ..

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the support portion 705 includes a right side support portion 708 and a left side support portion 709 provided at both ends of the bottom plate portion 701a in the lateral direction in the bottom plate front portion 701f.

The right side support portion 708 includes a right side bulging portion 710 that bulges upward from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. The bulging dimension (height) of the right bulging portion 710 is larger than the shaft diameter of the shaft portion 707 of the bottom lid 704. Inside the right bulging portion 710, a right hole portion 711 having a bell-shaped vertical cross section and extending in the lateral direction of the bottom plate portion 701a is provided. In the right hole portion 711, the end portion on the left side support portion 709 side is an open end, and the end portion on the opposite side thereof is closed. The depth dimension of the right hole portion 711 from the opening end is larger than the protrusion dimension of the shaft portion 707 from the lid main body 706.

The left side support portion 709 has the same configuration as the right side support portion 708 except that it is symmetrical. That is, it includes a left-side bulging portion 713 that bulges upward from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, and a left-side hole portion 714 provided in the left-side bulging portion 713.

Both ends of the shaft portion 707 are inserted into the holes 711 and 714 of the right side support portion 708 and the left side support portion 709 with the bottom lid 704 arranged inside the tank body 701. As a result, the bottom lid 704 is connected to the tank body 701 in a state where it can rotate in the vertical direction, and the bottom lid 704 closes the lower opening 703 from the inside of the tank body 701, and the bottom lid from the closed state. It is possible to switch between an open state in which the lower opening 703 is opened by rotating the 704 upward.

As shown in FIG. 157 (a), the front wall portion 701b of the tank body 701 is provided with a front wall bulging portion 716 that bulges forward. The front wall bulging portion 716 is arranged above the front wall portion 701b, and its width is slightly larger than that of the lid main body 706. When the bottom lid 704 is rotated toward the open position, a part of the lid main body 706 can be inserted into the inside of the front wall bulging portion 716.

Each wall portion 716a facing the front wall bulging portion 716 in the lateral width direction is provided with a protrusion 716b that projects from each wall portion 716a toward the inside of the front wall bulging portion 716 in a semicircular shape. Each of these protrusions 716b is arranged at the upper end of each wall portion 716a at a predetermined distance rearward from the front portion 716c of the front wall bulging portion 716. The distance between the protrusions 716b in the lateral width direction of the front wall bulging portion 716 is slightly narrower than the lateral width dimension of the lid body 706, and the bottom lid 704 is rotated toward the inside of the front wall bulging portion 716. When this is done, the lid body 706 is elastically deformed and enters between the protrusion 716b and the front portion 716c. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the bottom lid 704 in the open position.

A handle portion 718 is provided on the front wall portion 701b of the tank body 701. Since the handle portion 718 has the same configuration as the handle portion 503 according to each of the above embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first state in which the auxiliary tank 54 is engaged with the engaging portion 721 in the housing 11 to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54, and the first state in which the engagement is released and the housing 11 is released. The configuration is such that it can be switched between the second state, which allows the auxiliary tank 54 to be taken out from the inside, and the second state. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163 in addition to FIGS. 156 to 159. FIG. 160 is an explanatory view showing an installation state of the auxiliary tank 54 corresponding to the cross section taken along the line HH of FIG. 156, FIG. 161 is an explanatory view showing a state before engagement, and FIG. 162 is an explanatory view showing an engaged state. FIG. 163 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the engagement is disengaged. In FIG. 163, the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 are not shown for convenience.

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the bottom plate portion 701a of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided with a columnar bottom-side through hole 720 that penetrates the bottom plate portion 701a in the thickness direction. The bottom through hole 720 is arranged at the rear end portion 701g of the bottom plate portion 701a, and is located at the rear end portion of the auxiliary tank 54. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with an engaging portion 721 that can be engaged with the bottom through hole 720. The engaging portion 721 includes an accommodating portion 722 provided on the bottom plate 11a, and an engaging projection 723 accommodated in the accommodating portion 722 so that a part of the engaging portion 721 protrudes upward from the surface of the bottom plate 11a.

The engaging projection 723 includes a substantially columnar shaft portion 724 extending in the vertical direction and a head portion 725 connected to the upper end portion of the shaft portion 724, and the shaft portion 724 and the head portion 725 are integrally formed. There is. The head 725 has a substantially disk shape, and its diameter is larger than that of the shaft portion 724.

The accommodating portion 722 has a bottomed vertical hole shape that opens upward, and the first hole portion 726 provided from the upper end position to the intermediate position of the accommodating portion 722 and the lower end of the accommodating portion 722 from the intermediate position. It is provided with a second hole portion 727 provided up to the position. Both the first hole portion 726 and the second hole portion 727 have a substantially cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction. The diameter of the first hole portion 726 is larger than the diameter of the head 725 of the engaging projection 723, and the depth dimension of the first hole portion 726 is sufficiently larger than the thickness dimension of the head 725. Therefore, the head 725 can be accommodated inside the first hole 726. The second hole portion 727 is formed so as to extend downward from the center of the bottom surface 726a of the first hole portion 726, and the shaft portion 724 of the engaging protrusion 723 is inserted into the second hole portion 727. The diameter of the second hole portion 727 is slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 724, and the engaging projection 723 is supported by the second hole portion 727 so as to be able to move up and down.

A coil spring 729 is arranged between the lower surface 725a of the head 725 and the bottom surface 726a of the first hole 726. The coil spring 729 is arranged in a state where the shaft portion 724 is inserted, and the engaging projection 723 is urged upward by the urging force of the coil spring 729.

Here, the diameter Dc of the head 725 is smaller than the minimum diameter Dd (see FIG. 158) of the bottom through hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, when the bottom through hole 720 is located above the head 725 and the two face each other, the head 725 can be inserted into the bottom through hole 720. When the head 725 is inserted into the bottom through hole 720, the peripheral wall portion 720a of the bottom through hole 720 and the peripheral surface 725b of the head 725 come into contact with each other, thereby restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 back and forth and left and right. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the thickness dimension of the head 725 is smaller than the dimension of the bottom through hole 720 in the vertical direction (insertion direction of the head 725), but these may be the same. , The former may be larger than the latter.

The arrangement position of the engaging portion 721 (engaging projection 723) in the front-rear direction (depth direction of the housing 11) is the engaging portion 721 when the auxiliary tank 54 is inserted into the predetermined installation position in the housing 11. Is set to engage relative to the bottom through hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160, the rear end portion of the auxiliary tank 54 is at a position close to the back plate 11b of the housing 11, in other words, the front surface even if the front door 12 (see FIG. 3) is closed. The back surface of the door 12 is in a position where it does not collide with the auxiliary tank 54. By setting such a position as the installation position, the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 do not interfere with each other even if the front door 12 is closed with the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 engaged. Damage to the auxiliary tank 54, the front door 12, and the engaging portion 721 due to the closure of the front door 12 is avoided.

On the other hand, the arrangement position of the engaging portion 721 in the left-right direction (horizontal width direction of the housing 11) is such that the end portion (right flange portion) of the housing 11 on the right side plate 11c side of the auxiliary tank 54 abuts on the right side plate 11c. When they are made to fit, the left and right positions of the engaging portion 721 and the bottom through hole 720 are set to match. In this case, the engaging portion 721 and the bottom through hole 720 can be aligned by simply installing the auxiliary tank 54 at a position where it is in contact with the right side plate 11c. As a result, not only the engaging work can be facilitated, but also the auxiliary tank 54 can be packed and installed on the right side plate 11c side, which is advantageous in securing the installation space for other mounted parts such as the hopper device 51.

As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159 (b), the back surface 706a of the lid main body 706 is provided with a push-in protrusion 733 and two support protrusions 734 arranged on both sides of the push-in protrusion 733. ing. These push-in protrusions 733 and support protrusions 734 are integrally formed with the lid body 706.

The push-in protrusion 733 is formed at the end of the lid body 706 on the side opposite to the shaft portion 707, and is arranged at a position corresponding to the bottom through hole 720. As shown in FIG. 158, the pushing protrusion 733 has a columnar shape extending downward, and the tip thereof is chamfered in a tapered shape. The diameter De of the pushing protrusion 733 is smaller than the minimum diameter Dd of the bottom through hole 720, and the pushing protrusion 733 can be inserted into the bottom through hole 720.

The height dimension of the push-in protrusion 733 corresponds to the depth dimension of the bottom through hole 720. Specifically, the pushing protrusion 733 is such that the remaining dimension Ha obtained by subtracting the height dimension of the support protrusion 734 is the same as the depth dimension of the bottom through hole 720 or slightly larger than the depth dimension. The height dimension of is set.

Each support protrusion 734 has a substantially semicircular cross section, and is arranged at a corner at an end of the lid body 706 opposite to the shaft portion 707. When the bottom lid 704 is set to the closed position and the lower opening 703 is closed, a space corresponding to the lower opening 703 is formed below the bottom lid 704, so that the space is accommodated in the auxiliary tank 54. The bottom lid 704 may bend due to the weight of the medal. Even if such bending occurs, the support protrusion 734 comes into contact with the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, so that the bottom lid 704 can be supported in a well-balanced manner.

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the tank body 701 has an upper sensor insertion hole 731a through which the upper sensor rod 16a (see FIG. 6) is inserted and a lower sensor insertion hole through which the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted. 731b is provided. These sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b are formed in a horizontally long shape, and their height positions correspond to the height positions of the sensor rods 16a and 16b. Specifically, the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a is the same as or the distance Lj (see FIG. 160) from the surface of the bottom plate 11a to the lower end of the upper sensor rod 16a. It is slightly shorter than Lj. Further, the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the lower sensor insertion hole 731b is the same as or slightly smaller than the distance Lm (see FIG. 160) from the surface of the bottom plate 11a to the lower sensor rod 16b. It is short.

Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the above-mentioned installation position, the auxiliary tank 54 and the sensor rods 16a and 16b are in contact with each other or close to each other at the lower ends of the sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b. As a result, even if the auxiliary tank 54 tries to move upward, it is regulated by the sensor rods 16a and 16b, and the lifting of the auxiliary tank 54 from the bottom plate 11a is suppressed.

In this embodiment, both the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the lower sensor insertion hole 731b. Corresponds to the distances Lj and Lm, respectively, but it may be configured to perform only one of them. Further, as shown in FIG. 160, the vertical width of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b is substantially the same as the diameter (vertical width) of each sensor rod 16a, 16b, but the present invention is not limited to this. The vertical width of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b may be larger than the diameter of each sensor rod 16a, 16b. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing spillage of medals from the sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b when the medals are housed, the configuration of the present embodiment is preferable.

Next, a method of engaging the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162.

In engaging the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721, first, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a with the front surface of the housing 11 open. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located on the front side of the tip portions of the sensor rods 16a and 16b. At that time, as described above, by guiding the auxiliary tank 54 with the right side plate 11c, the left and right positions of the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 can be easily aligned.

From that state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed toward the back inside the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid and moved on the bottom plate 11a. Then, as shown in FIG. 161, when the bottom through hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 721 are brought close to each other to some extent, the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 701a and the engaging projection protruding from the surface of the bottom plate 11a are formed. It comes into contact with 723.

Here, in the present embodiment, an engaging inclined portion 745 is provided at the front end portion (contact portion with the head portion 725) of the bottom plate portion 701a. The distance between the engaging inclined portion 745 and the bottom plate 11a decreases from one end on the engaging projection 723 side toward the bottom through hole 720, in other words, the auxiliary tank 54 descends when viewed in the direction opposite to the sliding moving direction. It has a slanted shape. An arc-shaped portion 746 that is convex outward is provided above the engaging inclined portion 745, and the engaging inclined portion 745 and the front wall portion 701b are connected by the arc-shaped portion 746.

Due to the fact that the engaging protrusion 723 is urged by the coil spring 729, the engaging protrusion 723 protrudes from the bottom plate 11a, and the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging protrusion 723 interfere with each other in the process of sliding the auxiliary tank 54. There is a risk of At this point, by providing the arcuate portion 746 and the engaging inclined portion 745, the engaging projection 723 can be pushed down and guided into the accommodating portion 722. As a result, the auxiliary tank 54 can be smoothly slid to the position where the engaging protrusion 723 and the bottom through hole 720 are engaged, and damage to the engaging protrusion 723 and the like due to the installation of the auxiliary tank 54 can be suppressed. It becomes.

When the engaging protrusion 723 is pushed down, the coil spring 729 is pushed down accordingly, and the restoring force is stored. Then, as shown in FIG. 162, when the auxiliary tank 54 reaches the above-mentioned installation position and the bottom side through hole 720 is located above the engaging protrusion 723, the pushing force against the engaging protrusion 723 disappears. The restoring force of the coil spring 729 raises the engaging projection 723. As a result, the engaging projection 723 is inserted into the bottom through hole 720, and both are engaged. This makes it possible to regulate the movement of the auxiliary tank 54.

Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in the above-mentioned installation mode during transportation of the slot machine 10, rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 in the housing 11 can be suppressed, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be suppressed during transportation. It is possible to prevent the peripheral member from colliding with the peripheral member and being damaged.

Next, a method of disengaging the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 will be described with reference to FIGS. 160, 162 and 163.

It is necessary to disengage the auxiliary tank 54 when it is used in correspondence with manual recovery. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is provided by using the engaging method described above (see FIGS. 161 and 162). Install at the installation position. In this case, as shown in FIG. 162, the lower surface of the pushing protrusion 733 comes into contact with the upper surface of the head portion 725 of the engaging protrusion 723, and the pushing protrusion 733 is pushed up together with the engaging protrusion 723.

As a result of the bottom lid 704 being pushed up accordingly, as shown in FIG. 160, the bottom lid 704 is in a state of floating by a predetermined height from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, in other words, in a state of being slightly rotated upward. Stand still. Further, the engaging protrusion 723 is raised and inserted into the bottom through hole 720, so that the engaging protrusion 723 and the bottom through hole 720 are engaged with each other.

After that, when the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are sequentially housed in the auxiliary tank 54, the medals are placed on the bottom lid 704, and the load of the medals acts on the bottom lid 704. Since the load of the medal also acts on the coil spring 729 through the pushing protrusion 733 and the engaging protrusion 723, the coil spring 729 is gradually compressed and the bottom lid is gradually compressed as the medal weight on the bottom lid 704 increases. The 704 rotates downward little by little. As a result, the engaging protrusion 723 is pushed down by the pushing protrusion 733, and the head 725 gradually comes out from the bottom through hole 720.

When the medal storage capacity of the auxiliary tank 54 exceeds a predetermined amount, the head 725 is completely pushed out from the bottom through hole 720 as shown in FIG. 163. As a result, the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging protrusion 723 is released, and the auxiliary tank 54 is allowed to move. That is, when medals are accumulated to some extent in the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 is naturally allowed to be taken out, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected.

By the way, the capacity (weight) of the medals to be disengaged is smaller than the capacity (full state) of the medals in which the sensor rods 16a and 16b are conductive, and the capacity is reached before the fullness is detected. It is good to do. In this case, the engagement can be disengaged with a margin for the work timing of the medal collection (removal of the auxiliary tank 54) by the employee of the game hall, and it is possible to suppress that the collection work is hindered.

The engagement between the engaging portion 721 and the bottom through hole 720 can also be disengaged by human operation. That is, the engagement between the two can be released by putting a hand in the auxiliary tank 54 and pushing the bottom lid 704 downward. With such a configuration, even if the medal is not stored in the auxiliary tank 54 or the storage capacity is small, the engagement can be disengaged as needed, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out as appropriate. Is possible.

By the way, for example, when the auxiliary tank 54 is temporarily withdrawn in an attempt to pick up the medals scattered in the housing 11, the medals are not stored in the auxiliary tank 54 or the medal storage capacity is small. However, the auxiliary tank 54 may be taken out. In this case, in the configuration in which the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging protrusion 723 are engaged, if a forcible removal operation is performed, the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 721 may be damaged.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 158, a release inclined portion 741 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom side through hole 720 in order to correspond to the above-mentioned take-out operation. The release inclined portion 741 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom side through hole 720 located on the side opposite to the take-out direction (pull-out direction) of the auxiliary tank 54 with respect to the head 725. The distance between the release inclined portion 741 and the bottom plate 11a decreases from one end on the engaging protrusion 723 side toward the rear wall portion 701c side. It has a slanted shape.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out, the engaging projection 723 comes into contact with the release inclined portion 741 and is pushed downward along the inclination of the release inclined portion 741 while sliding on the surface thereof. Therefore, if the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out with a certain degree of pulling force, the engaging projection 723 can be retracted from the bottom through hole 720 accordingly. As a result, damage to the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 721 can be suppressed even when a forcible removal operation is performed.

In the bottom through hole 720, the peripheral wall surface 743 on the side opposite to the release inclined portion 741 is not inclined and is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the peripheral surface of the head 725. That is, when the slide moves in the installation direction, the head 725 is positively hooked on the peripheral wall surface 743 to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, even when the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed in vigorously when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed, the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted from moving beyond the installation position to the back, and the auxiliary tank 54 may violently collide with the back plate 11b. It is suppressed.

Next, a case where the auxiliary tank 54 is made compatible with automatic collection will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram when the auxiliary tank 54 is used in correspondence with automatic collection.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is used for automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is once taken out from the housing 11 with the front surface of the housing 11 open, and the bottom lid 704 is rotated upward to lower the auxiliary tank 54. The side opening 703 is opened. At that time, the bottom lid 704 is rotated until a part of the lid main body 706 enters between the protrusions 716b and the front portion 716c at the front wall bulging portion 716. In that state, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located on the front side of the tip portions of the sensor rods 16a and 16b.

From that state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed toward the back inside the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid and moved on the bottom plate 11a. Then, the auxiliary tank 54 is advanced to a position where the lower opening 703 and the medal discharge hole 15 communicate with each other. At that time, the auxiliary tank 54 is stopped at a position on the front side where the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged so that the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are not engaged. The installation of the auxiliary tank 54 is completed by the above operation.

In the present embodiment, the dimension of the bottom lid 704 in the longitudinal direction is sufficiently larger than the height dimension of the tank body 701. Therefore, in the state where the bottom lid 704 is rotated to the open position, the end portion 704a on the rotation tip side of the bottom lid 704 is located above the upper end portion of the tank body 701. An induction plate 52a (see FIG. 5) is arranged above the tank body 701 so as to protrude from the storage tank 52 toward the auxiliary tank 54.

In the present embodiment, the position of the guide plate 52a, the longitudinal dimension of the auxiliary tank 54, and the bottom lid 704 so that the guide plate 52a is located in the middle position from the open position to the closed position of the bottom lid 704. The open position etc. are adjusted. Therefore, even when a strong impact such that the bottom lid 704 rotates toward the bottom plate portion 701a is applied to the slot machine 10, the bottom lid 704 comes into contact with the outer surface of the front side wall portion 52b of the guide plate 52a. The rotation of the bottom lid 704 is restricted by. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom lid 704 from falling to the closed position and prevent the inconvenience that the lower opening 703 is closed.

Moreover, by bringing the bottom lid 704 into contact with the outer surface of the front side wall portion 52b of the guide plate 52a, the rotation of the bottom lid 704 in the closing direction is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the bottom lid 704 from blocking the medal discharge port of the guide plate 52a and the bottom lid 704 from interposing between the guide plate 52a and the lower opening 703. Even if the bottom lid 704 is maintained leaning against the guide plate 52a as it is, the medals from the storage tank 52 can be continuously guided to the lower opening 703, and the medals are continuously supplied to the automatic collection device. It will be possible.

In this embodiment, the protrusion 716b may be omitted. However, double protection with the guide plate 52a is provided against the tilt of the bottom lid 704, and the generation of abnormal noise due to the collision is suppressed by reducing the number of collisions of the bottom lid 704 with the guide plate 52a. In consideration of the above, it is preferable to use the configuration of the above embodiment.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A bottom-side through hole 720 provided in the auxiliary tank 54 and an engaging portion 721 provided in the housing 11 are provided, and the presence or absence of engagement between the two is switched according to the state of accommodating medals in the auxiliary tank 54. And said. Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is transported, rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 can be suppressed by engaging the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721. On the other hand, when collecting the medals housed in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 can be switched to the non-engaged state according to the medals accumulated in the auxiliary tank 54, and the casing can be used. It becomes possible to allow the auxiliary tank 54 to be taken out from the body 11.

When the medal is not accommodated in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other, and as the medal is accommodated in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through hole 720 is engaged. The structure is such that the portion 721 is not engaged with the portion 721. In this case, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 during transportation when the medal is not expected to be stored in the auxiliary tank 54, while the auxiliary tank 54 is in operation. The auxiliary tank 54 is naturally allowed to be taken out according to the medals being housed in the medals. As a result, not only the switching operation by the hall employee becomes unnecessary and the troublesomeness can be eliminated, but also the inconvenience that the engaging portion 721 or the like is damaged by performing the taking-out operation without forgetting the switching can be suppressed.

When a medal is housed in the auxiliary tank 54, a bottom lid 704 that is displaced downward due to the weight of the medal is provided, and as the bottom lid 704 is displaced downward, the engaging portion 721 (engagement protrusion 723) is provided. It is configured to be pushed out from the bottom through hole 720 and moved to the non-engaged position.

According to the above configuration, a sensor for detecting the weight, a drive unit for driving the engagement protrusion 723, and a control configuration for controlling the drive unit according to the detection result of the sensor are not required, which simplifies the configuration and reduces the bottom cost. It becomes advantageous to. Further, since the bottom lid 704 can efficiently receive the weight of the medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the engaging portion 721 is moved by utilizing the displacement of the bottom lid 704 to accommodate the medals. The responsiveness of the engaging portion 721 to the change of the above can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the switching to the non-engaged state from being delayed and causing trouble in taking out the auxiliary tank 54.

The bottom lid 704 is provided with a push-in protrusion 733 at a position on the back side of the housing 11, and a bottom through hole 720 and an engaging portion 721 are provided on the back side of the housing 11.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out from the inside of the housing 11 by the hall employee, it is conceivable that the front side of the auxiliary tank 54 is lightly lifted and then slid to the front side along the bottom plate 11a in that state. In this case, for example, if the push-in protrusion 733, the bottom-side through hole 720, and the engagement portion 721 are arranged on the front side of the housing 11, the push-in protrusion 733 is lifted as the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted. Is separated from the engaging portion 721, and it is conceivable that the unengaged state is unintentionally switched to the engaged state due to this.

In this regard, since the pushing protrusion 733, the bottom through hole 720, and the engaging portion 721 are arranged on the back side of the housing 11, the pushing of the engaging portion 721 by the pushing protrusion 733 can be easily maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the unintentional switching from the non-engaged state to the engaged state. As a result, the auxiliary tank 54 can be smoothly pulled out.

When the sensor rods 16a and 16b are inserted into the sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b, the peripheral edges of the sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b and the sensor rods 16a and 16b come into contact with or approach each other in the auxiliary tank 54. The structure is such that movement is restricted. As a result, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 can be additionally regulated separately from the engagement of the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721, and the suppression of rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 can be strengthened. At that time, since the sensor rods 16a and 16b are utilized, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated configuration for engagement, and an increase in the number of mounted parts can be suppressed.

By sliding the auxiliary tank 54 placed on the bottom plate 11a, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other. In this case, the two can be engaged by moving the auxiliary tank 54 on the bottom plate 11a without directly operating the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721, and the engaging operation can be easily performed. It will be possible. Further, with such a configuration, the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 can be arranged in a place that is difficult for the operator (the person who performs the engaging operation) to reach, and the layout can be freely arranged. The degree is improved.

Moreover, since the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other by the sliding movement to the back inside the housing 11, further simplification of the engaging operation can be promoted. That is, when closing the front door 12 after installing the auxiliary tank 54, it is necessary to push the auxiliary tank 54 into the inner part of the housing 11 in advance so that the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 do not interfere with each other. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the pushing operation of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging operation of the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 in one operation. At that time, since the engagement is naturally made by performing the normal installation work, it can also contribute to the suppression of forgetting to engage.

The bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are configured to engage with each other in the front-rear direction. In this case, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the front-rear direction can be restricted by the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid to be installed, the movement is restricted so that it can be grasped that the auxiliary tank 54 has been installed at an appropriate position.

When the bottom lid 704 is opened, the end portion 704a on the rotation tip side of the bottom lid 704 is located above the upper end portion of the tank body 701, and above the tank body 701 in the housing 11. A guide plate 52a is provided at a predetermined position so as to contact the bottom lid 704 in the open state at a predetermined open position. As a result, even if the bottom lid 704 is tilted due to an impact or vibration applied to the slot machine 10, the rotation of the bottom lid 704 can be regulated by the guide plate 52a, and it is possible to prevent the lower opening 703 from being unintentionally closed. ..

At that time, the bottom lid 704 is switched from the closed state to the front side to switch to the open state, so that the bottom lid 704 in the open state is positioned on the front door 12 side with respect to the guide plate 52a. Can be done. As a result, inconveniences such as the medal supplied from the guide plate 52a to the auxiliary tank 54 hitting the bottom lid 704 and splashing toward the front door 12 side and hitting the front door 12 can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the medal enters between the front door 12 and the tank body 701.

<Modification example 1>
In this modified example, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid and moved toward the installation position in a form corresponding to automatic collection, a configuration for defining the forward end position of the auxiliary tank 54 is added. It is different from the embodiment of. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 168. 165 is a perspective view of the bottom lid 704, FIG. 166 is a plan view of the tank body 701, FIG. 167 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state of the extension plate 751 when closed, and FIG. An explanatory view showing a state of 751 and FIG. 168 is an explanatory view showing how the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 165, an extension plate 751 extending outward is provided on the short side portion of the bottom lid 704 on the shaft portion 707 side. The extension plate 751 is provided on the side opposite to the lid main body 706 with the shaft portion 707 interposed therebetween, and is integrally formed with the shaft portion 707. The extension plate 751 has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the axial direction of the shaft portion 707 in a plan view, and is arranged at the center of the shaft portion 707. The length of the extension plate 751 in the extension direction is the distance from the rotation shaft 707a of the shaft portion 707 (see FIG. 167 (a)) to the tip portion 751a of the extension plate 751 from the rotation shaft 707a to the bottom plate portion. It is set to be longer than the distance to the back surface of 701a.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the tank main body 701, a notch portion 752 is formed in the bottom plate front portion 701f of the bottom plate portion 701a corresponding to the extension plate 751. The notch portion 752 has a rectangular shape in a plan view, and has a size that allows the extension plate 751 of the bottom lid 704 to pass through.

In such a configuration, when the bottom lid 704 is in the closed position, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), the extension plate 751 is located above the notch 752 and is housed inside the tank body 701. There is. On the other hand, when the bottom lid 704 is rotated upward toward the open position, the extension plate 751 is rotated in the opposite direction (downward) on the opposite side of the lid body 706, as shown in FIG. 167 (b). It moves, passes through the notch 752, and the tip 751a projects downward from the back surface of the bottom plate 701a.

As shown in FIG. 168, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with a recess 754 formed by cutting out a part of the surface of the bottom plate 11a. The recess 754 is in front of the medal discharge hole 15 in the movement path of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position (the position where the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged). It is located on the side (see the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 6). More specifically, the recess 754 is arranged on the passage region through which the tip end portion 751a of the extension plate 751 passes when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid and moved toward the installation position on the bottom plate 11a. The depth of the recess 754 is deeper than the protrusion length from the back surface of the bottom plate portion 701a of the extension plate 751, and when the extension plate 751 passes over the recess 754, it can enter the recess 754. (See FIG. 168 (a)).

Then, when the auxiliary tank 54 advances toward the installation position with the extension plate 751 inserted into the recess 754, the boundary between the recess 754 and the surface of the bottom plate 11a is as shown in FIG. 168 (b). The tip portion 751a of the extension plate 751 is hooked on the step portion 755 formed in the above. As a result, the advance of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted, and the position of the moving end of the auxiliary tank 54 is defined.

In this modification, the position of the step portion 755 is set so that the tip portion 751a of the extension plate 751 comes into contact with the step portion 755 of the recess 754 before the auxiliary tank 54 reaches the installation position. Further, in this case, the position of the step portion 755 is such that when the entire auxiliary tank 54 enters the housing 11 and the front door 12 is closed, the back surface of the front door 12 and the front end portion of the auxiliary tank 54 (front door 12 side). It is also in a position where it does not interfere with the end of the door.

Therefore, when the bottom lid 704 is rotated to the open position, the auxiliary tank 54 is allowed to advance to a position where the front door 12 can be closed, and the auxiliary tank 54 is located in front of the installation position. Can be stopped. Therefore, even if the operator (employee of the game hall) performing the pushing operation does not pay special attention to the position of the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 do not engage with each other and the front door 12 The auxiliary tank 54 can be installed at an appropriate position where the door can be closed.

On the other hand, when the bottom lid 704 is positioned in the closed position and the auxiliary tank 54 corresponds to the transportation of the slot machine 10 or manual collection, the extension plate 751 is housed inside the tank body 701 as described above. The tip portion 751a does not protrude downward from the back surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. Therefore, the tip portion 751a and the step portion 755 do not get caught, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be smoothly advanced to the installation position.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the configuration for disengaging the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an installation state of the auxiliary tank 54. In this modification, the structure of the bottom lid 514 of the auxiliary tank 54 and its support is the same as that of the first embodiment. These are designated by the same reference numerals as those in the drawings of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 169, an engaging drive portion 761 for driving the engaging projection 723 of the engaging portion 721 is attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11. The engaging drive unit 761 has a solenoid as a drive source and a transmission mechanism as a driving force transmitting means for connecting the solenoid and the engaging projection 723 and transmitting the driving force of the solenoid to the engaging projection 723. ing. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control device 101 and is driven based on a drive signal from the main control device 101.

When the output of the drive signal from the main controller 101 is stopped and the solenoid is in the non-driven (non-excited) state, the engaging projection 723 is held in the raised position (engaged position) by the urging force of the coil spring 729. Then, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other. On the other hand, when a drive signal is output from the main control device 101 and the solenoid is driven (excited), the engaging projection 723 moves from the ascending position to the descending position (non-engaging position). As a result, the engaging projection 723 is disengaged from the bottom through hole 720 to disengage the two, and the auxiliary tank 54 is allowed to move.

In this modification, the main control device 101 monitors the conduction state between the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b, and grasps that these are conducting, that is, the auxiliary tank 54 is in the full state. In this case, the drive signal is output to the engagement drive unit 761.

In such a configuration, when the slot machine 10 is transported, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 by using the engagement method (see FIGS. 161 and 162) described in the fourth embodiment. do. During transportation, the power supply device 91 of the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source, and power is not supplied to the slot machine 10. Therefore, the main control device 101 to the engaging drive unit 761 described above. The drive signal is not output. Therefore, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other, and the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the housing 11 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation, and it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from colliding with peripheral members and being damaged.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is used for manual collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in the same manner as described above. In this case, the power supply device 91 of the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power supply (commercial power supply of the game hall), and power is supplied to the slot machine 10. However, in a situation where the medal is not housed in the auxiliary tank 54, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b are in a non-conducting state, so that the drive signal is not output from the main control device 101. , The bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other.

Even if the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source, it is necessary to move the auxiliary tank 54 if the auxiliary tank 54 is empty for inspection or game setting before the hall is opened or after the hall is closed. Therefore, it is desirable that the auxiliary tank 54 is immobile for the convenience of work and the like. In this regard, even when power is being supplied to the slot machine 10, if the medal capacity in the auxiliary tank 54 is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other. When it is not necessary to move the auxiliary tank 54, the unnecessary movement can be suppressed, and an advantageous configuration in work or the like can be realized.

After that, when the number of medals housed in the auxiliary tank 54 reaches a predetermined amount and both sensor rods 16a and 16b conduct with each other, the main control device 101 outputs the above drive signal to the engaging drive unit 761. As a result, the engaging drive portion 761 is in the driving state, the engaging projection 723 is lowered, and the engagement between the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 is released.

Further, when both sensor rods 16a and 16b are electrically connected, as described above, an external signal indicating that the sensor rods 16a and 16b are full is output to the management device of the game hall through the external centralized terminal plate 121. After that, the employee who receives the notification goes under the slot machine 10 and performs an operation of taking out the auxiliary tank 54 in order to collect the medals in the auxiliary tank 54. In this case, in this modification, the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 has already been disengaged, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out. Therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out without difficulty, and the medals can be collected.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 again after collecting the medals, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other, and then both sensor rods 16a and 16b are electrically connected. The engagement is released again according to.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is used in correspondence with the automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed upside down in the housing 11 as in the first embodiment, or the bottom lid 514 may be installed. The auxiliary tank 54 may be installed in an upward posture after the auxiliary tank 54 can be held in an open position by locking the auxiliary tank 54 to the tank body 701 with a locking claw or the like.

As described above, even with this modification, it is possible to regulate the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation of the slot machine 10 while avoiding adversely affecting the operation of taking out the auxiliary tank 54 during manual collection, which is convenient. It will improve dramatically.

In the above modification, the engagement between the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 is disengaged in response to detecting the full state of the auxiliary tank 54, but before the full state is detected. It may be configured to disengage the two.

Specifically, apart from both sensor rods 16a and 16b, a detection means for detecting that the amount of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 has reached a specific amount less than full is provided, and the detection means is detected. The engagement drive unit 761 can be driven and controlled based on the result. In this case, the detection means is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the drive signal is output from the main control device 101 when the main control device 101 grasps the storage of the specific amount of medals. It is good to do. As a result, it is possible to allow the auxiliary tank 54 to be taken out prior to the full state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to respond with a sufficient margin to the take-out timing of the auxiliary tank 54 when the fullness is detected. Not only that, since the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out even if it is not full, it is possible to handle a case where a part of the medals in the storage tank 52 is moved to the auxiliary tank 54 and collected. It becomes.

As the detection means, a load sensor is attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, or an auxiliary tank 54 (tank body 701) is sandwiched between the front and rear or left and right at a height position lower than the upper sensor rod 16a. A configuration is conceivable in which a light receiving element is provided and the light from the light emitting element is continuously blocked by a medal in the auxiliary tank 54 for a predetermined period to detect the medal storage capacity.

<Modification example 3>
This modification is different from the fourth embodiment in that the engagement with the auxiliary tank 54 and the disengagement thereof are realized by utilizing the sensor that detects the stored state of the medals in the auxiliary tank 54. .. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. FIG. 170 is an explanatory view showing an installation state of the auxiliary tank 54, FIG. 171 (a) is a perspective view of the lower sensor unit 801 and its peripheral portion, and FIG. 172 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower sensor unit 801 (FIG. 172). a) is a perspective sectional view of the auxiliary tank 54, (b) is a perspective sectional view of the tank body 701, and FIG. 173 is a vertical sectional view of the auxiliary tank 54.

As shown in FIG. 171 (a), in this modified example, the lower sensor unit 801 is provided instead of the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6). Then, as shown in FIG. 170, the lower sensor portion 801 is configured to engage with the bottom lid 802 with the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701 interposed therebetween. Hereinafter, the combination of the lower sensor portion 801 and the rear wall portion 701c and the bottom lid 802 will be described. Since the upper sensor rod 16a has the same configuration as that of each of the above embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 171 (a), the lower sensor portion 801 has a substantially L-shaped vertical cross section, and is configured by bending a metal plate having a predetermined thickness. The lower sensor unit 801 includes a mounting portion 811 for mounting the lower sensor portion 801 to the housing 11, and a sensor main body 812 provided at the lower end of the mounting portion 811.

The mounting portion 811 extends along the back plate 11b of the housing 11, and a through hole (not shown) is formed in the central portion thereof so as to penetrate the mounting portion 811 in the thickness direction. The shaft portion 813a (see FIG. 170) of the screw 813 is inserted into the through hole from the inside of the housing 11, and the nut 814 is screwed into the shaft portion 813a of the screw 813 from the back side of the back plate 11b. .. As a result, the lower sensor portion 801 is fixed to the back plate 11b. Wiring is connected to the shaft portion 813a or the nut 814 via a connection terminal, and the lower sensor portion 801 and the main control device 101 are electrically connected through the wiring.

The sensor body 812 has an extension portion 821 that extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 811, a bent portion 822 that bends downward from the tip portion of the extension portion 821, and a section that rises diagonally upward from the tip portion of the bent portion 822. It is provided with a combined inclined portion 823. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), the tip portion 823a of the engaging inclined portion 823 extends to a position substantially the same height as the upper end portion 822a of the bent portion 822, and the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 Each vertical width dimension of is almost equal.

As shown in FIG. 170, the extension dimension of the sensor main body 812 from the mounting portion 811 corresponds to the length dimension of the upper sensor rod 16a. Specifically, the distance from one end 821a (see FIG. 171 (a)) of the extension 821 on the back plate 11b side to the tip 823a of the engaging inclined portion 823 in the extension direction of the extension 821 is , The distance from the back plate 11b of the upper sensor rod 16a to the tip of the sensor rod 16a is substantially the same. As a result, even if the shape of the lower sensor unit 801 is different from that of the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6), the lower sensor unit 801 is appropriately brought into contact with the medal in the auxiliary tank 54. It is possible to detect the full state well.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 173, the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701 is provided with a lower sensor insertion hole 831 corresponding to the lower sensor portion 801. The lower sensor insertion hole 831 penetrates the rear wall portion 701c in the thickness direction, and is formed in a size that allows the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 to pass through.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 173, the bottom lid 802 stands up from a substantially rectangular lid body 835 in a plan view and an end portion 835a of the lid body 835 opposite to the shaft portion 832. It is provided with an engaging standing portion 836 and has a substantially L-shaped cross section. In the lid body 835, the distance from the shaft portion 832 (center of rotation) to the end portion 835a is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft portion 832 on the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a to the end portion on the rear wall portion 701c side. The lid body 835 extends so as to cover substantially the entire surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. The engaging standing portion 836 stands in the vicinity of the rear wall portion 701c so as to substantially follow the inner surface of the rear wall portion 701c, and is above the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and below the upper sensor insertion hole 731a. It extends to a predetermined height position.

A lid sensor insertion hole 837 is provided in the upper part of the engaging standing portion 836. The lid sensor insertion hole 837 penetrates the engaging standing portion 836 in the thickness direction, and has a size that allows the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 to pass through. The lid sensor insertion hole 837 is arranged corresponding to the lower sensor portion 801 so as to be located in front of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 of the rear wall portion 701c in the front view with respect to the engaging standing portion 836.

As shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 173, a coil spring 839 is arranged in the bottom plate rear portion 701 g located between the lower opening portion 703 and the rear wall portion 701c in the bottom plate portion 701a. The coil spring 839 is fixed on a spring pedestal portion 840 in which a part of the surface of the rear portion 701 g of the bottom plate is recessed downward, and is arranged so as to exert an urging force upward.

When the lid main body 835 of the bottom lid 802 is close to the bottom plate portion 701a, a coil spring 839 is interposed between the lid main body 835 and the bottom plate portion 701a, and the bottom lid 802 is urged upward by the coil spring 839. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 173, when the bottom lid 802 closes the lower opening 703 and no medal is placed on the lid main body 835, the bottom lid 802 is predetermined from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. It is in a floating state by the height, and along with this, the engaging standing portion 836 of the bottom lid 802 is also stationary at the raised position.

When the engaging standing portion 836 is located in the raised position, the height position of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is raised so that the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 becomes the upper end portion of the lower sensor insertion hole 831. It will be located above 831a. As a result, the vertical width of the space in which the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837 are communicated with each other in the insertion direction of the lower sensor portion 801, that is, the lid sensor from the upper end portion 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831. The distance Lq to the lower end portion 837a of the insertion hole 837 is reduced as compared with the case where the engaging standing portion 836 (bottom lid 802) is lowered. In this case, the distance Lq is smaller than the vertical width dimension Hb (see FIG. 171 (b)) of the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 for engaging and the bent portion 822. The inclined portion 823 cannot pass or is difficult to pass.

Next, a method of engaging the lower sensor unit 801 and the bottom lid 802 and a method of disengaging the engaging method will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. 174 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state before engagement, FIG. 174 is an explanatory view showing an engaged state, and FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the engagement is disengaged. In FIG. 175, the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 are not shown for convenience.

First, a method of engaging the lower sensor unit 801 and the bottom lid 802 will be described. When engaging the lower sensor portion 801 and the bottom lid 802, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a with the front surface of the housing 11 open. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located closer to the front end portion of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor portion 801. At that time, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the auxiliary tank 54 can be aligned in the left-right direction by addressing the right side plate 11c.

From that state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed toward the back inside the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid and moved on the bottom plate 11a. Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (a), when the auxiliary tank 54 approaches the back plate 11b to some extent, a part of the tip end side of the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 becomes a rear wall portion of the tank body 701. It passes through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 provided in 701c and comes into contact with the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 provided in the engaging standing portion 836 of the bottom lid 802.

Here, since the engaging inclined portion 823 is inclined downward when viewed in the moving direction of the auxiliary tank 54, as the auxiliary tank 54 advances, the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 becomes the engaging inclined portion 823. It slides on and is gradually pushed downward along the inclination of the engaging inclined portion 823. Along with this, the bottom lid 802 is lowered together with the engaging standing portion 836, and the coil spring 839 is compressed to store the restoring force.

Further, as the engaging standing portion 836 is lowered, the height position of the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is lowered, and the lower end portion of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is lowered from the upper end portion 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831. The distance Lq to 837a is extended. Then, as the auxiliary tank 54 advances, the distance Lq expands, and finally, it becomes the same as or larger than the vertical width dimension Hb of the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823. As a result, the entire bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 can pass through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837.

When the auxiliary tank 54 advances further and the engaging inclined portion 823 passes through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837, the downward pressing force on the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 disappears. do. Along with this, the engaging standing portion 836 rises due to the restoring force of the coil spring 729. As a result, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), a part of the engaging upright portion 836 (the portion including the lower end portion 837a) below the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is the bent portion 822 and the back plate 11b. The lower sensor unit 801 and the bottom lid 802 engage with each other.

In this case, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is moved in the direction opposite to the back plate 11b, the engaging standing portion 836 comes into contact with the bent portion 822 of the lower sensor portion 801, so that the auxiliary tank 54 does not move. Be regulated. On the other hand, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 to the back plate 11b side is regulated by the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701 coming into contact with the screw 813 fixing the lower sensor portion 801. That is, in this modification, the rear wall portion 701c and the engaging standing portion 836 are sandwiched between the bent portion 822 and the screw 813, so that the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted from moving back and forth.

The upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the upper sensor rod 16a and the upper sensor insertion hole 731a as described in the fourth embodiment.

In this way, in a state where the forward / backward movement and the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 are restricted, the entire auxiliary tank 54 is accommodated in the housing 11, and even if the front door 12 is closed, the front door 12 The back surface does not collide with the auxiliary tank 54. That is, in this modification, the position of the auxiliary tank 54 when the lower sensor portion 801 and the bottom lid 802 engage with each other corresponds to the installation position referred to in the fourth embodiment.

Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in the above-mentioned installation mode during transportation of the slot machine 10, rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 in the housing 11 can be suppressed, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be suppressed during transportation. It is possible to prevent the peripheral member from colliding with the peripheral member and being damaged.

Next, a method of disengaging the engagement will be described. It is necessary to disengage the auxiliary tank 54 when it is used in correspondence with manual recovery. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is provided by using the engaging method described above (see FIGS. 161 and 162). Install at the installation position.

When the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are sequentially housed in the auxiliary tank 54, the medals are placed on the bottom lid 704, and the load of the medals acts on the bottom lid 704. Since the load of the medal also acts on the coil spring 839 through the bottom lid 704, as the medal weight on the bottom lid 704 increases, the coil spring 839 is gradually compressed and the bottom lid 704 rotates downward little by little. I will do it. As a result, the engaging standing portion 836 descends, and the distance Lq from the upper end portion 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 to the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is expanded.

Then, when the number of medals accommodated in the auxiliary tank 54 exceeds a predetermined amount, as shown in FIG. 175, the engaging standing portion 836 (bottom lid 704) is lowered to the descending end position, and the distance Lq is engaged with the bent portion 822. It is larger than the vertical width dimension Hb of the combined inclined portion 823. As a result, the entire bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 can pass through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837, and the movement restriction in the pull-out direction with respect to the auxiliary tank 54 is released. Will be done. That is, when medals are accumulated to some extent in the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 is naturally allowed to be taken out, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected.

When making the auxiliary tank 54 compatible with automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 is once taken out from the housing 11 with the front surface of the housing 11 open, and the bottom lid is provided, as in the fourth embodiment. The lower opening 703 is opened by rotating the 704 upward. After that, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the above installation position with the lower opening 703 open.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In the first embodiment, the winning probability of each special combination is set to the same probability as the winning probability of each corresponding combination in the normal game mode, but some may be different probabilities or all may be different probabilities. May be. For example, if the winning probability of the special specific combination corresponding to the specific combination is set to be higher than the winning probability of the specific combination, in the game in the specific mode, the transition lottery such as the attack mode in the normal game mode, the addition, etc. It will be easier to experience the lottery. On the other hand, if the probability is set to be lower than that of the specific combination, in the game in the specific mode, the transition lottery such as the attack mode in the normal game mode and the lottery such as the addition are not easily performed. As a result, it becomes easy for the player who has experienced that the transition lottery such as the attack mode is not easily performed in the specific mode for practice to experience that the transition lottery or the like in the normal game mode is frequently executed.

Further, the winning probability of the first PBB or the second PBB in the specific mode may be different from the first BB or the second BB in the normal game mode, for example, a higher probability than the first BB or the second BB, or the first BB or the second BB. It may be a lower probability. A high probability makes it easier to experience the first BB and the second BB, while a low probability ends the bonus state by shifting to a bonus state (special bonus state) during a specific mode. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the lottery of the first BB and the second BB of the normal game mode is not performed until.

(2) In the first embodiment, the lottery table in the specific mode is set to be equivalent to the lottery table in the normal game state in the normal game mode, but the lottery table in another game state (for example, a bonus state). It may be set to be equivalent to.

(3) In the first embodiment, the condition that the end condition of the first PBB and the second PBB is terminated by the execution of the game a total number of times including the number of times the production of the first BB and the second BB is executed (24 payouts). However, in order to be able to finish the game earlier, the game may be finished with a payout of a smaller number of cards (for example, 3 cards) than the payout of 24 cards. For example, in the case of a configuration that ends with a payout of 3 cards, 3 games (1 bet, 1 payout is 3 games) in a 1-bet game, and 1 game (3 bets, 3 payouts is 1 game) in a 3-bet game. Therefore, it is possible to finish the game earlier than the first embodiment.

(4) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB are provided, but the first PBB and the second PBB may not be provided. Instead, a winning mode similar to the winning mode of the first PBB or the second PBB, that is, a one-card payout combination that wins with the same result as the first BB or the second BB winning in the normal game mode is provided. Then, when the one payout combination is won (at the time of winning), it is preferable to generate an effect of winning the first PBB or the second PBB (winning). In this case, if the winning combination is configured so that the one payout combination can be won in the winning game, it is not necessary to provide a process corresponding to the state in which the first PBB and the second PBB are carried over.

Further, in this case, the special combination (30th small combination, etc.) corresponding to the combination (30th small combination, etc.) that can be won during the bonus state, the special combination that can be won during the normal game state, and the stop switches 42 to 44. The winning / non-winning is different depending on the difference in the operation order, and after the one payout combination winning the winning combination with the same outcome as the first BB or second BB winning outcome, the predetermined number of games (for example, 24 games) are reached. Then, the operation order of the special combination corresponding to the winning combination is notified during the bonus state, and the special combination winning is established. As a result, it is possible to experience a pseudo bonus state over a predetermined number of games.

Further, as the push order combination, a plurality of types of the above-mentioned out-of-order small combinations are provided, and a push order combination in which a plurality of out-of-order small combinations are set is provided. That is, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation order, the first out-of-order small winning combination is established, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation order. In that case, the second out-of-order small winning combination prize is established. Then, when the player wins the 1-card payout combination corresponding to the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB and does not win the prize in the outcome corresponding to the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB prize (when the 1-card payout combination is won in the loose order). ) Is a configuration in which one medal is paid out and the type of the small winning combination to be notified at the time of winning the above-mentioned pushing order combination is different. That is, before the winning of the one-card payout combination corresponding to the first PBB and the second PBB, the first operation order is notified so that the first out-of-order small combination can be easily won, or the first operation order is usually performed. The operation order is set to be easy (the order of stopping from the left reel, etc.), and the operation order of the second small winning combination is notified after the one-card payout corresponding to the first PBB and the second PBB is won. By doing so, it is possible to make the so-called reach eyes appear by making the outcomes different between the carry-over state and the non-carry-over state.

(5) In the first embodiment, the specific mode is basically performed by using the 1-bet game, but the specific mode may be performed by using the 2-bet game, or the normal game mode is set to 3. The configuration may be such that the specific mode is performed in the 3-bet game after the configuration is performed in the 1-bet game or the 2-bet game instead of the bet game.

(6) In the first embodiment, each RT state is set in addition to the normal game state and the bonus state even in the one-bet game, and the transition (promotion / fall) to each RT state corresponds to each re-game. It may be configured to be performed as a special replay or a special transition as a result. In this case, if at least one small winning combination is provided, the one-bet game can be played as a (small) free mode in which medals are not increased or decreased.

(7) In the first embodiment, even in the lottery process of the one-bet game, a result that does not win at any index value may be provided.

(8) In the first embodiment, which of the normal game mode and the specific mode is implemented may be configured so that it can be output externally. The external output destination may be, for example, a hall computer in the game hall or a data display installed in the game hall. In this case, the hall computer or the data display may be configured so that the game history of the normal game mode and the game history of the specific mode can be managed separately, or at least the game history of the normal game mode is managed while the game history of the specific mode is managed. It may be configured not to manage.

(9) In the first embodiment, the configuration that enables the normal game mode and the specific mode to be distinguished is not limited to the stamp 65a and the identification accessory 65b, and may be another configuration. For example, when it is possible to identify by the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65, the background color or the like may be different between the normal game mode and the specific mode in place of or in addition to the stamp 65a. In this case, when the display control device 81 determines the display content in the specific mode, the effect data of the corresponding effect content in the normal game mode is acquired, and the color data in the effect data is rewritten. It is good to display the contents in the specific mode. As a result, the storage capacity can be significantly reduced as compared with the configuration in which the effect data for the specific mode is separately stored. Further, when the identification accessory 65b can be used for identification, if the position protruding from the slot machine 10 (for example, upward) is set as a specific position, the manager of the game hall or the like can tell from a distance that the game hall is in the specific mode. Can be easily grasped.

Further, at the side end of the slot machine 10 (for example, on the right side opposite to the rotation axis side), an upright wall is provided so as to project forward and extend vertically. Then, the identification display may be performed using the wall portion of the upright wall. As a result, it does not bother the player who is playing the game while visually recognizing each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop switches 42 to 44, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and is easy for the manager of the game hall, etc. It is possible to display the identification at a position where it can be confirmed. In this case, for example, the identification display may not be performed on the wall portion of the upright wall facing the inside (player side), but the identification display may be performed on the wall portion of the upright wall facing the outside (adjacent gaming machine side). In this way, it is possible to make the display unnoticeable to the player who is playing the game even more. In addition, by doing so, it becomes possible for a player playing a game on an adjacent gaming machine to easily understand that the game on the adjacent gaming machine (main gaming machine) is in a specific mode. It is also possible to prevent the playability of this gaming machine, which does not reduce medals, from being mistaken for fraudulent activity.

(10) In the first embodiment, in the lottery table in the specific mode, the winning combinations are all set to be different between the normal game state and the bonus state (special bonus state), but some of them. The winning combination may be duplicated, or all the winning combination may be duplicated, and at least the winning probability of each winning combination may be different between the normal game state and the bonus state.

(11) In the first embodiment, in the specific mode, one bet and one payout are both played in the normal game state and the bonus state. However, the normal game state and the bonus state are used. It suffices if the expected number of medals to be paid out is the same as the number of medals inserted. In the bonus state, a game of betting 3 cards and paying out 3 cards may be performed (expected number of medals to be paid out = 3/3). In addition, both the normal game state and the bonus state have been explained with the game playability without the loss result, but when the game playability with the loss result is realized, the medal is inserted including the loss result in each state. It suffices if the expected number of payouts is the same as the number.

(12) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB that can be won in the one-bet game may be set as so-called non-missing combinations. By doing so, it is possible to surely establish the first PBB prize and the second PBB prize in the game in which the first PBB and the second PBB are won. As a result, the loss of medals that occurs when the first PBB and the second PBB are carried over can be eliminated.

(13) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB that can be won in the one-bet game may be set as a winning combination in which one medal is paid out at the time of winning. As a result, the loss of medals that occurs in the first PBB winning game and the second PBB winning game can be eliminated.

(14) In the first embodiment, when the special re-game winning is established in the specific mode, the automatic bet may not be made. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the presence and absence of the betting operation with the small winning combination. Further, when the small winning combination of rips is established, one medal may be automatically bet instead of paying out one medal. Even in this way, it is possible to eliminate the difference in the presence or absence of the betting operation between the small winning combination of the rip and the special replay winning.

(15) In the second embodiment, the configuration of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 and the fifth credit insertion switch 75 that perform the bet operation for the specific mode is not limited to the above, and may be other operation units. good. For example, the entire decorative panel 80 may be an operation unit capable of pressing operation, and the operation unit on the decorative panel 80 may be configured to perform a betting operation for a specific mode. Further, a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor may be provided, and the betting operation in the specific mode may be configured in which a part of the player's body such as a hand is detected by these sensors. Further, a MAX bet button may be provided, and the number of bets placed by the operation of the MAX bet button may be different depending on the presence or absence of a special addition flag or the like.

(16) In the second embodiment, the winning combination in the specific mode is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, and may include other winning combinations or ones not including any of the above-mentioned ones. For example, the first PBB and the second PBB may also be configured to win. If you win the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB, you will be in a bonus state for the specified number of games (until the specified number of games are paid out). It may be configured to shift to the bonus state with and further add in each game in the bonus state (that is, treat as a special zone).

Further, for example, although the special re-game and the special red 7 set are provided, the configuration may be such that the special re-game and the special red 7 set are not provided.

A non-winning result that does not win may be provided for any of the winning combinations, or a small winning combination may be provided as in the first embodiment. In these non-winning results and small wins, the number of additional games may be reduced or the additional games may not occur.

Special watermelons, special strong cherries, special weak cherries, special middle bells, special replays, and special red 7 sets are provided as special specific roles, but one or more of them may be won. Further, a plurality of lottery tables in a specific mode may be provided, and the winning combination and the winning combination may be different depending on each table. In this case, for example, in the normal game mode, if the second RT state (attack mode is supported), the lottery of the specific mode is performed at the table that wins the special watermelon, and the third RT state (VB mode is supported). For example, the lottery table in the specific mode may be different depending on the game state in the normal game mode, such as the lottery in the specific mode is performed at the table that wins the special red 7 match.

(17) In the second embodiment, the winning combination in the specific mode may be a configuration including a pushing order combination or a configuration in which any combination is a pushing order combination. As the push order, for example, a push order of a special watermelon and a special strong cherry is set, and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is the corresponding special special win, is notified according to the number of additional games won. It may be configured. For example, in the above-mentioned special watermelon and special strong cherry, the special strong cherry is set so that the number of additional games is larger as a whole. Therefore, when a relatively large number of additional games are selected during the lottery of the specific mode in the special addition, the operation order for winning the special strong cherry is notified, and when a small number of additional games are selected, the special watermelon is won. Notify the operation order. By doing so, it becomes possible to better associate the winning combination with the number of additional games.

In addition, as the push order combination, each special specific combination in the second embodiment and a winning combination for notifying the granting of benefits such as a predetermined bonus (for example, the fourth lip small combination or the first combination in the first embodiment). 5 rip small combination) and push order combination may be provided. In addition, a winning combination of notifying the grant of a privilege such as the predetermined bonus and a pushing order combination of a small winning combination may be provided. Then, regardless of whether or not the special addition, etc. is won, the game is played in a specific mode, and when the special addition, etc. is won, the winning role of the outcome that notifies the privilege grant such as the above-mentioned predetermined bonus, etc. The operation order may be notified, and if the player has not won, the operation order of the out-of-order small winning combination or the special specific winning combination may be notified.

(18) In the second embodiment, the timing for executing the game in the specific mode is not limited to the time when the attack mode is added, and may be another timing. For example, in the normal mode, it may be used as a winning notification effect in the challenge mode or the attack mode. In this case, for example, as in (17) above, each combination in the specific mode is used as a push order combination with the combination of the outcomes that notify the grant of benefits such as a predetermined bonus. Then, when the challenge mode or the attack mode is won, the operation order in which the winning combination that notifies the above-mentioned privilege grant is notified, and if the winning combination is not won, the above-mentioned special specific combination or the loss It is preferable that the configuration is such that the operation order in which the small winning combination can win is notified.

(19) In the second embodiment, when a specific combination is won during the normal game mode and a prize is generated (when there is a payout), a special addition by the specific mode is likely to occur, and a prize is generated. If it is not allowed to be paid out (when it is not paid out due to omission), a special addition in a specific mode may be less likely to occur. By doing so, it is possible to improve the significance of not causing omissions by so-called pressing when a specific role is won. Moreover, in this way, the event that the credit counter is 0 at the start of the specific mode is less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to preferably realize the playability of operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 in the specific mode.

(20) In the second embodiment, the closer the value of the credit counter is to the upper limit value, the less likely the special addition is caused by the specific mode, and the farther the value is from the upper limit value (the smaller the value of the credit counter), the more the special addition is made by the specific mode. The configuration may be such that it is likely to occur. When a special addition is made in a specific mode, even if one card is paid out, a sound effect corresponding to the payout sound effect in the normal game mode is generated. As the sound is output, 1 is added to the credit counter. In this case, if the special watermelon prize is established in a situation where the value of the credit counter is close to the upper limit (for example, 49), the credit counter is added by 1 in response to the payout of 5 watermelon prizes. The upper limit is set to (50), and four medals are paid out from the hopper device 51. However, in the case of a special watermelon prize, only the credit counter is added and no medals are paid out. Then, even though the effect at the time of winning the special watermelon was set at the time of winning the special watermelon, the fact that the medal was not paid out from the hopper device 51 clearly identifies that the watermelon was won. Therefore, if the smaller the value of the credit counter is, the more likely it is that special additions will occur in the specific mode, it will be possible to prevent the contradiction of whether or not medals are paid out in order to generate a pseudo-specific winning combination. Become. In this case, for example, if the credit counter is 41 or less, a special addition by the specific mode occurs so that even if 9 cards corresponding to the maximum number of cards to be paid out for the specific winning combination are paid out, only the credit counter is added. The configuration may be such that it is easy to generate, and when it exceeds 41, it is less likely to occur.

(21) In the second embodiment, as a special addition in the specific mode, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added or the VB mode is added, but the privilege of the game in the specific mode is not limited to this. For example, as a privilege of the game in the specific mode, a rare image may be given, or a password or the like that can change the effect in the normal game mode may be given. In the configuration in which the rare image is given, the rarity of the rare image given may be different depending on the type of the special specific role won in the game in the specific mode. Further, in the configuration in which a password or the like is given, the effect in the normal game mode that can be changed may be different depending on the type of the special specific combination that is won in the game in the specific mode.

(22) In the second embodiment, in the credit display invisible processing in step S5503, the display of the credit display unit 60 and the like is turned off. For example, although the display of the credit display unit 60 and the like continues, the display thereof The visibility of the display may be reduced (for example, the display may be slightly smaller than usual), or the visibility of the credit display unit 60 or the like may be improved by performing the effect at a position overlapping the credit display unit 60 or the like. It may be configured to be lowered (for example, a configuration in which the accessory is overlapped with the credit display unit 60 or the like in the front-rear direction).

(23) In the second embodiment, the privilege of the specific role that triggers the special addition may be different from the above. For example, where five medals are paid out based on the watermelon winning prize, three medals may be paid out. In this case, in the game played as a 3-bet game, the situation where the watermelon role winning in which 3 medals are paid out is established, and in the game played as a 1-bet game, 1 medal is paid out in a special watermelon. In both situations, where the winning combination is established, it becomes difficult for the actual medal to be paid out (it can be stopped only by increasing or decreasing the credit counter), which is preferable in reducing the distinction between the two situations. That is, by setting the privilege of the specific role that triggers the special addition to 3 or less, which is the number of bets, it is possible to suitably reduce the distinctiveness from the situation in which the special special role winning is established.

(24) The normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, special zone configuration, transition opportunity, transition probability, number of continuous games, etc. as display modes are not limited to the above, and may be other configurations. May be good. For example, in each of the above embodiments, the special zone is configured to shift to the 7th re-game winning in the VB mode, but it may be configured to shift to the attack mode, and the role that triggers the shift may also be For example, it may be a part of a specific role such as a watermelon.

(25) The configuration of the normal gaming state, the RT state, and the bonus state as the gaming state, the transition opportunity, the transition probability, the number of continuous games, and the like are not limited to the above, and may be other configurations. In this case, for example, in the first embodiment, it is preferable to set a special winning combination in the specific mode, which is a winning result at the stop roll that appears at the transition of the gaming state.

(26) The effective lines set in the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game are not limited to the downward-sloping line L4 and the bending line L6, respectively. For example, in a 3-bet game, a bending line L6 may be set, and in a 1-bet game, a downward-sloping line L4 may be set. In this case, for example, it is advisable to set the winning mode of each winning combination so that the winning is won when the outcome that is stopped in the 3-bet game in each of the above embodiments is stopped.

(27) The auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, audio is output from the speaker 64 to notify the operation order. The configuration may be such that the lamp of the stop switch to be operated next is lit and displayed in a different emission color from other stop switches to indicate the operation order, and the backlight of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be configured. The reel may be turned on or off to indicate the reel to be stopped next, or another display device or accessory device may be provided and the operation order may be notified by the device. Further, the operation order may be notified by a combination of these configurations.

(28) A penalty may be given to the player depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. For example, when the operation is performed in an operation order different from the operation order notified when the push order combination is won (when an operation for winning a combination different from the combination to be notified is performed), A penalty may be given, or the operation order is not notified when the push order combination is won, or the operation order is not notified when the push order combination is won. Nevertheless, if an operation in an operation order different from the predetermined operation order (for example, the operation order in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) is performed, a penalty may be given. As a penalty, for example, in the reel control process by the main control device 101, an operation that is subject to a penalty (a specific operation that is subject to a predetermined penalty) is performed based on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like. It is specified whether or not the game is played, and the main control device 101 prevents the lottery of, for example, the challenge mode and the attack mode from being performed over a predetermined number of games, and the lottery is added to the number of continuous games such as the challenge mode and the attack mode. It is preferable to execute a penalty process in which the lottery is not performed or the lottery is performed, but the lottery is performed with a lower probability of winning than in the situation where the penalty is not given.

Further, in this case, it is preferable that the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies the penalty notification that the specific operation subject to the above-mentioned predetermined penalty has been performed. This notification may be performed by the display control device 81. In this case, the display control device 81 can grasp that the specific operation has been performed by the command output when it is specified that the specific operation has been performed by the main control device 101, and the above-mentioned specific operation has been performed. It becomes possible to execute the process for performing the penalty notification.

Then, for example, the main control device 101 performs the above-mentioned penalty processing when the specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, but does not perform the above-mentioned penalty processing when the specific operation is performed in the specific mode. You may. The specific mode is a game mode in which the increase or decrease of medals does not occur by returning equal sheets, but if a penalty is given even in such a game mode, a penalty is given even though the increase or decrease of medals does not occur. This is because an event contrary to the significance of providing a specific mode such as being given can occur.

Further, in this case, the display control device 81 may be configured to perform the above-mentioned penalty notification when the specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, and also to perform the above-mentioned penalty notification when the specific operation is performed in the specific mode. good. In this way, in a configuration in which the specific mode is set as the practice mode, it is possible to notify that a penalty will be given if such a specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, and practice. It is possible to improve the significance of the mode.

Further, the display control device 81 may be configured to notify the content as the content of the penalty when a specific operation is performed in the specific mode. The content notification may be a notification explaining that the lottery such as the attack mode is more disadvantageous than usual as described above. In this way, it is possible to improve the significance of providing the specific mode as the practice mode.

(29) Although the normal game mode and the specific mode are realized by the difference in the number of bets, they may be realized by other configurations. For example, even if the number of bets is the same, when the changeover switch that can be switched between the first position and the second position is switched to the first position, the normal game mode can be executed and the switch is switched to the second position. In some cases, the specific mode may be made executable. The changeover switch may be provided at a position where the player can perform the changeover operation (for example, the front surface of the slot machine 10), or may be provided at a position where the player cannot perform the changeover operation (for example, the back surface of the slot machine 10). good. Further, the normal game mode and the specific mode may be switched depending on the set value that makes the winning probability of each combination different in the lottery by the lottery means. Specifically, when the set value is 1 which is the lowest value or 3 which is the intermediate value, the specific mode may be executed, and when the set value is another set value, the normal game mode may be executed.

(30) The effective line between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to the above. For example, in the normal game mode, in a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, other straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as effective lines instead of the downward-sloping line L4, or a line in which a bend occurs even in the normal game mode. The configuration may be set as an effective line. Further, even in the specific mode, the straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as effective lines, or other bent lines may be set as effective lines. The number of effective lines in the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to one, and may be two or more, or the number of effective lines may be different in both game modes. When either or one of the effective lines of both game modes is composed of a plurality of effective lines, one of the effective lines may be overlapped in both game modes, and in this case, at least the effective lines of each other may be used. Any configuration may include non-overlapping effective lines.

(31) Although the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to perform various effects, another effect may be used to perform various effects. For example, as a configuration in which various effects are performed with a so-called full-face liquid crystal display panel in which the game panel 25 provided so as to cover the entire display windows 26L, 26M, 26R while making each reel 32L, 32M, 32R visible is a liquid crystal display panel. Alternatively, the decorative panel 80 below the stop switches 42 to 44 may be used to perform various effects, or a movable accessory or the like may be used to perform various effects.

(32) The BB state (1st BB, 2nd BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB) as a bonus state, the CB state (CB, PCB), and the slot machine having each RT state have been described, but the configuration is limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine that does not have a BB state or a CB state, or a slot machine that has other gaming states such as a regular bonus (RB) state or a single bonus (SB) state. good.

(33) In the normal game mode, it is possible to start by betting 3 to 1 medals, but it may not be possible to start by betting 1 or 2 medals. In this case, in the first embodiment, it is preferable that one bet is possible by switching to the specific mode by operating the second effect switch 67, and in the second embodiment, the special addition flag is set to 1 It would be nice to be able to bet on one sheet. When these one-card bets are possible, other bets (three-card bet or two-card bet) may be disabled.

(34) As the privilege to be given, in addition to the privilege of shifting the game state and the privilege of re-gaming, the configuration is provided with the privilege of paying out medals, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the player is not limited to such a configuration. Any configuration may be used as long as some privilege is given. For example, a prize other than the medal may be paid out instead of the privilege of paying out the medal. In particular, when the game is played in a specific mode as a free mode as in the first embodiment, the number of medals does not increase or decrease. Therefore, even if a large number of games are added, the number of medals does not increase. I can't expect it. Therefore, for example, when the number of pseudo acquisitions exceeds a predetermined number, a privilege such as displaying a rare image may be given.

(35) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop buttons in parallel and having four effective lines has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, for example, a reel and a corresponding stop button. It may be a slot machine provided with five in parallel or a slot machine having seven effective lines. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop buttons are sufficient.

(36) In each of the above embodiments, the bottom plate portions 501a, 602, and 701a are provided with bottom through holes 720, which are opened and closed by the bottom lids 514,606,704,802, but the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54. The entire opening may be opened, and the opening may be opened and closed by a bottom lid 514 or the like.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, but other than the bottom plate 11a, for example, it is arranged on the mounted component arranged in the housing 11. An auxiliary tank 54 may be installed at a location.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, a rod-shaped sensor is used as the storage state detection means for detecting the storage state of the medals of the auxiliary tank 54, but another sensor is used, for example, a load sensor is attached to the bottom plate 11a. You may.

(39) In each of the above embodiments, the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 guides the left and right positions of the auxiliary tank 54. The guide is, for example, a predetermined guide member extending in the front-rear direction on the bottom plate 11a. It may be configured by a plate other than the right side plate 11c. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is guided only on the left and right sides, and the configuration may be such that the auxiliary tank 54 is guided on both the left and right sides.

(40) In each of the above embodiments, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b are provided with two sensor rods, but the lower sensor rod 16b may be omitted. In this case, for example, a conductive plate may be arranged on the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, and the conduction state between the conductive plate and the upper sensor rod 16a may be monitored by the main control device 101.

(41) In the first and third embodiments, the lower openings 512 and 603 may be omitted to close the bottom plate portions 501a and 602, and the bottom lids 514 and 606 may be omitted. .. In this case, by installing the auxiliary tank 54 downward, not only the auxiliary tank 54 can be fixed to the housing 11, but also the medal discharge hole 15 can be closed by the auxiliary tank 54. If the lower openings 512, 603 and the bottom lids 514 and 606 are omitted to support automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 may be taken out from the housing 11.

Further, when the lower openings 512 and 603 and the bottom lids 514 and 606 are omitted, it is not always necessary to install the auxiliary tank 54 downward so as to engage with the auxiliary tank 54. For example, the upper opening 502 is on the left side. Alternatively, it may be installed in a sideways posture so as to face to the right, or may be installed in a standing posture so that the upper opening 502 faces forward or rearward to engage with the structure. Even in such a case, it is possible to notice at a glance that the installation is performed in a mode different from the normal installation mode, and it is possible to promote the awareness that the installation is engaged (fixed).

Further, in the configuration in which the lower openings 512, 603 and the bottom lids 514 and 606 are provided, the configuration may be such that they are engaged in the above-mentioned sideways posture or standing posture. In that case, it is not always necessary to make the posture of the auxiliary tank 54 common between the case where the slot machine 10 is transported and the case where the slot machine 10 is used in correspondence with automatic collection. If it corresponds to automatic collection, it can be in a downward posture. In particular, when the posture is downward, the auxiliary tank 54 is set to the downward posture because there is an advantage that the upper opening 502 can be used to secure the medal movement path from the lower opening 512, 603 to the medal discharge hole 15. A configuration that supports automatic collection is preferable. Considering that it is not necessary to change the posture of the auxiliary tank 54 one by one between the time of transportation and the time of automatic collection, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

(42) In the first and third embodiments, the bottom lids 514 and 606 are configured to rotate, but the bottom lids are configured to move up and down or diagonally, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the bottom lids are configured. May be configured to open the lower openings 512 and 603 by lowering. In this case, it is preferable to form an inclined surface that descends toward the upper opening 502 (medal discharge hole 15) on the back surface of those bottom lids (the surface that becomes the upper surface when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture). With such a configuration, the medal that has passed through the lower openings 512 and 603 and reached the back surface can be satisfactorily guided toward the medal discharge hole 15.

(43) In the first and third embodiments, the engaging portion 574 for engaging the auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, but for example, the engaging portion is provided on the hopper device 51 or the like. The auxiliary tank 54 may be provided so as to engage with the mounted parts in the housing 11. In this case, it is not always necessary to engage the flange portion 571 of the auxiliary tank 54 with the engaging portion. A portion other than the flange portion 571 may be engaged, such as by providing an engaging portion that can be engaged. At that time, the height position of the engaged portion is changed according to the posture of the auxiliary tank 54. In the upward posture, the engaged portion and the engaged portion do not reach each other, and only in the downward posture. It is recommended that both be delivered. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the auxiliary tank 54 is unintentionally engaged with each other and the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted.

(44) In the first and third embodiments, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, it is configured to engage only on the left side of the auxiliary tank 54, but for example, the tank main body. The bottom plate 11a, the back plate 11b, and the right side plate 11c may be provided with an engaging portion that engages with the left side flange portion 571d and the rear side flange portion 572b of 501, so that the engagement portion may also be engaged on the right side or the rear side. The engaging portion is not limited to the left side of the auxiliary tank 54, but in the configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the right corner of the housing 11, the engaging portion is arranged on the left side of the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, there is an advantage that the engaging portion can be easily seen and the presence or absence of engagement can be visually confirmed as compared with the case where the engagement portion is arranged on the right side or the rear side. Considering this point, it is preferable that the engaging portion is arranged on the left side of the auxiliary tank 54. Incidentally, in the case of the configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the left corner portion in the housing 11, the engaging portion may be arranged on the right side of the auxiliary tank 54.

(45) In the first and third embodiments, the flange portion 571 is used as the first engaging portion. For example, the upper end portion of the tank body 501 projects outward other than the flange portion 571. A portion may be configured as a first engaging portion. At that time, the overhanging portion does not necessarily have to be provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral edge portion of the tank body 501, and may be provided corresponding to a part of the peripheral edge portion.

(46) In the first and third embodiments, the engaging portion 574 is integrally formed with the hopper mounting plate 22, but the engaging portion may be provided independently of the hopper mounting plate 22. , The configuration may be integrally formed with a peripheral member other than the hopper mounting plate 22 (for example, the hopper device 51).

(47) In the first and third embodiments, when the right flange portion 571c of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 are engaged, the upper surface of the right flange portion 571c and the overhanging portion in the engaging portion 574. Although the lower surface of the 578 is in contact with the lower surface (see FIG. 18C), a gap may be formed between the two only when they are close to each other. That is, the engagement does not necessarily have to be accompanied by contact.

(48) In the first and third embodiments, a display unit displaying predetermined information is provided on the back surface of the bottom plate portion 501a (the surface that becomes the upper surface when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture), and the auxiliary tank 54 is provided. The predetermined information may be hidden when the posture is upward, and the predetermined information may be displayed when the posture is downward. With such a configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, it is possible to call attention to the worker (employee of the game hall) who performs the take-out operation, and suppresses an unreasonable take-out operation. It will be possible. On the contrary, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the predetermined information becomes invisible or difficult to see, which suppresses the operator's confusion due to the display of the predetermined information and suppresses the hindrance to the medal collection work. can. As the predetermined information, for example, information explaining a disengaging method for disengaging the engaged state (for example, "slide to perform a take-out operation!") Can be considered.

The display unit (predetermined display) may be provided not only on the bottom plate portion 501a but also on another wall portion such as the front wall portion 501b. In this case, it is preferable that the predetermined information is reversed when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, it is difficult to visually recognize the predetermined information (the contents are difficult to identify), and when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, it is easy to see (the contents are easy to identify). Further, the predetermined information does not have to be directly visible, and may be indirectly visible such as through a mirror or the like.

(49) In the first and third embodiments, the bottom lids 514 and 606 are arranged inside the tank bodies 501 and 601. However, they are located outside the tank bodies 501 and 601 and inside the lower openings 512 and 603. It may be arranged. At that time, it is advisable to provide a regulating means for restricting the bottom lids from rotating to the outside of the tank bodies 501 and 601 beyond the closed position. As a result, even if the bottom lids do not come into contact with the surfaces of the bottom plate portions 501a and 602, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from coming off the bottom.

(50) In the third and fourth embodiments, the bottom lid 606, 704, 802 is tilted to a predetermined rotation angle between the closed position and the open position, as in the first embodiment. The connection between the bottom lid 606, 704, 802 and the tank main body 601, 701 may be released by moving the bottom lid 606, 704, 802 in a predetermined removal direction. On the contrary, in the first embodiment, the bottom lid 514 may be non-removable.

(51) In the first embodiment, the bottom lid 514 may be engaged with the tank body 501 at the closed position. In this case, the bottom lid 514 can be held in the closed position, and the slot machine 10 can be transported with the lower opening 512 closed.

(52) In the first embodiment, the rotation limiting means (protruding portion 535) is provided on the lid main body 521 of the bottom lid 514, but it may be provided on the shaft portion 522 of the bottom lid 514 or the tank main body 501. It may be provided on the right side wall portion 501d.

(53) In the first embodiment, the tank body 501 and the bottom lid 514 have a transparent structure, but these may be opaque. With such a configuration, when the internal structure of the slot machine 10 is visually confirmed from the outside of the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge hole 15, the tank body 501 and the bottom lid 514 can hinder it. In this case, it is not always necessary to make both the tank body 501 and the bottom lid 514 opaque, and only one of them may be opaque, or a part of them may be opaque. This also applies to other embodiments.

(54) In the third embodiment, the bottom lid 606 is urged toward the closed position by the coil spring 617 (elastic member), but the bottom lid 606 is urged by the magnetic force (adhesive force) using a magnet. May be. However, for example, when the bottom lid 606 is opened through the medal discharge hole 15 during transportation of the slot machine 10, the bottom lid 606 is automatically returned to the closed position to prevent fraudulent activity. It is preferable to use the configuration of the embodiment or the configuration using both the elastic member and the magnetic force. In the fourth embodiment as well, the engaging projection 723 and the bottom lid 802 may be urged by a magnetic force (repulsive force) instead of or in addition to the coil springs 729 and 839.

(55) In the first modification of the third embodiment, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 is provided with an inclination, and the medal is guided to the rotating tip side of the bottom lid 606 by the inclination. An air blowing device that blows air to the medals on the lid 606 or the bottom plate 602 is provided in the housing 11 or in the tank body 601 to guide the medals by the air from the device, or to guide the medals in a configuration other than inclination. , The guide means may be provided at a place other than the bottom lid 606. However, in order to simplify the configuration and improve the guidance accuracy, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

(56) In the second modification of the third embodiment, the back surface protruding portion 621 is configured to be continuous from one end to the other end of the back surface 606b along the rotation axis of the bottom lid 606, but one of the back surface 606b. It may be a configuration provided in the portion, or a configuration in which a plurality of back surface protruding portions are intermittently arranged may be used. In the latter case, it is preferable that the distance between the back surface protrusions is smaller than the medal diameter. As a result, it is possible to prevent the medals from the storage tank 52 from slipping between the back surface protrusions and reducing the damming efficiency.

(57) In the second modification of the third embodiment, the medal from the storage tank 52 is blocked on the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606, but the medal blocked at a place other than the back surface 606b is blocked on the back surface. It may be configured to guide to 606b.

(58) In the fourth embodiment, the installation position of the auxiliary tank 54 (the position where the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged, or the lower sensor portion 801 and the engaging standing portion 836 are engaged. The matching position) is set to a position farther back than the position where the front door 12 can be closed (the position where the front door 12 does not interfere with the auxiliary tank 54 even when the front door 12 is closed), but the front door 12 can be closed. It may be set to the position just before. In this case, the space between the back surface of the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 can be eliminated or narrowed, and the space is used to attempt to illegally access the main control device 101, the setting key insertion hole 73, or the like. It becomes possible to suppress the act.

(59) In the fourth embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position, the engaging inclined portion 745 and the arc-shaped portion 746 that guide the engaging projection 723 toward the descending position are assisted. The configuration is provided on the tank 54 side, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the auxiliary tank 54 side by providing an inclination at the contact portion of the auxiliary tank 54 on the head 725 of the engaging projection 723. May be good. In this case, the inclination of the auxiliary tank 54 side may be opposite to that of the engaging inclined portion 745.

(60) In the fourth embodiment, the diameter De of the pushing protrusion 733 may be larger than the opening diameter of the accommodating portion 722 (diameter of the first hole 726). In this case, the weight of the medal prevents the push-in protrusion 733 from entering the accommodating portion 722 when the push-in protrusion 733 is lowered, and the height dimension of the push-in protrusion 733 is changed to the depth dimension of the bottom through hole 720 (when lowering). The stroke of the push-in protrusion 733) can be made sufficiently large. As a result, even if the height dimension of the pushing protrusion 733 is reduced due to wear or the like, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the engaging protrusion 723 cannot be pushed out from the bottom through hole 720.

(61) In the fourth embodiment, the peripheral wall surface 743 on the side opposite to the release inclined portion 741 stands upright on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom through hole 720 and is substantially parallel to the peripheral surface of the head 725. However, the peripheral wall surface 743 may be inclined in the opposite direction to the release inclined portion 741. In this case, the inclination angles of both inclinations may be the same or different.

In the latter case, the inclination angle of the release inclined portion 741 (the angle formed by the upper surface of the head 725 and the release inclined portion 741) may be smaller than that of the inclination of the peripheral wall surface 743. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out (pulled out), the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging protrusion 723 come into contact with each other at the initial movement, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed (pushed in), it engages with the auxiliary tank 54 at the final stage. When the protrusion 723 comes into contact with the protrusion 723, it is assumed that a stronger load is applied to the engaging protrusion 723 in the take-out operation. In this case, by making the release inclined portion 741 relatively laid down, damage to the engaging projection 723 can be suppressed. On the other hand, regarding the inclination of the peripheral wall surface 743, by increasing the inclination angle and making it relatively upright, the back side of the auxiliary tank 54 while reducing the catch between the head 725 and the peripheral wall surface 743 to some extent. It can be easier to regulate the progress to.

(62) In the fourth embodiment, the release inclined portion 741 for reducing the catching during the taking-out operation of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom side through hole 720, but instead of or in addition to this. Therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 may be provided on the auxiliary tank 54 side, such as by providing an inclination at the contact portion of the auxiliary tank 54 on the head 725 of the engaging projection 723. In this case, the inclination of the auxiliary tank 54 side may be opposite to that of the release inclined portion 741. Further, as in (61) above, when an inclination is provided to reduce catching when the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed in, the head of the engaging protrusion 723 is replaced with or in addition to the peripheral wall surface of the bottom through hole 720. It may be provided at 725.

(63) In the fourth embodiment, the lift of the auxiliary tank 54 is regulated by both the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b, but it may be regulated by only one of them. Further, also in the first and second embodiments, the auxiliary tank 54 may be restricted from being lifted by at least one of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b.

(64) In the fourth embodiment, the widths of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the lower sensor insertion hole 731b correspond to the widths of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b (with substantially the same dimensions). The upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b may be configured to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the left-right direction. This also applies to other embodiments. In this case, it is not always necessary to correspond the widths of both the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the lower sensor insertion hole 731b, and only one of them may be associated.

(65) In the fourth embodiment, the entire bottom lid 704 is made transparent, but when the bottom lid 704 is positioned in the open position, it is located above the upper end of the tank body 701. The structure may be such that only a part or a part of the part has transparency. Even with such a configuration, the inside of the housing 11 and the tank body 701 can be visually observed through the bottom lid 704, and a part of the bottom lid 704 tends to protrude upward to increase the height dimension of the auxiliary tank 54. Despite the configuration, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the visibility inside the housing 11 and the tank body 701. The entire bottom lid 704 is transparent, and the front wall portion 701b of the tank body 701 (the wall portion that overlaps the bottom lid 704 from the front when the bottom lid 704 is located in the open position) is transparent. If the structure is provided, the inside of the tank body 701 can be visually recognized through both the front wall portion 701b and the bottom lid 704, and it is possible to facilitate the inspection / confirmation work such as whether the inside of the tank body 701 is clogged with medals.

(66) In the fourth embodiment, the bottom lid 704 is brought into contact with the guide plate 52a, but the bottom lid 704 is attached to another member (for example, a storage tank 52 or the like) located on the open position side of the guide plate 52a. It may be configured to be in contact with each other. This also applies to each modification according to the fourth embodiment.

(67) In the fourth embodiment, the lid body 706 of the bottom lid 704 is used as a movable bottom plate to include a movable member that receives substantially all of the medal weight in the auxiliary tank 54. For example, the bottom plate. A movable member may be provided on a part of the portion 701a or a peripheral wall portion such as the front wall portion 701b, and the movable member may receive a part of the weight of the medal. In short, it suffices if the engagement can be disengaged as the medal weight increases, and how much of the medal weight the movable member receives is arbitrary. This also applies to the third modification of the fourth embodiment.

(68) In the fourth embodiment, both the lid main body 706 as the movable bottom plate and the engaging standing portion 836 as the first engaging portion are provided on the bottom lid 704, and they are integrally formed. However, the movable bottom plate and the first engaging portion may be separated from each other and arranged separately, and the movable bottom plate may be interlocked with each other via a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement (power) of the movable bottom plate to the first engaging portion. This also applies to the third modification of the fourth embodiment.

(69) In the fourth embodiment, a cushioning member (elastic member) such as rubber or sponge may be arranged at the contact point between the bottom lid 704 and the guide plate 52a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom lid 704 and the guide plate 52a from being damaged by the impact when the bottom lid 704 collides with the guide plate 52a. In this case, the interference member may be arranged on the bottom lid 704 side or on the guide plate 52a side. This also applies to each modification according to the fourth embodiment.

(70) In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source, the bottom through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged (the engaging protrusion 723 is engaged). (Positioned in the raised position), but if the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power supply but the slot machine 10 is not turned on (if the power switch 71 is not turned on), the bottom through hole The 720 and the engaging portion 721 may be engaged with each other.

Further, when disengaging, even if the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source, the slot machine 10 may not be disengaged unless the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, or the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source. If not, the configuration may not be released.

It should be noted that the slot machine 10 may be configured to be disengaged even if the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source, such as mechanically interlocking with the ON operation of the power switch 71 to disengage the slot machine 10. Considering that the slot machines may collide with each other and the power switch 71 may be switched to the ON side during transportation, it is preferable that the connection to an external power source is a condition.

(71) In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are disengaged regardless of the detection results of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b. May be. That is, the slot machine 10 may be disengaged on the condition that the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source or the power is turned on while the slot machine 10 is connected to the external power source.

(72) In the modified example 3 of the fourth embodiment, the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is provided in the engaging standing portion 836, and the lower sensor portion 801 is inserted through the lid sensor insertion hole 837. In the engaging standing portion 836, the portion above the lower end portion of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 may be omitted, and the lid sensor insertion hole 837 may not be provided. That is, the height of the engaging standing portion 836 is set to a position corresponding to the height position of the lower end portion of the lid sensor insertion hole 837, and the upper end portion of the engaging standing portion 836 is the bent portion 822 and the rear wall portion. The auxiliary tank 54 and the lower sensor unit 801 may be engaged with each other by entering and exiting the space formed between the 701c and the auxiliary tank 54.

(73) In the third modification of the fourth embodiment, when the engaging standing portion 836 and the lower sensor portion 801 are engaged, the lower end portion of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 in the engaging standing portion 836 is Although a gap is formed between the lower sensor portion 801 and the extending portion 821 so that the two are close to each other, they may be brought into contact with each other.

(74) In the fourth embodiment and the third modification thereof, these configurations are not necessarily alternative, and both configurations may be combined.

(75) In each of the above embodiments, the auxiliary tank 54 is subjected to a specific operation by the operation means provided in the slot machine 10 so that the employee of the game hall or the like can disengage the engagement at an arbitrary timing. It may be configured to be disengaged. Considering that the front door 12 needs to be opened as a preliminary operation when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the slot machine 10, it is preferable that the specific operation is an operation for opening the front door 12.

Specifically, an unlocking operation for the locking device 20 (key cylinder 21) (for example, an operation for rotating the key inserted in the key cylinder 21 to the left) can be considered. For example, the engaging portion on the housing 11 side is made movable so as to be able to switch between the engaged state and the non-engaged state (for example, the configuration of the second modification of the fourth embodiment). A link mechanism for transmitting the movement of the locking device 20 to the engaging portion may be provided between the engaging portion and the locking device 20, or a configuration for detecting an unlocking operation and driving and controlling the engaging portion may be provided. It is preferable that the engaging portion is switched from the engaged state to the non-engaged state based on the unlocking operation.

In the above configuration, the disengagement by the specific operation may be provided in combination with the disengagement configuration in each embodiment, or may be provided in place of those configurations. In the latter case, the movable type is performed when an operation different from the specific operation (for example, an operation of closing the front door 12) performed by using the above-mentioned operation means or an operation means different from the above-mentioned operation means is performed. The engaging portion of the door may be configured to switch from the non-engaged state to the engaged state.

(76) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having ball throwing and ball payout functions such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in the following features A to H are "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, the inside is based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is a start lever in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the above corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest of gaming, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69),
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means.
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number (3 bets) and a second bet number (1 bet, 2 bets) different from the first bet number are provided. Gambling
It is provided with an effective position setting means (a function of executing an effective line setting process by the main control device 101) for setting the effective position according to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means.
When the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a first specific result (for example, a watermelon role as a 26th small winning combination, a replay) is provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means. Gambling
When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a second specific result different from the first specific result (for example, a special as a 26P small winning combination) as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means. Watermelon role, special replay) is provided,
The privilege granting means
The lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, and the first specific pattern is set at the first effective position (downward right line L4) set by the effective position setting means corresponding to the first bet number. When the combination is stopped, the first privilege corresponding to the first specific result (for example, five medals at the time of winning a watermelon, replay) can be given.
The lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, and the first specific pattern is set at the second effective position (bending line L6) set by the effective position setting means corresponding to the second bet number. When the second specific pattern combination different from the combination is stopped, the second privilege corresponding to the second specific result (for example, one medal at the time of winning a special watermelon, replay) can be given.
When the second specific pattern combination is stopped at the second effective position, the orbiting body is at a position that is not set as an effective position by the effective position setting means when the number of bets is the second. The pattern is attached so that the first specific pattern combination is stopped at a specific position set as the first effective position by the effective position setting means when the number of bets is one. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the game is played with the first bet number, when the first specific result is won, the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the first effective position and the first privilege is given. When a game is played with a second bet number different from the first bet number, if a second specific result different from the first specific result is won, the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the first effective position and the first specific pattern combination is stopped. The second specific pattern combination is stopped at the second effective position, and the second privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to obtain different benefits with the same stop result depending on whether the game is played with the first bet number or the second bet number. That is, it is possible to realize a game in which different benefits are given by playing a game with a different number of bets even if the appearance is the same stop result with one gaming machine. By doing so, it becomes possible to diversify the game.

Feature A2. As the first privilege, the privilege granting means can pay out a specific number of gaming media equal to or more than the first bet number or execute a re-game, and the second privilege is the second. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the same number of gaming media as the number of bets can be paid out or re-gambling can be executed.

According to the above configuration, even if the game played with the first bet number and the game played with the second bet number have the same stop result in appearance, the game medium played with the first bet number is more than the bet number. While the payout or re-game can be granted, in the game played with the second bet number, the same number of game media as the bet number is paid out or the re-game is granted, and the increase in the game medium cannot be expected. In this way, by providing a clear difference in the advantage for the player between the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number, it is possible to standardize the outcome of the game based on both bet numbers. Even if they are similar to each other, it is possible to have completely different playability, and it is possible to guarantee the significance of incorporating a plurality of playability into one game machine.

Feature A3. When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a plurality of types of the second specific result are provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means.
When a lottery is performed by the lottery means when the second bet number is set in a predetermined state (normal gaming state), one of the plurality of types of the second specific result is won. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized in that it is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific result winning is established, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out or the re-game is given. If any of the second specific results or the re-gaming combination is won in the above-mentioned game, the game medium is not increased or decreased in the game played with the second bet number in the predetermined state. As a result, the game played with the second bet number can be used as, for example, a practice game or as a production in the game played with the first bet number. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game medium does not increase or decrease depending on the second bet number by utilizing the commonality of the outcome with the game by the first bet number.

Feature A4. As the first specific result, a transition result (for example, a third replay as the first promotion replays 1 to 4) is provided in which the winning probabilities of the predetermined combination (replay) before and after the transition are different.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the first specific symbol combination for transition as the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the first effective position, the gaming state is set to a predetermined state (RT). It is equipped with a transition means (a function of executing RT status processing by the main controller 101) that can be transitioned to the status).
As the second specific result, as the second privilege, a second payout result is provided in which the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second payout result and the second specific symbol combination for payout as the second specific symbol combination stops at the second effective position, the second bet number The same number of game media as the above are paid out,
The pattern is attached to the orbiting body so that when the second specific pattern combination for payout stops at the second effective position, the first specific pattern combination for transition stops at the specific position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

According to the above configuration, in the game with the second bet number, the transition result is won and the game state is shifted to the predetermined state in the game with the first bet number, which is reproduced by paying out the same number of game media as the second bet number. be able to. By doing so, for example, it is possible to simulate the transition of the gaming state to a predetermined state in the game with the first bet number in the game with the second bet number without increasing or decreasing the game medium. It becomes.

In addition, although the configuration is such that "payment of the same number of game media as the number of second bets" is performed as the "second benefit" corresponding to the "second payout result", "a predetermined number of game media" is used as the "second benefit". The payout may be made. Even with such a configuration, in order to experience the transition of the game state to a predetermined state in the game with the first bet number in the game with the second bet number, the game medium is given. Is possible.

Feature A5. Execution of the first predetermined effect in which a predetermined effect (for example, an attack mode start effect) can be executed by a predetermined notification means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65) based on the transition of the game state to the predetermined state by the transition means. Means (a function of performing processing for executing the attack mode start effect by the display control device 81),
The lottery result by the lottery means performed in the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means is the second payout result, and the first specific pattern combination for transfer to the specific position is used. When the second specific pattern combination for payout stops at the second effective position, the second predetermined effect executing means (the second predetermined effect executing means) capable of executing the predetermined effect by the predetermined notification means ( Display control device 81 (function to perform processing to execute display attack mode start effect) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A4, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, in order to experience the transition of the game state to the predetermined state with the second bet number, a predetermined effect common to the effect is generated, and it is possible to make the experience more realistic. It becomes. By doing so, the game characteristics for practice based on the second bet number can be made closer to the game characteristics based on the first bet number.

Feature A6. Identification means (stamp 65a, identification combination) that makes it possible to distinguish between the case where the predetermined effect is executed by the first predetermined effect executing means and the case where the predetermined effect is executed by the second predetermined effect executing means. The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized in that the object 65b) is provided.

According to the above configuration, whether the game is played by the first bet number or the game is played by the second bet number while the games are similar to both the first bet number and the second bet number. Can be identified by looking at the predetermined effect. By doing so, both games are clarified when, for example, the manager of the game hall confirms the ball output status, etc., while making the rolls by the orbiting body common and further standardizing the production. Can be distinguished into.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the winning probability of the replaying combination changes before and after the transition as the predetermined combination.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to experience the transition to the so-called RT state as the transition to the predetermined state. As the game state shifts and the probability of the lottery result changes, in addition to the RT state in which the re-game probability changes, a bonus state in which the small winning combination probability changes is assumed. It can be said that the specific symbols such as the symbols can be aligned and transferred, and it is easy to understand in appearance, and it can be said that it is familiar to the player that the specific symbols such as the 7 symbols are aligned and transition to the bonus state. On the other hand, the transition to the RT state is less familiar than the transition to the bonus state, and in many cases, the outcome at the time of transition is relatively difficult to recognize. Therefore, by applying the game property that allows the player to experience the transition of the gaming state with the second bet number to the transition of the RT state as in the configuration of the feature A4, the transition of the gaming state that is difficult to understand is experienced. It will be very useful to fully understand the playability.

Feature A8. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result in which the predetermined combination (re-game) is won as the first specific result, and the first effective position is the first for the predetermined combination as the first specific pattern combination. 1 When a specific pattern combination is stopped, a predetermined privilege (re-game) corresponding to the predetermined result is given as the first privilege.
The lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the second predetermined combination as the second payout result (for example, the winning combination of one piece), and the predetermined combination of the second specific patterns at the second effective position. When the second specific symbol combination for the role (for example, the symbol combination for which the first lip small winning combination is established) is stopped, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out.
In the orbiting body, when the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination stops at the second effective position, the pattern is attached so that the first specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination stops at the specific position. Is attached,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the second predetermined combination, the first means (for example, the main means) for causing the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination to stop at the second effective position. A function for executing a process for notifying the push order for establishing the first lip small winning combination when the control device 101 wins the winning combination of the first winning combination) and the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination A function of executing a process for notifying the push order for establishing a small winning combination when the main control device 101 wins the winning combination of the first winning combination. ), The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A7.

According to the above configuration, in the game based on the number of bets, the transition result is won in the game based on the number of bets, and the probability of winning the predetermined combination changes and the probability of granting the predetermined privilege changes. Second predetermined role result It is possible to reproduce by stopping the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined role or not stopping the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined role at the time of winning. .. Moreover, if the second specific pattern combination for the second predetermined combination is stopped, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out. It is possible to experience without accompanying.

Feature A9. When the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means, the payout combination (for example, bell) in which the payout of the game medium is given as a privilege before and after the transition is won. The first specific transition results (first BB, second BB) that have different probabilities are provided.
When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means, the payout combination (for example, bell) in which the payout of the game medium is given as a privilege before and after the transition is won. A second specific transition result (first PBB, second PBB) with different probabilities is provided.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific transition result, and the first specific symbol combination for specific transition as the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the first effective position, the gaming state is changed. It is possible to shift to the first specific state (bonus state), and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific transition result, and the second effective position is specified as the second specific pattern combination. Specific transition means that can shift the game state to the second specific state (special bonus state) when the second specific pattern combination for transition is stopped (function to execute bonus state processing by the main control device 101) With
The pattern is attached to the orbiting body so that when the second specific pattern combination for specific transition stops at the second effective position, the first specific pattern combination for specific transition stops at the specific position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

According to the above configuration, the first specific transition result and the second specific transition result as so-called bonuses are provided in both the first bet number and the second bet number games, respectively. Moreover, when the second specific transition result is won in the game with the second bet number and the second specific pattern combination for specific transition, which is the prize for the second specific transition result, stops at the second effective position, the first specific transition As a result, the first specific pattern combination for specific transition, which is a prize, stops at a specific position. By doing so, it is possible to make the bonus winning when the bonus is won in the game with the second bet number appear as if the bonus winning is also made in the game with the first bet number, and it depends on the second bet number. The playability of the game can be improved.

Feature A10. When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the second specific state is shifted based on the second specific transition result after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific transition result. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that, in the game until the end of the game, a number of game media exceeding the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is not paid out.

According to the above configuration, even if the second specific transition result is won in the game with the second bet number and the second specific state is reached, the game medium cannot be expected to increase. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the game based on the first bet number from the game based on the second bet number, and to strengthen the impression that the game based on the second bet number is a practice game.

In the above configuration, "when the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific transition result, and then the first specific transition result is obtained. On the premise that in the game until the end of the first specific state that has been transferred based on the above, the number of game media that exceeds the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is paid out. The difference between the 1 specific state and the 2 specific state can be clarified.

Further, if the relationship between the "first bet number" and the "second bet number" is "the second bet number is smaller than the first bet number", the second bet number can be transferred to the second bet number. 2 It is possible to make the player understand the specific state as a privilege according to the number of bets.

Feature A11. The first terminating means (set in step S613 by the main control device 101) for terminating the first specific state based on the number of game media paid out during the first specific state has reached the first predetermined number. A function to execute an affirmative determination process in step S1504 based on the number of remaining payouts becoming 0) and
A second termination means (main control device) that terminates the second specific state based on the fact that the number of gaming media paid out during the second specific state becomes a second predetermined number that is smaller than the first predetermined number. A function of executing an affirmative determination process in step S1504 based on the fact that the number of remaining payouts set in step S614 according to 101 becomes 0).
The gaming machine according to the feature A10, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends with a smaller number of payouts than the first specific state. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the second specific state in line with the game for practice by the second bet number, and as in the feature A9, the second specific state is substantially the game medium. Even if the increase is not expected, it is possible to terminate the second specific state earlier.

In the above configuration, for example, "when the first specific transition result is won or after the first specific state transition, the lottery of the lottery means by the second bet number is performed until the first specific state is completed. As a result, the second specific transition result is not won, and when the second specific transition result is won or after the transition to the second specific state, the first bet number is until the end of the second specific state. As a result of the lottery of the lottery means, the first specific transition result is not won. ”The significance of ending the second specific state earlier is enhanced. That is, in such a configuration, even if the bet number is set as the first bet number, the first specific transition result is not won until the end of the second specific state. Therefore, regardless of the increase or decrease of the game medium in the second specific state. This is because it is necessary to end the second specific state in order to play the game with the first bet number.

Feature A12. As a result of being able to win in the lottery by the lottery means in the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means in the second specific state, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out. Is provided as a result that can be granted as the privilege, and a lottery by the lottery means in a situation where a specific bet number (3, first bet number) larger than the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein as a result of being able to win in the above, a result is provided in which the same number of gaming media as the specific bet number can be paid out as the privilege.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second specific state ends with the payout of the second predetermined number, the game with the specific bet number is played earlier than the game with the second bet number. It is possible to terminate the second specific state. In particular, a game in which the player wants to fully enjoy or experience the second specific state by making it possible to change whether or not to end early in the part of the bet number that can be determined by the player's operation. It is secured and it becomes possible to play the game while respecting the will of the player.

Feature A13. As a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means during the second specific state, a predetermined end result (PCB, SB) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or feature A12, wherein the second termination means can terminate the second specific state based on winning the predetermined termination result.

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends even if the predetermined end result is won. Therefore, for example, depending on the winning probability of the predetermined end result, the second specific state ends earlier than the second predetermined number. Can be done. This makes it possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the second specific state, in which the number of game media cannot be expected to increase, continues for a long time.

Regarding the "predetermined end result", more specifically, "when the winning probability of the predetermined combination changes before and after the transition and the number of game media paid out after the transition reaches a predetermined number, the gaming state after the transition". May be the result of the termination. In addition, regarding the "predetermined end result", "when the winning probability of the predetermined combination changes before and after the transition and the number of game media paid out after the transition reaches a predetermined number, or when the predetermined number of games are executed, the transition is made. It may be a result that the later gaming state is terminated.

Further, when the above configuration is applied to the feature A12, it may be set that "the predetermined end result is set as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means in the situation where the specific bet number is set". .. A player who sets a specific bet number by the bet number setting means can be regarded as having an intention to end the second specific state at an early stage, and in this case, a predetermined end result is won. With the configuration obtained, it is possible to end the game early according to the player's will, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of terminating the game even though it is not desired to end the game early.

Feature A14. When the drive control means is operated so as to stop the orbit of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the drive control means is operated. It controls so that the winning pattern corresponding to the winning result stops at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific transition result, and the symbol corresponding to the second specific transition result is not stopped and the second specific symbol combination for the specific transition is not formed, the first 2 It is provided with a reservation storage means (a function of setting a bonus winning flag in step S306 of the main control device 101 and a function of executing a negative determination process in step S609) to reserve and store the winning of the specific transition result.
In the lottery by the lottery means performed in the situation where the second specific transition result winning is reserved and stored in the reserved storage means, it is set so that there is a non-winning result that does not win the second specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A13.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the second specific transition result is reserved and stored, it is possible to aim and stop the pattern corresponding to the second specific transition result. That is, even if an attempt is made to win a prize for the second specific transition result that is reserved and stored, if the second specific result is won, the second specific transition result prize is established in the control that prioritizes the second specific result prize. It is not possible to make it move to the second specific state. Therefore, if the above configuration is used, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to shift to the second specific state.

Feature A15. In the reserved storage means, the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific transition result, the symbol corresponding to the first specific transition result does not stop, and the first specific symbol combination for the specific transition is not formed. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that the winning of the first specific transition result can be reserved and stored even in such a case.

In the situation where the first bet number is playing a game that may be different from the trial version game in which the increase or decrease of the game medium is small, the first specific transition result is obtained and if it is reserved and stored, some players may play the game. It is also conceivable to carry out the reserved situation with the second bet number instead of the first bet number. In that respect, according to the above configuration, since it is possible to win the first specific transition result won by the first bet number by the second bet number, the game quality of each bet number is not deteriorated. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the game in which a prize is established.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A15, wherein the second bet number is set as a number smaller than the first bet number.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the first specific state that shifts with the first bet number and the second specific state that shifts with the second bet number smaller than that becomes clear. In particular, in the feature A14, the act of winning the first specific transition result with the second bet number is more likely to be performed in the situation where the first specific transition result is reserved and stored.

Feature A17. When the second specific transition result is won and the second specific pattern combination for the specific transition is stopped at the effective position, the transition means shifts to the second specific state, while the game medium is paid out at the time of the transition. Is not done,
In the second specific state, in the predetermined game in the second specific state, the number of game media of the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is added to the number of game media of the second bet number. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A16, wherein the payout is set as one of the termination conditions of the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, since the game medium is not paid out at the time of winning the second specific transition result, the game medium may be lost at the time of transition to the second specific state. Therefore, assuming that the end condition of the second specific state is increased by the number of game media (second bet number) required at the time of winning the second specific transition result, the total from the transition to the end of the second specific state to the end is calculated. It is possible to reduce the increase / decrease in the game medium. As a result, the game with the second bet number is shared with the stop result in the game with the first bet number as a game property in which the increase / decrease in the game medium is reduced even if the second specific state transition occurs. Can be enjoyed to the maximum.

Feature A18. In a game performed in a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the first continuous performance is continuously performed across each game by a predetermined effect means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65). The production is set,
In a game performed in a situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a second continuous effect that is continuously performed across each game is set in the predetermined effect means. ,
The first continuous number storage means (continuous effect counter) for grasping the continuous number of the first continuous effect and the second continuous number storage means (continuous effect counter for display) for grasping the continuous number of the second continuous effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, which are characterized by having each.

According to the above configuration, the number of consecutive first continuous effects and the number of consecutive second continuous effects are separately grasped. Therefore, for example, a game based on the first bet number while executing the first continuous effect. Even if the game is switched from to the second bet number, or vice versa, the continuous number of each continuous production can be memorized, and when the game is returned to the original bet number, the game is continuous. It is possible to restart from the middle of the production.

Feature A19. A first effect mode in which an effect based on the first bet number is performed as an effect by a predetermined effect means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65) based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (operation of the second effect switch 67). It is provided with a switching means (a function of executing a specific mode switching process by the display control device 81) capable of switching between a (normal game mode) and a second effect mode (specific mode) in which the effect based on the second bet number is performed. ,
Any one of the features A1 to A18, wherein the bet number setting means can set the first bet number and the second bet number without switching the effect mode by the switching means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch the effect mode and entertain the game with the first bet number and the game with the second bet number in the effect mode suitable for each. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which the bonus is won at the time of so-called bonus winning, a bet number different from the bet number at the time of winning the bonus may be set, and even in such a case, the production mode is switched. If this happens, the player may feel annoyed. Therefore, by making it possible to set each bet number by the bet number setting means without switching the production mode, the game by each bet number can be fully enjoyed without feeling the above-mentioned troublesomeness. Can be entertained.

Feature A20. Based on the transition of the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (advantageous section, during bonus), the effect mode cannot be switched by the switching means, or the effect mode should not be switched by the switching means. The gaming machine according to feature A19, which is provided with a regulation means (a function of executing processes such as steps S4603, S4604, S4703 to S4705 by the main control device 101) for executing a regulation process for notifying the above.

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that switching between the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number should not be performed depending on the game state. For example, in an advantageous state managed by the number of games, if the game is consumed by another bet number, the number of games in the advantageous state may be eroded, and one bet number may be used. If the bonus is won, the bonus lottery may not be performed even if the game with the other bet number is played. Therefore, by providing the means for disabling the switching as described above, it is possible to avoid the event that the player loses due to the switching.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to feature A20, wherein the predetermined gaming state on which the regulation processing is performed by the regulating means is a state advantageous to the player.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature A20 can be suitably exhibited.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69),
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means.
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
The transition result (for example, 1st BB, 1st BB, 1st BB, 1st BB, 1st 2BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB), and when a specific pattern combination (for example, 7 reds) corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, the transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to the specific state. (Function to execute bonus state processing by the control device 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery executed by the lottery means in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number (3 cards), a larger number of game media than the first bet number is paid out. The first specific result (for example, watermelon as the 26th small winning combination) and the transition result are provided so that the game can be performed or the replay can be performed.
As a result of the lottery executed by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number (1 bet) which is smaller than the first bet number, the second bet number is set. A game characterized in that a second specific result (for example, a special watermelon as the 26th P small winning combination) and the transition result are provided so that the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out or the re-game can be executed. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the start operation means is operated with the bet number of the game medium as the first bet number, and the result of the lottery executed based on the operation is notified by the stop result of the pattern through the operation of the stop operation means. , If the result of the lottery is the first specific result, the number of bets in a game machine capable of a series of games in which a larger number of game media than the number of bets can be acquired or re-games can be executed. By setting the second bet number different from the first bet number, a game in which the same number of game media as the bet number can be paid out or a re-game can be executed can be won in the second specific result or the transition result. It becomes possible to do. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game that is performed while expecting to acquire a number of game media that is larger than the number of bets, and at the same time, a game that is performed from a completely different viewpoint from the game. .. For example, by increasing the winning probability of the second specific result and the transition result, it is possible to realize a game in which the game medium does not increase or decrease (small), such that the game medium cannot be expected to increase, but the game medium does not decrease. However, even if the winning probability of the second specific result or the transition result is low, the number of the second bet is smaller than the number of the first bet. It is also possible to execute a series of games such as orbiting the orbiting body, operating the stop operating means, and stopping the orbiting body. By doing so, it is possible to freely set the game regardless of the uniform number of bets, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of the game.

Feature B2. In a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the first specific result is won, and a first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result is formed at the effective position. By stopping each of the orbiting bodies, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result winning is given.
As the second specific result,
A specific position that is not the effective position in the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, and is the effective position in the situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means. In addition, when each of the orbiting bodies is stopped in the state where the first predetermined pattern combination is formed, the privilege corresponding to the second specific result winning is given as the first correspondence result (for example, as the 26th P small winning combination). Special watermelon) and
By stopping each orbiting body in a state where the first predetermined pattern combination is not formed at the specific position, the privilege corresponding to the second specific result winning is given. )When,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein is set.

According to the above configuration, in terms of playability based on the second bet number, the first predetermined pattern combination that is a prize in the game with the first bet number is formed, and the first predetermined pattern combination that is not a prize in the game with the first bet number is formed. It is possible to give a privilege corresponding to the second specific result winning in either case where the pattern combination of is not formed. By doing so, in a game with a second bet number in which the increase or decrease of the game medium is small, some patterns are aligned and the so-called winning prize is stopped as in each game, but some patterns are aligned and stopped. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the stopped rolls such that the winning rolls appear or the so-called out-of-roll rolls are stopped without being aligned, and the playability by the second bet number can be improved.

Feature B3. As the second specific result, when the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, each of the orbitals is stopped in a state where the first symbol combination is stopped at the effective position, and the first operation result is won. When (for example, a small combination of detachment) is established and the operation order of the stop operation means is a second operation order different from the first operation order, a second operation order different from the first pattern combination at the effective position is obtained. The operation order correspondence result (for example, special first) in which each of the orbiting bodies is stopped and the second operation result winning (for example, the third lip small winning combination) different from the first operation result winning is established in the state where the pattern combination of 1 promotion replays 1 to 4) are provided,
When the first operation result winning is established, the privilege giving means pays out the same number of game media as the second operation result winning, and even when the second operation result winning is established, the second betting number is paid out. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, which is configured to pay out the same number of gaming media as the above.

According to the above configuration, in the game with the second bet number, when the operation order correspondence result is obtained among the second specific results, the number of game media to be paid out does not change, but different pattern combinations stop depending on the operation order and different prizes are won. It becomes an aspect. By doing so, in the game with the second bet number, the game playability is improved by increasing the number of winning modes to be larger than the types of winning results, while ensuring the game playability without increase / decrease (small) of the game medium. Can be done.

Feature B4. In a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the first specific result is won, and a first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result is formed at the effective position. By stopping each of the orbiting bodies, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result winning is given.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation order correspondence result and the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, the first predetermined combination of the first symbols is placed at the effective position. When the first operation result winning is established by stopping each of the orbiting bodies in the state where the pattern combination is formed, and the operation order of the stop operation means is the second operation order, the effective position is the said. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the second operation result winning is established by stopping each of the orbiting bodies in a state where the first predetermined pattern combination is not formed as the second pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the so-called out-of-order rolls and winning wins in the first bet number are stopped by the operation order by the stop operation means. Although the benefits granted will not change even if any of the outcomes is stopped, if the above is done, for example, by notifying or not notifying the first operation order for the winning outcomes, the prize will be won. It is possible to intentionally make a roll appear. As a result, the playability of the second bet number can be significantly improved.

Feature B5. In a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the re-game result is won among the first specific results, and a predetermined combination of symbols for re-game corresponding to the re-game result is placed in the effective position. By stopping each of the orbiting bodies in the formed state, the re-gambling corresponding to the re-gambling result winning is given.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation order correspondence result and the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, the replay predetermined as the first pattern combination at the effective position. When each of the orbiting bodies stops in a state where the pattern combination of the above is formed, the first operation result winning is established, and the operation order of the stop operation means is the second operation order, the effective position is set to the above. Described in feature B3 or feature B4, wherein the second operation result winning is established by stopping each of the orbiting bodies in a state where the predetermined combination of symbols for replay is not formed as the second combination of symbols. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, the so-called replay winning outcomes and the losing outcomes in the first bet number are stopped by the operation order by the stop operation means. Although the benefits granted will not change even if any of the rolls is stopped, if the above is done, for example, the first operation order for the roll that will be the replay prize may or may not be notified. Then, it is possible to intentionally make a roll that is a replay prize. As a result, the playability of the second bet number can be significantly improved.

Feature B6. As a game performed in a situation where the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a high re-game state (for example, a second RT state) in which the probability of winning the re-game result is relatively high and low, and a low The re-gambling state (for example, the 1st RT state) is set, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result corresponding to the operation order, the operation order notification means (for example, the display control device 81) can notify the first operation order by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). The gaming machine according to feature B5, which is characterized by having a function of executing a mode push order combination process).

According to the above configuration, in the case of the operation order correspondence result, for example, if the first operation order is notified by the operation order notification means, a replay winning result in the game of the first bet number appears, and the first If the operation order is not notified, a missed result will appear in the game with the first bet number, and depending on the presence or absence of the notification, even in the game with the second bet number, the high replay state or low in the game with the first bet number will appear. It is possible to reproduce the re-gambling state. Therefore, the playability of the game based on the second bet number can be improved.

Feature B7. When the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, a plurality of types of the second specific result are provided as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means.
In a predetermined state (normal gaming state), when the second bet number is set and the lottery is performed by the lottery means, one of the plurality of types of the second specific result and the transition result is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the game is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific result winning is established, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out or the re-game is given. Therefore, the second specification is performed in the game played with the second bet number. If any of the results is won, the game medium will not increase or decrease in the game played with the second bet number. As a result, the game played with the second bet number can be used as, for example, a practice game or as a production in the game played with the first bet number.

Feature B8. In the game from when the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means and the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result to the end of the specific state shifted based on the transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein a number of gaming media exceeding the number of bets set by the betting number setting means is not paid out.

According to the above configuration, even if the transition result is won in the game with the second bet number and the specific state is reached, the game medium cannot be expected to increase. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the game based on the first bet number from the game based on the second bet number, and to strengthen the impression that the game based on the second bet number is a practice game.

Feature B9. When the transition result is won in the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means and the specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the transition means is transferred to the specific state. , The game medium is not paid out at the time of the transition.
In the specific state, in the predetermined game in the specific state, the number of game media of the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is added to the number of game media of the second bet number to pay out the number. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that the above is set as one of the termination conditions of the specific state.

According to the above configuration, in the second bet number, since the game medium is not paid out at the time of winning the transition result, the game medium may be lost at the time of transition to the specific state. Therefore, assuming that the end condition of the specific state is increased by the number of game media (second bet number) required at the time of winning the transition result, the increase / decrease of the game medium is reduced when the total from the transition to the specific state to the end is increased. It becomes possible. As a result, the game based on the second bet number can be made playable with less increase or decrease in the game medium even if a specific state transition occurs.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69),
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means.
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
The transition result (for example, 1st BB, 1st BB, 1st BB, 1st BB, 1st 2BB, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB), and when a specific pattern combination (7 reds) corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, the transition means (main control) for shifting the gaming state to the specific state. Function to execute bonus state processing by device 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number (3 bets) and a second bet number (1 bet) different from the first bet number are provided.
When the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the lottery means draws a lottery of each winning combination including the transition result with the first lottery probability, and sets the bet number. When the bet number set by the means is the second bet number, the lottery of each winning combination including the transition result is performed with the second lottery probability.
In a predetermined state, when the lottery of the lottery means is performed based on the first lottery probability, the ratio of the privilege to the bet number and the lottery of the lottery means are performed based on the second lottery probability. The composition is different from the ratio of the privilege to the number of bets in the case of
A display means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of displaying game information including the privilege to be given, and
Identification means (stamp 65a, for identification) that enables the display means to identify that the game is being played with the first bet number and that the game is being played with the second bet number. Character 65b) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in both the case where the game is played with the first bet number and the case where the game is played with the second bet number, each combination including the transition result that enables the transition to a specific state A lottery will be held. The so-called payout rate, which is the ratio of the privilege to the bet number, is different between the game played with the first bet number and the game played with the second bet number. By using such a gaming machine, it is possible to realize a plurality of game features having different ball output rates in one gaming machine, and one gaming machine can meet the needs of various players. Moreover, which of the games is being played can be identified by a display means capable of notifying the game information including the privilege. Therefore, for example, when confirming the game information including the obtained privilege, it becomes clear at a glance which bet number was played together with the privilege, and for example, the payout rate is determined by the manager of the game hall or the like. It can be easily confirmed.

Although the payout rate is expressed as "the ratio of the privilege to the bet number", for example, "the grant rate of the privilege for each game" and "a predetermined number of game media are paid out as a privilege". It may be expressed as "the rate of increase of the game medium for each game" or "the rate of decrease of the game medium for each game". In addition, the number of games for calculating the payout rate may be "per predetermined number of games".

Further, "in a situation in which a predetermined state" may be a predetermined state among a plurality of types of gaming states set, such as during a bonus or an RT state, or these plurality of types are set. It may be a state that includes any or all of the gaming states that are being played.

Feature C2. The identification means identifies the display information (normal game effect data) displayed by the display means when the game is played by the first bet number, indicating that the game is played by the second bet number. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number can be distinguished by superimposing the information (effect data for identification information).

According to the above configuration, the display information when the game with the first bet number is performed and the display information when the game with the second bet number is performed are provided as separate items, and each of them is provided. Compared with the configuration that enables identification, it is only necessary to superimpose the identification information, so that the storage capacity of the display information stored in advance can be significantly reduced.

Feature C3. The display means displays image data for displaying the display information when the game is played by the second bet number, and displays the display information when the game is played by the first bet number. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the identification information can be displayed by using the image data for the purpose of display, and the identification information can be superimposed and displayed.

According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to store the image data for displaying the display information when the game is performed by the second bet number in advance, and the effect of the feature C2 can be more preferably performed. can.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the display means is arranged at a position that does not overlap the orbiting body in the front-rear direction.

According to the above configuration, the discriminability by the identification means is not a concern when playing a game while looking at the orbiting body, and the orbiting body is not a concern when confirming the distinctiveness by looking at the display means. For example, when a roll that does not stop easily stops on the orbiting body, it is assumed that some players take a picture and record it. In that respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to take a picture without worrying about the reflection of the display means in the picture taking.

Feature C5. When the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number and the transfer means shifts to the specific state, the circuit is stopped. The stop roll of the pattern that stops at a position that can be seen through the display unit
It is characterized in that the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is the same as the stop result when the transfer means shifts to the specific state in the situation where the bet number is the second bet number. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4.

According to the above configuration, the transition to a specific state in which the winning probability of each winning combination can be changed by the lottery means occurs due to the same stop roll in the case of the first bet number and the case of the second bet number. obtain. In this way, even if the game playability is different from each other, the transition of the game state is caused by the same roll, which makes it easier for the player to understand the game playability and the ball payout rate is low. Even when playing a game on the side, it is possible to experience that the transition to a specific state has occurred due to the same roll as the roll on the side with a high payout rate, and it is also possible to provide a sense of satisfaction. It becomes.

On the other hand, if the numbers are the same in this way, it can be said that it becomes more difficult for some game hall managers and the like to know which game is being played. In particular, the point at which the transition of the game state occurs is a point that the manager of the game hall can pay attention to. In that respect, as described in feature C1, since the display means can be identified, it is notified which game is being played at a position unrelated to the outcome of each orbiting body. While enjoying the effect of satisfaction to the player, the distinctiveness does not decrease.

Feature C6. In a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the first shift result (first BB, second BB) is the shift result that causes the shift means to shift to the specific state. Is provided,
In a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, the second shift result (first PBB, second PBB) is the shift result that causes the shift means to shift to the specific state. Is provided,
The probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the first transition result in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, and the bet number setting means are set. Features C1 to C5, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the second transition result is set as the same probability in the situation where the number of bets is the second number of bets. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a transition result (probability of a first transition result and probability of a second transition result) is determined between a game with a first bet number and a game with a second bet number having different payout rates. It is set as the same probability. Therefore, in the winning status of the transition result (the occurrence status of the specific state), it is difficult to distinguish between the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number. In other words, even if the game has different ball output rates, both games can be treated as similar games. For example, one game can be treated like a trial version of the other game. .. Then, as described in the feature C1, although both games are similar in this way, since they can be identified on the display means side, the confirmation work by the game hall can be easily performed.

In addition, by configuring "the benefits obtained differ between the specific state that shifts based on the first transition result and the specific state that shifts based on the second transition result", the winning probabilities of both transition results are the same. Even so, it is possible to secure configurations with different ball output rates.

Feature C7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result (for example, watermelon as the 26th small winning combination), the privilege granting means pays out the first specific number of game media as the privilege. ,
The case where the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is the first specific result in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, and the first specific number. When the game medium is to be paid out, the same stop roll as the stop roll of the pattern that stops at a position recognizable through the display unit in the situation where each orbiting body is stopped. However, if the bet number set by the bet number setting means is stopped in the situation where the bet number is the second bet number, a second specific number of game media different from the first specific number is paid out. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

According to the above configuration, the game played with the first bet number and the game played with the second bet number can be configured to be given different benefits with the same stop roll. As a result, the first bet number and the second bet number are common to each other by utilizing the roll of the orbiting body, which is an area different from the display means in which the distinctiveness is generated, while making it identifiable by the identification means. It is possible to realize playability with different ball output rates while using.

Feature C8. When the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number and the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is different from the first specific result (for example, as the 26th P small winning combination). In the case of the special watermelon), the second specific number of game media can be paid out.
The probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the first specific result in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, and the bet number setting means are set. Described in feature C7, wherein the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the second specific result is set as the same probability in the situation where the bet number is the second bet number. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the first specific result in which the first specific number is paid out and the second specific result in which the second specific number is paid out are made to appear with the same probability while using a common result. be able to. As a result, the first bet number and the second bet number are common to each other by utilizing the roll of the orbiting body, which is an area different from the display means in which the distinctiveness is generated, while making it identifiable by the identification means. It is possible to realize playability with different ball output rates while using.

Feature C9. The display means can display the number of payouts of the game medium as the payout number information by the privilege granting means when notifying the game information including the privilege.
When the second specific number of gaming media is paid out based on the second specific result, it is possible to display the payout number information assuming that the first specific number of gaming media has been paid out. The gaming machine according to the feature C8, which is characterized in that.

According to the above configuration, when the game information including the privilege is notified, the same payout number information can be displayed for the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number. As a result, even if the number of game media actually paid out is different and the ball output rate is different, it is possible to experience the same game playability on the display. However, as described in the feature C1, when the game information is notified, it is possible to identify which game the game is, so it is premised that the display is a pseudo display, and has such a premise. Therefore, it is considered that no problem can occur even if the display is different from the actual number of payouts as described above.

Feature C10. The display means can display information on the number of games executed as game number information when notifying game information including the privilege.
When the game is played by the first bet number, the game number information of the game played by the first bet number is displayed, and when the game is played by the second bet number, the game is concerned. The gaming machine according to feature C9, characterized in that information on the number of games played in the second bet can be displayed.

According to the above configuration, while the payout number information is displayed in a pseudo manner, the game number information is displayed corresponding to the actual number of games. This is because if the game number information is also displayed in a pseudo manner, the reliability of the notification of the game information will be significantly reduced. By displaying the same number of games as the number of games actually experienced by the player. , It becomes easy to imagine a pseudo payout number display.

Feature C11. The identification means identifies the display information (normal game effect data) displayed by the display means when the game is played by the first bet number, indicating that the game is played by the second bet number. By superimposing the information (effect data for identification information), it is possible to distinguish between the game based on the first bet number and the game based on the second bet number.
The number of bets when the lottery means is drawn based on the second lottery probability, rather than the ratio of the privilege to the number of bets when the lottery means is drawn based on the first lottery probability. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the ratio of the privilege to the above-mentioned privilege is lower.

According to the above configuration, the game with the second bet number on the side with the low payout rate is shown with respect to the display information when the game with the first bet number on the so-called high payout rate side is performed. The identification information is superimposed. In other words, when the game is played with the first bet number, the identification information is not superposed. That is, when the game with the first bet number is performed, it can be said that it is possible to concentrate on the game with the first bet number without worrying about the other game. This is due to the idea that many players prefer to play games on the side with a high ball output rate, and by doing so, it is possible to create a gaming machine that meets the needs of many players. be able to.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69),
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means.
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. As a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a predetermined number of game media, and
The transition result (for example, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB) corresponding to the transition of the lottery result by the lottery means to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery by the lottery means changes as compared with before the transition. ), And when a specific pattern combination (for example, red 7, red 7, and watermelon alignment) corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, the transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state to the specific state. Function to execute bonus state processing by 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The expected number of payouts (ball payout rate) of the game medium by the payout means with respect to the bet number set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the specific state, and the normal number before the transition to the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means is equal to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the game state.

According to the above configuration, the number of payouts per game is set to be the same between the bonus state as a specific state that shifts based on the so-called bonus winning as a transition result and the normal game state before the bonus shift. ing. That is, even if the normal gaming state is changed to the bonus state, the advantage for the player does not change. For example, as a configuration that does not change the advantage, a pseudo state is generated by aligning and stopping the bonus patterns in a predetermined start game, but the small winning probability is not changed as compared with before the transition to the bonus state. A configuration that generates a bonus state is also conceivable. However, in this case, the player feels the occurrence of the bonus state because the game state does not change at all and the small winning combination winning probability does not change only through the start game in which the bonus patterns can be aligned and stopped. It's hard to do. On the other hand, in the above configuration, the probability of each role changes due to the transition to a specific state as a bonus. For example, if the winning probability of each role increases or the winning combination wins only during the bonus, the bonus It is easy to experience the condition. If the configuration is such that the advantage is not changed as described above, it is possible to simulate the bonus state as a specific state without giving profit to the player, and the game design. The degree of freedom of is greatly improved. Therefore, it is possible to preferably measure the degree of attention of the game.

In addition, "equivalent" may include "same thing" and "not the same, but the same level of profit that the player can obtain".

In addition, "the expected number of payouts (ball payout rate) of the game medium by the payout means with respect to the bet number set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the specific state, and before the transition to the specific state. The expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means with respect to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means per game executed during the normal game state is equivalent to the above. The advantage in the specific state and the advantage in the normal gaming state before the transition to the specific state are equivalent. "

Feature D2. The expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state, and the game by the payout means per game executed during the normal game state before the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the expected number of payouts of the medium is equal to or less than the number of bets set by the bet number setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, it is not expected that the number of game media will increase not only in the normal game state but also in the specific state. In other words, the game medium cannot be expected to increase even in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the player is allowed to experience the bonus as a specific state without giving a profit to the player.

Feature D3. The expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and the game by the payout means per game executed during the normal game state before the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the expected number of payouts of the medium is the same as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, it can be expected that the same number of game media as the number of bets will be paid out in each game in the normal game state and the specific state. That is, although the increase in the game medium cannot be expected in each game, the decrease in the game medium does not occur. In this way, by making the game playability that does not increase or decrease the game medium, it is possible to realize playability for practice, for example, for understanding the specifications of the game machine.

Feature D4. As a lottery result executed by the lottery means, a plurality of payout combinations and re-game combinations to be paid out of the game medium by the payout means are provided, and when the lottery by the lottery means is performed, any of the above It is configured to win the payout combination or the replay combination.
The payout means is a privilege corresponding to the payout combination winning when the lottery result in the lottery means is the payout combination winning and a specific pattern combination corresponding to the payout combination winning stops at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the payout of the same number of gaming media as the number of bets set by the betting number setting means is executed.

According to the above configuration, the so-called out-of-game result is not set, and the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out or the re-game is executed in each game. For example, in a configuration in which there is no increase or decrease in the game medium when a plurality of games are averaged, there are a state in which the game medium is decreasing and a state in which the game medium is increasing. There may be advantages and disadvantages for the player in realizing the above. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, since the game medium does not increase or decrease in each game, the player can feel free to experience the game without causing an advantageous situation or a disadvantageous situation. Can be done.

Feature D5. When the drive control means is operated so as to stop the orbit of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the drive control means is operated. It controls so that the pattern corresponding to the winning result stops at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the symbol corresponding to the transition result does not stop forming a predetermined combination of symbols at the effective position, the reserved storage means for retaining and storing the transition result winning ( A function to execute a process of setting a bonus winning flag in the main control device 101) is provided.
In the lottery by the lottery means performed in the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved and stored in the reservation storage means, it is set so that there is a non-winning result in which none of the plurality of payouts is won. The gaming machine according to the feature D4.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the migration result is reserved and stored, it is possible to aim and stop the specific pattern corresponding to the migration result. In other words, even if you try to win the transfer result that you have reserved, if you win another paying combination, you will not be able to establish the transition result winning in the control that prioritizes the winning combination, and you will be in a specific state. It will not be possible to migrate. Therefore, if the above configuration is used, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to shift to a specific state.

Feature D6. As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and the normal game state before the transition to the specific state The first bet number (1 bet) at which the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game to be executed is equivalent, and the second bet number is different from the first bet number. The number (3 sheets) is provided,
In the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and before the transition to the specific state. The expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during a certain normal game state is not equal to the expected number of payouts.
The transition result is set as the lottery result by the lottery means of the game performed with the second bet number.
In the reserved storage means, the lottery result by the lottery means of the game played with the second bet number is the transition result, and the specific pattern corresponding to the shift result forms a predetermined combination at the effective position and stops. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the winning result of the transition can be reserved and stored even if the game is not performed.

In the situation where the second bet number is playing a game that may be different from the above-mentioned trial version game in which the increase / decrease in the game medium is small, if a transition result is obtained and the reserved memory is stored, the reserved memory may be used depending on the player. It is also conceivable to carry out the situation with the first bet instead of the second bet. In that respect, according to the above configuration, since the transition result of winning the second bet number can be won by the first bet number, the winning is established without deteriorating the game characteristics of each bet number. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the game to be played.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the first bet number is set as a number smaller than the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, since the first bet number is smaller than the second bet number, the loss of the game medium is minimized in the situation where the transfer result is reserved and stored in the second bet number. If the transition result winning is to be established, it is assumed that the transition result winning is established by the first bet number instead of the second bet number. Therefore, the scene where the effect of the feature D6 is exhibited is more likely to occur, and the merit of having the configuration of the feature D6 can be increased.

Feature D8. When the drive control means is operated so as to stop the orbit of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, the drive control means is operated. It controls so that the pattern corresponding to the winning result stops at the effective position.
In each of the orbiting bodies, the specific pattern corresponding to the transition result is arranged so as to be able to stop at the effective position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means.
The transition means is characterized in that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the transition result, and the specific pattern is shifted to the specific state by forming a predetermined combination at the effective position and stopping. Features The gaming machine described in D4.

According to the above configuration, the game property of aiming at a specific pattern and stopping it in the case of the transition result is lost, but since it is not reserved and stored as in the feature D5, the game medium is equal to the number of bets at the time of reserved storage. The event that the loss occurs does not occur.

Feature D9. As the plurality of payout combinations, a first payout combination (for example, a special bell as a first P small combination) and a second payout combination (for example, a special watermelon as a 26P small combination) are set.
The payout means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first payout winning combination and the first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first payout winning combination is stopped at the effective position, the first payout winning combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is paid out, and the payout is performed.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second payout winning combination and the second predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second payout winning combination is stopped at the effective position, the second payout winning combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, the payout of the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D8, wherein the first predetermined pattern combination and the second predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually distinguishable.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of payout combinations are set, and in any payout combination winning, the first payout combination is won in the game property in which the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out and the game medium does not increase or decrease. The first predetermined pattern combination and the second predetermined pattern combination constituting the second payout winning combination are visually distinguishable. Therefore, it is possible to cause variations in the stop rolls of the orbiting body in each game, and it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored even if the game playability does not increase or decrease the game medium regardless of which payout combination is won. It will be possible.

Feature D10. As the plurality of payout combinations, a first payout combination that can be won during the normal gaming state (for example, a special bell as the first P small combination) and a third payout combination that can be won during the specific state (for example, the 32P small combination). Special BB small and medium-sized role 1) as a role is set,
The payout means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first payout winning combination and the first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first payout winning combination is stopped at the effective position, the first payout winning combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is paid out, and the payout is performed.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third payout combination winning and the third predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the second payout combination winning stops at the effective position, the third payout combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, the payout of the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D9, wherein the first predetermined pattern combination and the third predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually distinguishable.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of payout combinations are set, and in any payout combination winning, the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out and the game media do not increase or decrease. The first predetermined pattern combination that constitutes the first payout winning combination that occurs and the third predetermined pattern combination that constitutes the third payout winning combination that occurs during the specific state are configured to be visually identifiable. There is. Therefore, it is possible to generate variations in the stop appearance of the orbiting body in each game between the normal game state and the specific state, and even if the expected number of game media is the same, the game state has changed. It becomes possible to make it easier.

Feature D11. As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and the normal game state before the transition to the specific state The first bet number (1 bet) at which the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game to be executed is equivalent, and the second bet number is different from the first bet number. The number (3 sheets) is provided,
In the situation where the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during the specific state and before the transition to the specific state. One of the features D1 to D10 characterized in that the expected number of payouts of the game medium by the payout means per game executed during a certain normal game state is not equal to each other. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, while realizing the novel playability of the above feature D1 in the first bet number, if the second bet number is different from the first bet number, the payout is expected in the specific state and the normal game state. It is possible to realize a general game in which the numbers are different. In this way, it is possible to realize a plurality of playability with one gaming machine, and it is possible to diversify the gaming.

In this case, for example, if the game playability in which the game medium can be increased or decreased realized by the second bet number can be experienced by the first bet number, the game by the first bet number is the second bet number. It is possible to provide it as a practice for playing games. As a result, the game with the second bet number is regarded as a novel and complicated game property, and even if the fun is difficult to understand in the first game, it is interesting to practice it with the first bet number first. It is possible to fully enjoy the game with the second bet number.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69),
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means.
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. As a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a predetermined number of game media, and
The transition result (for example, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB) corresponding to the transition of the lottery result by the lottery means to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery by the lottery means changes as compared with before the transition. ), And when a specific pattern combination (for example, red 7, red 7, and watermelon alignment) corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position, the transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state to the specific state. Function to execute bonus state processing by 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number (3 bets) and a second bet number (1 bet) different from the first bet number are provided.
In a game played in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, it is determined whether or not a specific condition that can be satisfied without winning the transition result is satisfied. Condition determination means (in the second embodiment, a function of executing a process of determining the presence / absence of a special addition flag by the main control device 101) and
A predetermined game is performed in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied, and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. In the first effect means (the main control device 101 in the second embodiment, for example, the processing of steps S5520 and S5704, S5705), the first specific effect can be executed by the effect means (auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc.). Function to execute) and
In a game performed in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. In the second effect means (in the main control device 101 in the second embodiment, for example, the second specific effect different from the first specific effect can be executed by the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc.)). (Function to execute processing such as step S5521, step S5712, S5713, and processing for special addition) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first bet number and the second bet number can be set, when the game is played with the first bet number and a specific condition is satisfied, and then the game is played with the second bet number. A different effect is generated depending on whether the game is played with the first bet number or the game is played with the first bet number but the game is played with the second bet number without satisfying the specific conditions. As a result, it is possible to greatly improve the range of games of the gaming machine in which a plurality of bets can be set. That is, unlike a conventional gaming machine, for example, a uniform game property in which a game is always played with the first bet number, for example, a specific condition is satisfied at the time of a game with the first bet number, and then the second bet is made. It is possible to realize the playability of playing a game by number.

Feature E2. A situation in which the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determination means and a situation in which the specific condition is determined not to be satisfied by the condition determination means are set by the bet number setting means. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the winning probability of each winning combination by the lottery means performed in a situation where the betting number is the second betting number is the same probability.

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of each winning combination by the lottery means in the game played with the second bet number does not change regardless of the success or failure of the specific conditions. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make the production different between the first production means and the second production means without changing the game state or the like. Therefore, the degree of freedom of production is improved, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of attention.

Feature E3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out. 2 payout roles (for example, special watermelon as the 26th P small role) and replay roles (special replay) are provided.
At least in the situation where the specific condition is determined by the condition determining means, the lottery by the lottery means is performed in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. If so, the gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, which is set to win either the second payout combination or the re-game combination.

According to the above configuration, the game medium does not increase or decrease at least in the game played with the second bet number when the specific condition is satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to position the game with the second bet number as a game for production, and it is possible to preferably realize a novel production with different bet numbers within a range that does not cause a loss to the player. can.

Feature E4. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the first specific number of game media having the second bet number or more is paid out. The first payout role (for example, watermelon as the 26th small role) to be played is provided.
The specific condition is that in a game played in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, the lottery result by the lottery means is the first payout combination winning. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, which can be satisfied as one condition.

According to the above configuration, in order to play the game with the second bet number based on the establishment of the specific condition, the player has the game medium of the second bet number even though the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, inconveniences such as not being able to see the second specific effect based on the establishment of the specific conditions are less likely to occur. That is, the game medium having the second bet number or more should be paid out based on the first payout winning combination winning / winning that triggered the establishment of the specific condition.

Feature E5. A first payout combination (for example, a watermelon as a 26th small combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number. Gambling
A second payout combination (for example, a special watermelon as a 26P small combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. Gambling
The stop roll of each of the orbitals when the first payout winning combination is established is set to be the same as the stop roll of each of the orbitals when the second payout winning combination is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4.

According to the above configuration, a first payout winning combination in a game with a first bet number that satisfies a specific condition, and a second payout combination winning in a game with a second bet number that can be executed after the specific condition is satisfied. The stop rolls are common. By doing so, the game played with the second bet number can be made to resemble the game with the first bet number, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the game playability in which each bet number goes back and forth.

Feature E6. A first payout combination (for example, a watermelon as a 26th small combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number. Gambling
The specific condition is that the first payout combination is won and the lottery is won by a second lottery means (a function of executing a special additional lottery process by the main control device 101) different from the lottery by the lottery means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, which is characterized in that it is established based on the above.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is not satisfied only by winning the first payout combination at the time of the first bet number, but it is established when the lottery by the second lottery means is won. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability of establishment of the specific condition without lowering the appearance rate of the first payout combination, and it is possible to increase the rarity of the second specific effect by the second effect means. In addition, by doing the above, even if the first specific combination is won, there are cases where the specific conditions are satisfied and cases where the specific conditions are not satisfied, and there are various production settings when the first specific combination is won. It can also be converted.

Feature E7. By winning the lottery by the second lottery means, a second privilege (for example, an addition of the number of games in the attack mode) different from the privilege by paying out the game medium is given. The gaming machine according to the feature E6.

According to the above configuration, the significance of the lottery by the second lottery means is improved, and if the second privilege is given, the specific condition is satisfied, and the second specific effect is performed by the second effect means. Therefore, the significance of the second specific production is also improved.

Feature E8. By the lottery means performed in a situation where the specific condition is determined by the condition determination means and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. The description according to the feature E7, wherein the feature E7 is provided with a means (a function of executing a special addition process by the main control device 101) capable of determining the type of the second privilege to be granted based on the lottery result. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the significance of the game played with the second bet number is improved. That is, it is determined that the second privilege will be granted by winning the second lottery means at the time of winning the first specific combination, and the second bet number will be granted in the subsequent game of the second bet number. 2 The type of benefits will be decided. By doing so, the fun of the game based on the second bet number is improved.

Feature E9. In a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, the lottery means uses the first bet number instead of the second bet number as the bet number set by the bet number setting means. When the lottery is performed by the above, it is provided with a means (a function of executing a process for normal addition by the main control device 101) capable of determining the type of the second privilege to be granted based on the lottery result. The gaming machine according to the feature E8.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a specific condition is satisfied and the type of the second privilege can be determined in the game based on the second bet number, the game based on the first bet number is played instead of the game based on the second bet number. In this case, since the type of the second privilege is determined using the lottery result of the game based on the first bet number, the inconvenience that the second privilege is not given is avoided.

Feature E10. Using the lottery result by the lottery means based on the first bet number that triggered the establishment of the specific condition, a means capable of determining the type of the second privilege to be granted (based on the additional opportunity by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to feature E8 or feature E9, which comprises a function of executing a process of determining the number of special additional games).

According to the above configuration, not only the result of the game after the specific condition is satisfied but also the result of the game that triggered the establishment of the specific condition is reflected in the type of the second privilege. As a result, the continuity of a series of games in which a specific condition is satisfied in the game based on the first bet number and then the second privilege is given mainly in the game based on the second bet number becomes the type of the second privilege. It will be reflected, and it will be possible to realize a novel game property, which is a privilege granting system that takes into account the continuity of the game with different bets.

Feature E11. The second specific effect by the second effect means is characterized in that it can occur even in a game performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E10.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a game with a first bet number and a game with a second bet number is played, the second specific effect is the first in a configuration in which a second specific effect can occur. Since it can occur even in a game based on the number of bets, it is difficult to understand whether the game in which the second specific effect occurs is executed with the first bet number or the second bet number. be able to. As a result, in the game property realized by moving the number of bets back and forth, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the number of bets and pay attention to the whereabouts of the game (for example, the type of the second privilege to be given).

Feature E12. A first payout combination (for example, a watermelon as a 26th small combination) is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number. Gambling
The specific condition is that the first payout combination is won and the lottery is won by a second lottery means (a function of executing a special additional lottery process by the main control device 101) different from the lottery by the lottery means. It is established based on
When the lottery by the second lottery means performed in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number is not won, the second specific effect can be executed. The gaming machine according to feature E11, wherein the gaming machine is provided with various means (a function of executing a process for normal addition by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, even if the specific condition for which the second privilege is to be granted is not satisfied, the second specific effect can occur in the game played with the first bet number. Therefore, it is difficult to understand whether the second specific effect was performed based on the game based on the second bet number executed when the specific condition was satisfied, or whether it was performed based on the non-establishment of the specific condition. Can be done. As a result, in the game property realized by moving the number of bets back and forth, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the number of bets and pay attention to the whereabouts of the game (for example, the type of the second privilege to be given).

Feature E13. As the receiving means, there are a plurality of second bet number receiving means capable of accepting the virtual game medium of the second bet number.
The second effect means is a situation in which the specific condition is determined by the condition determination means, and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. When the virtual game medium of the second bet number is accepted by the operation of the first second bet number accepting means among the plurality of second bet number accepting means in the game performed in When the virtual game medium of the second bet number is accepted by the operation of the second second bet number accepting means different from the first second bet number accepting means while executing the second specific effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, characterized in that the first specific effect is executed.

According to the above configuration, of the plurality of second bet number accepting means, when the first side is operated, the second specific effect is executed, while when the second side is operated, the first specific effect is executed. Will be executed, and it will be possible to make the production different depending on the second bet number receiving means to be operated. For example, even if the operation of the first side is urged when a specific condition is satisfied, it is a matter for the player to decide which operation to perform, and the second side operates contrary to the operation instruction of the first side. If so, the structure will respect the player's decision-making. As a result, the orbiting body is rotated by one's own operation to start the game, and the orbiting body is stopped by one's own operation to end the game. It becomes possible.

Feature E14. Having a plurality of the starting operation means,
Described in feature E13, wherein the player receives the operating force of the first second bet number receiving means and operates a predetermined starting operation means among the plurality of starting operating means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the player operates the first second bet number receiving means, the predetermined starting operation means is also operated, and the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operation means are performed in conjunction with each other. Therefore, operability is improved. In this case, as the second bet number receiving means, not only the one on the first side and the one on the second side are provided as described above, but also a plurality of starting operation means are provided. It can be said that the player can select whether or not to use the configuration in which the operation is performed. Therefore, the game can be suitably executed without imposing the effect against the player's will.

In the above configuration, "the acceptance operation unit in which the operation of the first second bet number acceptance means is performed and the start operation unit in which the operation of the predetermined start operation means is performed are provided adjacent to each other, and the above-mentioned configuration is provided. If the receiving operation unit and the starting operation unit are operated in a common operation direction, the player can operate both operation units at the same time.

Further, in this case, the configuration may be such that "when the receiving operation unit is operated in the operation direction, it has an interlocking unit that presses the start operation unit in the operation direction".

Feature E15. A game played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, and the above-mentioned game. Identification of a game played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied and the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number. Features E1 to E14 characterized in that it is provided with means for reducing the performance (a function of executing a process of setting a betting effect, payout appearance, etc. when a special addition flag is set by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, in a game property realized by moving the number of bets back and forth in a situation where a specific condition is satisfied, it is difficult to understand the number of bets going back and forth, and the whereabouts of the game (for example, the second privilege to be given). It is possible to pay attention to the type of).

Feature E16. As a lottery result by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number, a payout combination and a re-game combination in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out are set. Gambling
When the lottery result by the lottery means performed in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number is the payout combination, it is established from the state where the specific condition is satisfied. Features E1 to E15 characterized in that it is possible to maintain the state in which the specific condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-gambling combination while changing to the non-playing state. The gaming machine according to any one of.

The re-gaming role is a role that enables the game to be executed with the same number of bets as the number of bets of the current game without requiring a new game medium as a privilege at the time of winning, for example, the second bet. If a player wins or wins a replay in a number-based game, he or she may be forced to play the next game with a second bet. Therefore, according to the above configuration, when a player wins a replay role in a game with a second bet number based on the establishment of a specific condition, the next game must also be played with the second bet number. Even if it becomes, since the state in which the specific condition is satisfied is maintained, for example, the player is allowed to play the game with the second bet number even though the specific condition is not satisfied. There is no need to play a useless game.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69),
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means.
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. As a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a predetermined number of game media, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the first specific combination (for example, the replay in the normal gaming state in the first embodiment, the watermelon combination as the 26th small combination in the second embodiment) and the first specific combination. A second specific combination (for example, in the first embodiment, the first lip small combination in the normal gaming state, in the second embodiment, for example, a special watermelon combination as the 26P small combination) is provided, which has a higher winning probability than the combination. Has been
The first specific situation in which the first specific role winning can be established (the situation in which the re-game winning is established in the normal game mode, the situation in which the watermelon role winning is established), and the second in which the second specific combination winning can be established. 2 Specific means for reducing the distinctiveness from a specific situation (a situation in which the first lip small winning combination is established in a specific mode or a situation in which a special watermelon winning combination can be won) (for example, in the second embodiment, a special addition is added). A gaming machine characterized in that it sometimes has a function (function of setting a sound effect when betting three cards).

According to the above configuration, the distinction between the first specific situation in which the first specific combination can be won and the second specific situation in which the second specific combination can be won is reduced, so that the first specific combination is awarded. It becomes difficult to tell whether the second specific role has won a prize. Since the second specific combination has a higher winning probability than the first specific combination, for example, by making the frequently occurring second specific combination winning look like the first specific combination winning that does not occur frequently, the first It is possible to make it seem as if the first specific role winning is occurring frequently without increasing the winning probability of the first specific role too much. In this way, by lowering the distinctiveness between the winning combinations with different winning probabilities, it is possible to realize a novel playability by combining these winning combinations.

Feature F2. In the first specific situation, when the first specific combination winning is established, the pattern that stops at a position that can be visually recognized via the display unit in the situation where each orbiting body is stopped. The stop roll is
The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that, in the second specific situation, the result is the same as the stop result when the second specific combination winning is established.

According to the above configuration, the stop roll at the time of winning the first specific combination and the stop roll at the time of winning the second specific combination are the same stop roll. That is, a so-called slot in which the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the orbiting body is stopped by the operation of the stop operation means, and the winning of each winning combination is established as a stop result according to the lottery result. With respect to the stop result, which is the key to the playability of the machine, the first specific combination prize and the second specific combination prize can be made common. As a result, in order to reduce the distinctiveness of each specific effect by the specific means, since the stop result of each game is the same in the first place, it is possible to make it easy to think that both specific roles are the same.

Feature F3. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number (3).
The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is a second bet number different from the first bet number. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

According to the above configuration, the first specific winning combination and the second specific winning combination having different winning probabilities can be used properly depending on the difference in the number of bets. As a result, in the first specific situation where the first specific combination prize can be established and the second specific situation where the second specific combination prize can be established, the game performance such as the lottery probability does not go through the transition of the gaming state. Can be completely different. Moreover, as in feature F1, since the distinctiveness is lowered between the first specific situation and the second specific situation, it is difficult for the player to realize that such completely different game characteristics come and go. , It is possible to realize a novel playability by utilizing the exchange of the playability.

Feature F4. It is provided with an acceptance effect executing means (a function of executing a process for betting effect by the main control device 101) capable of executing an acceptance effect based on the acceptance of the game medium or the virtual game medium by the acceptance means.
The specific means distinguishes between the acceptance effect executed by the acceptance effect executing means in the first specific situation and the acceptance effect executed by the acceptance effect executing means in the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, which is characterized in that it can be lowered.

According to the above configuration, the first identification is made by lowering the distinctiveness between the first specific situation and the second specific situation from the effect at the start of the game in which the game medium or the virtual game medium is accepted by the receiving means. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the situation where different roles such as the role winning and the second specific winning winning can be won, and it is possible to suitably realize the playability described in the feature F1.

Feature F5. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number (3).
The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is a second bet number different from the first bet number.
When the acceptance means corresponding to the second bet number is accepted, the specific means executes the acceptance effect corresponding to the first bet number by the acceptance effect execution means. 1 The gaming machine according to feature F4, characterized in that the distinctiveness between the specific situation and the second specific situation is reduced.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult to understand from the acceptance effect whether the game in which the first specific combination can be won by the first bet number or the game in which the second specific combination can be won by the second bet number. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which bet number the game is based on, that is, which specific winning combination can be won, while making the winning combination different depending on the number of bets.

Feature F6. A virtual game medium number display means (credit display unit 60) that displays the number of virtual game media that can be accepted by the acceptance means, and
An update means (in / out of the number of bets by the main control device 101) for updating the display of the number of virtual game media by the virtual game medium number display means based on the reception of the virtual game medium by the receiving means. Counter processing: Function to execute step S109) and
With
Based on the establishment of the specific condition (set of the special addition flag) that causes the second specific situation, the specific means may make the number of virtual game media by the virtual game medium number display means invisible or difficult to see. The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that it is possible.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the number of bets by the bet number setting means is different between the first specific situation and the second specific situation, the visibility of the number of virtual game media that can be used for setting the bet number is also reduced. , The distinctiveness between the first specific situation and the second specific situation is lowered. In this way, the fact that different bet numbers are set by the bet number setting means is clearly expressed by updating the display of the number of virtual game media, and which bet number becomes clear. It can be avoided.

Feature F7. A payout number display means (payout number display unit 62) for displaying the payout number of the game medium paid out by the payout means is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the specific means can make the number of payouts by the payout number display means invisible or difficult to see based on the establishment of the specific condition.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific situation is generated, not only the display of the number of virtual game media but also the visibility of the display of the number of payouts is lowered. Generally, these displays are arranged side by side, and if the visibility of only one of the displays is reduced, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, by reducing the visibility of both of these displays, it is possible to effectively exert the effect of the feature F6 without giving a sense of discomfort.

Feature F8. The feature is that the number of gaming media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the first specific winning combination prize is different from the number of gaming media that can be paid out by the paying out means based on the second specific winning combination winning prize. The gaming machine according to the feature F7.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific combinations have different payout numbers, the visibility of the payout number display is reduced in the first place as described in feature F7. Therefore, in the configuration of feature F7, You can also enjoy the effect of making it difficult to understand which specific role winning prize was established.

Feature F9. As the receiving means, a plurality of specific receiving means (second credit insertion switch 57 for one bet, fourth credit insertion switch 69, fifth credit insertion switch 75) that can be operated in the second specific situation are provided.
In the second specific situation, when the virtual gaming medium is accepted by the operation of the first specific acceptance means among the plurality of specific acceptance means, the specific means is said to be the first by the acceptance effect executing means. 1 When the virtual gaming medium is accepted by the operation of the second specific acceptance means different from the first specific acceptance means while performing the acceptance effect which is a target for reducing the distinctiveness from the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F8, wherein the acceptance effect execution means is used to perform the acceptance effect that is not a target for reducing the distinctiveness from the first specific situation.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific situation, when the first side of the plurality of second bet number accepting means is operated, the acceptance effect in which the distinction from the first specific situation is lowered is performed, and the second is performed. When the side is operated, a reception effect is performed in which the distinctiveness from the first specific situation is not deteriorated. By doing so, the range that does not deviate from the real pleasure of the slot machine game is that the orbiting body is rotated by one's own operation to start the game, and the orbiting body is stopped by one's own operation to end the game. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the effect of the effect of reducing the distinctiveness.

Feature F10. Based on the payout of the game medium by the payout means, the payout appearance execution means (a function of executing the process of setting the payout appearance by the main control device 101) capable of executing the payout appearance according to the number of payouts is provided. ,
The number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the first specific combination prize is different from the number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the second specific combination prize.
The specific means is based on the payout appearance executed by the payout appearance execution means based on the first specific combination winning in the first specific situation and the second specific combination winning in the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized in that it is possible to reduce the distinctiveness from the payout appearance execution means executed by the payout appearance execution means.

According to the above configuration, the distinctiveness of the payout appearances between the first specific role and the second specific role, which are different in the number of payouts, is lowered. Becomes difficult to understand. Thereby, the playability of the feature F1 can be suitably realized.

Feature F11. A first specific number of game media is paid out by the payout means based on the first specific combination prize, and a second specific number of game media different from the first specific number is paid out based on the second specific combination prize. It is a configuration that is paid out by the above-mentioned payout means.
Based on the second specific winning combination, the specific means executes the payout appearances corresponding to the one specific number of payouts by the payout appearance execution means, thereby performing the first specific situation and the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature F10, which is characterized by lowering the distinctiveness between the two and the pachinko and pachinko machines.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature F10 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F12. The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a lottery result by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is the second bet number.
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the second specific number is set to be equal to or less than the same number as the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, for example, in the case of a configuration having a function of crediting a virtual game medium, when the second specific winning combination is established, it becomes difficult to actually pay out the game medium. That is, in order to establish the second specific winning combination, the virtual game medium of the second bet number is accepted by the receiving means, and as a result, the game medium of the second specific number which is equal to or less than the second bet number. It is considered that the second specific number of gaming media is within the above credits even if the player wins. As described above, since the game medium is not actually paid out, the effect of lowering the distinctiveness can be achieved only by paying out the appearance.

Feature F13. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, wherein the starting operating means is operated by receiving the operating force of the receiving means by the player.

According to the above configuration, when the player operates the receiving means, the starting operating means is also operated, and the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operating means are performed in conjunction with each other, so that the operability is improved. By doing so, a time lag between the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operating means is less likely to occur, and the orbiting body is started to orbit without giving time for the receiving means to recognize the number of virtual game media accepted. It becomes possible. Therefore, in a configuration in which the first specific combination and the second specific combination are used properly according to the difference in the number of bets as in feature F3, the distinctiveness of the number of bets is lowered, and either the first specific combination or the second specific combination is won. It becomes possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not has occurred.

In the above configuration, "the receiving operation unit in which the receiving means is operated and the starting operation unit in which the starting operating means is operated are provided adjacent to each other, and the receiving operation unit and the starting operation unit are provided. If the operation direction to be operated is standardized, the player can operate both operation units at the same time.

Further, in this case, the configuration may be such that "when the receiving operation unit is operated in the operation direction, it has an interlocking unit that presses the start operation unit in the operation direction".

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69),
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means.
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the number of bets set by the bet number setting means, a first bet number (3 bets) and a second bet number (1 bet, 2 bets) different from the first bet number are provided. Gambling
It is provided with an effective position setting means (a function of executing an effective line setting process by the main control device 101) for setting the effective position according to the number of bets set by the bet number setting means.
Set by the first effective position (downward right line L4) set by the effective position setting means in the situation where the bet number set by the bet number setting means is the first bet number, and by the bet number setting means. The second effective position (bending line L6) set by the effective position setting means in the situation where the bet number to be bet is the second bet number is set to include a specific position which is an effective position that does not overlap with each other. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to relate the game of the first bet number and the game of the second bet number by using the specific position. That is, the specific position included in the first effective position side does not overlap with the second effective position, and the specific position included in the second effective position side does not overlap with the first effective position. By utilizing such a relationship, for example, in a game played with the first bet number, a predetermined result is won by stopping a predetermined pattern combination at a specific position, while a game played with the second bet number. In, even if the predetermined symbol combination is stopped at the position where the predetermined symbol combination that wins the predetermined result in the first bet number is stopped, the position is valid in the game played with the second bet number. Since it is not a position, it will not be a prize as a predetermined result. However, apparently, in the game played with the first bet number, the winning result is a stop result, so it is as if the predetermined result winning was established in the game played with the second bet number. It becomes possible to pretend. The reverse is also true, and if such a specific position that does not overlap between the first effective position and the second effective position is used, a result that wins on one side but does not win on the other side appears as described above. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by utilizing the commonality of the outcomes.

Feature G2. The first effective position is composed of a first specific position (bending line L4) that does not overlap with the second effective position, and the second effective position is a second specific position (bending line L6) that does not overlap with the first effective position. The gaming machine according to the feature G1, wherein the first effective position and the second effective position are set so that there is no overlapping effective position.

According to the above configuration, there is no overlapping effective position between the first effective position and the second effective position. If there are overlapping effective positions, for example, in the case of trying to stop a stop roll that is a predetermined result in a game played with the first bet number in a game played with the second bet number. , The pattern combination corresponding to the result of the game of the second bet number is stopped at the overlapping effective position, so that the rule of the outcome to be set (the outcome of the game according to the first bet number and the second bet) There may be an inconvenience that the rule of standardizing the outcome of the game by number) is broken. Therefore, by making sure that there are no overlapping effective positions as in the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature G1 while preventing such an inconvenience from occurring.

Feature G3. The effective position is a position that can be visually recognized via the display unit, and one stop position at which the pattern attached to each of the orbiting bodies can be stopped is set for each of the stopping positions of the orbiting body. It is set as a line that is a combination of each.
The first specific position is set as a line that becomes a straight line when the stop positions are combined, while the second specific position is set as a bending line that bends when the stop positions are combined. Features The gaming machine described in G2.

In a gaming machine in which a plurality of orbitals are stopped and the result is notified by a combination of the symbols attached to the plurality of orbitals, the symbols corresponding to the winning combination are stopped in a straight line as the combination of the symbols. It is easier for the player to understand the winning combination than when the player stops at the bending line. Based on such a premise, in the case of the above configuration, the player is stopped at the first specific position set as a straight line than at the second specific position set as a bent line. It is considered that the combination is easy to understand. When such an event is used, for example, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the game of the second bet number is stopped at the second specific position in the second bet number, the stop result of the game is If the predetermined pattern combination is stopped at the first specific position, the eyes tend to be more focused on the predetermined pattern combination, and it is easy to misunderstand as if the predetermined result winning is established. Therefore, it is more preferable to make the outcomes common by using the first specific position and the second specific position.

Feature G4. It is set so that the stop position included in the line of the first specific position and the stop position included in the line of the second specific position have a common stop position and a non-common stop position, respectively. The gaming machine according to the feature G3, which is characterized in that the game is played.

According to the above configuration, the design becomes easy in order to standardize the outcome of the game by both bets by using the first specific position and the second specific position. Specifically, for example, when a stop roll that stops a predetermined pattern combination on the line at the first specific position is to appear in a game with a second bet number, the game with the second bet number is used. Where it is necessary to stop the predetermined pattern combination at the first specific position while stopping the resulting combination of patterns at the second specific position, according to the above configuration, in such a situation, the first specific position At the stop position common to the above, the symbols constituting the predetermined pattern combination may be stopped, and at the stop positions not common to the above, the symbols not forming the predetermined pattern combination may be stopped. As a result, the pattern configuration can be simplified in associating the combination of the pattern stopped at the common stop position and the pattern stopped at the non-common stop position with the predetermined pattern combination.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein the common stop position has a larger number of stop positions than the non-common stop position.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature G4, among the patterns stopped at the second specific position, the number of patterns constituting the predetermined pattern combination is larger than that of the patterns not forming the predetermined pattern combination. As a result, in designing the combination of various symbols in the game of the second bet with respect to the game of the first bet, it becomes easy to divert the combination of various symbols in the game of the first bet. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize the novel playability of the feature G1 while making good use of the existing configuration.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5, wherein the first bet number is set as a larger number than the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, the number of first bets on the side where the straight line is set as the effective position is larger than the number of second bets on the side where the bent line is set as the effective position. Generally, as the number of bets increases, the probability of winning a role (for example, a bonus) increases, and the benefits obtained in the game increase. However, in the above configuration, the player actually plays the game. The number of bets that will be placed is set as a straight line. By doing so, for example, in a game with a second bet number, when a predetermined pattern combination is stopped on a straight line which is the first effective position, it is possible to consider the game normally performed. It is possible to easily understand that it is a stop result corresponding to a predetermined result winning.

Feature G7. The first specific result (for example, the role of watermelon) is set as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means in the situation of the first bet number.
A second specific result (for example, a special watermelon role) is set as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means in the situation where the number of bets is the second.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, the privilege corresponding to the first specific result can be given by stopping the first specific pattern combination at the first specific position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific result, the privilege corresponding to the second specific result can be given by stopping the second specific pattern combination at the second specific position.
The first specific pattern combination is set so as to be established when the first specific pattern (for example, a watermelon pattern) constituting the first specific pattern combination stops at each of the stop positions. The second specific symbol combination is established when a combination of a plurality of types of second specific symbols (for example, a watermelon symbol and a red bell symbol) constituting the second specific symbol combination is stopped at each of the stop positions. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G6, which is characterized in that the game is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination that stops at a straight line is set as one type of first specific pattern alignment, while the second specific pattern combination that stops at a bent line has a plurality of types. Since it is set as a combination of the second specific pattern, the first specific pattern combination is easier to catch the eye than the second specific pattern combination, and in order to understand the role in which the prize is established from the stop roll. , Even if the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination are stopped, it is easy to understand that the first specific result winning is established. As a result, even if it is the second specific result, it becomes easy to think that the first specific result winning is established.

Feature G8. When the first specific pattern combination stops at the first specific position, the second specific pattern combination stops at the second specific position, and when the second specific pattern combination stops at the second specific position, the above. The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the first specific pattern combination stops at the first specific position.

According to the above configuration, for example, in a game with a second bet number, a situation occurs in which the second specific result is the second specific result, and the second specific pattern combination stops at the second specific position to win the second specific result. As a stop result, the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the first specific position. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to think that the second specific result is the first specific result.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69),
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means.
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a game mode
A first game mode (normal game mode) set so that the game medium can be increased or decreased from the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing a game.
A second game mode (specific mode) in which the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is set so that the increase or decrease of the game medium is less likely to occur than in the first game mode.
Is set,
In the second game mode, as a lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result of the same number of game media as the number of bets set by the bet number setting means is given as the privilege (for example, the 26th P. A gaming machine characterized in that a special watermelon role as a small role is set.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode is set so that the increase / decrease of the game medium can occur, and the second game mode is set so that the increase / decrease of the game medium is unlikely to occur. A plurality of game modes can be executed in the game machine, and the games can be diversified. In particular, since the second game mode is unlikely to increase or decrease the game medium, it can be used as, for example, a practice game mode or a production game mode, and can be a novel game machine that has never existed before. ..

When setting a game mode in which the increase or decrease of the game medium is unlikely to occur, for example, it is possible to use all the lottery results as a re-game combination. The re-gaming role is a role that enables the next game to be executed with the same number of bets as the number of bets set in this game without requiring the acceptance of the game medium again. , It is considered to be a preferable role in performing the game mode for the above practice. In particular, when the re-game winning combination is established, the bet number for the next game is generally set automatically without accepting the game medium in the next game. By performing the game mode, there is an advantage that the operability is improved because the acceptance operation is not required.

However, if such a re-game is set as all the winning combinations, the number of bets is automatically set as described above. Therefore, the second game mode as the game mode for the practice is set. Even if you try to end the game, the number of bets is always set based on the re-game winning prize, so that it may be difficult to end the second game mode. In this case, for example, it is necessary to turn on / off the power of the gaming machine, or add a configuration that allows the gaming mode to be changed even if the number of bets is set based on the re-gaming winning.

Therefore, in the above configuration, it is inconvenient that the number of bets is automatically set by setting the payout result in which the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out, instead of using all of them as replaying roles. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a novel gaming property of the second gaming mode, which has never been seen before, in combination with the first gaming mode, while avoiding the above.

The "second game mode" may be expressed as, for example, "a second game mode set so that the game medium does not increase or decrease", or "a second game mode that enables the maintenance of the current state of the game medium". It may be expressed as "game mode".

Further, regarding the "first game mode" and the "second game mode", for example, "the first game mode in which the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means and the first game mode in which the bet number setting means is used". It may be expressed as "a second game mode in which a second bet number different from the bet number is set".

Feature H2. The second game mode is set as a mode in which a game imitating the game of the first game mode can be executed.
When the game is played in the second game mode, a means capable of executing identification notification indicating that the game is a game imitating the game in the first game mode (a process of performing identification display by the display control device 81 is executed). The gaming machine according to feature H1, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, in realizing a novel second game mode such as the practice game mode shown in the feature H1, the position of the second game mode can be clearly recognized by the player.

Feature H3. The first game mode is a game mode executed when the first bet number (3 or 2 bets) is set by the bet number setting means.
The second game mode is described in feature H1 or feature H2, which is a game mode executed when a second bet number different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode and the second game mode are realized by the difference in the number of bets. In this way, each game mode only needs to be different from the game medium or virtual game medium to be accepted by the receiving means, so that the player can select which game mode to play the game. Is possible. Here, in order to realize a plurality of game modes due to the difference in the number of bets in this way, if one of the game modes is configured by replay as described in feature H1, it will be automatically accompanied by the replay prize. Depending on the setting of the number of bets, the next game will have to be played in the same game mode. In that respect, as described in the feature H1, since the second game mode is realized by the payout result, even if the next game is to be set to the first game mode, a different bet number (first bet number) is used. Is allowed to be set, and the first game mode and the second game mode can be preferably executed.

Feature H4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-gaming combination and a transition result corresponding to shifting the gaming state from the normal gaming state to a specific state in which the winning probability of each combination in the lottery by the lottery means changes (for example, the first PBB, the first 2PBB) is set,
A lottery by the lottery means in a first predetermined state (normal game state) of the normal game state in the first game mode and a second predetermined state (normal game state) of the normal game state in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the probability that the result will be won as the re-gaming combination is set to be the same or substantially the same probability.

According to the above configuration, not only the payout result but also the re-game combination is set even in the second game mode in which the game medium is set so as not to increase or decrease. Then, the re-game combination is set as the same or substantially the same winning probability in the first predetermined state of the first game mode and the second predetermined state of the second game mode. On the premise that the first game mode is a general game mode, the re-game combination of the second game mode has the same or substantially the same probability as the winning probability of the re-game combination in the general game mode. If is set, it is possible to play the game with the same feeling as usual in both the practice mode and the second game mode as the game mode, and it is possible to improve the significance of the practice mode. Become. Further, based on the premise that the first game mode is a general game mode as described above, in the general game mode, the winning probability of the re-game combination is set to another small combination or the like. It should be a winning probability, and even if the re-game combination is set with a high probability that the re-game combination will be won except for the other small combination, the other small combination is set in the general game mode. It can be expected that the payout result will be obtained even in the second game mode with a probability that the winning combination can be established. Then, in the second game mode, almost all the results become the re-game combination, and in rare cases, the payout result is unlikely to occur, and the effect of the feature H1 can be suitably exhibited.

It should be noted that the "substantially the same probability" does not have to be exactly the same probability, but may be a probability that the player can recognize that the probability is the same, in other words, the probability is different. Probabilities that are difficult to do are sufficient.

Feature H5. In the normal game state in the first game mode, a plurality of re-game states (normal game state, first to third RT states) having different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means wins the re-game combination are set. And
The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the first predetermined state is set as one of the plurality of replaying states.

According to the above configuration, the second predetermined state in the second game mode has the same or substantially the same probability of winning the re-game combination as the re-game state of any one of the plurality of re-game states in the first game mode. It is set to be. In this way, not only the playability of the first game mode is improved by the plurality of re-game states, but also the second game mode can be positioned as a practice mode corresponding to one of the states. 2 The playability of the game mode is clarified.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the plurality of re-gaming states (normal gaming state, first to third RT states) are not set in the normal gaming state in the second gaming mode.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the feature H5, the second gaming mode can be simplified. That is, while the first game mode has a plurality of re-game states set, the second game mode as a practice mode does not have a plurality of re-game states set, so that the second game mode is the first game mode. It can be said that it is a simpler mode. By doing so, in designing a gaming machine having a plurality of gaming modes such as a first gaming mode and a second gaming mode using the limited storage area of the gaming machine, the storage area is twice as large as the normal one. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of securing or simplifying the general first game mode.

The above configuration may be expressed as "the normal game state in the second game mode is set so that the probability of winning the re-game combination does not change in the lottery by the lottery means".

Feature H7. In the first game mode, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-game combination winning and the re-game pattern combination corresponding to the re-game combination is stopped at the effective position, the re-game combination winning is established. As a privilege corresponding to the above, in the next game, the bet number can be set by the bet number setting means without having the accepting means accept the game medium or the virtual game medium.
As a kind of the pattern combination for the re-game, the re-game pattern (first replay symbol, second replay symbol) which is a pattern constituting the pattern combination for the re-game stops at the effective position. A pattern combination is set to form a pattern combination for replay.
As the payout result as the lottery result in the second game mode, the payout of the same number of game media as the bet number is given as the privilege by stopping all the re-game patterns (various rips). The gaming machine according to feature H6, which is characterized in that a small role) is set.

If a stop roll corresponding to the re-game payout result appears as in the above configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the re-game role winning has been established because the re-game patterns are apparently aligned and stopped. However, since the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out, the effect of being able to play the next game without requiring a new game medium is the same as the re-game winning combination. Therefore, even if the winning probability of the re-game combination is uniformly set in the second game mode, if the winning probability and the appearance rate of the re-game payout result are different, the winning probability of the re-game combination will be as if it were. You can make it look like it's changing. Therefore, it is possible to bring the game performance closer to the first game mode without setting a plurality of states in which the winning probabilities of the re-game combinations are different in the second game mode.

Feature H8. The drive control means establishes the re-game payout result winning when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the re-game payout result, and when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order. When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, the means for preventing the re-game payout result winning is not established (execution of the reel control process by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to the feature H7, which is characterized by having a function to perform.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the case where the re-game payout result prize is desired to appear and the case where the re-game payout result prize is not to appear without differentiating the winning probability of the re-game payout result. Therefore, in the gaming machine of feature H7, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of states in which the winning probabilities of the re-game payout results are different, and the configuration of the second gaming mode can be simplified.

Feature H9. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the re-gambling payout result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order and the re-gambling payout result winning is established, the privilege giving means is described. Even when the payout of the same number of game media as the number of bets is given as the privilege and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order and the re-game payout result winning is not established, the same number as the number of bets. The gaming machine according to feature H8, characterized in that the payout of the gaming medium is given as the privilege.

According to the above configuration, the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out regardless of whether or not the re-game payout result winning is established at the time of winning the re-game payout result. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property in which the game medium is not increased or decreased by always playing the game of returning equal sheets regardless of whether or not a prize is won.

Feature H10. The game according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized in that the configuration is such that switching from the first game mode to the second game mode can be executed regardless of the lottery result in the first game mode. Machine.

According to the above configuration, if the second game mode is to be executed while the first game mode is being performed, it can be executed at any time, and the second game mode cannot be executed unless some game result is obtained. In comparison, the degree of freedom of the game is improved.

Features H11. A predetermined effect executing means (a function of performing a process of executing various effects for a specific mode by the display control device 81) for executing a predetermined effect in the second game mode is provided.
When the predetermined effect executing means is switched from the first game mode to the second game mode in a situation where the regulatory conditions (for example, bonus winning) that are satisfied during the first game mode are satisfied. The gaming machine according to the feature H10, wherein the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted.

According to the above configuration, the switching between the first game mode and the second game mode can be freely performed, but when the regulation condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is restricted even if the mode is switched to the second game mode. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player when it should not be switched from the first game mode to the second game mode while allowing free switching between the two game modes.

Feature H12. In the normal game state in the first game mode, a plurality of game states (normal game state, first to third RT states) having different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means wins a predetermined combination are set.
The second game mode is set as a mode in which a game imitating the game of the first game mode can be executed.
It is provided with a setting means (a function of executing a specific mode switching process by the display control device 81) for setting the second game mode.
The setting means has one of the features H1 to H11 that can be set to start the second game mode this time from one of the plurality of game states in the first game mode. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the second game mode can be played as a simulated trial version mode of the first game mode without causing an increase or decrease in the game medium. In order to perform this simulated experience, it is possible to set from which state of the game state in the first game mode to experience by the setting means, so that the game playability of the second game mode is improved.

Feature H13. When a specific operation of the stop operation means subject to a predetermined penalty is performed, a penalty means (a function of executing a penalty process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is provided. Prepare,
The penalties perform the specific process when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, while the specific process is performed when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H12, characterized in that the processing is performed so as to reduce the disadvantage of the player when the specific processing is not performed or the specific processing is performed.

According to the above configuration, when a specific operation subject to a predetermined penalty is performed in the first game mode, a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is performed as a penalty. If it is applied uniformly to the game mode, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. That is, in the first place, the above penalty is given to an act of intentionally trying to obtain a game medium in the first game mode, whereas the second game mode is a mode in which an increase or decrease in the game medium cannot be expected. This is because if the above penalty is given to the second game mode as well, it goes against the purpose of the second game mode.

Feature H14. A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a penalty notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification that the specific processing is performed by the penalty means based on the specific operation is provided.
The specific notification executing means performs the specific notification when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, and the specific notification is also performed when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to the feature H13, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of feature H13, although no penalty is given in the second gaming mode, specific notification is performed. As a result, even in the second game mode, if a specific operation is performed, it becomes possible to understand that if the first game mode is an operation in which a penalty is given, it is a mode for practice. The significance of things can be improved.

Feature H15. The specific notification executing means has a configuration capable of executing content notification indicating the content of the specific process when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, when the specific operation is performed in the second specific mode, although no penalty is given, the content notification indicating the content of the penalty (content of the specific process) is performed. As a result, the fear of the penalty given when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode is notified, the specific operation is prevented from being performed, and the second game mode is the mode for practice. It is possible to improve the significance.

Feature H16. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Accepting means for accepting game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69),
Bet number setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for grasping that the game medium or the virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means and setting the number of bets for the game up to a predetermined number. Function to execute processing) and
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means.
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a game mode
A first game mode (normal game mode) set so that the game medium can be increased or decreased from the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing a game.
A second game mode (specific mode) in which the game medium is not increased or decreased from the number of bets set by the bet number setting means by playing a game.
Is set,
Penal means that can perform specific processing that is disadvantageous to the player when the specific operation of the stop operation means that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed (a function that executes a penalty processing by the main control device 101).
With
The penalties perform the specific process when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, while the specific process is performed when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to perform processing that reduces the disadvantage of the player when the specific processing is not performed or the specific processing is performed.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode is set so that the increase / decrease of the game medium can occur, and the second game mode is set so that the increase / decrease of the game medium does not occur. A plurality of game modes can be executed in the game machine, and the games can be diversified. In particular, since the second game mode does not increase or decrease the game medium, it can be used as, for example, a practice game mode or a production game mode, and can be a novel game machine that has never existed before. ..

In addition, when a specific operation subject to a predetermined penalty is performed in the first game mode, a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is performed as a penalty. Here, if such a specific processing configuration is uniformly applied to the second game mode, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. That is, in the first place, the above penalty is given to an act of intentionally trying to obtain a game medium in the first game mode, whereas the second game mode is a mode in which an increase or decrease in the game medium cannot be expected. This is because if the above penalty is given to the second game mode as well, it goes against the purpose of the second game mode. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the second game mode, which is a mode for practice.

The "second game mode" may be expressed as, for example, "a second game mode in which the increase or decrease of the game medium is unlikely to occur" or "a second game mode in which the current state of the game medium can be maintained". You may.

Further, regarding the "first game mode" and the "second game mode", for example, "the first game mode in which the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means and the first game mode in which the bet number setting means is used". It may be expressed as "a second game mode in which a second bet number different from the bet number is set".

The inventions shown in the following features Group I to Group O are "Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a kind of game machines. These game machines include game media such as medals that are surplus in the storage unit. Regarding the background technology that "some machines are provided with an auxiliary tank for accommodating the above (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-323750)", "Here, in the gaming machines illustrated above, the usability of the auxiliary tank is still improved. It was made with the problem that the invention "There is room for."

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing, and
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage unit (storage tank 52) for storing game media, and a hopper device (hopper device 51).
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) installed in a predetermined installation area side by side with the hopper device in the housing and accommodating a game medium surplus in the storage unit,
With
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end.
The first engaging portion (right flange portion 571c) provided in the auxiliary tank and
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion,
With
The auxiliary tank is installed in a first orientation (upward posture) in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom is on the lower side in the predetermined installation area, and in a second orientation different from the first orientation. It is possible
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation. A gaming machine characterized in that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged when the first engaging portion is engaged, and the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement.

From the viewpoint of suppressing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank housed in the housing. However, when manually collecting the game medium contained in the auxiliary tank in the gaming machine, it is necessary to take out the auxiliary tank from the inside of the housing, so that the auxiliary tank is required to be stored in a free state without being fixed. Therefore, if the gaming machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation or the like, the auxiliary tank moves inside the housing and collides with the surrounding hopper device, door body, or the like, causing damage.

In this respect, in this configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction with the opening facing up and the bottom facing down, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged. When the auxiliary tank is installed in a second orientation different from the first orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged with each other. When the game medium from the storage unit should be stored in the auxiliary tank, it is assumed that it will be used in the first orientation. Will be possible. On the other hand, when the installation is performed in the second orientation, the movement of the auxiliary tank in the housing can be restricted by engaging the engaging portions. By installing the auxiliary tank in the second direction during transportation of the gaming machine or the like, rattling of the auxiliary tank during transportation can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed. That is, according to the present invention, it is possible to regulate the movement of the auxiliary tank during transportation, etc., while allowing the operation of taking out the auxiliary tank during operation of the gaming machine, and the convenience is significantly improved.

Moreover, in the present invention, since the orientation of the auxiliary tank corresponds to the switching between the engaged state and the disengaged state, the appearance of the auxiliary tank can be changed depending on whether the auxiliary tank is in the engaged state or the disengaged state. Can be different. For example, if the engagement point is a blind spot when viewed from the employee of the game hall (the worker who removes the auxiliary tank), perform an unreasonable removal operation without noticing that it is in the engaged state. There is a risk of damaging the first engaging portion, the second engaging portion, or the like. In this respect, according to this configuration, it is possible to notice the difference in state at first glance due to the difference in the appearance of the auxiliary tank. In this case, for example, if the operator is notified in advance that the presence or absence of engagement differs depending on the orientation of the auxiliary tank, it is easy to determine which of the above states is in each of the above states without the need to confirm the engagement location. It is possible to grasp the situation and suppress an unreasonable take-out operation.

In addition, in this configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, it can be installed by utilizing the installation area for installing in the first orientation. This makes it unnecessary to secure a dedicated space for transportation, etc., and the degree of expansion of the installation space can be suppressed to a small extent, making it suitable for gaming machines where the installation area for mounted parts is limited. can do.

Feature I2. The door body is rotatably connected to the housing on one side of the gaming machine, and the door body and the housing are on the side of the gaming machine opposite to the one side. A locking device is installed to lock the door.
The predetermined installation area is set in the housing at a position closer to the side on the opposite side.
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the upward movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by engaging the first engaging portion with the second engaging portion.

In the above configuration, since the locking device is provided on the side opposite to the rotation axis of the door body, it is possible to prevent the door body from opening under the locked state, and a predetermined auxiliary tank is installed. Since the installation area of the door is set closer to the side opposite to the rotation axis of the door body, it is possible to easily put in and take out the auxiliary tank. However, in a configuration in which the locking device and the installation area of the auxiliary tank are arranged on the same side, if the auxiliary tank moves upward during transportation of the gaming machine, the auxiliary tank is caught in the position of interference with the locking device, and later. Even if the unlocking operation is performed, the unlocking may not be possible. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the movement of the auxiliary tank upward is restricted by engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the second direction is a direction in which the auxiliary tank is turned upside down with respect to the first direction.

According to this configuration, the size of the occupied space in the installation area can be made not much different between the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction and the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction. Therefore, the auxiliary tank can be installed in the second direction by utilizing the installation area for installation in the first direction as it is, and the expansion of the installation area can be suppressed.

Feature I4. The size of the tank overlapping area on the tank installation surface of the installation area differs between the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation and the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the tank overlapping area is larger when the machines are installed in the orientation of 2.

When transporting the gaming machine, the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the second direction. In such a case, a force is generated in the auxiliary tank according to the orientation of the housing due to the movement of the gaming machine itself, but the auxiliary tank is engaged with the housing side and the tank overlapping area on the tank installation surface is large. Therefore, the auxiliary tank can be held in a stable state. Further, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the tank overlapping area on the tank installation surface is small, so that the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation while the gaming machine is operating. The configuration can be advantageous in avoiding interference between the and the engaging portion (second engaging portion) on the housing side.

Feature I5. The height positions of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion match when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the mutual positional relationship is set so that the height positions do not match when the machines are used.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are unintentionally engaged, and the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted. It can be suppressed.

Feature I6. In the auxiliary tank, at least a part of the peripheral edge of the opening is provided with an overhanging portion (right side flange portion 571c) that projects outward.
The game according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the first engaging portion is formed by the overhanging portion and the second engaging portion is provided on the tank installation surface of the installation area. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are properly engaged, and the first engaging portion is engaged with the upside down of the auxiliary tank. The height position of the part can be changed greatly. As a result, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are unintentionally engaged and the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted. Become.

Feature I7. The overhanging portion is provided at a portion extending in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank installed in the installation area at the peripheral edge of the opening.
By sliding the auxiliary tank in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine in the housing, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged and disengaged. The gaming machine according to the feature I6.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the auxiliary tank can be engaged in the housing by using the overhanging portion provided on the peripheral edge of the opening of the auxiliary tank. can. Further, since the hopper device and the auxiliary tank are provided side by side in the housing, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the auxiliary tank for the hopper device and the wall portion of the housing is provided by the overhanging portion. The position of is regulated. Therefore, even if the auxiliary tank is not engaged in the first orientation, the misalignment of the auxiliary tank can be regulated.

Feature I8. The accommodation state detecting means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, and main control device 101) for detecting the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank is provided.
The accommodation state detecting means is an insertion member (upper sensor rod 16a, lower side) that is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 505a, lower sensor insertion hole 505b) provided in the auxiliary tank. Has a sensor rod 16b)
A plurality of the insertion holes are provided vertically.
In both the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation and the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the insertion member is placed in any one of the plurality of insertion holes. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I7, characterized in that it can be inserted.

According to the above configuration, the insertion member of the accommodation state detecting means is located inside the tank body in both the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation and the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation. Can be made to. As a result, the accommodation state of the game medium can be detected regardless of the vertical orientation of the auxiliary tank, and the auxiliary tank can be installed upside down.

Feature I9. By sliding the auxiliary tank in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine in the housing, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged and disengaged.
The accommodation state detecting means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, and main control device 101) for detecting the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank is provided.
The accommodation state detecting means is an insertion member (upper sensor rod 16a, lower side) that is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 505a, lower sensor insertion hole 505b) provided in the auxiliary tank. Has a sensor rod 16b)
The insertion member extends in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine and extends in the height direction in the same direction as the tank installation surface of the installation area.
The game according to any one of features I3 to I8, wherein the insertion member can be taken in and out of the insertion hole by sliding the auxiliary tank in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine in the housing. Machine.

When the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the first orientation and the game medium is housed in the auxiliary tank, the auxiliary tank is relatively heavy, so that when the auxiliary tank is taken out by the operator. It is considered that the auxiliary tank is pulled out of the housing by sliding it on the tank installation surface from the front opening side of the housing. In this case, since the auxiliary tank is slid, the insertion member inserted into the insertion hole of the auxiliary tank is pulled out from the auxiliary tank without receiving an excessive force.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the second direction, the auxiliary tank is empty and its weight is relatively light. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank is taken out by the operator, it is conceivable that the auxiliary tank is pulled out of the housing in a state of being lifted toward the front side. In this case, there is a concern that the insertion member inserted into the insertion hole of the auxiliary tank receives an excessive force from the auxiliary tank. In this regard, since the auxiliary tank is slid in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine to engage and disengage the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, the insertion member is the auxiliary tank. It is possible to suppress receiving excessive force from. That is, the insertion member can be protected.

Feature I10. Of the side wall portions that rise from the peripheral edge of the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank so as to surround the bottom portion, the side wall portion that faces the second engaging portion when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation ( The left side wall portion 501e) has an inclined shape that increases as the distance from the side wall portion (right side wall portion 501d) facing the inside of the auxiliary tank increases upward. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the first direction, the side wall portion facing the second engaging portion has an inclined shape that increases as the distance between the facing side wall portions increases upward. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, it becomes easy to secure a space between the auxiliary tank and the second engaging portion, and interference between the two can be suppressed.

Feature I11. A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) is provided in the bottom plate portion of the housing, and the game medium can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine through the bottom plate opening.
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the bottom plate opening is covered by the auxiliary tank, and the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged with each other outside the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I10, which is configured to be combined.

When transporting the gaming machine, foreign matter or hands are allowed to enter the bottom plate opening from the outside of the gaming machine to release the engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, and the auxiliary tank is dismissed to the inside of the gaming machine. It is assumed that an attempt is made to gain unauthorized access to the pachinko machine. According to the above configuration, the bottom plate opening is covered by the auxiliary tank, and the engaging relationship between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is constructed on the outside of the auxiliary tank. A wall portion of the auxiliary tank can be interposed between the portions. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the engaging portion through the bottom plate opening, and it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned fraudulent activity.

Feature I12. A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) is provided in the bottom plate portion of the housing, and the game medium can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine through the bottom plate opening.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I11, wherein the auxiliary tank can be opened and closed by an opening / closing means (bottom lid 514) provided on the bottom.

According to the above configuration, by opening the bottom of the auxiliary tank, the game medium from the storage portion can be guided to the bottom plate opening as it is. As a result, it is possible to support automatic collection with the auxiliary tank installed in the housing, it is not necessary to secure a storage place for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost. ..

Feature I13. The opening / closing means is configured to open the bottom portion by moving inside the auxiliary tank.
The gaming machine according to feature I12, wherein the auxiliary tank includes holding means for holding the opening / closing means in a closed position.

According to the above configuration, since the holding means for holding the opening / closing means in the closed position is provided, the gaming machine can be transported with the bottom of the auxiliary tank closed.

Feature I14. The auxiliary tank is provided with a display unit on which predetermined information is displayed.
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the predetermined information is visible or easily visible in the first aspect, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the predetermined information is visible. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I13, wherein is invisible or becomes a second aspect that is more difficult to see than the first aspect.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the second direction, the predetermined information can be visually recognized or easily visually recognized, so that the operator who performs the removal operation can be alerted, and the removal cannot be performed. The operation can be suppressed. On the contrary, when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation, the predetermined information becomes invisible or difficult to see, which suppresses the operator's confusion due to the display of the predetermined information and hinders the collection work of the game medium. Can be suppressed.

Predetermined information includes information explaining how to disengage the engaged state, information calling attention to the removal of the auxiliary tank, information suggesting or clearly indicating that the auxiliary tank is fixed, and auxiliary tank. Information that suggests or clearly indicates that it is the bottom of the tank, information that suggests or clearly indicates the raw material or forming material of the auxiliary tank, and the like can be considered. The predetermined information does not necessarily have to be characters, and may be composed of colors, shapes, patterns, and the like.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing, and
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage unit (storage tank 52) for storing game media, and a hopper device (hopper device 51).
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) installed in a predetermined installation area side by side with the hopper device in the housing and accommodating a game medium surplus in the storage unit,
With
The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging the game medium inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine.
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening at the upper end and a bottom at the lower end.
The bottom portion is provided with an opening / closing means (bottom lid 514) capable of opening / closing the bottom portion.
The auxiliary tank has a first orientation (upward posture) in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom is on the lower side in the predetermined installation area, and a second orientation in which the opening is on the lower side and the bottom is on the upper side. It can be installed facing down (downward posture),
A gaming machine comprising a switching mechanism that closes the opening / closing means in the first orientation and opens the opening / closing means in the second orientation.

According to the above configuration, since the bottom of the tank can be opened and closed, the auxiliary tank can be made compatible with manual collection by closing the bottom, while the auxiliary tank can be made compatible with automatic collection by opening the bottom. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be installed in the housing even at the time of automatic collection, it is not necessary to secure a storage place for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost.

In addition, in the above configuration, since the bottom portion can be opened as the auxiliary tank is turned upside down from the first direction to the second direction, the operation of switching to the open state can be simplified. Moreover, in this configuration, since the opening and closing of the bottom is associated with the direction of the auxiliary tank, it is possible to easily grasp which mode is used. For example, in the case where the opening and closing is only switched under the first direction, it is difficult to know which state it is in unless the inside of the auxiliary tank is looked into. As a result, there is a risk of using it in an erroneous manner, such as using it in an open state where it should be used in a closed state. In this respect, in this configuration, since the appearance of the auxiliary tank can be different between the closed state and the open state, it is possible to notice the difference in the state at first glance. In particular, since it is configured to be in an open state when the bottom is on the upper side, it becomes easy to notice that the bottom is vacant, and it is possible to suppress use in an erroneous manner.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in the second direction when the gaming medium is automatically collected.

When the bottom of the auxiliary tank is switched to the open state by setting the auxiliary tank in the second direction, it is possible to suppress forgetting to open the bottom when using it in correspondence with automatic collection.

Features J3. The opening / closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support portion 504) and is rotated inside the auxiliary tank to open the bottom portion.
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, wherein the opening / closing means is rotated and opened by its own weight when the auxiliary tank is in the second orientation.

According to the above configuration, since the opening / closing means rotates by its own weight to open the bottom, the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be opened by turning the auxiliary tank into the second direction, and forgetting to open it. Can be suppressed. At that time, since a drive unit that rotates the opening / closing means to open the bottom and a control configuration that controls the drive unit according to the posture of the auxiliary tank are not required, the configuration can be simplified and the cost can be reduced. It will be possible.

Features J4. The opening / closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support portion 504) and is rotated inside the auxiliary tank to open the bottom portion.
4. The feature J1 to J3, wherein at least the support-side base end portion of the opening / closing means is covered from above by the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank when the auxiliary tank is in the second orientation. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medium from the storage portion from colliding with the support-side base end portion of the opening / closing means and causing a hindrance to the support. At that time, by utilizing the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank as a covering portion that covers the support side base end portion, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated part, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank can be simplified.

Feature J5. The opening / closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support portion 504) and is rotated inside the auxiliary tank to open the bottom portion.
The auxiliary tank includes a rotation limiting means (protruding portion 535) that limits the rotation range of the opening / closing means.
The rotation upper limit angle (predetermined rotation angle α) by the rotation limiting means is an angle at which the opening / closing means rotates toward the closing side by its own weight when the auxiliary tank is in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J4.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation, the opening / closing means rotates by its own weight to close the bottom, so that the bottom of the auxiliary tank is oriented as the auxiliary tank is in the first orientation. Can be closed and forgetting to close can be suppressed. At that time, since a drive unit that rotates the opening / closing means to close the bottom and a control configuration that controls the drive unit according to the posture of the auxiliary tank are not required, the configuration can be simplified and the cost can be reduced. It will be possible.

Features J6. A feature J5 characterized in that when the opening / closing means is rotated to the rotation upper limit angle with the auxiliary tank in the first orientation, the opening / closing means is inclined toward the closing side. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the first direction, the opening / closing means falls toward the closing side by its own weight, and the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be closed naturally.

In addition, this feature is described as "when the opening / closing means is rotated to the rotation upper limit angle with the auxiliary tank in the first orientation, the center of gravity of the opening / closing means causes the rotation axis of the opening / closing means to be rotated. It is configured to be located on the closed side with respect to the virtual vertical line passing through. "

Feature J7. The opening / closing means is rotatably supported by a support means (support portion 504) and is rotated inside the auxiliary tank to open the bottom portion.
In the auxiliary tank, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, it hits the opening / closing means rotated to the opening side, and a rotation restriction that limits the rotation angle of the opening / closing means on the opening side. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) are provided.

According to the above configuration, when a foreign substance or the like is allowed to enter through the opening of the bottom plate to open the bottom of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine or the like, the rotation limiting member can prevent it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom of the auxiliary tank from being completely opened, and to make it difficult for unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine.

Feature J8. The accommodation state detecting means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, main control device 101) for detecting the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank is provided.
The accommodation state detecting means is an insertion member (upper sensor rod 16a, lower side) that is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 505a, lower sensor insertion hole 505b) provided in the auxiliary tank. Has a sensor rod 16b)
The gaming machine according to feature J7, wherein the rotation limiting member is configured by the insertion member.

According to the above configuration, the rotation of the opening / closing member can be restricted by utilizing the accommodation state detecting means without providing a dedicated member as the rotation limiting member. Further, if the auxiliary tank is installed with the insertion member inserted in the tank when transporting the gaming machine, the rotation of the opening / closing means can be restricted, while the restriction can be lifted by removing the auxiliary tank from the housing. .. That is, the presence or absence of the restriction can be switched according to the situation, and the convenience is improved.

Features J9. The first engaging portion (right flange portion 571c) provided in the auxiliary tank and
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion,
With
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation. When the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged with each other, the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement of the first engaging portion J1 to J8. The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to support automatic collection while engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion. As a result, for example, even if a player hits the gaming machine and an impact is applied, the misalignment of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed, and the gaming medium from the storage portion can be appropriately guided to the bottom plate opening. .. Further, if the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction during transportation of the gaming machine or the like, the movement of the auxiliary tank in the housing can be regulated, and the rattling of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the auxiliary tank collides with the surrounding members in the housing and is damaged.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing, and
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage unit (storage tank 52) for storing game media, and a hopper device (hopper device 51).
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing and accommodating a game medium surplus in the storage unit,
With
The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging the game medium inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine.
The auxiliary tank
It has a bottomed shape with an opening at the top and a bottom at the bottom.
An opening / closing means (bottom lid 514) provided on the bottom and capable of opening / closing the bottom,
A support means (support portion 607) that supports the opening / closing means so as to be openable and closable.
An urging means (coil spring 617) that urges the opening / closing means toward the closing side, and
With
The auxiliary tank has a first orientation (upward posture) in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom is on the lower side in the predetermined installation area, and a second orientation in which the opening is on the lower side and the bottom is on the upper side. It can be installed facing down (downward posture),
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the opening / closing means is opened by the weight of the opening / closing means when the gaming medium from the storage portion is placed on the opening / closing means. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

According to the above configuration, the bottom of the tank can be opened and closed, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the bottom of the tank can be opened by the weight of the game medium on the opening / closing means. By installing it in the orientation, it can be used for automatic collection. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be installed in the housing even at the time of automatic collection, it is not necessary to secure a storage place for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost. Moreover, since the opening / closing means is urged to the closed side by the urging means, it is possible to prevent the bottom of the tank from being left open, and foreign matter or hands can enter through the opening of the bottom plate to illegally enter the inside of the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress the act of trying to access.

Feature K2. The auxiliary tank includes an opening regulating means (surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602) that restricts the opening / closing means from opening to the outside of the tank by abutting the opening / closing means from the outside of the tank in the closed state of the opening / closing means. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 characterized by being

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, it is possible to prevent the bottom of the tank from opening even if the opening / closing means is pushed up from below. As a result, if the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction when transporting the gaming machine, it will be difficult for the bottom of the tank to open even if foreign matter or hands enter through the opening of the bottom plate, and the inside of the gaming machine will be opened through the opening of the bottom plate. It is possible to suppress the act of attempting unauthorized access.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the bottom portion is provided with an enclosure portion (standing portion 608) extending in the height direction of the auxiliary tank and surrounding the periphery of the opening / closing means.

It is assumed that foreign matter or the like that has entered through the opening of the bottom plate is hooked on the opening / closing means to open the bottom of the tank to gain unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine. In this respect, in this configuration, since the opening / closing means is surrounded by the surrounding portion, it is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter or the like to be caught by the opening / closing means, and it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned fraudulent activity.

Features K4. The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the height dimension of the enclosure portion is larger than the thickness dimension of the opening / closing means.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to make it more difficult for foreign matter or the like to be caught in the opening / closing means.

Feature K5. Provided with upward movement restricting means (right flange portion 571c, engaging portion 574) for restricting the upward movement of the auxiliary tank when the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in the second direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4.

According to the above configuration, by installing the auxiliary tank in the second direction when transporting the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the lifting of the auxiliary tank, and the auxiliary tank collides with the surrounding members during transportation, causing them to collide with each other. Damage is suppressed. Further, even if a foreign substance or the like is allowed to enter through the opening of the bottom plate to push up the auxiliary tank, it is possible to make it difficult for a gap to be formed between the auxiliary tank and the tank installation surface, or to make it difficult to expand the gap. As a result, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally accessing the inside of the gaming machine through the gap. Not only that, even when it is used in correspondence with automatic collection, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from bouncing inside the housing when an impact is applied, for example, by a player hitting a gaming machine. .. As a result, the displacement of the auxiliary tank due to the impact is suppressed, and the inconvenience that the game medium from the storage portion is not guided to the bottom plate opening can be suppressed.

Feature K6. The upward movement regulating means is
The first engaging portion (right flange portion 571c) provided in the auxiliary tank and
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion,
With
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation. The feature K5 is characterized in that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged in the case where the first engaging portion is engaged, and the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the configuration of the above feature K5 can be realized in a practically preferable manner. In addition, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion do not engage, and the auxiliary tank is allowed to move. Therefore, when used in correspondence with manual collection, the auxiliary tank can be easily taken out from the inside of the housing.

Feature K7. In the auxiliary tank, the opening / closing means is provided with a size capable of opening / closing a part of the bottom portion.
Guidance means (inclined portion 604) that guides the gaming medium from the storage portion to the side of the opening / closing means when the auxiliary tank is installed in the bottom portion different from the opening / closing means in the second orientation. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K6.

For example, when the game medium is supplied from the storage unit, if the response of the opening / closing means is delayed and the bottom of the tank is not opened, the game medium may accumulate on the bottom and gradually spill and scatter in the housing. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the game medium is collected in the opening / closing means, the weight of the game medium can be concentrated on the opening / closing means. This makes it possible to enhance the open responsiveness of the opening / closing means.

Feature K8. The guiding means is a guiding inclined portion (inclined portion 604) provided at a portion different from the opening / closing means at the bottom portion.
The feature K7 is characterized in that the guiding inclined portion has an inclined shape that descends toward the opening / closing means when the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in the second direction. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the game medium can be guided along the inclination, and the game medium from the storage unit can be suitably brought to the opening / closing means.

Feature K9. The support means rotatably supports the opening / closing means.
A bottom opening (lower opening 603) is provided on the bottom.
The opening / closing means opens the bottom opening by being rotated inside the auxiliary tank.
The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, wherein the bottom opening is arranged closer to the rotation tip side of the opening / closing means.

In the above configuration, where the opening / closing means is exposed to the outside of the tank through the bottom opening, the bottom opening is arranged closer to the rotating tip side of the opening / closing means. Therefore, the game medium from the storage portion can be easily placed on a position separated from the rotation shaft of the opening / closing means, and the opening responsiveness of the opening / closing means can be improved.

Feature K10. The support means rotatably supports the opening / closing means.
The auxiliary tank is characterized by including a guiding means (back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606) for guiding the gaming medium mounted on the opening / closing means toward the rotation tip side of the opening / closing means. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K9.

According to the above configuration, since the game medium is guided toward the rotation tip side of the opening / closing means, it becomes easy to concentrate the weight of the game medium away from the rotation axis of the opening / closing means, and the opening responsiveness of the opening / closing means. Can be increased.

Features K11. The guide means includes a guide inclined portion provided on the opening / closing means.
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the guide inclined portion is provided on a predetermined surface on the side where the game medium is placed in the opening / closing means, and is directed toward the rotation tip side. The gaming machine according to feature K10, which is characterized in that it is inclined downward.

According to the above configuration, the game medium on the opening / closing means can be guided along the inclination, and the game medium from the storage portion can be suitably moved to the rotation tip side.

Feature K12. The opening / closing means opens the bottom portion by being rotated inside the auxiliary tank against the urging force of the urging means.
A feature K1 to a feature K1 to be characterized in that, in a state where the bottom portion is closed by the opening / closing means, the mounting surface of the game medium in the opening / closing means is inclined so as to descend toward the rotation tip side of the opening / closing means. The gaming machine according to any one of K11.

When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the game medium enters the inside of the tank as the opening / closing means of the auxiliary tank is opened by the weight of the game medium. In this case, when the game medium enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the opening / closing means returns to the closed position due to the urging force of the urging means. In such a case, if the game medium remains on the opening / closing means, the opening / closing means may be bounced out of the auxiliary tank with the force of closing, and the game medium may be scattered in the housing.

In this respect, in the above configuration, in the closed state of the opening / closing means, the mounting surface of the game medium in the opening / closing means is inclined downward to the rotation tip side, so that the inconvenience of the game medium being bounced off is suppressed. That is, if the mounting surface of the game medium is inclined downward toward the rotation tip side, the game medium is guided into the tank even if the opening amount of the opening / closing means is relatively small. Therefore, when the opening / closing means is closed due to the decrease of the game medium on the opening / closing means, the amount of rotation required for closing is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the game medium from being bounced off.

In this feature, "in a state where the bottom portion is closed by the opening / closing means, the opening / closing means is inclined so that the tip side is located inside the tank in the vertical direction with respect to the supported portion by the supporting means." It may be read as.

Feature K13. In the auxiliary tank, the bottom portion has a receiving portion (bottom plate portion 602, bottom lid 606) that receives the game medium supplied from the storage portion when the auxiliary tank is installed in the downward posture.
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K12, wherein the bottom portion is provided with an upright portion (bottom plate protruding portion 605) that stands up from the bottom portion at a portion surrounding the receiving portion. ..

When the auxiliary tank is installed in a downward position, the game medium enters the inside of the tank as the opening / closing means of the auxiliary tank is opened due to the weight of the game medium. In this case, when the game medium enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the opening / closing means returns to the closed position due to the urging force of the urging means. In such a case, if the game medium remains on the opening / closing means, the opening / closing means may be bounced out of the auxiliary tank with the force of closing, and the game medium may be scattered in the housing. In this respect, in the above configuration, since the upright portion is provided at the bottom of the auxiliary tank around the receiving portion, even if the game medium is bounced off, the game medium reaches the outside of the auxiliary tank. It can be suppressed from being stored.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing, and
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage unit (storage tank 52) for storing game media, and a hopper device (hopper device 51).
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) installed in a predetermined installation area side by side with the hopper device in the housing and accommodating a game medium surplus in the storage unit,
With
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end.
The first engaging portion (bottom side through hole 720, engaging standing portion 836) provided in the auxiliary tank, and
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 721, lower sensor portion 801) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion, and
With the switching means (bottom lid 704, 802) for switching between the engaged state and the non-engaged state of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion according to the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank. ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

From the viewpoint of suppressing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank housed in the housing. However, when manually collecting the game medium contained in the auxiliary tank in the gaming machine, it is necessary to take out the auxiliary tank from the inside of the housing, so that the auxiliary tank is required to be stored in a free state without being fixed. Therefore, if the gaming machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation or the like, the auxiliary tank moves inside the housing and collides with the surrounding hopper device, door body, or the like, causing damage.

In this respect, in this configuration, a first engaging portion provided in the auxiliary tank and a second engaging portion provided in the housing are provided, and both are engaged according to the accommodating state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank. It is configured to switch the presence or absence of a match. Therefore, by engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion during transportation of the gaming machine, rattling of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed. Become. On the other hand, when collecting the game medium contained in the auxiliary tank, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be switched to the non-engaged state according to the accumulation of the game medium in the auxiliary tank. It becomes possible to allow the auxiliary tank to be taken out from the inside of the housing.

Feature L2. When the gaming medium is not accommodated in the auxiliary tank, the switching means engages the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, and the gaming medium is accommodated in the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are brought into a non-engaged state accordingly.

According to the above configuration, when the gaming medium is not expected to be accommodated in the auxiliary tank during transportation, the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, while the gaming machine is in operation. In, the auxiliary tank is naturally allowed to be taken out as the gaming medium is accommodated in the auxiliary tank. This not only eliminates the need for the switching operation by the operator and contributes to the elimination of troublesomeness, but also suppresses the inconvenience of damaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion by performing the taking-out operation without forgetting the switching. ..

Feature L3. A feature L1 or a feature L1 having a release operation portion (bottom lid 704, 802) for releasing the engagement in a state where the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are engaged. The gaming machine described in L2.

In the above configuration, since the release operation portion is provided, even if the game medium is not housed in the auxiliary tank and the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are in the engaged state. The engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be disengaged by operating the disengaging operation portion, and the auxiliary tank can be appropriately taken out. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of using the auxiliary tank while suppressing rattling during transportation of the gaming machine.

Feature L4. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are provided so as to engage with each other in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the movement of the auxiliary tank in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is restricted by the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as the auxiliary tank moving inside the housing and hitting the door body side when the gaming machine is being transported.

Feature L5. One of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is a movable portion (engagement projection 723, an engaging standing portion 836), and the movable portion is the other engaging portion (bottom). It can be moved between the engaged position and the non-engaged position with respect to the side through hole 720 and the lower sensor unit 801).
The switching means is any one of the features L1 to L4, characterized in that the movable portion is moved from the engaged position to the non-engaged position based on the gaming medium being housed in the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the configurations of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be simplified, and it can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing the configuration of any of the features L1 to L4.

Feature L6. The first engaging portion is a hole portion (bottom side through hole 720) provided in the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank.
The second engaging portion is the movable portion (engaging projection 723) that can enter and exit the hole.
The switching means is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, and has a movable bottom plate (bottom lid 704) that is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium when the game medium is housed in the auxiliary tank. death,
The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the movable portion moves from the engaged position to the non-engaged position as the movable bottom plate is displaced downward due to the weight of the gaming medium.

In the above configuration, the auxiliary tank is provided with a movable bottom plate. Since this movable bottom plate is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, the weight of the game medium housed in the auxiliary tank can be efficiently received. Since the movable part is moved by using the displacement of the movable bottom plate, the responsiveness of the movable part to the change in the accommodation state of the game medium can be enhanced, and the switching to the non-engaged state is delayed and the auxiliary tank is taken out. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles.

Feature L7. The movable bottom plate is
It is rotatably supported by the support means (support portion 705).
The gaming machine according to feature L6, characterized in that it has a pushing portion (pushing protrusion 733) on the side of the rotating tip that pushes the movable portion and moves the movable portion from the engaged position to the non-engaged position.

According to the above configuration, the engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is released by pushing the movable portion with the movable bottom plate. In this case, since the downward displacement of the movable bottom plate can be used as it is for pushing the movable portion, the configuration can be simplified.

Feature L8. The movable bottom plate can be rotated in the housing with the back side in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine as a rotation tip.
The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are provided on the back side in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine in the housing.

When the auxiliary tank is pulled out from the inside of the housing by an operator, it is conceivable that the front side of the auxiliary tank is lightly lifted and then slid to the front side along the bottom plate of the housing in that state. In this case, for example, if the rotating tip of the movable bottom plate is on the front side of the housing and the pushing portion is provided on the front side, the pushing portion of the movable portion by the pushing portion is released as the auxiliary tank is lifted. As a result, it is conceivable that the non-engaged state is unintentionally switched to the engaged state. And there is a concern that this will hinder the withdrawal of the auxiliary tank.

In this regard, since the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are provided on the back side in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine in the housing, it becomes easy to maintain the pushing of the movable part by the pushing portion, and it is unintentionally non-existent. It is possible to suppress switching from the engaged state to the engaged state. This makes it possible to smoothly pull out the auxiliary tank.

Feature L9. The first engaging portion is the movable portion (engaging upright portion 836) that can be displaced in the vertical direction.
The second engaging portion is an engaged portion (lower sensor portion 801) provided at a position where it can be engaged with the movable portion.
The switching means is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, and has a movable bottom plate (cover body 835) that is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium when the game medium is housed in the auxiliary tank. death,
The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the movable portion moves from the engaged position to the non-engaged position as the movable bottom plate is displaced downward due to the weight of the gaming medium.

In the above configuration, the auxiliary tank is provided with a movable bottom plate. Since this movable bottom plate is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, the weight of the game medium housed in the auxiliary tank can be efficiently received. Since the movable part is moved by using the displacement of the movable bottom plate, the responsiveness of the movable part to the change in the accommodation state of the game medium can be enhanced, and the switching to the non-engaged state is delayed and the auxiliary tank is taken out. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that causes troubles.

Feature L10. The second engaging portion is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through an insertion hole (lower sensor insertion hole 831, lid sensor insertion hole 837) provided in the auxiliary tank.
The gaming machine according to feature L9, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be engaged with each other inside the auxiliary tank.

In the above configuration, the engagement relationship between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be constructed inside the auxiliary tank. For this reason, it is not necessary to secure a space for engagement around the outer side of the auxiliary tank, and in the installation area for the auxiliary tank (predetermined installation area), the dead space that does not contribute to the accommodation of the game medium can be suppressed to a small size, or the generation thereof occurs. Can be suppressed.

Feature L11. The accommodation state detecting means (lower sensor unit 801 and main control device 101) for detecting the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank is provided.
The accommodation state detecting means has an insertion member (lower sensor unit 801) to be inserted into the insertion hole, and has an insertion member (lower sensor unit 801).
The gaming machine according to feature L10, wherein the second engaging portion is formed by the insertion member.

According to the above configuration, since the second engaging portion is configured by utilizing the accommodation state detecting means for detecting the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank, the number of parts can be increased in order to realize the configuration of the feature L10. It can be suppressed. In addition, since the accommodation state detecting means is generally made of metal, it can be configured to be preferable in terms of suppressing damage to the second engaging portion.

Feature L12. The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging the game medium inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L11, wherein the movable bottom plate has a configuration in which the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be opened and closed.

According to the above configuration, since the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be opened and closed by the movable bottom plate, the game medium from the storage portion can be guided to the bottom plate opening as it is by opening the movable bottom plate. As a result, it is possible to support automatic collection with the auxiliary tank installed in the housing, it is not necessary to secure a storage place for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost. ..

Feature L13. Guide means (extending plate 751, recess 754) that guides the installation position of the auxiliary tank to a predetermined position where the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion do not face each other when the movable bottom plate is in the open state. ), The gaming machine according to feature L12.

If the movable bottom plate is in the open state, the weight of the game medium cannot be properly received, and there is a possibility that switching from the engaged state to the non-engaged state may be inconvenient. In this respect, in this configuration, when the movable bottom plate is in the open state, the installation position of the auxiliary tank is guided to a position where the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion do not face each other, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs. It can be suppressed.

Feature L14. The accommodation state detecting means (lower sensor unit 801 and main control device 101) for detecting the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank, and
An external signal output means (main control device 101) that outputs a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the detection result of the accommodation state detecting means is a predetermined result.
With
The switching means is characterized in that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are brought into a non-engaged state before the predetermined signal is output by the external signal output means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L13.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to allow the auxiliary tank to be taken out before the game medium is taken out (taken out of the auxiliary tank) through a predetermined signal. As a result, it is possible to respond to the timing of taking out the auxiliary tank with a margin, and it is possible to suppress the trouble of collecting the game medium.

Feature L15. The accommodation state detecting means (upper sensor rod 16a, main control device 101) for detecting the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank is provided.
The accommodation state detecting means has an insertion member (upper sensor rod 16a) that is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through an insertion hole (upper sensor insertion hole 505a) provided in the auxiliary tank.
When the insertion member is inserted into the insertion hole, the peripheral portion of the insertion hole and the insertion member come into contact with each other or approach each other in a direction intersecting the insertion direction. Features The gaming machine according to any one of L1 to L14.

According to the above configuration, the movement of the auxiliary tank can be regulated by the peripheral portion of the insertion hole and the insertion member coming into contact with each other or approaching each other. As a result, it is possible to regulate the movement of the auxiliary tank in addition to the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, and it is possible to strengthen the suppression of rattling of the auxiliary tank. At that time, since the accommodation state detection unit is utilized, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing, and
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage unit (storage tank 52) for storing game media, and a hopper device (hopper device 51).
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) installed in a predetermined installation area side by side with the hopper device in the housing and accommodating a game medium surplus in the storage unit,
With
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end.
The first engaging portion (right flange portion 571c) provided in the auxiliary tank and
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion,
With
By sliding the auxiliary tank on the tank installation surface (bottom plate 11a) of the predetermined installation area, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged and disengaged. A gaming machine characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the two is set in.

From the viewpoint of suppressing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank housed in the housing. However, when the auxiliary tank is stored in the housing in a free state in the gaming machine, if the gaming machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank moves in the housing, and the surrounding hopper device, door body, etc. There is an inconvenience that it collides with and causes damage.

In this regard, according to this configuration, a first engaging portion provided in the auxiliary tank and a second engaging portion provided in the housing are provided, and by engaging these, the inside of the housing The movement of the auxiliary tank can be regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from moving in the housing and colliding with surrounding members, and it is possible to prevent damage to the auxiliary tank and surrounding members during transportation.

In this case, in this configuration, by sliding the auxiliary tank on the tank installation surface, it is possible to engage and disengage the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion. .. Therefore, both can be engaged or the like without directly operating the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion. In addition, with such a configuration, the degree of freedom in layout can be improved, for example, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be arranged in a place that is difficult for the operator to reach. , It can be an advantageous configuration in a gaming machine where the installation space of mounted parts is limited. In addition, when closing the door body, it is indispensable to push the auxiliary tank to the rear of the gaming machine (inside the housing) so that the door body and the auxiliary tank do not interfere with each other. The pushing operation and the engaging operation of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be completed in one operation, and the workability can be improved.

Feature M2. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are provided so as to engage with each other in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the movement of the auxiliary tank in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is restricted by the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as the auxiliary tank moving inside the housing and hitting the door body side when the gaming machine is being transported. Further, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing, the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, so that the auxiliary tank is placed in a predetermined installation area in the housing. You can see that the slide has moved to.

Feature M3. The first engaging portion is a hole portion (bottom side through hole 720) provided in the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank.
The second engaging portion is a movable portion (engaging projection 723) that can move in and out of the hole.
The movable portion is urged by an urging means (coil spring 729) so as to protrude from the tank installation surface of the predetermined installation area.
At the end of the auxiliary tank on the back side in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, a guide portion (engagement inclined portion 745, arc-shaped portion 746) for guiding the movable portion under the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature M1 or M2.

According to the above configuration, the movable portion can be inserted into the hole portion by the urging force of the urging means, and the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be appropriately engaged with each other. However, the movable part may protrude from the tank installation surface, and the auxiliary tank and the movable part may interfere with each other in the process of sliding the auxiliary tank. In this regard, in this configuration, the movable part is guided under the bottom of the auxiliary tank by the guide portion provided at the end of the auxiliary tank on the back side in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the movable part can be moved with respect to the auxiliary tank. It is possible to suppress the catching of the part. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be smoothly slid to the position where the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged. In addition, damage to the first engaging portion and the like due to the installation of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed.

Features M4. As the guide portion, an inclined portion (engaging inclined portion 745) that intersects the auxiliary tank at an angle with respect to the sliding direction and comes into contact with the movable portion when the auxiliary tank is slid and moved is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the inclined portion has an inclined shape that pushes the movable portion downward as the slide movement progresses.

According to the above configuration, the movable portion can be guided under the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank along the inclination of the inclined portion, which can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature M3.

Feature M5. When the auxiliary tank is slid on the tank installation surface, a guide means (right side plate 11c) for guiding the auxiliary tank so that the auxiliary tank passes through a predetermined specific path is provided.
Features M1 to M4 characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is set so that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion engage when the auxiliary tank passes through the specific path. The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the above configuration, if the auxiliary tank is slid and moved according to the guide of the guide means, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be easily engaged. Therefore, for example, even if the engaging portion is a blind spot or a portion that is difficult to see from the viewpoint of the operator who installs the auxiliary tank, the engaging portion can be easily engaged, and the workability of the engaging work can be improved. It will be possible to increase.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing, and
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage unit (storage tank 52) for storing game media, and a hopper device (hopper device 51).
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) installed in a predetermined installation area side by side with the hopper device in the housing and accommodating a game medium surplus in the storage unit,
With
The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging the game medium inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine.
The auxiliary tank
A bottomed tank body (tank body 701) with an opening at the top and a bottom at the bottom.
An opening / closing means (bottom lid 704, 802) that can open / close the bottom portion, and
With
The opening / closing means opens the bottom portion by rotating inside the tank body, and the end portion on the rotation tip side is located above the tank body in the opened state.
A game characterized in that a contact member (guide plate 52a) that comes into contact with the opening / closing means in an open state at a predetermined open position is provided at a position above the tank body in the housing. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the bottom of the tank can be opened and closed, the auxiliary tank can be made compatible with manual collection by closing the bottom, while the auxiliary tank can be made compatible with automatic collection by opening the bottom. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be installed in the housing even at the time of automatic collection, it is not necessary to secure a storage place for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, and it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from being lost.

However, when the bottom of the tank is open and used, for example, if a player hits the gaming machine and an impact or vibration is applied, the opening / closing means may tilt and the bottom may be closed. In this case, if the game proceeds as it is without noticing that it has been closed, not only the game medium will not be collected, but also the game medium will overflow from the auxiliary tank and be scattered in the housing. In this respect, according to this configuration, even if the opening / closing means is tilted due to an impact or vibration, the rotation of the opening / closing means can be regulated by the contact member, and unintentional closing of the bottom of the tank can be prevented.

Feature N2. The contact member is a guide portion (guidance plate 52a) that guides the gaming medium from the storage portion to the auxiliary tank, or a member provided at a position on the side where the rotation angle of the opening / closing means is larger than that of the guide portion. The gaming machine according to feature N1, which is characterized in that it is.

According to the above configuration, when the rotation of the opening / closing means is restricted by the contact member, the opening / closing means blocks the discharge port of the game medium in the guiding portion, or the opening / closing means is interposed between the guiding portion and the bottom of the tank. It is suppressed. As a result, the game medium from the storage section can be continuously guided to the bottom plate opening, and the delay in collecting the game medium can be suppressed.

Feature N3. The gaming machine according to feature N2, wherein the opening / closing means is rotatably provided at the bottom thereof toward the front of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the opening / closing means in the closed state is rotated toward the front of the gaming machine to open the opening state. In this case, the opening / closing means in the open state can be positioned on the door body side with respect to the guiding portion. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as the game medium supplied from the induction unit to the auxiliary tank hitting the opening / closing means and splashing toward the door body side and hitting the door body. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game medium from entering between the door body and the tank body.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the opening / closing means has a long shape and is rotatably supported by a short side portion of the bottom portion.

According to the above configuration, the end of the opening / closing means on the rotating tip side is positioned above the upper end of the tank body in the open state while the tank body is deepened to some extent to secure an appropriate tank capacity. Will be possible.

Feature N5. The game according to feature N4, wherein the opening / closing means is rotatably supported by a short side portion on the front side of the gaming machine when the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area. Machine.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing with the bottom of the tank open, the opening / closing means can be positioned on the front side. When pushing in the auxiliary tank, the opening / closing means can be easily supported by hand, and the installation work can be facilitated.

Feature N6. The accommodation state detecting means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, main control device 101) for detecting the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank is provided.
The accommodation state detecting means is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 731a, lower sensor insertion hole 731b) provided in the side wall portion (rear wall portion 701c) on the back side of the auxiliary tank. It has an insertion member (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) to be inserted.
The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the contact member is provided at a position where the opening / closing means and the insertion member are in contact with each other in a non-contact state.

According to the above configuration, when the opening / closing means is tilted, the rotation of the opening / closing means is restricted by the contact member before contact with the insertion member. As a result, even if the opening / closing means is unexpectedly tilted, the collision with the insertion member can be suppressed.

Feature N7. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein at least a part of a portion located above the tank body when the opening / closing means is in the open state has transparency. ..

According to the above configuration, the inside of the housing and the tank body can be visually observed through the opening / closing means, and the height dimension of the auxiliary tank tends to be large due to a part of the opening / closing means protruding inside the housing. And it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the visibility inside the tank body.

Feature N8. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N7, wherein at least one of the opening / closing means and the abutting member is provided with a buffering means at a contact portion between the opening / closing means and the abutting member. ..

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing means and the like from being damaged by the impact when the opening / closing means comes into contact with the contact member.

<Characteristic O group>
Features O1. A housing (housing 11) opened forward and
A door body (front door 12) that opens and closes the front opening of the housing, and
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage unit (storage tank 52) for storing game media, and a hopper device (hopper device 51).
An auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) installed in a predetermined installation area side by side with the hopper device in the housing and accommodating a game medium surplus in the storage unit,
With
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end.
The first engaging portion (bottom side through hole 720) provided in the auxiliary tank and
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 721) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion,
Engagement operating means (coil spring 729, engaging drive unit 761) that puts the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion into an engaged state or a non-engaged state.
With
When the engaging operation means is in a predetermined power supply state for the gaming machine, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are in a non-engaging state, and the engaging operation means is not in the predetermined power supply state. , A gaming machine characterized in that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are in an engaged state.

From the viewpoint of suppressing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank housed in the housing. However, when manually collecting the game medium contained in the auxiliary tank in the gaming machine, it is necessary to take out the auxiliary tank from the inside of the housing, so that the auxiliary tank is required to be stored in a free state without being fixed. Therefore, if the gaming machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation or the like, the auxiliary tank moves inside the housing and collides with the surrounding hopper device, door body, or the like, causing damage.

In this respect, in this configuration, the first engaging portion provided in the auxiliary tank and the second engaging portion provided in the housing are provided, and they are not in a predetermined power supply state to the gaming machine. It is in an engaged state, and is configured to be in an engaged state when it is not in a predetermined power supply state. Therefore, when power is not supplied during transportation of the gaming machine, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be engaged, while the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall to supply power. If so, it can be in an unengaged state. That is, according to this configuration, while restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine or the like, the operation of taking out the auxiliary tank during the operation of the gaming machine can be allowed, and the convenience is significantly improved.

Feature O2. The engaging operation means has the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion based on the predetermined power supply state and the capacity of the gaming medium in the auxiliary tank to be less than or equal to the predetermined amount. The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with means for engaging with and.

Even if the power supply line is connected to the gaming machine installed in the game hall, for example, if the auxiliary tank is empty during inspections or game settings before the hall opens or after the hall is closed, the auxiliary tank It is desirable that the auxiliary tank is immovable because it is not necessary to move the machine and for work reasons. In this respect, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged with each other based on the predetermined power supply state to the gaming machine and the capacity of the gaming medium in the auxiliary tank to be less than or equal to the predetermined state. Therefore, when it is not necessary to move the auxiliary tank, the unnecessary movement can be suppressed, and an advantageous configuration in work or the like can be realized.

Feature O3. The accommodation state detecting means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, main control device 101) for detecting that the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank is a predetermined state (full state) is provided.
The engaging operation means connects the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion based on the predetermined power supply state and the detection of the predetermined state by the accommodation state detecting means. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, which comprises means for bringing it into a disengaged state.

According to the above configuration, when the power supply line is connected to the gaming machine, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion correspond to the accommodation state of the gaming medium becoming a predetermined state (for example, a full state). The portion can be in a disengaged state. This makes it possible to allow the auxiliary tank to move according to the timing of taking out the auxiliary tank.

Feature O4. The accommodation state detecting means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b, main control device 101) for detecting the accommodation state of the game medium in the auxiliary tank is provided.
The accommodation state detecting means
A first means (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) capable of detecting that the accommodation state is the first state (full state), and
A second means capable of detecting that the accommodation state is a second state in which the accommodation amount is smaller than that of the first state, and
With
The engaging operation means connects the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion based on the predetermined power supply state and the detection of the second state by the second means. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, which comprises means for bringing it into a disengaged state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to allow the auxiliary tank to be taken out prior to the accommodation state of the game medium becoming the first state (for example, the full state), and the auxiliary tank can be taken out with a margin. Will be possible.

Feature O5. One of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is a movable portion (engagement protrusion 723), and the movable portion with respect to the other engaging portion (bottom side through hole 720). It can be moved between the engaged position and the non-engaged position,
The engaging operation means is
A drive unit (a drive source for the engagement drive unit 761) that moves the movable portion to the engaged position and the non-engagement position,
1. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the power supply line is connected to the gaming machine, it is possible to switch between the engaged state and the non-engaged state according to the capacity of the gaming medium in the auxiliary tank. It can be a practically preferable embodiment in realizing any of the configurations of to O4.

Feature O6. The engaging operation means includes an urging means (coil spring 729) for urging the movable portion toward the engaging position.
The gaming machine according to feature O5, wherein the movable portion is held at the engaging position by the urging force of the urging means when the driving portion is in a non-driving state.

According to the above configuration, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be brought into an engaged state when the gaming machine whose power supply line is not connected to the gaming machine is being transported. This makes it possible to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank during transportation and the like.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature O group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature O group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 341), a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 410), and the launching thereof. It is provided with a ball passage (guidance rail 400) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part (nails 369, etc.) arranged in the game area (game area PE). A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a passing portion (general winning opening 361, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine (ball-using rotating body-type gaming machine): Equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol sequence in the final stop, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means. The fluctuation of the symbol is started, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means, or after a predetermined time elapses, and the game requires that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that generates a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and further provides a ball tray to perform a throwing process of taking in the game ball from the ball saucer, and paying out the game ball to the ball saucer. A gaming machine provided with a payout device to be performed, and configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown by the throwing device.

10 ... Slot machine as a game machine, 11 ... Housing, 15 ... Medal discharge hole as bottom plate opening, 32 ... Reel as a peripheral body, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop operation means Stop button as, 52 ... Storage tank as a storage unit, 54 ... Auxiliary tank, 64 ... Speakers constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 81 ... Display control as a sub control board Device, 101 ... Main control device as main control board, 102 ... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means, 501, 601, 701 ... Tank body, 504, 607, 705 ... As support means Support portion, 514,606,704,802 ... bottom lid as opening / closing means, 571c ... right side flange portion as first engaging portion, 574 ... engaging portion as second engaging portion, 617 ... as urging means Coil spring, 720 ... bottom through hole as the first engaging part, 721 ... engaging part as the second engaging part, 801 ... lower sensor part as the first engaging part, 836 ... second engagement Standing part as a joint part.

Claims (1)

The housing that is open to the front and
A door body that opens and closes the front opening of the housing,
A hopper device installed in the housing and having a storage unit for storing game media, and a hopper device.
An auxiliary tank installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing and accommodating a game medium surplus in the storage unit,
With
The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening for discharging the gaming medium inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine.
The auxiliary tank
It has a bottomed shape with an opening at the top and a bottom at the bottom.
An opening / closing means provided on the bottom and capable of opening / closing the bottom.
Supporting means that supports the opening / closing means so that it can be opened and closed,
An urging means that urges the opening / closing means toward the closing side, and
With
The auxiliary tank has a first orientation in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom is on the lower side in the predetermined installation area, and a second orientation in which the opening is on the lower side and the bottom is on the upper side, respectively. Can be installed,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the opening / closing means is opened by the weight of the opening / closing means when the game medium from the storage unit is placed on the opening / closing means. It is composed and
The bottom portion has a receiving portion for receiving a game medium supplied from the storage portion when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation.
A gaming machine characterized in that a standing portion that stands up from the bottom portion is provided on the bottom portion at a portion that becomes a periphery of the receiving portion.

Images